| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080198817 | System and Method for Enabling Wireless Data Transfer - A method of enabling wireless data transfer to an electronic device having a first transceiver structured to interact with a first wireless network and a second transceiver structured to interact with a second wireless network including repeatedly powering up the second transceiver to await receipt of a second beacon signal through the second wireless network, receiving an instance of the second beacon signal with an indication of availability of data to be transferred to the electronic device through the first wireless network, and in response to the receiving of the instance of the second beacon signal with the indication of availability of the data, powering up the first transceiver to receive the data through the first wireless network. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198818 | System and Method for Enabling Wireless Data Transfer - A method of enabling wireless data transfer to an electronic device having a transceiver structured to interact in a first mode with a first wireless network and in a second mode with a second wireless network, including repeatedly powering up the transceiver and enabling the second mode to await receipt of a second beacon signal through the second wireless network, receiving an instance of the second beacon signal with an indication of availability of data to be transferred to the electronic device through the first wireless network, and in response to the receiving of the instance of the second beacon signal with the indication of availability of the data, enabling the first mode to receive the data through the first wireless network. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198819 | Concurrent Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure Connectivity for a Wireless LAN - A system and methods are disclosed for concurrent ad-hoc and infrastructure connectivity for a wireless local area network. The system comprises an infrastructure access point, an ad-hoc personal device, and a wireless terminal device configured to communicate concurrently with the infrastructure access point and the ad-hoc personal device. Furthermore, the system allows selection of a common communication operation mode. If the common communication operation mode indicates a concurrent operation mode, a wireless terminal is configured to communicate concurrently with an infrastructure access point and an ad-hoc personal device. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198820 | Location-Based Pattern for Scanning for Wireless Local Area Networks - A mobile device having a wireless local area network interface and one or more other wireless interfaces identifies a location of the mobile device via one or more of the other wireless interfaces, estimates a likelihood of finding a wireless local area network at the location, and scans for wireless local area networks while at the location during scan sessions that are separated by intervals, where the intervals are determined by the estimated likelihood. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198821 | Public Access Point - The invention instantiates a Personal VLAN bridge, using IEEE Std. 802.11 elements. The result is a bridge, referred to as a public access point, that is better suited for implementing public wireless data networks than the IEEE Std. 802.11 architecture. The invention also provides a location-update protocol for updating the forwarding tables of bridges that connect public access points together. The invention further provides a method for more controlled bridging, which is referred to as fine bridging. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198822 | Technique for Negotiating on Behalf of a Mobile Ambient Network within a Multi-Operator Wireless Communication System - A mobile ambient network (MAN) negotiator | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198823 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK LINK - A user can link a station to an access point by triggering buttons of the station and the access point respectively. After the buttons are triggered, the station scans the SSID of the access point. The access point updates SSID and sends out the new SSID to the station in response to the station's request. Then, the station generates a security key according to the new SSID and links the access point according to the new SSID and the security key so as to establish a WLAN link. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198824 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR QOS PROVISIONING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A method and system for QoS provisioning in broadband wireless mesh networks are disclosed. According to one embodiment, a computer-implemented method, comprises providing a dual mode mesh router having a plurality of radios, wherein the mesh router is used in a cell of a plurality of cells that covers a geographic region. The mesh router includes one or more WiMAX backhaul radios, one or more WiFi backhaul radios, one or more WiMAX access radios, one or more WiFi access radios, and three or more intra-mesh radios. Traffic is received at the dual mode mesh router. A minimum quality of service requirement is identified for the traffic. The traffic is routed via the one or more WiMAX backhaul radio when the minimum quality of service meets a predetermined value. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198825 | System and method for transmitting data packages with a classification mechanism of priority grade - A system and method for transmitting data packages with a priority grade, which applies to a processing procedure of transmitting a data package from an application layer to WLAN device is provided. The system includes at least an analysis module and a QoS classifier. The analysis module is used to analyze the contents of data package transmitted from the application layer, to classify and to record the data or type of service (ToS) of the data package. The QoS classifier is used to mark the priority grade on the data package according to the classification and the record made by the analysis module. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198826 | Method and system of detecting duplicate SSID via self-scanning in WLAN - A method and a system of detecting a duplicate service set identifier (SSID) via self-scanning in a WLAN are provided. An access point (AP), when a scan request is given, generates a probe request packet by inserting a SSID of the AP thereinto, transmits the probe request packet to neighbor APs, receives probe response packets, in response to the probe request packet, from the neighbor APs, detects SSIDs from the probe response packets, and informs the presence of a neighbor AP, the SSID of which is the same as that of the AP, if any of the detected SSIDs is the same as the SSID of the AP. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080205354 | Method for Initiating a Wireless Transfer of Data Between at Least Two Electronic Devices, Electronic Device and Software Program Therefor - The invention relates to a method of initiating a wireless transfer of data between two electronic devices. In order to make the initiation particularly user friendly, it is proposed that a concept called “hugging” is employed. A hugging state between two electronic devices is assumed to be given if a first electronic device and a second electronic device are determined to undergo a specific motion pattern relative to each other while being at least in close vicinity to each other. Only in case such a hugging state is detected at a first device, a data transfer channel is opened for transferring data between the first device and some other device, e.g. the second device. The invention relates equally to a corresponding device and to a software program product with a corresponding software code. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205355 | Optimal path routing method in wireless network - An optimal path routing method is provided for transmitting data from a source node to a destination node. The optimal path setting method includes transmitting a shortcut request (SCRQ) message from the source node to a topology server; determining shortcut information at the topology server based on the SCRQ message; and transmitting a shortcut notification (SCNF) message containing the shortcut information from the topology server to the destination node. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205356 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA BROADBAND COVERAGE IN A VEHICULAR AREA NETWORK (VAN) - The disclosure relates to techniques and technologies for providing mobile wireless broadband coverage. In one implementation, Wireless Wide Area Broadband (WWAB) network elements are provided in a Vehicular Area Network (VAN) that also includes a Mobile Network Controller (MNC). The WWAB network elements in the VAN include at least one WWAB base station (BS). A mobility protocol tunnel is provided between a Mobility Management Server (MMS) and the MNC to make mobility of the WWAB network elements in the VAN transparent to the WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. The WWAB BS and the MNC can allow a WWAB-enabled mobile station (MS) to connect to WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205357 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA BROADBAND COVERAGE IN A VEHICULAR AREA NETWORK (VAN) - The disclosure relates to techniques and technologies for providing mobile wireless broadband coverage. In one implementation, Wireless Wide Area Broadband (WWAB) network elements are provided in a Vehicular Area Network (VAN) that also includes a Mobile Network Controller (MNC). The WWAB network elements in the VAN include at least one WWAB base station (BS). A mobility protocol tunnel is provided between a Mobility Management Server (MMS) and the MNC to make mobility of the WWAB network elements in the VAN transparent to the WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. The WWAB BS and the MNC can allow a WWAB-enabled mobile station (MS) to connect to WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205358 | Usage of network load information for rate adaptation purposes - The present invention provides a method and apparatus that features obtaining in a terminal, node, point or device information containing one or more indications about a network load of a wireless short-range communication network; and adjusting rate adaptation logic in the terminal, node, point or device based on the network load information. The information may be obtained in a network control message, including one or more beacon and probe response frames having information about at least one of a load, an average access delay, available admission capacity, access delay, or some combination thereof, of the wireless short-range communication network. The wireless short-range communication network may take the form of a wireless local area network (WLAN), wireless fidelity network (Wi-Fi), an ultra wideband network (UWB) or other suitable network using beacon-based communications protocols either now known or later developed in the future. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205359 | Transmitter with digital up conversion and multimode power amplifier - A voice, data and RF integrated circuit (IC) includes a transmitter processing module, coupled to receive outbound data and to produce processed data in accordance with a selected one of a plurality of protocols and that generates a control signal based on the selected on of the plurality of protocols. A digital up conversion module produces a digital up-converted signal from the processed data. A radio receiver front end includes a programmable power amplifier that produces a transmit signal from the digital up-converted signal in accordance with the selected one of the plurality of protocols, based on the control signal. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205360 | Balancing clusters of a wireless mesh network - An apparatus and method of propagating a size of a cluster within a wireless mesh network is disclosed. The method includes a gateway within the cluster maintaining information of access nodes within the cluster. The gateway determines a cluster size based on the maintained information, and transmits routing packets that include the cluster size of the gateway. An apparatus and method of balancing clusters of a wireless mesh network is also disclosed. The method includes the gateway of each cluster originating beacons, wherein the beacons include a size of the cluster of the gateway. The access nodes of each cluster, re-broadcasts beacons received from the gateway of the cluster. A connecting access node selects which cluster to connect to at least in part based on the size of each of the clusters. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205361 | Wireless communication system and terminal - The present invention provides a wireless communication system and a terminal. A base station includes means that notifies terminals of an intensity of a received interference power. The terminal includes means that controls a transmission power for transmitting data to the base station, which is one of base stations and to which data is to be transmitted, by referencing an intensity of interference power (OSI) notified from base stations to which data is not to be transmitted. The means that controls a transmission power calculates a decision value for increasing/decreasing the transmission power, wherein the decision value is variable according to the current transmission power of the terminal and propagation attenuations between the terminal and the base stations to which data is not to be transmitted, and variably controls the amount of transmission power increase/decrease according to the decision value for increasing/decreasing a transmission power. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205362 | Address Resolution Protocol-Based Wireless Access Point Method and Apparatus - A wireless access point ( | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205363 | Method for operating a VoIP terminal device and a VoIP terminal device - In one aspect, a method for operating a cordless VoIP terminal device in a private network is provided. The VoIP terminal device is authorized to access the private network. Data stored on the VoIP terminal device is assessable via a standard interface for facilitating data access only after the VoIP terminal device has been successfully logged into the private network. A VoIP terminal device for carrying out the method is further provided. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205364 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING A FRAME IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for configuring a frame in a communication system is provided. The method includes determining a number of frames for configuring one multi-frame, wherein the number is at least two, and configuring each of the determined number of frames, wherein the determined number of frames include a first frame and a second frame temporally discriminated from each other, each of the determined number of frames includes a downlink sub-frame and an uplink sub-frame, a downlink sub-frame of the first frame includes a first area for transmitting a reference signal used for an acquisition of synchronization between a base station and a mobile station, a second area including system information and common control information related to the multi-frame, a third area including modulation scheme information and allocation information of data bursts, a fourth area to which a downlink data burst is allocated in a diversity mode and a fifth area to which a downlink data burst is allocated in a band Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC) mode, and a downlink sub-frame of the second frame includes a sixth area including modulation scheme information and allocation information of data bursts, a seventh area to which a data burst is allocated in a diversity mode, and an eighth area to which a data burst is allocated in an AMC mode. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080212544 | Method in a wireless sensor reader for obtaining sensor data from a radio frequency addressable sensor - A method in a wireless sensor reader for obtaining sensor data from one or more radio frequency (RF) addressable sensors includes transmitting signals to the one or more RF addressable sensors wherein the signals initialize the one or more RF addressable sensors; interrogating the one or more RF addressable sensors to isolate an individual RF addressable sensor; receiving sensor data from the isolated RF addressable sensor, wherein the received sensor data includes sensor identification information; communicating sensor identification information to a processor external to the wireless sensor reader; receiving sensor data processing information; and processing the sensor data based on the received processing information. At least the transmitting step includes common designation network communications. The wireless sensor reader is capable of powering down to conserve energy and capable of powering up in response to an electronic signal. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212545 | Demand-driven prioritized data structure - A system and method for optimizing the efficiency of data sharing among a set of radio nodes in a radio environment is provided. The technique includes identifying a data unit and assigning it a class, identifying a connectivity type, computing a significance factor based on connectivity type and assigned class, mapping the significance factor to a priority factor, and scheduling output of the data unit based on the priority factor. A scheduler algorithm can be used for scheduling output. The class can be assigned based on which nodes of the set of radio nodes possess copies of the data unit at a given time. An arbitration process can be used to determine the priority factor. A significance factor weighting algorithm, based on how many nodes will be receiving the data and on how much a node needs the data, can be used to determine the significance factor. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212546 | HIERARCHICAL SERVICE LIST - The present invention relates to communicating between a network and user equipment in a wireless communication system. The invention includes receiving an indicator on a first transmission frequency having no associated uplink service. The indicator indicates at least one transmission frequency different from the first transmission frequency and having no associated uplink service. Moreover, the indicator indicates whether the availability of a service on the at least one transmission frequency is provided on the first transmission frequency. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212547 | Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, wireless communication method, and computer program - A wireless communication network that forms an ad-hoc network without the arrangement of a controlling station sets a period that a communication apparatus can utilize with priority and performs isochronous communication in the period as required. When isochronous communication has not been performed or after isochronous communication has finished in the priority utilization period, other communication apparatuses perform arbitrary communication. When another communication is performed in a communication apparatus's own priority utilization period, the start of isochronous communication is temporarily delayed. In an ad-hoc communication environment, data having a real-time characteristic, such as AV content, can be efficiently transmitted through the isochronous communication. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080219223 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK UNIT AND METHOD FOR EXCHANGING CAPABILITY INFORMATION - A communication network unit having a memory for storing, for each communication terminal of a plurality of first communication terminals which are each associated with a same user identification, information about communication capabilities of the respective communication terminals a determining unit for determining which communication capabilities can be used for communicating with the user identified by the user identification based on the information about the communication capabilities of the first communication terminals, and a signaling unit for signaling to a second communication terminal which communication capabilities can be used for communicating with the user identified by the user identification. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219224 | System and Method for Providing Secure Mobility and Internet Protocol Security Related Services to a Mobile Node Roaming in a Foreign Network - A method for connection roaming a Mobile Node (MN) to a Network GateWay (NGW) for providing secure data path using Internet Protocol (IP) security procedure. Also Mobile IP (MIP) is required for providing mobility to the user, when the MN moves from one sub-network to another. However, when the Home Address of the network is not known, a cyclic interdependency is observed between the IP Security (Ipsec) procedures and MIP procedures. If the home address of the MN is not known initially during the procedure, IPsec Security Associations (SA's) are formed between the MN and NGW such that only MIP packets are passed through. After the MIP Registration is completed, the Home Address of the MN is known from the MIP registration Reply. MN now forms a data path tunnel with the NGW by exchanging Create_Child_SA messages. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219225 | Method for Bearer Independent Call Control (Bicc) Optimization for Ip Bearer Support - A method is disclosed for the optimization of a BICC (Bearer Independent Call Control) IP Bearer Support in a WCDMA R4 Telecommunication system, and provides for exchange of IPAddress and Port Id between two MGWs by avoiding tunneling between two MSCs, reducing the number of message exchanges, and reducing the message sizes. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219226 | Wireless Lan System and Its Broadcasting Station - In a wireless LAN system according to the present invention, when a first communication station transmits packets to a second communication station, the first communication station can select a first method in which the second communication station returns first transmission-confirmation information to the first communication station for each packet that the second communication station receives, and a second method in which the second communication station returns, in response to the request of the first communication station, second transmission-confirmation information to the first communication station for plural received packets. The first communication station selects either one of the first method and the second method, based on a number k of packets to be acknowledged by the second transmission-confirmation information. With this arrangement, in the wireless LAN system capable of using plural kinds of transmission confirmation information, transmission confirmation information capable of improving transmission efficiency is selected. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219227 | Method and Apparatus to Create Multicast Groups Based on Proximity - Devices and methods use close range communication links, such as near field communication (NFC) protocol links, to enable users to authenticate mobile devices to one another to create or expand secure multicast groups. Once the two or more devices establish a close range communication peer-to-peer link the devices exchange multicast group communication data sufficient to permit the devices to receive or send multicast messages. Long range wireless or wired network communication links are then used for multicast message communications. Proximity limits of the close range communication P2P link enables mutual trust to be presumed among devices, reducing the need for security and authentication signaling. The limited range of close range communication P2P links renders multicast groups established in this manner less vulnerable to eavesdropping and intrusion. Embodiments enable users to initiate secure multicast group participation merely by bringing two or more devices into close proximity. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219228 | PEER POWER SAVE MODE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) WIRELESS NETWORK - A protocol for a peer power save mode (PPSM) in a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) wireless network and a system therefor are provided. A station (STA) set up a TDLS link can send a frame having a power management bit set to a peer STA to enter into a power save mode (PSM). In this case, the station entering into the PSM operates in a PPSM client mode. When the peer STA operates in the PPSM client mode, the STA can operate in the PPSM access point (AP) mode or can enter into the PPSM client mode. The STA operating in the PPSM AP mode buffers data for the STA operating in the PPSM client mode and informs the peer STA of information indicating that there is buffered data by the use of a peer traffic indication frame or the like. In principle, a U-APSD procedure can be applied to the transmission of data through a direct link from the STA operating in the PPSM AP mode to the STA operating in the PPSM client mode. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219229 | WIRELESS RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless relay communication system and method are provided. The system includes a BS, at least one RS and subscriber terminals. The method includes: configuring a downlink relay zone and an uplink relay zone in downlink sub-frame and uplink sub-frame of physical layer frame structure of a BS, respectively, configuring a downlink relay zone and an uplink relay zone in uplink sub-frame and downlink sub-frame of physical layer frame structure of an RS, respectively, to define one or more combinations of OFDMA symbols and relay subchannels or relay timeslots for communication between the RS and BS; performing relay communication between the BS, the RS and a subscriber station. In the invention, an advanced relay mode is supported, i.e. an MSS/SS may access BS via the relay of RS, thereby broadening the effective coverage of BS, and improving the throughput of MSS/SS. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219230 | Method and system for authentication of WLAN terminal interworking with broadband wireless access network - A method and a system for interworking with a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal. According to the method, a relay station for connecting the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal with the Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network sets a connection with the Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network through an initialization process. A user authentication with the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal is performed by the relay station in compliance with a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) protocol. A user authentication with a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network Access Control Router (ACR) is performed in compliance with a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network protocol by the relay station in place of the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219231 | WIRELESS PACKET COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - An access point in a wireless packet communication system is disclosed. The access point has an antenna for receiving IP data encoded according to a wireless IP communication protocol. The access point also has a combiner having an input coupled to said antenna and having first and second outputs. The access point further has a first decoder for receiving encoded IP data on a first channel at a first output of said combiner. The access point also has a second decoder for receiving encoded IP data on a second channel at a second output of said combiner. The access point further has a router for receiving unencoded IP data from said first decoder at a first input, and receiving unencoded IP data from said second decoder at a second input, said router having a single output for passing unencoded IP data from said first decoder and said second decoder. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219232 | LAN BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of routing calls from a mobile unit to a destination location can include registering the mobile unit with a wireless adjunct, wherein the wireless adjunct is in communication with a switching unit and a packet based network and is operable to receive data from the switching unit and place the data, in packetized form, on the packet based network. The method can further include responding to a call setup request from the mobile unit and querying a subscriber database to determine if the mobile unit is a resident or a guest. If the mobile unit is a resident, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through the switching unit to a first destination location. If the mobile unit is a guest, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through an RF source to a second destination location. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080225803 | Transmitting Device, Wireless Communications System, and Program and Computer-Readable Storage Medium Storing Same - A worker uses a remote controller ( | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225804 | Real-Time Sessions for Wireless Mesh Networks - A real-time data transport protocol directed to aggregating multiple packets of a real-time protocol session and transmitting redundant copies of the packets as defined by a sliding window. In particular implementations, a method comprising accessing a plurality of packets of a real-time protocol session; aggregating, over a sliding window, a contiguous sequence of packets in the plurality of packets into real-time data transport packets, and transmitting the real-time data transport packets to a receiving node. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225805 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVISIONING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and apparatus for provisioning a communication device is disclosed. An apparatus that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a communication device having a controller element that establishes wireless communication with a base unit operating according to a short-range cordless phone communication protocol, and receives from the base unit provisioning information that enables a communication device to establish wireless communications with an access point operating according to a wireless fidelity (WiFi) communications protocol. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225806 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING MOBILITY IN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORKS - A method to enable mobility while connected to an Internet protocol network comprises receiving a first data packet from a mobile node at a first mobile gateway in a mobile-gateway-communication network via a first access point and determining if a communication session is ongoing responsive to receiving the first data packet. When it is determined that a communication session is not ongoing, the first mobile gateway is established as a home mobile gateway for the duration of the communication session. When the mobile node connects to a second mobile gateway in the mobile-gateway-communication network via a second access point during the communication session, a tunnel is opened from the second mobile gateway to the home mobile gateway so that the communication session is maintained regardless of the protocol implemented by the mobile node and the access points. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225807 | Transmitter, receiver and system as well as related methods and computer programs for identifying at least one network capability - It is disclosed a method comprising transmitting an identifier for identifying at least one network capability related to mobile internet protocol, | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225808 | Integrated media system and method - An integrated media system and method comprising a media server and one or more client interfaces disposed in communicative relation with a network. The media server may be structured to communicate an interactive media object to the client interface over the network. The interactive media object comprising at least one primary communication module, at least one secondary communication module having multi-media content, and one or more communication services, such as, for example, e-mail, VoIP, live chat, etc. Further, the primary communication module may be structured to resemble a printed publication. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225809 | Topology system of wireless network with dynamic balance - The present invention is to provide a topology system of wireless network with dynamic balance comprising at least one subsidiary topology system of wireless network each having a plurality of access points and only one access point automatically becomes a root access point which operates on a channel different from others, and dynamically generates an unique derivative group ID different from others as the root access point linked with a wired network; other access points not linked with the wired network join one of subsidiary topology systems of wireless network according to loading and dataflow of the subsidiary topology systems of wireless network, and automatically become either a pure access point or an escape access point, dynamically generate an unique derivative group ID same as those linked with other root access points, and operate on a channel same as those linked with other root access points. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225810 | CONFIGURABLE ZONE-BASED LOCATION DETECTION - An improved technique provides location detection using wireless net-works such as Wi-Fi networks in a flexible, configurable manner that allows for variations in the environment and tracks target movement accurately in such an environment. Zones of different relative sizes and sensitivities can be defined, so as to vary the degree of resolution for different parts of the area being detected. Mechanisms are provided to take into account fluctuations in signal strength, and reduce the incidence of false positives resulting from incorrectly detecting zone or location changes due to fluctuations of signal strength. In addition, detection time can be configured for zone entry and/or exit. Self-adjustment based on heuristic analysis can also be implemented. Data can be sent or received based on the physical location as determined by the zone. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225811 | Systems and Methods For Reliable Broadcast and Multicast Transmission Over Wireless Local Area Network - Broadcast and multicast (BM) systems have not been reliable in the wireless local area networks. Higher bandwidth and more reliable BM transmissions are necessitated by video and audio applications. A class of BM reliable frames is transmitted at a higher rate. The access point performs some rudimentary collision avoidance to enhance reliability, and individual stations are given the ability to send feedback to the access point regarding the quality of the transmission. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225812 | VoIP-only Base Transceiver Station - Embodiments for a low-cost, flexible, VoIP-Only Base Transceiver Station are disclosed. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225813 | Personal network, and method to secure a personal network - Personal network, being associated with a user, the personal network comprising a plurality of personal devices associated with the user, wherein the personal devices are configured to be interconnected with each other via one or more communication connections, to allow datacommunication there-between; and at least one personal network control unit and/or service configured to control access to the personal network, wherein the control unit and/or service is operable to be in at least a first mode to allow access of all of the personal devices to the personal network, and a second mode to restrict the access of at least one of the personal devices to the personal network. Also, there is provided a method to secure a personal network of a user. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225814 | Wireless access point service coverage area management - A Wireless Access Point (WAP) of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) infrastructure includes a processor, a radio and a directional antenna. The radio supports communications with a first plurality of wireless terminals and listens to, but does not participate in transmissions of at least some of a second plurality of wireless terminals to collect non-participatory WAP data. Based upon the non-participatory WAP data, the processor creates WAP operational reports and provides the WAPs operational reports to the WLAN. The WLAN creates directions based thereon and directs the WAP to alter the gain pattern of the directional antenna. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225815 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MESSAGES ON A WIRELESS DEVICE CONNECTING TO AN APPLICATION SERVER - A system and method for providing a message on the graphic display of a wireless device while the wireless device is connecting to an application download server across a wireless network. When the wireless device attempts to communicate with an application download server or changes files while navigating an application download server, a message is transmitted across the wireless network to the computer platform of the wireless device and displayed to the user of the wireless device. The message can be transmitted to the wireless device from the same application download server that the wireless device is attempting to connect to or navigate, or alternately, the message can be transmitted from another server on the wireless network. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080232335 | Enhanced Network Allocation Vector Mechanism for Optimal Reuse of the Spectrum in a Wireless Communication System - Wireless networks and methods of use includes a source that transmits a signal to at least one destination during a scheduled time period. The network also includes at least one node, which is hidden from the destination, and which transmits a signal during the scheduled time period. The networks and their methods of use provide for efficient use of the medium. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232336 | Systems, Methods, and Computer-Readable Media for Communicating Via a Mobile Wireless Communication Device - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media are provided for communicating via a mobile wireless communication device (MWCD). According to exemplary embodiments, a message is generated for a customer premises equipment located at a customer premises. The message is provided to the customer premises equipment via a mobile wireless communication device located at the customer premises. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232337 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING FREQUENCY OVERLAY IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. A sending apparatus in the broadband wireless communication system includes a controller for distributing packets to a plurality of processors to transmit the packets in a multi-Frequency Allocation (FA) access mode; the plurality of the processors for processing the packet provided from the controller in a Media Access Control (MAC) layer; and a plurality of senders for encoding the packets provided from the corresponding processors in a physical layer and transmitting a signal generated through the physical layer encoding. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232338 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SECURE, PORTABLE, WIRELESS AND MULTI-HOP DATA NETWORKING - A mobile network solution provides secure and portable wireless networking service to mobile users with devices equipped with wireless network interfaces. The Secure Nomadic Wireless Network, or SNOWNET, follows a hierarchical approach. Special SNOWNET nodes are deployed in the area where networking service is needed and form a backbone network. At the same time, SNOWNET nodes provide local access service to regular mobile clients. SNOWNET provides security through authentication of the nodes and clients, as well as through encryption of the data. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080240048 | MULTIRADIO MANAGEMENT THROUGH SHARED TIME ALLOCATION - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of radio modules integrated within the same wireless communication device. In at least one embodiment of the present invention, time may be allocated for use in communicating over one or more wireless communication mediums. The allocated time may take the form of timeslots. The timeslots may be dedicated or shared timeslots, the type of timeslot affecting the behavior of each wireless communication medium. Use of shared timeslots may, for example, be determined locally to the radio modules based on a relative priority between the wireless communication mediums sharing the timeslot. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240049 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THROUGHPUT OF ACCESS CLASSES IN A WLAN - A system comprises a monitoring module operative to monitor traffic on a wireless medium, the traffic belonging to one or more of two different access classes (ACs), one access class (AC) being a higher-priority AC and the other being a lower-priority AC; a throughput adaptation module communicatively coupled to the monitoring module and operative to dynamically generate data corresponding to one or more AC-sensitive parameters based on the monitored traffic and on a desired throughput ratio between the two different ACs; and a wireless communication module communicatively coupled to the throughput adaptation module and operative to communicate the data to one or more wireless stations on the wireless medium. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240050 | TDMA MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK (MANET) WITH SECOND ORDER TIMING AND TRACKING - A communication system includes a plurality of mobile nodes forming a mobile ad-hoc network (MANET) and having a network clock time. A plurality of wireless communications links connects the mobile nodes together. Each mobile node includes a communications device and controller for transmitting and routing data packets wirelessly to other mobile nodes via the wireless communications link using a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) data transmission. Each mobile node includes a clock circuit having a digital clock time. A clock circuit is operative for processing a second order internal clock compensation factor as a learned and accumulated value for establishing a virtual clock time to correct any clock timing errors of the physical clock time from the network clock time. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240051 | WIRELESS DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless diagnostic monitoring system and a method for monitoring wireless devices are provided. The system includes at least one wireless device having a first RF transceiver and a first microprocessor operably coupled to the first RF transceiver. The wireless device is configured to transmit an RF signal having a diagnostic message having operational status information associated with the wireless device and a unique identifier identifying the wireless device. The system further includes a monitoring device having a second RF transceiver and a second microprocessor operably coupled to the second RF transceiver. The second RF transceiver is configured to receiver the RF signal. The second microprocessor is configured to determine an operational task to perform based on the operational status information. The second microprocessor is further configured to store data associated with the operational task in a memory device. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240052 | CLIENT-BASED INFORMATION SERVICE FOR SEAMLESS VERTICAL HANDOVERS - A system and method to enable a wireless device having multiple radios to obtain information about wireless networks without each radio having to independently scan for all available networks. The wireless device downloads information from a remote information server, such that the information is later accessible locally. The local information server may be updated independently according to the preferences of the user. The system enables any of the radios to obtain access information without having to perform time- and power-consuming scanning operations, where the access information is sufficient for the radio to make contact with the wireless network, irrespective of whether the radio is tailored to support that network. The system may include wireless neighborhood map(s) of one or more geographic regions. The wireless device is able to ascertain the wireless network landscape of a region without having to actually reside in the geographic region. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240053 | Quality of service (QoS) negotiation between network nodes in a Mobile IP network - Techniques for negotiating QoS between a foreign agent and a home agent of a Mobile IP network are described herein. According to one embodiment, quality of service (QoS) parameters are extracted from a registration reply message received from a home agent of a home network in response to a registration request message originated from a mobile node coupled to a foreign network. Thereafter, network traffics between the mobile node of the foreign network and the home agent of the home network associated with the mobile node are routed according to at least a portion of the QoS parameters. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240054 | Relay scheduling in wireless networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for communicating in a wireless network are disclosed. One embodiment includes a method for communication in a wireless network that comprises scheduling relay transmissions by stations in separate cells of the wireless network based on out-of-cell interference. The method may also include transmitting data by one or more wireless nodes within the wireless network using orthogonal downlink frame formats and uplink frame formats that prevent a first station of a particular class from transmitting while a separate, second station of the particular class is listening. Other embodiments are disclosed and claimed. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240055 | Wireless network beacon timing - An apparatus and method of a wireless network timing transmission of multiple BSSID beacons is disclosed. The method includes identifying multiple personalities of the wireless network, wherein a separate MAC address corresponding with each of the personalities. A beacon type is assigned for each of the personalities. During each transmission interval, a plurality of the beacon types are consecutively transmitted, wherein the different beacon types are consecutively spaced during transmission by a predetermined inter-frame spacing, wherein the predetermined inter-frame spacing is substantially less than an air-time duration of each transmission interval. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240056 | Air-time control of wireless networks - A method and apparatus for controlling transmission air-time available to a wireless node within a wireless network is disclosed. The method includes occupied by transmission packets. The method includes the wireless node monitoring air-time available to the wireless node for wireless transmission. The wireless node controls wireless transmission of neighboring wireless devices if the air-time available is detected to be lower than a threshold. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240057 | Accessing hardware initialization data of WLAN module using die identifier - A method, system and apparatus of accessing hardware initialization data of WLAN module using die identifier are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes accessing a die identification data of a WLAN module when the WLAN module is integrated to a device having a non-volatile memory, and writing initialization data corresponding to the die identification data to the non-volatile memory. The method may further include storing the initialization data to a database file during a manufacturing process of the WLAN module. The method may include comprising detecting a presence of the initialization data through accessing the non-volatile memory. In addition, the method may include automatically fetching the initialization data of the database file using a trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP) when the detecting the presence of the initialization data fails. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240058 | SIMULTANEOUS WLAN COMMUNICATIONS TO CARRY PERSONAL AREA NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - An integrated circuit radio transceiver and associated method comprises a multi-mode device operable to support personal area network communications as well as traditional wireless local area network communications. In one embodiment, IEEE 802.11 protocol IBSS communications are used to transport Bluetooth communication data packets. In another embodiment, a direct link comprising direct packet transfers without beaconing is performed between the multi-mode device and another multi-mode device. Thus, the multi-mode device is operable to establish traditional BSS communications with an Access Point in addition to establishing peer-to-peer communications with another multi-mode device to transport the Bluetooth communications over the 802.11 IBSS communication link or over an IEEE 802.11 direct communication link. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240059 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD OF SUBSCRIBER OF SERVICE NEGOTIATION SYSTEM - A resource allocation method of a subscriber station in a service negotiation system is provided. The resource allocation method includes gathering statistics of bursty data, bandwidth grant situation, and measuring wireless signal quality. The subscriber station switches its operation mode according to the statistics and bandwidth data derived by the signal measurement. When the subscriber station in a wireless system switches into a normal operation mode, it allocates bandwidth to management message and numbers of data connections to satisfy the quality of service (QoS) of each connection. When the subscriber station in a wireless system switches into an emergency operation mode, it allocates bandwidth to management message and unsolicited grant service (UGS). | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240060 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REAL-TIME CORRELATION OF AAL2 AND AAL5 MESSAGES FOR CALLS IN UTRAN - System and method for correlating multiple frames of data associated with a single call into a call record. One embodiment comprises correlating data in a radio access network by capturing data passing to and from a radio network controller, identifying ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 (AAL5) frames within the data, assigning a first call identifier to the AAL5 frames, identifying ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) frames within the data, assigning a second call identifier to the AAL2 frames, and combining AAL2 frames and AAL5 frames having a same first call identifier and a same second call identifier into a call record. The data passing to and from the first radio network controller may be data passing over an Iub interface between a Node B and the radio network controller or data passing over an Iur interface between two radio network controllers. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240061 | AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH DATA MEMORY CACHE AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications system for an aircraft carrying at least some personnel having personal electronic devices (PEDs) for wireless data communications outside the aircraft includes a ground-based communications network, and an access point in the aircraft for providing a wireless local area network (WLAN) for data communications with the PEDs. An air-to-ground transceiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the ground-based communications network. An aircraft data memory cache is in the aircraft and cooperates with the access point for storing common data accessible by the PEDs during flight of the aircraft. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240062 | AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH NETWORK SELECTION CONTROLLER AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications system for an aircraft carrying at least some personnel having personal electronic devices (PEDs) for wireless data communications outside the aircraft includes a ground-based communications network, and a satellite-based communications network. An access point is in the aircraft for providing a WLAN for data communications with the PEDs. An air-to-ground transceiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the ground-based communications network. A satellite receiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the satellite-based communications network to the PEDs. At least one network selection controller determines whether to send data communications to the PEDs through the air-to-ground transceiver or the satellite receiver. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240063 | High-Density Wireless Local Area Network - A data communication system includes an access point and a plurality of stations each for exchanging wireless data communication messages with the access point. At least some of the messages are in a format that includes at least one message header and a plurality of data units. Each of the data units includes a respective data unit header and a respective data frame. Each data unit header identifies a respective one of the stations as a recipient to receive the respective data frame of the data unit. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240064 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAMES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - On the case of receiving data frame from a station, the method of the present invention instructs the repeater to replace the content of the receiver address field by the address of the bridge when receiving the frame transmitted from the station, and then forwards the frames to the bridge. On the case of receiving a data frame transmitted from the bridge, the repeater can replace the content of transmitter address field by the address of the repeater itself, and then forwards the data frame to the station. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080247366 | Forced silencing of transmitting device - Various embodiments are described relating to sharing scanning operations among nodes in a wireless network, such as a WiMedia ultra-wideband (UWB) network. In an example embodiment, a message may be sent from a sending node to one or more receiving nodes requesting the receiving nodes to reduce transmissions on a wireless medium. The sending node and the receiving nodes may be included in a distributed wireless network. In an example embodiment, the wireless medium may be scanned at the sending node to determine whether the one or more receiving nodes are participating in the distributed wireless network by periodically transmitting beacons during a repeated interval, wherein the scanning may be performed periodically, aperiodically, or continuously. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247367 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SCHEDULING TRANSMISSIONS FOR COEXISTENCE OF DIFFERING WIRELESS RADIO PROTOCOLS - Embodiments of systems and methods for Bluetooth and WiMAX coexistence are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. In some embodiments systems and methods are described to determine a temporal reference associated a frame, and then align another wireless frame with that temporal reference. Once aligned, transmissions and receptions in one wireless frame may be arranged to not temporally overlap with transmissions or reception the other wireless frame. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247368 | NON CENTRALIZED SECURITY FUNCTION FOR A RADIO INTERFACE - A module dual mode device architecture and method of use is disclosed. The system architecture provides a distributed design of an IEEE 802.11i compliant supplicant module that provides security to data/voice packets sent over the wireless local area network (“WLAN”) radio interface from a dual mode device to an access point. The dual mode device establishes a connection with the access point and if the access point is security enabled, one or more session keys are generated. The session keys are used to provide security for communications over the radio interface between the dual mode device and the access point. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247369 | System and Method for Presence in Wireless Networks - The invention relates generally to a method for providing presence and instant messaging in a computer network. In particular, the invention is directed to a modified implementation of known wireless networking protocols to provide instant messaging and presence services to mobile units using. The instant messaging and presence services are provided within the framework of the native wireless networking protocol. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247370 | Training Signals for Selecting Antennas and Beams in Mimo Wireless Lans - A computer implemented method selects antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output wireless local area network that includes multiple stations, and each station includes a set of antennas. Multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets are received in a station. Each sounding packet corresponds to a different subset of the set of antennas. A channel matrix is estimated from the multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets, and a subset of antennas is selected according to the channel matrix. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247371 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE SAME - Provided are a wireless network system and a method of configuring the same, in which stations that perform directional communication in a high-frequency band can share information regarding their communication capabilities with each other. An apparatus for managing stations that transmit/receive data using millimeter wave (mmWave) includes a communication capability information management module which receives an association request frame and determines the communication capability of an associating station that has transmitted the association request frame based on the association request frame; an information-frame-generation module which generates a wireless video area network (WVAN) information frame specifying the communication capability of the associating station; and a communication module which transmits the WVAN information frame, wherein the apparatus serves as a wireless network coordinator. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247372 | Data Synchronization for Multicast/Broadcast Service in Wireless Relay Network - Wireless communication relay networks and techniques for providing data synchronization in Multicast Broadcast Services (MBS). | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080253339 | Interconnection Device For a Radiocommunication Network - Local radiocommunication device comprising an IP access point adapted to communicate outwards from the network in IP mode, a point-to-point communication module adapted to communicate with a terminal according to at least one point-to-point communication protocol, and an interface adapted to allow the IP access point to communicate with the point-to-point communication module and thus to allow the said terminal to communicate with the outside of the local radiocommunication network. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253340 | Hybrid Mobile Communication System Comprising Multi-Hop-Ad-Hoc and Circuit-Switched Modes - According to the present invention, connection can be always maintained between the mobile node and the access router, and disruption of on-going transport session can be prevented by making effective use of two architectures (hierarchical and mesh architectures). The mobile nodes | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253341 | Method for Improving Self-Coexistence of Wireless Communication Networks - Self-coexistence of first and second wireless communication networks ( | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253342 | Signaling in convergence sublayer in WiMAX - Examples and implementations of techniques for providing an efficient and flexible convergence sublayer service enablement strategy in establishing the initial service flows and pre-provision service flows during the initial Mobile Subscriber (MS) Terminal network entry time (i.e. attachment to the WiMAX access network). | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253343 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD OF SEARCHING - A communication terminal capable of wireless LAN communication includes: a search unit that searches for a base station that should be an access point; a database that stores an application of the wireless LAN communication and search information utilized for searching associated with the application; a set-up unit that sets up the application; and a determination unit that determines search information in accordance with the application, by retrieving search information corresponding to the application from the storage unit. The search unit searches for a search-targeted base station that should be an access point, by targeting only a base station that corresponds to a base station identifier contained in the search information, for a predetermined period. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253344 | Wireless LAN medium access controller supporting mode change and mode change method therreof - A wireless LAN medium access controller supporting mode change and the mode change method thereof are proposed. A physical layer detects signal strength in the environment and writes a mode index value of the stronger signal into a register. When the written mode index value is different from a mode index value in the communication system, a medium access controller is informed to perform mode change. The physical layer then sends out an interrupt signal to a central processor and sends the mode index value to the central processor for comparison via a DMA module and a memory. An interface module is used to access the mode index value in the memory for providing an external interface for the medium access control layer. When the mode index value doesn't conform to the signal in the environment, a software layer in the medium access controller is used for mode change. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080259881 | Method of Testing the Availability of a Connection to a Home Authentication Server Prior to Associating With a Wlan Access Point - A method of determining availability of a connection between a wireless local area network and a home network of a mobile user device prior to initiating connection or authentication comprises selecting a network device; and sending a probe signaling message comprising a user device to the selected network device. The network device uses this home identifier data to formulate a signaling message that it sends towards the appropriate home network to contract a home authentication server. An indication to the user device of the result of the attempt is returned. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259882 | Determining a WLAN Regulatory Domain - A mobile station is in a wireless local area network ‘WLAN’ environment and receives beacon frames that lack any WLAN regulatory information. The mobile station nonetheless determines a WLAN regulatory domain and configures the physical layer of its WLAN interface for operation in that WLAN regulatory domain. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259883 | Method and System for Client-Driven Channel Management in Wireless Communication Networks - A method and system for assigning channels to a plurality of access points (APs) of a wireless communication network is disclosed. The method includes obtaining first information regarding first interference experienced by a first client due to multiple APs being positioned in proximity of that client, and obtaining second information regarding second interference experienced by either the first client or a first of the APs with respect to which the first client is associated, where the second interference is due either to others of the APs that are in proximity to the first AP, or to others of the clients that are in proximity to either the first client or the first AP. Additionally, the method further includes determining channel assignments for the plurality of APs based upon each of the first and second information. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259884 | IMS Network-Based Multimedia Briefcase - A system for managing multimedia is provided. The system includes an IMS (Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem) network that has a media server and a Call Session Control Function (CSCF) server. The system includes a data store that is in communication with the IMS network. The system also includes an application configured to promote storing multimedia data to the data store. The multimedia data is created by a client. The client communicates with the CSCF and the multimedia server to promote providing the multimedia data for storage to the data store and to promote retrieving the multimedia data stored on the data store. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259885 | DUAL MODE DEVICE WITH MAC ADDRESS CAPTURE AND PAIRING - Seamless connectivity by a user device between a licensed and an unlicensed network is provided through capturing of MAC address information relating to one or more access points servicing the licensed and/or the unlicensed networks. One or more access points can be chosen as a designated access point. If the access point is available for communication with the device and other device criteria is met, the access point is designated. If designated, when the device is in vicinity of the access point seamless and transparent connectivity is automatically established with that access point. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259886 | Plain Old Telephony Equivalent Services Supported Via Unlicensed Mobile Access - An access point ( | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259887 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRESENTING MULTIMEDIA OBJECTS IN CONJUNCTION WITH VOICE CALLS FROM A CIRCUIT-SWITCHED NETWORK - The present invention provides systems and methods for presenting a multimedia object to a handset in conjunction with voice call from a circuit switched (CS) network. The voice call is delivered over the CS network and the multimedia object is delivered over a packet-switched (PS) network. The multimedia object can be rendered as a voice call alert, during the voice call, or after the voice call. The multimedia object can be an advertisement object and can be provided by a third party. The systems and methods described are applicable to IMS and non-IMS networks. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259888 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - Disclosed herein is a communications system that uses multiple transmission media, the system including: communications interface combining adapters connected via a power-line transmission path and a wireless transmission path between wireless LAN access points, each adapter having a power line communication interface and a wireless LAN interface, the wireless LAN interface having an access point function and an inter-access point communication function; wireless LAN terminals connected to the access points included in the adapters; and a wired LAN terminal connected to a wired LAN interface included in at least some of the adapters. Data transfer between the wireless LAN terminals or between one of the wireless LAN terminals and the wired LAN terminal is performed via a high-speed combined interface logically formed by using the power-line transmission path and inter-access point communication between the adapters to which the terminals participating in the data transfer are connected. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259889 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TERMINAL ENTERING AND LEAVING IDLE MODE - A communication method and system for terminal entering and leaving idle mode in a mobile communication system are disclosed. The communication method for a terminal entering an idle mode includes: triggering a flow of entering the idle mode for the terminal; and a serving access service network gateway sending the information of anchor function entities serving the terminal to an anchor function entity information storing unit, so as to store the information. With the technical scheme of the invention, when the anchor function entities serving the terminal are not located at the same physical entity, the addressing process can be accomplished correctly, and the smoothness of the network service flow can be guaranteed. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259890 | VoIP Service Threshold Determination by Home Wireless Router - A home wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) that supports wireless communications within a WLAN service area. The home wireless router establishes broadband communications via a broadband connection with a VoIP service accumulator. The home wireless router services a plurality of wireless terminals within the WLAN service area, including at least one Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) wireless terminal. The home wireless router receives a query from the VoIP service accumulator requesting information regarding the home wireless router's prior servicing of (or ability to service) VoIP calls. In response, the home wireless router responds to the VoIP service accumulator with information regarding the home wireless router's prior servicing of (or ability to service) VoIP calls. The home wireless router and the VoIP service accumulator subsequently service VoIP calls within the WLAN based upon the information regarding the home wireless router's prior servicing of (or ability to service) VoIP calls. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080267142 | Distributed Antenna Wlan Access-Point System and Method - A wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) system comprises a first plurality of distributed remote antenna units operative to transmit and receive RF signals and a central WLAN beam-forming unit connected to each distributed remote antenna unit and operative to provide communication between the antenna units and a second plurality of wireless clients. The WLAN AP system can be used for simultaneous communications with the wireless clients over the same radio frequency (RF) channel while avoiding mutual interferences. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267143 | TERMINAL INITIATED CONTEXT PRESERVATION - A method, a system, a network device, a terminal device, and computer programs for controlling a packet data protocol context in a mobile communication system. According to an example embodiment, an enhanced context modification request may be generated at a terminal device of the mobile communication system by adding a preservation information indicating a desired preservation of a packet data protocol context. The enhanced context modification request may be transmitted towards a core network of the mobile communication system, and a context-related decision may be controlled at the core network based on the preservation information. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267144 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING BROADCAST AND/OR MULTICAST BASED COMMUNICATION SESSIONS FOR MOBILE NODES | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267145 | Methods and Apparatus for Managing Wireless Networks Using Geographical-Level and Site-Level Visualization - A WLAN system and method enables network modeling and management through an easy-to-use user interface. A console coupled to the WLAN is configured to display a first set of graphical entities representing locations of the multiple sites in a geographical view, and display a second set of graphical entities in a site view representing a subset of the components selected in response to user input. An XML format may be used to display the various views on a browser operating within the console. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267146 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING PACKETS - A system and method for sending and receiving packets is provided. An embodiment includes a system comprising a wireless communication device configured to communicate with at least one application server via device access node and a wireless local area network. The wireless communication device is configured to communicate with the device access node through the wireless local area network using at least one protocol layer that is native to the wireless local area network, and using at least one protocol layer that is native to the device access node. The device access node is configured to send and receive application information carried over above-described protocol layers. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267147 | Automatic Discovery and Connectivity Protocol for Bluetooth Scatternet Formation - A system and method for wireless communication by a plurality of devices in a scatternet network is provided. The method includes discovering one or more of the plurality of devices in the scatternet network. The method includes determining roles for one or more of the plurality of devices, and transferring data between one or more of the plurality of devices. The discovering of other devices, determining roles, and transferring data between one or more of the plurality of devices occur substantially simultaneously. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267148 | Communication unit, system and method for saving power therein - A communication unit comprises a receiver for receiving a message sent on an allocation channel, packet identifying logic, capable of identifying a data type of the received message, operably coupled to buffer logic for buffering data packets to be sent to the second communication unit. In an active mode of operation, the receiver of the communication unit is capable of intermittently receiving the message sent on the allocation channel and transition to continuously receive the message sent on the allocation channel in response to either: the buffer logic identifying that data packets are to be transferred to the second communication unit; or the packet identifying logic receiving a communication resource allocation message and identifying resource allocation data therein. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267149 | Selecting receiver parameters based upon transmitting device identification via transmission characteristics - A wireless device includes at least one antenna, an RF interface, and processing circuitry coupled to the RF interface and indirectly to the at least one antenna. The wireless device identifies other wireless devices that service based upon transmission characteristics of wireless signals received from other wireless devices and/or relative positions of the other wireless devices with respect to itself. In a first operational period, the wireless device determines transmission characteristics of the other wireless devices. Then, during a second operational period, without further interaction with the other wireless devices, the wireless device determines communication link characteristics based simply upon transmission characteristics of the other wireless devices. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267150 | Motion adaptive wireless local area nework, wireless communications device and integrated circuits for use therewith - A circuit includes an on-chip gyrating circuit that generates a motion parameter based on motion of the circuit. A global positioning system (GPS) receiver receives a GPS signal and that generates GPS position data based on the GPS signal. A processing module processes the motion parameter to produce motion data, generates position information based on at least one of the GPS position data and the motion data, converts outbound data into an outbound symbol stream, and converts an inbound symbol stream into inbound data. A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver section generates an outbound RF signal from the outbound symbol stream, and converts an inbound RF signal into the inbound symbol stream. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267151 | Wireless Local Area Network Antenna Array - A wireless local area network (“WLAN”) antenna array (“WLANAA”) is disclosed. The WLANAA may include a circular housing having a plurality of radial sectors and a plurality of primary antenna elements. Each individual primary antenna element of the plurality of primary antenna elements may be positioned within an individual radial sector of the plurality of radial sectors. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267152 | MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE (MBMS) SERVICE DISCOVERY - A system and method for discovery of and access to service in a Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS) environment by user equipment (UE) when roaming. The UE may be associated with a plurality of URLs including a home URL and a symbolic URL. When the UE is roaming, the symbolic URL is resolved by a local DNS server to a local URL that is assessed by a local Service Discovery server to determine the MBMS services that may be accessed by the UE in the visiting network. Further, when roaming, the home URL is resolved by the local DNS server and forwarded to a home Service Discovery server where the home URL is assessed to determine the MBMS services that may be accessed by the UE in the home network. Accordingly, the UE is operable to access home network MBMS services as well as visiting network MBMS services when roaming. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267153 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HOME NODE-B IDENTIFICATION AND ACCESS RESTRICTION - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), including a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), for identifying a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell are disclosed. The WTRU receives a broadcast from a cell including a cell identifier (ID). If the cell ID is associated with a CSG cell, the WTRU determines whether the CSG ID is programmed in the USIM. The cell broadcast may include a single bit information element (IE) indicating that the cell is a CSG cell. If the cell ID is a CSG ID, the cell ID may further include a plurality of fields which indicate at least one of a country, a region, an operator, and a home evolved Node-B (HeNB) number. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating whether the CSG cell is public or private. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating that emergency calls are allowed from all users. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267154 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AVOIDING HANGING PDP CONTEXTS - A method and system for avoiding hanging Packet Data Protocol (PDP) contexts in a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network. A time-out period is included in a request message to create a PDP context. The request message is transmitted from a first GPRS Support Node (GSN) to a second GSN. The second GSN receives the request message and transmits a response message to the first GSN. If the second GSN is unable to create the PDP context within the time-out period, the response message informs the first GSN that creation of the PDP context has been aborted. A Network Service Access Point Identifier (NSAPI) may be included in the response message so that the first GSN may request the second GSN to delete the request for creating the PDP context after a N3-T3 timeout of the first GSN has expired. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267155 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE SUPPORTING ENHANCED CALL FUNCTIONS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit services voice communications in a WLAN with at least one other wireless device and includes a WLAN interface, a transcoder, and a switch box. The WLAN interface wirelessly communicates with at least one wireless device to receive inbound packetized audio data from the at least one wireless device and to transmit outbound packetized audio data to the at least one wireless device. The transcoder receives the inbound packetized audio data and converts the inbound packetized audio data to inbound Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) WLAN audio data. The WLAN interface also receives outbound PCM WLAN audio data and converts the outbound PCM WLAN audio data to the outbound packetized audio data. The switch box operably couples between the transcoder and a PCM bus, to which an audio COder/DECoder (CODEC) couples. A speaker and a microphone coupled to the audio CODEC. The switch box enables the wireless transceiving integrated circuit to perform call conferencing operations, call forwarding operations, call hold operations, call muting operations, and call waiting operations. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080273505 | Providing Handover/Handoff for Dual Mode (Wifi/GSM) Mobile Terminals in a GSM Network Using A Three-Way Calling Mechanism - Current WiFi and WiMAX access points are designed to provide enterprise grade services to consumers. With the proliferation of IP based services, specifically Voice over IP (VoIP), problems emerge with the reliability of the access points providing telecom services. Specifically, 911 services and maintenance are perceived to be significantly inferior in the VoIP environment. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273506 | Adaptive Beamforming Configuration Methods And Apparatus For Wireless Access Points Serving As Handoff Indication Mechanisms In Wireless Local Area Networks - Methods and apparatus for use in configuring a wireless access point (AP) which serves as a handoff indication mechanism (“AP tripwire”) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) for mobile device handoffs between the WLAN and a wireless wide area network (WWAN) are described. During a configuration procedure or training mode of operation of the wireless AP, radio frequency (RF) signals transmitted from a plurality of communication devices are received at the wireless AP. The plurality of communication devices include a first group of communication devices positioned at locations of undesired RF coverage of the wireless AP, outside of an RF coverage boundary of a WLAN coverage region of one or more other wireless APs of the WLAN. The plurality of communication devices also include a second group of communication devices positioned at locations of desired RF coverage of the wireless AP, around the RF coverage boundary of the WLAN coverage region and within the WWAN coverage region. Wireless transceiver parameters of the wireless AP are automatically determined and set to adjust boundaries of an RF coverage region, such that RF signal coverage of the first group of communication devices is minimized but RF signal coverage of the second group of communication devices is maximized. Preferably, the parameters of the wireless transceiver are determined through use of an adaptive beamforming technique (e.g. a minimax optimization) which is performed automatically by the wireless AP without user intervention. After the configuration procedure, the wireless AP operates with use of the configured wireless transceiver parameters in a normal, steady-state mode of operation as the AP tripwire of the WLAN. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273507 | Direct station-to-station link between wireless network devices - Some embodiments of the invention may establish a direct station-to-station-link (STSL) between client devices in an IEEE 802.11 network by using the payload portion of communicated frames to set up the STSL. Legacy access points may be able to handle this procedure without having to be modified, as they would to implement a Direct Link Setup (DLS) approach. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273508 | PACKETIZED AUDIO DATA OPERATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit includes a WLAN interface, an input buffer, an input buffer controller, and a processor. The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit may also include an output buffer, an output buffer controller, a transcoder, and/or an audio Coder-Decoder (CODEC). The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit is installed in a WLAN device that services voice communications. The input buffer receives packetized audio data from the WLAN interface. When the input buffer satisfies a buffer vacancy threshold, the processor and the input buffer controller cooperatively operate to fill at least a portion of the input buffer with packetized audio data. The processor copies packetized audio data from the input buffer and fills the input buffer with the copied packetized audio data to maintain an audio pattern in the input buffer. The input buffer controller fills the input buffer when the processor is available and after copying/filling is no longer effective. The processor operates to maintain the audio pattern when additional packetized audio data is received by the WLAN interface. These operations are also performed for the output buffer, which receives packetized audio data from the transcoder and writes the packetized audio data to the WLAN interface. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273509 | Method, System And Device For Optimizing Routing In Mobile IPv6 - This disclosure relates to a method, system and device for optimizing routing in a mobile IPv6. The core is that the communication between a mobile node and a correspondence node is performed in a routing optimization mode, while providing a secure verification, so that the care-of address of the mobile node would not be obtained by a distrustful third party or a distrustful correspondence node. Moreover, to further ensure the privacy of the location of the mobile node, the current care-of address of the mobile node is shielded from the correspondence node by separating the binding cache from the correspondence node. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080279158 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION AND METHOD FOR USING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - A communication device including a communication connection establishing circuit configured to establish an ad hoc network communication connection between the communication device, a second communication device and a third communication device, a generating circuit configured to generate encryption parameters to be used by the second communication device and the third communication device for encrypting and decrypting data transmitted between the second communication device and the third communication device via the communication connection when the first communication device has left the communication connection, a signaling circuit configured to signal the encryption parameters to the second communication device and the third communication device, and a disconnection circuit configured to remove the communication device from the communication connection. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279159 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT MPEG TRANSMISSION OVER 802.11 - In one embodiment, a method includes characterizing a first packet of a video stream as being associated with a first frame type, wherein the video stream is arranged to be transmitted on a wireless local area network. The method also includes processing at least the first packet of the video stream as being associated with the first frame type if the first packet of the video stream is characterized as being of the first frame type. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279160 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HAVING A DEVICE COORDINATOR SELECTION CAPABILITY - A system and method for wireless communication having a device coordinator selection capability are disclosed. In one aspect, the method comprises determining a coordinator priority of each device based on a static priority table, the table assigning a priority to each type of devices. The method further comprises selecting a first device among the plurality of devices as the coordinator based at least in part on the coordinator priority of each device, and a coordinator candidate from the plurality of devices except the current coordinator, based on the coordinator priority of each device and probing results. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279161 | Modifying remote service discovery based on presence - Modifying remote service discovery based on presence involves identifying service discovery data using ad-hoc, peer-to-peer, service discovery protocols of a local network. The service discovery data is aggregated via an entity of the local network. Presence data associated with a remote device located outside of the local network is identified and the aggregated service discovery data is altered based on the presence data. The altered aggregated service discovery data is made available to the remote device using out-of-band communications. The out-of-band communications are different from the service discovery protocols of the local network. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279162 | Shared processing between wireless interface devices of a host device - An integrated circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives first packetized data between a host module and a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol, wherein the first wireless interface circuit includes a first processing module that processes the first packetized data. A second wireless interface circuit, coupled to the first wireless interface device, transceives second packetized data between the host module and a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol, wherein the second wireless interface circuit includes a second processing module that processes the second packetized data, wherein the second wireless interface circuit is operable to assign a first processing task to the first processing module and wherein the first processing task relates to the processing of the second packetized data. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279163 | Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device with acknowledge priority - A wireless communication device includes a host module. A first wireless interface device transmits a first outbound packet in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol at a first power level and a first rate during a first time interval and that transmits a second outbound packet at a second power level and a second rate during a second time interval, wherein the first power level is less than the second power level and wherein the second rate is less than the first rate. A second wireless interface device transceives data between the host module and a second external device during the second time interval in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol. An antenna section provides at least one radio frequency communication path between the first wireless interface device and the first external device and between the second wireless interface device and the second external device. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279164 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO A WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention provides a method for connecting with a wireless network device. The method includes following steps: upon configuring the wireless network device, executing a first target procedure to connect the wireless network device with the terminal device; executing a second target procedure, allowing the sharing device to be searched by the wireless network device according to at least one target signal; executing a third target procedure to select a target sharing device corresponding to the wireless network device according to the target signal; and connecting wirelessly the wireless network device with the target sharing device. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279165 | MULTI-CHANNEL INTER BASE-STATION COMMUNICATION - The invention relates generally to communication systems and in particular to radio frequency (RF) architectures. Some embodiments of the invention are directed towards a multi-channel inter-BS communication system. The multi-channel inter-BS communication system includes a plurality of co-existing wireless regional area network (WRAN) cells, wherein each of the plurality of co-existing WRAN cells includes a plurality of data frames and at the end of each of the plurality of data frames is a slotted co-existence window. Additional embodiments of the invention include CB frames, fixed-slot host scheduling and modulo scheduling. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279166 | WIRELESS-AWARE NETWORK SWITCH - An application-specific integrated circuit and related network switch are disclosed. The integrated circuit includes switch circuitry for receiving a 802.11 wireless data frame and forwarding it to a predetermined port. Inspection circuitry is provided for inspecting attributes of the data frame. Decision circuitry is provided for instructing the switch circuitry to forward the data frame based on the attributes, both 802.3 wired and 802.11 wireless. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080285526 | SIGNAL ACQUISITION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that generate pilots for signal acquisition in a wireless communication system based on time domain sequences. The pilots may be generated by a base station and transmitted in a pilot field to one or more access terminals to aid in signal acquisition at each of the access terminals. One of the pilots may be common to all access points in the wireless communication system, thereby allowing an access terminal to obtain a timing estimate for the system while minimizing the effects of interference variations between base stations. Further, one or more generated pilots may be unique to each access point in order to allow each respective access point to be identified by its generated pilots. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285527 | Method and Apparatus for Sharing Common Interest Links Between Communication Devices - Techniques for processing data related to common interests of two or more users of a communication system are disclosed. In an exemplary method disclosed hererin, the occurrence of a trigger event at a first communication device is detected, wherein the trigger event is related to communications between the first communication device and a second communication device. In response to the trigger event, the transmission of a first data object to the second communication device is initiated, wherein the first data object comprises information indicating one or more interests of a user of the first communication device. The exemplary method further comprises receiving and processing a second data object formed in response to the first data object, the second data comprising data related to one or more common interests shared by the users of the first and second communication devices. Similar methods suitable for implementing at a user communication device or at a data object server are disclosed, as are correspondingly configured devices. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285528 | System and Method for WLAN Multi-Channel Redundancy for VoIP Optimization - A system includes a wireless switch and a plurality of wireless nodes. A mobile device connects to the wireless switch by communicating a packet to the wireless switch via two or more of the plurality of wireless nodes. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285529 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING PILOT SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a pilot signal in a wireless communication system. A reference cell scrambling code or one of a plurality of additional cell scrambling codes is selected for each combination of one of a plurality of first scrambling codes (PSCs) applied to a first synchronization channel (P-SCH) and one of a plurality of second scrambling codes (SSCs) applied to a second synchronization channel (S-SCH). It is determined whether to transmit the pilot signal using the reference cell scrambling code or one of the plurality of additional cell scrambling codes. The reference cell scrambling code or the additional cell scrambling code is generated according to the determination. The pilot signal is transmitted using the generated reference cell scrambling code or the additional cell scrambling code. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285530 | Wireless Node Location Mechanism Featuring Definition of Search Region to Optimize Location Computation - A wireless node location mechanism that defines a search region to optimize the computations associated with estimating the location of a given wireless node. According to one implementation, a coverage map associated with each radio receiver that records signal strength data is defined out to a threshold signal strength level. Before computing the estimated location of a given wireless nodes, a search region is defined based on the intersection of the coverage maps associated with each radio receiver that detects the wireless node. Some implementations use information provided by the fact that certain radio receivers did not detect the wireless node to further optimize the location estimate. By defining a search region, which is a generally small area relative to the space encompassed by an entire RF environment, the present invention provides several advantages, such as reducing the processing time and/or power to compute estimated locations for wireless nodes. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285531 | High frequency module - A high frequency module comprises: a switch circuit connected to two antenna terminals; a diplexer connected to two reception signal terminals and the switch circuit; and a diplexer connected to two transmission signal terminals and the switch circuit. Each of the diplexers incorporates two band-pass filters and a low-pass filter. Each of the band-pass filters is formed by using a resonant circuit. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080291879 | Man-Portable Incident Command Platform - A man-portable incident command platform is provided. A controller for a rechargeable battery system is disclosed that evaluates whether a cover of the rechargeable battery system is open or closed; determines whether an AC power source is available; evaluates a charge level (for example, from a system management bus) of one or more batteries in the rechargeable battery system; and enables a charging circuit for one or more batteries requiring a charge based on whether the cover of the rechargeable battery system is open or closed and if the AC power source is available A charging circuit for the rechargeable battery system is disclosed that comprises one or more programmable voltage sources for charging one or more batteries in the rechargeable battery system. A power distribution unit (PDU) is disclosed for a rechargeable battery system that supplies power to a plurality of devices each having a different voltage requirement The PDU comprises a plurality of DC/DC converters for converting a first DC value to a plurality of DC levels, wherein each of the plurality of DC levels are associated with a different one of the voltage requirements. A portable communications device is disclosed that comprises a plurality of wireless backhaul connections to a public network; and a mobile mesh network connection for establish a wireless local area network. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291880 | RANDOM ACCESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The random access communication method according to the present invention includes a mobile station transmitting a transmission continuation request signal which requests a continuation of transmission of random access data to a base station during transmission of the random access data, the base station judging, upon receiving a transmission continuation request signal from the mobile station, whether or not to permit a continuation of transmission of the random access data depending on the current communication situation, the base station transmitting a transmission continuation permission signal or a transmission continuation rejection signal to the mobile station depending on whether or not to permit the continuation of transmission of the random access data, and the mobile station continuing, upon receiving the transmission continuation permission signal from the base station, transmission of the random access data. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291881 | Communication Network - A communication network ( | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291882 | Aggregated Links - A method and a transport scheme for packets of traffic over a logical link made up of the aggregation of several physical links ( | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291883 | MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND STATION SUPPORTING MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE - Provided are a management procedure in a wireless communication system and a station supporting the management procedure. In the method, a requested station receives a location request frame including a location request option sub-element which contains a value for indicating a timing measurement request from a requesting station. The requested station transmits an acknowledgement frame in response to the location request frame to the requesting station. The requested station transmits to the requesting station a location response frame including a timing measurement sub-element which contains a time difference between a transmission end time of the acknowledgement frame and a reception end time of the location request frame in response to the location request frame. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291884 | System and method for transmitting/receiving signal in communcation system - A system and method are disclosed for transmitting/receiving a signal in a communication system in which a first communication system and a second communication system coexist, the second communication system being evolved from the first communication system and being capable of using a control signal and a broadcast signal used in the first communication system. The method of transmitting a signal includes the steps of transmitting a first message including common control information and frame control information for the first communication system in a first frame, transmitting a second message including common control information and frame control information for the second communication system in a second frame, and signaling location information of the transmitted second message in the second frame. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291885 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF MIPv6 MOBILE NODES - A method for communication of MIPv6 mobile nodes, comprising: the mobile node accesses network at access location and obtains care of address, calculating a privacy identifier PID using the care of address etc. the mobile node replaces its home address by the PID, and sends the PID and the care of address together as binding update message to the home agent and correspondent node, the home agent and correspondent node recover the home address for the mobile node using the PID after they have received the binding update message. The method for communication of MIPv6 mobile nodes according to the present invention uses that a configuring replaced identifier replacing the home address is sent, thereby hiding Ipv6 address. By setting PID and its algorithm, we improve the sequence number in the binding update messages enabling the sequence number has randomness, and prevent the intercepting person continue tracking the mobile node through the home address. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291886 | VoIP WLAN CONFERENCE CALLING VIA HOME WIRELESS ROUTERS - A home wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and services a plurality of wireless terminals within the WLAN service area including at least one Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) wireless terminal. The home wireless router receives a request from the VoIP wireless terminal to establish a VoIP conference call with at least two other VoIP wireless terminals. The home wireless router interacts with the VoIP service accumulator to determine at least one other home wireless router required to service the VoIP conference call, queries the at least one other home wireless router to determine its ability to service the VoIP conference call for at least one serviced VoIP wireless terminal, and receives a response from the at least one other home wireless router. The home wireless router, the at least one other home wireless router, and the VoIP service accumulator then set up and service the VoIP conference call. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080298327 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING GATEWAY BANDWIDTH SHARING AD-HOC NETWORKS - Systems and methods for establishing gateway bandwidth sharing ad hoc networks. In a first aspect, a method includes establishing a relationship with a gateway that retrieves data from a remote location and divides the data into at least a first portion and a second portion. The method further includes establishing an ad hoc network comprising at least one local lender, receiving the first portion from the gateway via the at least one local lender, receiving the second portion from the gateway, and joining the first portion and the second portion to re-create the data. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298328 | TRUSTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS WITH STATION-TO-STATION LINK ASSOCIATION - After establishing a direct station-to-station link (STSL) with a second wireless client device in a centralized network, a first wireless client device may initiate a process with the second wireless device to secure the link. Prior to securing the link, any exchange of frames that are routed through the intermediate access point (AP) may place the related security information in the payload of the frames. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298329 | Method of Beacon Management For Merging Piconets - A method for synchronizing communications between first and second piconets is provided. It is determined whether superframes corresponding to the first and second piconets are synchronized according to respective beacon period start times from the detected beacons. When the superframes are not synchronized, a type of overlap is determined. The type of overlap includes 1) an overlap between beacon periods, 2) an overlap between reservation periods and 3) an overlap between beacon periods and reservation periods of the superframes. The first and second piconets are merged into a single piconet according to rules based on the determined type of overlap. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298330 | Using Presence Detection To Control A Wireless Network - A wireless system coupled to a local area network (LAN) ( | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298331 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - When a wireless communication network is built in an ad hoc mode, it is possible to appropriately build the wireless communication network regardless of start timings of wireless communication functions of image capturing apparatuses. In order to achieve the object, there is provided the image capturing apparatus which is capable of building a wireless communication network by wirelessly connecting to another image capturing apparatus in an ad hoc mode, and which is capable of switching between a function as a creator and a function as a joiner, including a start unit configured to start as the creator, a unit configured to execute a scan process, and a unit configured to determine based on a result of the scan process whether to function as the creator and to function as the joiner, and to control the image capturing apparatus in accordance with the determination result. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298332 | PACKET DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND CONTROL STATION - A packet data communication method including a radio base station receiving packet data from a mobile terminal, and generating a data frame having a packet frame error detection code and transmitting to a control station. The control station detects an error in a packet frame contained in the data frame based on the error detection code. Packet frames with no error detected therein are separated, while a sequence number of the packet frame with an error detected therein is detected. The packet frames are arranged in order of sequence number, and the arrival of a packet frame having a missing sequence number is awaited. After a waiting period packet frames, other than those with an error detected therein, are arranged in continuous order by sequence numbers. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298333 | SCANNING PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS LAN, STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME, AND FRAME FORMAT THEREFOR - Provided is a scan procedure in a wireless local access network, and station and frame format for the scan procedure. In the scan procedure, a second station receives from a first station a probe request frame which comprises a Homogeneous Extended Service Set Identifier (HESSID) field containing a desired HESSID of the first station and a network type field containing a desired network type of the first station. And, the second station transmits a probe response frame to the first station in response to the probe request frame in case that the HESSID field in the probe request frame is set to a wildcard HESSID or the HESSID of a second station which received the probe request frame, and the network type field in the probe request frame is set to a wildcard network type or the network type of the second station. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080304455 | Method, System, Mobile Communication Terminal and a Node Adapted for End-to-End Quality Access Selection of an Access Network - In a method of selecting an access network from among one or more access networks capable of providing service to a mobile communication terminal, measuring (S | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304456 | Communication System, Radio Lan Base Station Control Device, and Radio Lan Base Station Device - There are provided a communication system, a radio LAN base station control device, and a radio LAN base station device capable of increasing the control reliability and improving communication stability and safety between the radio LAN base station control device and the radio LAN base station device. In this communication system ( | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304457 | Secure mobile IPv6 registration - In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving by an agent a request from a network node for generation of a secure IPv6 address for use by the network node, the request including a selected subset of parameters selected by the network node and required for generation of the secure IPv6 address according to a prescribed secure address generation procedure, the selected subset including at least a public key owned by the network node; dynamically generating by the agent at least a second of the parameters required for generation of the secure IPv6 address; generating by the agent the secure IPv6 address based on the selected subset and the second of the parameters required for generation of the secure IPv6 address; and outputting, to the network node, an acknowledgment to the request and that includes the secure IPv6 address, and the parameters required for generation of the secure IPv6 address. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304458 | Inter-Working of Networks - In a heterogeneous network environment comprising a plurality of first wireless networks and a second wireless network, said plurality of first wireless network utilizing a first wireless communication protocol and said second wireless network utilizing a second wireless communication protocol different to said first, a method of gathering data from said plurality of first wireless networks, which method comprises the steps of: electronically extracting a network identifier from at least one of said first wireless networks; transmitting said network identifier to a remote server; and said remote server compiling a database of network identifiers received from said plurality of first wireless networks, storing of said database facilitating inter-working between one or more of said plurality of first wireless networks and said second wireless network. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304459 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A CONTROL STATION, A METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A TERMINAL STATION, A CONTROL STATION, A TERMINAL STATION, AND A COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A method for controlling a control station (H | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304460 | CELLULAR NETWORK/WLAN VoIP SERVICE INTERACTION BY HOME WIRELESS ROUTER - A home wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The home wireless router services a plurality of wireless terminals within the WLAN service area, the plurality of wireless terminals including at least one Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) wireless terminal. The home wireless router receives a request to terminate a WLAN VoIP call to the VoIP wireless terminal. The home wireless router determines that the VoIP wireless terminal is currently servicing a cellular call via a cellular network. The home wireless router causes the cellular network to be misled into concluding that another cellular call is to be serviced by the VoIP wireless terminal, the cellular network places the cellular call on hold in the incorrect conclusion that it will service the another cellular call, and the WLAN VoIP call is terminated to the VoIP wireless terminal. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304461 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-NETWORK COVERAGE - A system and method are provided for a multi-network wireless communications access terminal (AT) to access multi-network coverage. The method registers a multi-network AT in a first communications network. In response to registering with the first network, the AT receives information via the first network that is required for accessing a second communications network (e.g., an IEEE 802.20 or 1xEV-DO network). The AT obtains services accessed via the second network, in response to the access information received via the first network. For example, the second network access information may be system information, channel information, or access point parameters. The AT retains the option of obtaining services accessed via the first network if the second network cannot be accessing the second network. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080310375 | Return Routability Optimisation - A method of managing switching of a virtual private network (VPN) tunnel termination point from a first address to a second address. The VPN operates between a fixed network node and a mobile node which defines the termination point. The address of the mobile mode is switched from the first address to the second address and a notification from the mobile node to the fixed node is sent to indicate that the address of the mobile has changed from the first address to the second address. Verification of the trustworthiness of the second address is also then made. A searching manager for performing the method is also disclosed. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310376 | Method and System for Routing Packets in an Ad Hoc Wireless Network - A system for routing packets in an ad hoc wireless network. In response to entering the ad hoc wireless network, location data is broadcast to other nodes within the ad hoc wireless network. Location data is received from the other nodes within the ad hoc wireless network. The received location data is recorded in a routing table. In response to determining that one or more packets need to be transmitted, a best route is calculated to transmit the one or more packets within the ad hoc wireless network using data in the routing table. Then, the one or more packets are transmitted to a node within the ad hoc wireless network based on the calculated best route. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310377 | Method and system for providing routing protocols in a frequency hopping spread spectrum network - A method and system for providing a network and routing protocol for utility services are disclosed. In one embodiment, a computer-implemented method comprises discovering a utility network, wherein a utility device (for example, a constant powered meter) sends network discovery messages to find the utility network. Neighboring meters are discovered and the device listens for advertised routes for one or more networks from the neighbors. The device is then registered with one or more utility networks, receiving a unique address for each network registration. Also illustrated in this invention disclosure is how each device of a class of devices (for example, battery powered meter) finds and associates itself with another device (for example, constant powered meter). The constant powered meter also registers its associate battery powered meter with the utility networks. The constant powered meter registers itself with the access points and the upstream nodes in the path out of each network. Each upstream node can independently make forwarding decisions on both upstream and downstream packets i.e. choose the next hop according to the best information available to it. The constant powered meter can sense transient link problems, outage problems, and traffic characteristics. It uses the information to find the best route out of and within each network. Each network device thus maintains multi-egress, multi-ingress network routing options both for itself and the device(s) associated with it. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310378 | SELECTIVE PHASE CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiple-phase selective connection establishment in wireless communications networks. Radio resource control (RRC) layer communications can be instantiated between a mobile device and base station. Additional information can be required by a downstream network component regarding the mobile device. Accordingly, the RRC resources can be utilized to transmit the additional information from the mobile device to the network component to facilitate the multiple-phase establishment. This can be accomplished using non-access stratum (NAS) messages. Further, the information can relate to authorization, security re-configuration, context re-synchronization, an identity of the mobile device, and the like. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310379 | Short-Distance Wireless Data Transmitting Apparatus and Method - A short distance wireless data transmission system and method which are capable of minimizing data loss are disclosed. The short distance wireless data transmission system can monitor variation amount of memory data, which is buffered in the master side when data transmission errors occur, can perform re-transmission of data having transmission errors, and can perform a change toward new replacement channel without interference if variation amount of memory data, which is buffered therein, exceeds a predetermined reference value to re-transmit from data in which the first transmission error occurs thereto, such that real time data cannot be lost, although a channel change is generated by successive channel interference. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310380 | ADAPTIVE HISTORY AWARE BEAM STEERING - The present invention relates to the field of multi-path wireless communication. The present invention provides a system for assisting in providing a wireless communication link between a first communication device and a second communication device based on a plurality of communication paths comprising a history manager for providing, based on a recorded history of communication path states, a proposal for one or more communication paths based on which the communication link can be provided. The present invention further provides a corresponding method and a communication system and a communication device comprising the system of the present invention. Based on the proposal provided by the present invention, path switching can be performed more effectively, less and shorter interruptions of the communication link can be obtained and an enhanced transmission quality can be provided for multi-path wireless communication systems. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310381 | GENERIC WIRELESS SERVICES DISCOVERY - Embodiments of the invention relate to wireless communications. More particularly, embodiments of the invention relate to generic discovery mechanisms that may be utilized in wireless communications. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080316979 | Configuring a host device by way of MMP - The claimed subject matter relates to configuring a host device through utilization of MMP, which is a protocol that is based upon MIP but not associated with several deficiencies associated therewith. In particular, a wireless terminal can be configured to run MMP and send messages that conform to MMP over a wireless link. A base station can be configured to act as a DHCP server. The base station can provide configuration information to host device by way of DHCP. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316980 | Arrangement and a Method in Communication Networks - The present invention relates to an arrangement comprising a functional server node forming part of a conglomerate, or pool, of functional server nodes in common controlling a number of radio network control means, each functional server node being able to control any, or a number of, radio network control means, to which mobile stations are connected. The functional server nodes support transfer/redistribution of mobile stations between each other without interrupting the connection of the mobile stations, a target functional server node, to which it has been decided that a mobile station is to be transferred from a current functional server node, generates an area update or transfer acceptance message comprising an identification of the current functional server node, an identification of the target functional server node and a transfer indications. The invention also relates to a method of redistributing or transferring mobile station contexts. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316981 | MODULATION CODING SCHEMES FOR CONTROL FRAME TRANSMISSION UNDER 802.11N - A control frame transmission algorithm is disclosed for 802.11n devices operating in a wireless neighborhood that includes both high-throughput (HT) devices and non-high throughput devices. The control frame transmission algorithm establishes the characteristics of a control frame initiated by the station, as well as the characteristics of a response control frame, which is sent in response to a frame received from another station. These characteristics include the PHY protocol data unit format, the transmission rate, and modulation coding scheme to be used. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316982 | Managing Dense Wireless Access Point Infrastructures in Wireless Local Area Networks - Techniques for enhancing the throughput capacity available to client devices connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. Specifically, existing WLAN resources are converted into wireless access points (APs) to create a dense infrastructure of wireless APs. To leverage this dense AP infrastructure, central management techniques are employed. With client-to-AP mapping, these techniques are used to prevent the discovery of multiple APs in a WLAN by a client device and to select a single AP (using certain policies) to associate with the client device and provide it with an enhanced wireless connection to the WLAN. Additionally, techniques are employed to centrally determine, using central policies, when the AP should disassociate from the client device and when another centrally selected AP should respond to, and associate with, the client device to provide it with an enhanced wireless connection to the WLAN—without interrupting/disrupting the client device's access. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316983 | Service information in a LAN access point that regulates network service levels provided to communication terminals - A LAN access point maintains service information that defines which of a plurality of network service levels is allocated to a plurality of communication terminals. The LAN point regulates the network service levels that it provides to the communication terminals in response to the service information. The service information may allocate different maximum communication bandwidth levels and/or allow/deny access to various network services to defined communication terminal identifiers, identifiers route locations hosted on communication terminals, and/or identifiers for users of the communication terminals. Moreover, the service information may define a time of day schedule and/or day of week schedule that varies the allocation of maximum communication bandwidth levels and/or access to various network services. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316984 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARTUS AND CONTROL METHOD OF AN INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, an information processing apparatus includes a radio communication unit, a searching unit which searches for an external device with which the radio communication unit is capable of performing data transfer, a detecting unit which detects all of radio communication functions provided in the external device, a monitoring unit which monitors a link speed attained with respect to the external device, a determining unit which determines whether or not the link speed acquired by the monitoring unit reaches a link speed which makes it possible to perform a radio communication function requiring the highest link speed among all of radio communication functions, and a control unit which makes a connection to the external device unit when the determining unit determines that the link speed is reached. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316985 | WLAN having load balancing based on access point loading - A network having distribution of access point loading includes access points to which mobile stations can associate themselves based upon access point beacon signal levels and loading levels for the various access points. A mobile station receives beacon signals from various access points and determines a signal strength for the received beacon signals. The mobile station also receives access point loading information from the access points. The mobile station associates with an access point based upon the access point beacon signal strengths and the access point loading information. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316986 | Remote Antenna for Wireless Access Point - A center access point ( | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316987 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE MULTIPLE RECEIVERS - Briefly, a wireless communication device that includes a processor to enable a determined number of receivers of a MIMO system according to a value provided with a request to enable the receivers is provided. A method for enabling the receivers of MIMO system is also provided. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316988 | METHOD FOR FAST ROAMING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A roaming service method for a fast and secure wireless network is provided. In an embodiment of the present invention, an AP, which an STA associates with, transmits proactive keys needed for roaming to neighbor APs of the AP. When the STA moves to one of the neighbor APs, a reassociation is carried out between the STA and the neighbor AP using the already provided proactive key. In another embodiment of the present invention, an authentication server transmits proactive keys needed for roaming to neighbor APs to which the STA is likely to move, so that when the STA moves to one of the neighbor APs, a reassociation is carried out between the STA and the neighbor AP using the already provided proactive key. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316989 | METHOD AND EQUIPMENT FOR ACCESSING A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for accessing a network in a telecommunication system which comprises at least one terminal and a plurality of networks in which information sets describing settings needed to access networks and their resources are stored in the terminal. The terminal scans for information about available networks. Available information sets are determined by comparing the information about available networks to the stored information sets. At least one network is accessed based on the settings defined in the available information sets. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING LINK RANGE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING A SELF-CONFIGURABLE ANTENNA - Embodiments of the invention facilitate providing wireless links with longer link ranges and/or better suppression of interference than can be provided by the integrated antennas of a typical wireless network node. While, in some cases, it is possible to install intermediate wireless network nodes to hop through long expanses between distant wireless network nodes, it is desirable for distantly spaced wireless network nodes to reach one another through a single transit link (i.e. one hop). This approach is preferable because a single transit link is capable of higher data rates and better interference suppression than multi-hop transit links. The present invention provides methods and apparatus for enhancing the link range achievable by typical wireless network nodes so that distantly spaced wireless network nodes are able to communicate with one another using only a single-transit link. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20090003291 | SIX-ADDRESS SCHEME FOR MULTIPLE HOP FORWARDING IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A six field address scheme identifies both the originating point and the endpoint of a data frame enabling multiple hop forwarding though a plurality of intermediate mesh points in a wireless mesh network. Data frames originating or ending at a point outside of the wireless mesh network access the wireless network at a mesh access point using a legacy address scheme. The legacy address schemes are converted to a six address scheme using a proxy address table at the access point. Each mesh access point includes not only a routing table but a proxy address table as well as enabling the mesh access point, and/or mesh portal points, to convert address schemes having less than six address fields to the six field format. Subsequent to the conversion, mesh points within the wireless mesh network need only the routing table to facilitate the forwarding of the data frame. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003292 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRACKING AND LOCATING LAPTOPS - An arrangement for employing a host of receivers that may already be present in a laptop, to enable the laptop to collect a significant amount of data about its location. Once the system then finds a readily available connection, it can then transmit information about its location as well as other information to help pinpoint the location of the laptop. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003293 | Accounting for map parsing delay to enable coexistence of multiple radios - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes an apparatus that includes a first radio to communicate with a first wireless network and a second radio to communicate with a second wireless network. The first wireless network transmits a map defining locations within an assigned spectrum data is to be communicated therebetween. An earliest possible location defined in map is such that the map can be parsed within the time it would take to get to the earliest possible location so that the radio can be turned off after receiving the map until the location defined in the map, and the second radio is active when the first radio is not. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003294 | Multiple radio platform transmission power control - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes an apparatus that includes a first radio to communicate with a first wireless network and a second radio to communicate with a second wireless network. A controller is used to estimate signal to noise and interference ratio (SINR) for signal being received by the first radio when the second radio is transmitting. The controller is also to determine if the estimate meets a threshold. Transmissions are permitted from the second radio while the first radio is receiving if the threshold is met. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003295 | AD-HOC NETWORK DEVICE WITH REDUCED DATA LOSS - When data is to be transmitted from a transmission source to a transmission destination in a wireless or wired ad-hoc network constructed in an indoor environment such as a house or an office, the data is transmitted by using a path that is formed over a plurality of channels that the respective nodes have. Also, when data transmission with high reliability is to be performed, same data is sent to two or more paths, thereby even when the data on one path cannot be normally delivered due to noise, the data can be delivered to the transmission destination without being affected by the noise by using the data transmitted on another channel. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003296 | Method And System For Interconnecting Digital Subscriber Line Network And Radio Communication Network - A method and system for interconnecting a DSL network and a radio communication network are disclosed. The DSL network carries data transmitted in the radio communication network so that the radio communication network and the DSL network are interconnected. The xDSL is adopted to perform the base station transmission. The scheme may function as a radio extension of the wire access of the DSL network and is suitable to fixed wireless, nomadic connectivity, laptop and mobile access applications. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003297 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC LMA ASSIGNMENT IN PROXY MOBILE IPv6 PROTOCOL - Methods and apparatuses are provided for supporting mobility in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol (“IP”) network without having a mobile node (“MN”) to participate in certain mobility related signaling. Instead, a proxy agent might implement functions of a mobile access gateway (“MAG”) in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version 6 (“IPv6”) network. The proxy agent, rather than the MN, might send a request to a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (“DHCP”) server, and receive back a local mobility anchor address (“LMAA”) of a local mobility anchor (“LMA”). The proxy agent might instead perform a Domain Name System (“DNS”) lookup for the LMAA of the LMA first; in response to a failure to receive the LMAA, the proxy agent might then send the request to the DHCP server to receive the LMAA. The proxy agent might further update DNS information of the MN. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003298 | SIX-ADDRESS SCHEME FOR MULTIPLE HOP FORWARDING IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A six field address scheme identifies both the originating point and the endpoint of a data frame enabling multiple hop forwarding through a plurality of intermediate mesh points in a wireless mesh network. Data frames originating or ending at a point outside of the wireless mesh network access the wireless network at a mesh access point using a legacy address scheme. The legacy address schemes are converted to a six address scheme using a proxy address table at the access point. Each mesh access point includes not only a routing table but a proxy address table as well as enabling the mesh access point, and/or mesh portal points, to convert address schemes having less than six address fields to the six field format. Subsequent to the conversion, mesh points within the wireless mesh network need only the routing table to facilitate the forwarding of the data frame. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003299 | METHOD FOR CLEAR CHANNEL ASSESSMENT OPTIMIZATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and apparatus are directed toward optimizing clear channel assessment (CCA) parameters in a wireless local area network having an access point (AP) and at least one station. An upper bound and a lower bound for an energy detect threshold (EDT) parameter are determined. A value of the EDT parameter is calculated and is bound by the upper bound and the lower bound. The EDT parameter is updated. The method can be performed at each station or at the AP, with the updated CCA parameters being signaled to each station associated with the AP. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090010230 | AUTOMATIC WIRELESS NETWORK LINKING METHOD WITH SECURITY CONFIGURATION AND DEVICE THEREOF - An automatic wireless network linking method with a security configuration includes: providing an access point with a floating service set identifier and a shared key. The floating service set identifier has a prefix name. Next, a host system is provided to execute a setting and linking application to automatically scan the access point with the prefix name and obtain the floating service set identifier of the access point. Both the access point and the setting and linking application perform an operation process to generate a dynamic key. The dynamic key is converted into a wireless network encryption algorithm. Finally, the host system links to the access point to perform wireless communication, and uses the wireless network encryption algorithm to encrypt and decrypt data. Thereby, the time required for setting up the wireless network platform is reduced. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010231 | COMMUNICATIONS METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO SYNCHRONIZATION WITH RESPECT TO A PEER TO PEER TIMING STRUCTURE - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. A peer to peer timing structure is implemented which includes recurring peer discovery intervals and traffic intervals. Some embodiments further include recurring paging intervals for peer to peer pages. A wireless communications device, supporting peer to peer communications and storing information defining the timing structure, determines a time reference point, facilitating a coarse level of synchronization with respect to the timing structure. The time reference point is determined based on a broadcast signal received from a communications device, e.g., a satellite, base station, or beacon signal transmitter. Multiple peer to peer wireless communications devices in a local vicinity thus obtain the same basic understanding as to the current relative point in time with respect to a common recurring peer to peer timing structure. Peer to peer timing synchronization is further refined based on received signals communicated between peers. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010232 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS TIMING STRUCTURE - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. A peer to peer timing structure is implemented which includes a pattern of different types of time intervals including at least a peer discovery time interval and a traffic interval. A wireless communications device, supporting peer to peer operations stores the peer to peer timing structure information, accesses the stored information, and used the accessed information to determine an operation to be performed during a current time period. The operation is, e.g., a peer discovery operation, a peer to peer timing synchronization operation, a peer paging operation, or a peer to peer traffic signaling operation. Various exemplary relationships between the different types of intervals, including relative frequencies, relative durations, and spacing information, are described. Advantageous construction of the recurring peer to peer timing structure facilitates efficient utilization of air link resources and/or higher traffic data throughput capabilities. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010233 | Wireless Gateway in a Process Control Environment Supporting a Wireless Communication Protocol - A wireless gateway for use in a process control environment includes a wireless interface for communicating with a first wireless network using a first wireless communication protocol, such that the wireless network includes a plurality of field devices operating in the process control environment. The wireless gateway further includes a host interface for communicating with an external host disposed outside the wireless network using a second communication protocol and a protocol translator to enable an exchange of data between the first interface and the second interface. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010234 | ROUTING PROTOCOL FOR A NETWORK EMPLOYING MULTI-USER WIRELESS CHANNELS - A routing protocol, according to one embodiment of which a first station of a wireless network monitors its outgoing transmissions corresponding to a traffic flow for occurrence of multi-tier signals and for ability to achieve a specified minimum transmission rate. Based on the monitoring, the first station may transmit an outgoing solicitation message that identifies the monitored traffic flow as a candidate for rerouting. Upon receipt of the solicitation message, a second station of the wireless network evaluates whether rerouting of the monitored traffic flow through the second station is capable of increasing data throughput for that traffic flow without decreasing data throughputs for other traffic flows presently handled by the second station. Based on this evaluation, the second station may transmit to the first station an offer to reroute the monitored traffic flow. The first station, in turn, evaluates this offer, e.g., by comparing its benefits with those of alternative offers that the first station might have received from other stations of the wireless network in response to the solicitation message. Based on the latter evaluation, the first station may reroute the monitored traffic flow through the station whose offer is deemed preferable. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010235 | WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEM MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - Provided are WLAN system management procedure and a station supporting the procedure. In the management procedure, a station receives one or more event request frames each of which includes zero or more event request elements, wherein each of the event request elements comprises an event type field for specifying the event type of an event request. After reception, if the station moves to a different Extended Service Set (ESS), the station cancels all outstanding event requests of the event request frames and deletes all pending event report frames and event data. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010236 | Mobile Communication Control Method, Mobile Terminal, and Access Router - A technology is disclosed that provides a mobile communication control method, a mobile terminal, and an access router that allow communication to be continued after a handover without newly establishing all protocol states from the beginning. The technology includes a step at which a mobile node | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010237 | Communication Method, Communication System, Mobile Node and Network Node for Notification About the Proximity of a Second Wireless Network Via a First Wireless Network - For communications between several different types of wireless networks and a mobile node, technology to provide various services from a wireless network to the mobile node which is not covered by that network without exhaustion of the mobile node battery is disclosed. According to this technology, the mobile node sends an update message to a currently accessible network node, which transfers the update message to the same or different types of nearby network nodes with incrementing the hop count for every transfer. The different type of network node that has received the update message checks whether the hop count decreases from that previously received and judges that the mobile node is approaching if the hop count decreases and sends the guide message to the mobile node via the same and different types of networks. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090016306 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN EFFICIENT TIM ELEMENT SUPPORTING MULTIPLE BSSes IN A WIRELESS LAN - Aspects of a system for an efficient traffic indication map (TIM) element supporting multiple basic service sets (BSSes) in a wireless LAN may include an access point (AP) the enables generation of a traffic indication virtual bitmap based on the presence of stored data pending transmission to one or more WLAN stations (STAs) via a wireless communication medium. The AP may generate a partial virtual bitmap based on the generated traffic indication virtual bitmap. The partial virtual bitmap may comprise a first segment and a second segment, wherein each segment may be derived from the generated traffic indication virtual bitmap. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016307 | Information Communication Terminal, Radio Communication Apparatus, Radio Communication Network System and Program Product Capable of Performing Communication Corresponding to Purpose - An information communication terminal can transmit data of a plurality of attributes over a radio communication network. The information communication terminal transmits the data to the radio communication network, stores information correlating a network address of the radio communication network with the attribute of the data, extracts the attribute of the data to be transmitted, extracts the network address correlated to the extracted attribute and transmits a beacon including the extracted network address. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016308 | Antenna in cargo container monitoring and security system - An antenna system for a container monitoring system includes: a short range wireless communications device associated with each container, each short range wireless communications device including a transmitter element and a complementary receiver element; at least one long range communications device communications device associated with each container; a global positioning or GPS element; and an antenna system which is integrated into the construction of each container wall, door, or roof. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090022113 | SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SERVICE SYSTEM - Disclosed are a subscriber information management system and a method for a mobile communication service system for managing subscriber information. System comprises a subscriber information management system for a mobile communication service system that a wire terminal and a wireless terminal respectively connected with an integrating and managing server and provides at least one portal service from the integrating and managing server, the system comprising: a subscriber information management unit, wherein the subscriber information management unit is included in the integrating and managing server, and links subscriber information transmitted from the wireless terminal with subscriber information transmitted from the wire terminal using a predetermined key value. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022114 | ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS LAN - A wireless access device in a local area network (LAN) having a plurality of transceivers. Each transceiver has a directional antenna positioned in a substantially circular array to communicate signals with a plurality of stations in a corresponding sector. Each sector defines a portion of a coverage area surrounding the wireless access device. The wireless access device has a network interface to a data network, and an array controller to control communication of data between the stations and the transceivers, and between the transceivers and the network interface. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022115 | MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORKS - A device may receive a discovery signal from a mobile node, register the mobile node in response to receiving the discovery signal from the mobile node, assign a mobility label to the mobile node after the registration, distribute messages describing the mobility label and the mobile node to edge routers in the network to create a label switched path, and route communication messages from a remote node to the mobile node along the label switched path in the network. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022116 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING UP AND TEARING DOWN CONNECTIONS IN MESH NETWORKS - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices may form and/or tear down intra-mesh connection with other WMC devices in the same mesh network. WMC devices may utilize information related to other WMC devices in the mesh network in determining formation and tearing down of intra-mesh connections. This information may comprise relative speeds, locations, and directions of movement of the WMC devices forming/tearing intra-mesh connections. Other information including data bandwidth and/or power consumption may be utilized in such determination. This information may also comprise available services advertised by WMC devices in the mesh network. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022117 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING CONNECTION TO AND USE OF LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - Methods and systems for a handheld portable communication device for configuring connection to and use of local and remote resources are disclosed and may include discovering available networks and resources, establishing a route between the handheld wireless communication device and a selected one or more of the available resources via a selected one or more of the available networks based on user preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device, and communicating multimedia data between the handheld wireless communication device and the selected one or more of the available resources via the established route. The established route may be dynamically adjusted, based on network availability and bandwidth. The handheld wireless communication device may communicate utilizing a plurality of wireless protocols. The preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device may be dynamically adjusted. The resources may be local or remote to the handheld wireless communication device. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022118 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN ATOMIZING FUNCTION OF A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods and systems for an atomizing function for a mobile device are disclosed and may include discovering available resources via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) and assessing respective cost functions for processing tasks by the HWCD and/or the discovered resources. The tasks may be apportioned for local and/or remote execution by the HWCD and/or the discovered resources based on the assessed cost functions. The assessed cost functions may be dependent on factors comprising communication bandwidth, memory space, CPU processing power, and battery power, which may be weighted. The cost functions may be dynamically assessed, enabling dynamic reapportioning of the tasks, which may be apportioned based on latency, quality of service (QoS), priority and/or user preferences associated with the local and/or remote execution. The apportioning of the processing of the tasks may be based on the assessed cost functions, and a priority and/or a QoS associated with the task. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022119 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A PERSISTENT REQUEST GENERATED BY A WIRELESS DEVICE, EXECUTED REMOTELY AND OUTPUT TO CONFIGURABLE LOCAL RESOURCES - Methods and systems for a persistent request generated by a wireless device, executed remotely and output to configurable local resources are disclosed and may include generating via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) a persistent request for a user that may be communicated to remote devices for execution and storage of results. The stored results may be received from local resources local which may be configured by the remote devices based on user preferences to deliver the stored results to the user. The stored results may be received by the user via the HWCD or another wireless communication device, and the identity of the user may be authenticated prior to receiving the stored results. The remote devices may discover the local resources based on the detection of the user logging into the network. User preferences may be stored in networked devices or may be stored in the HWCD. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022120 | Method And System For Enabling Rendering Of Electronic Media Content Via A Secure Ad Hoc Network Configuration Utilizing A Handheld Wireless Communication Device - An ad hoc network enabled to handle secure data may be created for a specified user via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) such that rightful access to protected data stored on one or more networked devices may be extended to one or more distributed rendering devices. The HWCD and/or the user may be authenticated. The HWCD may enable configuration of one or more dynamic connections on the ad hoc network as needed until communication of data is complete. Bandwidth and throughput of one or more communication links may be adjusted according to bandwidth availability. The data may be buffered via the HWCD and/or one or more of the distributed rendering devices. Processing data tasks may be assigned to one or more networked resources on the ad hoc network. The data may undergo format conversion and be consumed on the one or more distributed rendering devices and/or the HWCD. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022121 | Apparatus and method for redundant connectivity and multi-channel operation of wireless devices - A wireless network includes leaf nodes (such as wireless sensors or other wireless devices) and infrastructure nodes (such as access points). The leaf nodes communicate data messages to the infrastructure nodes. The infrastructure nodes communicate the data messages to gateway infrastructure nodes, which transmit the data messages over a wired network. The leaf nodes may communicate data messages to multiple infrastructure nodes in various ways. For example, the leaf nodes may transmit multiple messages, one at a time, to multiple infrastructure nodes. The leaf nodes may also broadcast a single message to multiple infrastructure nodes. In addition, the leaf nodes may communicate a single message containing a group identifier (such as a multi-cast group address) associated with multiple infrastructure nodes. In this way, communications from the leaf nodes may be more reliable. This may be particularly useful, for example, in networks such as 802.11-based networks. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022122 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION OUTSIDE A MESH BY INCLUDING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION IN ROUTER CONFIGURATION MESSAGES - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and the device user. WMC devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form an ad hoc wireless network wherein each WMC device within the network may function as a router for other devices. Utilizing such routing capability within an ad hoc wireless network may allow WMC devices that are out of their wireless coverage area to use other WMC devices within such ad hoc wireless network to route any impending communication through such other WMC devices wherein these devices may have wireless connectivity to their coverage networks. WMC devices that are may have external connectivity may be enable to be selective in routing information and/or data from other WMC devices in the ad hoc network. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022123 | Apparatus and method for providing contents sharing service on network - The present invention relates to a network-based contents sharing service providing device and method. A contents provider stores at least one content in a memory and manages it, classifies information on shared contents to be shared with the contents receiver according to a predetermined reference, generates a shared contents list by making information on the classified shared contents into a list, manages the list, and provides the shared contents list to the corresponding contents receiver when there is a contents receiver for sharing shared contents from among the contents receivers in the service area in which the contents provider is positioned. A contents receiver presents the shared contents list to the contents receiving user, receives at least one shared content from the contents provider through downloading or streaming according to selection of the contents receiving user having acquired the list, and performs it. Accordingly, the contents receiving user can freely use various contents of the contents provider positioned in the service area such as his portable terminal. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022124 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING AN ANCHORING POINT FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal includes an Internet Protocol (IP) address module that requests and receives a first IP address from a home anchoring point within a home network. The first IP address is an address of the home anchoring point. The system also includes a packet module that exchanges packets with the home anchoring point via a first attachment point. The packets include the first IP address. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022125 | DIRECT LINK TEARDOWN PROCEDURE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME - Provided are a direct link teardown procedure in a TDLS (Tunneled Direct Link Setup) wireless network and a station supporting the direct link teardown procedure. In the direct link teardown procedure, an initiating station of the teardown procedure transmits a TDLS teardown request message to the peer station of the direct link. The initiating station receives a TDLS teardown response message in response to the TDLS teardown request message from the peer station. Then, the initiating station disables its direct Rx path and destroys the security parameters relevant to the direct link upon receipt of the TDLS teardown response message. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022126 | MULTIPLE PACKET DATA NETWORK SUPPORT OVER TRUSTED ACCESS - A media access gateway comprises a wireless network interface, an authorization module, a filter information module, and a proxy mobility agent module. The wireless network interface selectively establishes a wireless link with a first interface of a wireless terminal that has a plurality of wireless interfaces. The authorization module determines a home agent corresponding to the wireless terminal. The filter information module receives filter information from one of the wireless terminal and a server and generates output filter information. The proxy mobility agent module transmits a binding update to the home agent. The binding update includes the output filter information. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022127 | SECURE LOCALIZATION FOR 802.11 NETWORKS WITH FINE GRANULARITY - A system and method that uses wireless-capable desktop computers in a vicinity such as to enable one to securely determine the location of an untrusted user with office level granularity. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022128 | ACCESS POINT WITH SIMULTANEOUS DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION OF INDEPENDENT DATA FOR MULTIPLE CLIENT STATIONS - A wireless network device comprises R modulation modules that receive R independent data streams, that modulate the R independent data streams, and that apply a multiplexing matrix to generate M modulated and multiplexed data streams, respectively, where R and M are integers greater than one. M summing modules sum portions of each of the M modulated and multiplexed data streams to generate M transmit data streams. M transmitters simultaneously transmit the M transmit data streams during a simultaneous downlink transmission (SDT) period. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022129 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE AND AGGREGATION OF MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for the aggregation of multimedia information storage via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. Information about storage resources accessible to a broadband access gateway may be collected and used in selecting storage capacity used for storing multimedia information such as, for example, streaming video, broadcast video, digitized video, digitized audio, text, and digitized images. The gateway may manage storage and retrieval of the multimedia information based upon user defined criteria and characteristics of the available storage resources. Multimedia information may be parsed for storage across multiple storage resources, and the location and nature of the storage resources used for storage of multimedia information items may be unknown to the user. Storage services accessible via a broadband connection may also be used as storage resources. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022130 | Switching between two communicaiton modes in a WLAN - Method and system for switching a network application operating in a first communication mode to a second mode within a wireless local area network, comprising: judging whether mobile nodes are neighboring according to location information; when nodes are neighboring inquiring whether mobile nodes want to switch to second mode to run network applications; when all mobile nodes agree to switch to second mode, downloading and installing network application provided by the application server to one of the mobile nodes; configuring each of the mobile nodes with the communication parameters under the second mode; and switching all mobile nodes to the second communication mode to continue the previous network application. The invention dynamically switches between Infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode to balance system resources, improve QoS, reduce the communication traffic, waiting time and the cost of the users, and increase the income of the provider of the network service. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022131 | Communication system - The present invention deals with a method and system for producing services in the communication system of a building. In the method of the invention, the communication system comprises at least one terminal device applicable for local-area communication, at least one communication means, at least one server controlling the communication system, at least one base station for implementing a local-area network in the communication system, and a local network for implementing mutual data transfer between the said communication means, the said server controlling the communication system and the said base station. In the method, a number of service folders are generated in the terminal device and a service folder applicable to the purpose in each case is selected. From the selected service folder, a service request is selected which is transmitted from the terminal device to the communication system, where the service request is executed in one or more sub-stages using one or more communication means. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022132 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A wireless communication system includes first and second wireless terminals capable of performing transmission by at least one of a first transmission scheme and a second transmission scheme. The first wireless terminal performs transmission of a first frame to the second wireless terminal by using the second transmission scheme. The second wireless terminal communicates with the first wireless terminal to notify the first wireless terminal of information associated with a status of the reception of the first frame transmitted from the first wireless terminal by using the first transmission scheme. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090028116 | DYNAMIC VLANS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods are described for managing a wireless network. Packets addressed to subscriber stations may be assigned a tag based on the base station at which the packet is received and the base station at which the subscriber station first entered the network. The tag can identify a media access address associated with subscriber equipment accessible through the subscriber station and an IP address associated with the subscriber equipment. The tag may be obtained from a table linking each of a plurality of virtual local area networks to one or more subscriber stations previously registered at a network base station. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028117 | PROVIDING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY AND SERVICE STATE INFORMATION TO APPLICATION SERVERS | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028118 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND SYSTEMS FACILITATING MANAGEMENT OF AIRSPACE IN WIRELESS COMPUTER NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating the management of wireless computer network environments and the detection of rogue and other devices that may affect the performance and/or security of the wireless computer network. The present invention enables accurate and cost effective WLAN airspace mapping. In one embodiment, the present invention allows any conforming access point the ability to routinely scan its airspace, collect data on all operating frequencies and report this information back to a management platform. In one embodiment, the management and reporting functionality described herein uses a standards-based vehicle, such as Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). In one embodiment, the present invention facilitates isolation of rogue wireless devices affecting the computer network environment and effective decision-making as to management of the detected device. The present invention also allows network administrators to optimize the configuration of the wireless network environment for performance and security. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028119 | Method of managing transmission within a wireless communications network - The method includes sending a request for permission to transmit by each ready node in the wireless network. Each ready node is a node of the wireless network ready to transmit, each request identifies a node in the network that is the destination, and each request is sent over a control channel. An iterative process based on priorities determined for the ready nodes is then performed to determine which ready nodes to block from transmission and which ready nodes to clear for transmission. Transmissions are sent over a payload channel from ready nodes in the clear to transmit state. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028120 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING NEIGHBORHOOD AP INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method of managing communications in a wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system providing a plurality of channels and comprising an information server for storing the neighborhood access point (AP) information. The method comprises scanning a plurality of channels to detect at least one channel used by a first AP, generating neighborhood AP information including channel information for identifying at least one of the detected channels, and transmitting the neighborhood AP information to an information server, wherein said scanning is performed by a second AP and wherein the first AP is a neighboring AP of the second AP. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028121 | WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL, A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, A MAC ADDRESS LEARNING METHOD AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A wireless LAN terminal includes a wired LAN interface, a wireless LAN interface and a bridge unit. The bridge unit detects that a terminal apparatus connected with the wired LAN interface moves to a position under different wireless LAN equipment and learns a MAC address of the terminal apparatus which moves. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028122 | WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL ALLOWING ANOTHER PROCESSING IN ITS WAITING OR IDLE STATE - Wireless LAN (Local Area Network) terminals are provided for executing a four-way handshaking procedure when they communicate with one another directly in a wireless ad hoc network mode. Each of the wireless LAN terminals may include a state processor which takes action in accordance with a communication state of its own wireless LAN terminal, and, upon sending a message during the four-way handshaking procedure, issues sending-completion information that indicates completion of the sending. The terminal may further include a state manager which, based on the sending-completion information, causes the communication state to be in a waiting state so that even during the four-way handshaking procedure, a message in processing procedure other than the message sent during the four-way handshaking procedure can be sent and received. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090034492 | Supporting Idle Stations in Wireless Distribution Systems - Supporting idle stations in an IEEE 802.11 wireless distribution system. When a station in an IEEE 802.11 wireless distribution system (DS) enters the idle state, it is not associated with any access points (APs) in the DS, Prior to entering the idle state, a station may establish filters indicating what traffic it wishes to receive. These filters are sent to a server in the DS. When a station goes idle, it is associated with a paing server in the DS, which buffers all received for the idle station, and initiates paging of the idle station when such traffic meeting filter criteria is received. When the station exits the idle state by reassociating with an AP in the DS, the server is notified, and forwards the buffered traffic to the station through its AP. The server may be implemented as a process running in a controller or portal in the DS. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034493 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATIONING BASED NAT ACCESS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for location-based network address translation (NAT). The system allows an administrator to logically partition an environment into a plurality of spatial regions. The method then includes specifying, for each of the spatial regions, whether network address translation (NAT) is allowed or not allowed for that spatial region, then performing a locationing procedure to determine in which spatial region the mobile unit is located. NAT is allowed for wireless data communication from the mobile unit if the mobile unit is within one of the spatial regions for which NAT is allowed, and is not allowed for wireless data communication from the mobile unit if the mobile unit is within one of the spatial regions for which NAT is not allowed. The systems and methods are applicable, for example, to networks operating in accordance with 802.11, RFID, WiMax, WAN, Bluetooth, Zigbee, UWB, and the like. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034494 | Method for Allocating a Temporary Address to a Mobile Node of a Telecommunication System, Equipment and Programs for Implementing Same - The invention concerns a method wherein the mobile node ( | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034495 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING A PERSISTENT APPLICATION SESSION WITH ANONYMITY BETWEEN A MOBILE HOST AND A NETWORK HOST - System and method for facilitating a persistent application session with anonymity between a mobile host and a network host in a wireless communication environment. The system and method include establishing a first communication session between the mobile host and the network host through a first radio access point; receiving a first mobile host identifier and a mobile host address from the mobile host during the first communication session, wherein the first mobile host identifier is different from the mobile host address; terminating the first communication session due to movement of the mobile host; establishing a second communication session between the mobile host and the network host using the first mobile host identifier, through a second radio access point; and receiving a second mobile host identifier from the mobile host during the second communication session, wherein the second mobile host identifier is different from the first mobile host identifier and the mobile host address. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034496 | PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR A MOBILE STATION - A packet data protocol (PDP) context management method is provided. The PDP context management method enables a mobile station to manage the PDP contexts of networks integrally by evaluating PDP context capacities of the networks in a proactive manner. A packet service method of the present invention includes creating a network information table after activating a packet data protocol (PDP) context to a network, determining, when a multiple PDP context activation is requested, whether the network has a multiple PDP context capacity with reference to the network information table, requesting, if the network has a multiple PDP context capacity, a multiple PDP context activation to the network and stopping, if the network has a multiple PDP context capacity, attempt of a multiple PDP context activation to the network. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034497 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - If a WiMAX base station cannot receive a ranging signal from a WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal or if adjustment is not completed even after the WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal adjusts a parameter depending on adjusted value information for a pre-determined number of times, negotiation is performed via a heterogeneous network to establish a communication connection for upstream communication from the WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal to the WiMAX base station, and only downstream communication from the WiMAX base station to the WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal is performed via a WiMAX network. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034498 | Simultaneously Maintaining Bluetooth and 802.11 Connections to Increase Data Throughput - A device for wirelessly communicating between one or more mobile communication devices over a wireless network. A primary mobile communication device is configured to establish one or more connections to one or more secondary mobile communication devices. The primary mobile communication device is further configured to establish a first connection and a second connection to at least one of the secondary mobile communication devices. The first connection is a Bluetooth (BT) connection and the second connection is a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) connection. The primary mobile device is also configured to establish a third connection to another secondary mobile communication device wherein the third connection is a WiFi connection. Additionally, the primary mobile communication device is configured to simultaneously maintain the BT connection and the WiFi connections during the bi-directional transmission of data between the primary mobile communication device and the secondary mobile communication devices. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034499 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTE OPTIMISATION IN NESTED MOBILE-NETWORKS - The invention provides a method and apparatus for building a linked binding cache. The method includes storing mobile router entries in a binding cache. The mobile router entries include a first mobile router entry having a prefix and an indication of the prefix's length along with an associated intermediate address. The method also includes linking a second mobile router entry to the first mobile router entry for delivering at least one data packet via the first mobile router. The method further includes adding a pointer in the binding cache from the entry of the second mobile router to the first mobile router entry when the intermediate address of the second mobile router matches the first mobile router's prefix in order to create a linked binding cache. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034500 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF UNACKNOWLEDGED NETWORK LAYER SERVICE ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER (NSAPI) RECOVERY IN SUB-NETWORK DEPENDENT CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL (SNDCP) COMMUNICATION - A system and method of unacknowledged Network Layer Service Access Point Identifier (NSAPI) recovery in Sub-Network Dependent Convergence Protocol (SNDCP) communication are disclosed herein. The disclosed techniques prevent the loss of data which may result from changing between GPRS/GSM modes in a Class B mobile station (MS). | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090040986 | METHOD OF RECOVERING COMMUNICATION ACCESS IN DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A wireless system and method including a medium access control (MAC) layer adapted to recover service in restricted channels. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040987 | APPARATUS FOR REDUCING SIGNALLING DATA BURSTS IN MOBILE NETWORK - A technology is disclosed for reducing the burst of DAD messages which may be triggered due to the change of the network prefix when using the technique of the neighbor discovery proxy. According to this technology, in roaming from the access network link | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040988 | AVOIDING PPP TIME OUTS DURING IPCP NEGOTIATIONS - Methods and apparatus are presented for extending the protocol synchronization period between a PPP client and a PPP server, wherein the PPP server is located on a wireless communication device. In one aspect, the PPP server generates and sends an IPCP Configure-Nak message to the PPP client whenever the PPP client sends an IPCP Configure-Request message, wherein an arbitrary non-zero value is deliberately sent as the primary DNS address, the secondary DNS address, the primary WINS address, or the secondary WINS address is sent in the IPCP Configure-Nak message. The IP address is deliberately omitted from the IPCP Configure-Nak message. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040989 | High performance wireless networks using distributed control - A design and proof of concept of a new type of WLAN, complete with simulation and results from the simulation has been described. Each AP Node is implemented as a self-contained embedded OS unit, with all algorithms resident in its Operating system. The normal day-to-day functioning of the AP node is based entirely on resident control algorithms. Upgrades are possible through a simple secure communications interface supported by the OS kernel for each AP node. Benefits provided by a wireless network, as proposed in this invention, are that: it installs out of the box; the network is self-configuring; the network is redundant in that mesh network formalism is supported, ensuring multiple paths; load balancing is supported; there is no single point of failure; allows for decentralized execution; there is a central control; it is network application aware; there is application awareness; there is automatic channel allocation to manage and curtail RF interference, maximize non interference bandwidth and enable seamless roaming between adjoining wireless sub networks (BSS) and it supports the wireless equivalent for switching—for seamless roaming requirements. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040990 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AVOIDING AVALANCHE EFFECT IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for avoiding access point transmission rate fall-back mechanism having an avalanche effect when acknowledgements are not received for packets sent during co-existence of WLAN and other wireless network technologies. A receiver comprises at least two dissimilar network technology subsystems. In some embodiments, a transmitter transmits a handshake to the receiver prior to transmission of at least one data packet and does not reduce a transmission rate of future transmissions to the receiver if the transmitter does not receive a reply to the handshake. In other embodiments, the receiver is able to send an indicator to a transmitter requesting a protection mechanism be employed prior to transmission by the transmitter of at least one data packet. In further embodiments, the receiver is able to negotiate with the transmitter for the transmitter to employ a protection mechanism prior to transmission of at least one data packet to the receiver. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040991 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - An object of the present invention is to realize a distributed autonomous transmission scheduling by using a terminal without the need to observe packets in relation to communication of other wireless terminals in a cell, such as VoIP, in which a plurality of wireless terminals that periodically transmit packets exist, thereby allowing intermittent reception during the packet observation and enabling to control power consumption of the wireless terminal as well as to reduce the load to thereby improve the communication quality. To attain the object, a VoIP terminal | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040992 | Method and mobile terminal for acquiring packet service - A method and mobile terminal for acquiring a packet service in a mobile communication system is provided. A mobile terminal of the present invention determines, when it powers on, whether to register with a network on the basis of previously stored packet service usage frequency and updates, when using the packet service after registering with the network, the packet service usage frequency. The mobile terminal of the present invention can reduce waste of resources required for the packet service by reducing communication with the network. A packet service acquisition method of the present invention helps reduces a number of mobile terminals registered with a network, whereby the network can reduce its processing load, resulting in improvement of network throughput. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040993 | Apparatus and method for supporting mixed quality of service setup type in a broadband wireless communication system - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. The system includes: an access service network (ASN), consisting of at least one base station (BS) and at least one access service network_gateway (ASN-GW), for supporting a first quality of service (QoS) setup type for a first Mobile Station (MS) and for supporting a second QoS setup type for a second MS; the first MS for obtaining information on the first QoS setup type, which is an available QoS setup type of the first MS, through the access service network after an authentication process is completed during an initial network entry process, and for performing communication by processing a service flow (SF) according to the first QoS setup type; and the second MS for obtaining information on the second QoS setup type, which is an available QoS setup type of the second MS, through the access service network after the authentication process is completed during the initial network entry process, and for performing communication by processing the SF according to the second QoS setup type. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040994 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY DEVICES IN AN IEEE 802.15.4 NETWORK - In a 802.15.4 network, each reduced functionality device (RFD) is permitted to communicate with only an assigned full function device (FFD). The present invention allows each of the RFDs to communicate with another RFD upon the RFD determining that the local FFD assigned to the RFD is inoperable or unable to communicate. Under emergency conditions, the RFD is able to communicate with a closely located RFDs such that the closely located RFDs can receive and respond to an emergency situation and/or repeat the message. To satisfy the 802.15.4 standards, communication between the RFDs is allowed only during emergency conditions and when the FFD is inoperative. A comprehensive test procedure is included to insure the integrity of the system is preserved at all times. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040995 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY ACROSS HETEROGENEOUS ADDRESS SPACES - A mobile node includes a processor, a network interface, and a storage device having computer program code for execution by the processor. The computer program code includes a network layer for transmitting and receiving packets and an intermediate driver that transmits packets to the network layer and receives packets from the network layer using a virtual internet protocol (IP) address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver transmits packets to the network interface and receives packets from the network interface using a routable actual IP address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver permits the actual IP address to change when the mobile node moves from a first subnet to a second subnet without a corresponding change in the virtual IP address. A corresponding NAT associates the virtual IP address with a second actual IP address when the NAT is notified that the mobile node is in the second subnet. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090046676 | AD HOC SERVICE PROVIDER CONFIGURATION FOR BROADCASTING SERVICE INFORMATION - An ad hoc service provider includes a processing system configured to enable access by one or more mobile clients to a first wireless network via a second wireless network. The processing system is further configured to assemble service information for broadcasting to one or more mobile clients. The service information includes attributes of access to the first wireless network, the access being offered by the ad hoc service provider to one or more mobile clients. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046677 | Portable cellular enhancer - An apparatus for sharing user-defined media content with a peer. The apparatus comprises a repository for storing media content inputted by a user of the apparatus and a wireless interface for establishing a wireless personal area network (WPAN) with a first communication entity of the peer in a proximity to said apparatus. The WPAN allows the peer to access the media content using the first communication entity, thereby allows the user to share said media content with the peer. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046678 | Method for predicting the mobility in mobile ad hoc networks - Disclosed are methods for determining the neighborhood local view of a mobile node in time which can facilitate the forwarding decision in the design of network protocols. In conventional mobile ad hoc networks nodes set up local topology view based on periodical received “Hello” messages. The conventional method is replaced with proactive and adaptive methods of predicting locations of nodes based on preserved historical information extracted from received “Hello” messages and constructing neighborhood view by aggregating predicted locations. This method is useful for providing updated and consistent topology local view that a network communication employs to determine optimal forward decisions and improve communication performance. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046679 | Access Router Device, Mobility Control System, and Mobility Control Method - In a network configuration in which a mobility control node is placed in the network, a packet is forwarded from a communication partner to the mobility control node by a basic IP mobility protocol for supporting movement in a local network managed by the mobility control node, a movement of a mobile terminal device across local networks formed by mobility control nodes is achieved without adding a function to the mobile terminal device. A mobility control node to be provided to the mobile terminal device is identified by a trigger reporting a movement has been performed to the network from the mobile terminal device, and, in the case of HO across between mobility control nodes, network information before the movement is reported instead of network information to be originally reported. Thus, the mobile terminal device determines that the movement is in the same network and can continue communication without performing an address generation procedure. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046680 | DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND METHOD THEREOF - A station transmit data to another station positioned outside its regulatory maximum transmit power via an access point according to a method defined in an infrastructure mode and directly transmit data to another positioned within a range of its regulatory maximum transmit power according to a method defined in a direct transmission mode. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046681 | Multichannel mac in wireless networks - A method of transmitting data over a plurality of channels, said channels forming a bonded channel comprising a bonded channel superframe, the bonded channel superframe comprising a bonded channel beacon period and a bonded channel data period;
| 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046682 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for transmitting information of a network interworking with a wireless LAN (802.11, Wi-Fi) network or EMID (ESS MAC ID) provided from an EMID server to a wireless user equipment if the wireless user equipment accesses the wireless LAN network is disclosed. A wireless communication system which performs communication using a plurality of subcarriers includes at least one access point receiving messages from at least one wireless user equipment and communicating with another access point through a distribution system, and at least one interworking information broker receiving information request message of subscriber service provider network (SSPN) through interface with the at least one access point and acquiring response information corresponding to the information request message through interface with a network entity which includes information of the SSPN, the information request message of the SSPN being transmitted from the wireless user equipment to the at least one access point. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046683 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for performing P2P communications in a communication system are provided, in which a first MS transmits a request signal requesting P2P communications with a second MS and a unique identification number of the second MS to a BS, receives from the BS a CID of the second MS allocated by the BS and transmission information required for initial synchronization of the P2P communications in response to the request signal, acquires synchronization with the second MS using the CID of the second MS and the transmission information, and establishes a P2P connection with the second MS. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046684 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - A communication apparatus determines a communication mode in a network in which the communication apparatus is to participate. If the communication apparatus determines that the communication mode is the infrastructure mode, it selects a client function. If the communication apparatus determines that the communication mode is the ad hoc mode, it selects a server function. The communication apparatus operates as an apparatus having the selected client function or server function. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046685 | Method and System for a Wireless Transmission over GPRS Communications Network - The present invention provides a system and method of wireless transmission in GPRS communications network, comprising a virtual COM utility program for creating virtual COM ports. A GPRS virtual COM gateway server is coupled to the virtual COM ports via LAN or Internet. A plurality of remote electronic device is coupled to its corresponding GPRS data terminals. Remote electronic devices can connect to GPRS virtual COM gateway server by GPRS data terminals through GPRS network and Internet for wireless transmitting data to the local device. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046686 | WIRELESS CONNECTING SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING NETWORK APPARATUS TO WIRELESS NETWORK AND NETWORK APPARATUS USED IN WIRELESS CONNECTING SYSTEM - A wireless connecting system includes a first network apparatus connected to a wireless network and a second network apparatus to be connected to the wireless network. The first network apparatus stores a network wireless setting and an ad-hoc wireless setting. The second network apparatus stores the same ad-hoc wireless setting as that stored in the first network apparatus. The first network apparatus sends the network wireless setting using the ad-hoc wireless setting. The second network apparatus receives the network wireless setting using the ad-hoc wireless setting, determines whether or not the received network wireless setting is adaptive in the second network apparatus, and sends the determination result using the ad-hoc wireless setting. The first network apparatus receives the determination result using the ad-hoc wireless setting, and outputs the received determination result. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046687 | MOBILE WIMAX NETWORK SYSTEM HAVING PRIVATE NETWORK AND MOBILE IP TERMINAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMax) network system having a private network and a mobile Internet Protocol (IP) terminal processing method thereof are provided. A private access control router performs an initial access procedure for a WiMax terminal requesting initial access. When a mobile IP address is set in the WiMax terminal, a mobile IP registration procedure for the WiMax terminal is performed according to a mobile IP standard. When the WiMax terminal is a local subscriber WiMax terminal, a virtual IP address for accessing the private network mapped to the mobile IP address is registered in an IP mapping table. A single private access control router can process a local intranet service and a public Core Network (CN) service without an additional access control router and a local subscriber WiMax terminal can receive simultaneously the local intranet service and the public CN service without any special operation. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046688 | Method and System for Providing Broadband Multimedia Services - A wireless router access point for use with a mesh network employing a mesh protocol and a point-to-multipoint network employing a point-to-multipoint protocol, and a multimedia system employing the same. In one embodiment, the wireless router access point includes a mesh access point subsystem configured to translate between a point-to-multipoint protocol and a mesh protocol to communicate with the mesh network. The wireless router access point also includes a point-to-multipoint access point subsystem configured to translate between a mesh protocol and a point-to-multipoint protocol to communicate with a user of the point-to-multipoint network. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046689 | Mobile communication system using a downlink shared channel - A mobile communication system includes a radio network control apparatus having inside a function block for processing a downlink shared channel and table means for storing various setting information related to the downlink shared channel communication and the downlink shared channel multi-cast communication. According to the information, a multi-cast communication (including uni-cast communication) is realized by using the downlink shared channel for one or more mobile apparatuses. Moreover, a base station has a function to transmit the downlink shared channel data and signaling data received from a radio network control apparatus, to a mobile apparatus via a radio line. Furthermore, it is possible to multi-cast data selectively to a particular mobile apparatus being call-connected. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090052409 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A telecommunications system for communicating internet packet data in accordance with a first internet protocol (IPV6) via a packet radio network operable in accordance a second internet protocol (IPV4). The system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPV4) to and from a gateway support node of the packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet radio network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form an address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (IPv6). The address includes an interface identifier having a tunnel end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at the gateway support node of the packet radio network. The internet packet data is communicated to and from a correspondent node via the gateway support node and the established bearer using internet protocol address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (Ipv6). | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052410 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, EDGE ROUTER, AND TRANSFER CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM USED THEREFOR - The present invention aims to provide continuous communication, between mobile terminal, based on edge mobility technology, during hand over a mobile terminal, even if addresses of edge routers before/after movement of the mobile terminal may not be acquired from the mobile terminal. It is configured so that when the mobile terminal moves, it becomes connected to the edge router and a CN information request command is transmitted to a home agent. The home agent manages a care-of address corresponding to a home address of the mobile terminal and transmits the CN information request command to this care-of address, which corresponds to the edge router before the mobile terminal moves, and the edge router manages a care-of address of a communication partner of the mobile terminal. Therefore, the care-of address of the communication partner of the mobile terminal can be acquired. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052411 | ADAPTIVE INTERFERENCE CONTROL - Systems and methods which control communications in a carrier sense multiple access environment to provide a balance between communication sensitivity and transmission availability are shown. Adaptive interference control techniques of embodiments operate to determine a media error time metric representing the time associated with receiving interfering signals. The media error time metric of embodiments is used to adjust operation of various network systems in order to adjust communication sensitivity and/or transmission availability. Desensitizing thresholds and sensitizing thresholds may be used to define operating boundaries, such that desensitizing thresholds are used to control network desensitize actions which result in decreased error times and sensitizing thresholds are used to control network sensitizing actions which result in increased error times. Error time metrics and corresponding desensitizing and sensitizing thresholds may be utilized with respect to a plurality of radios. Embodiments provide for adjustment of control parameters based upon historical operation. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052412 | Minimizing Packet Loss During Fast Roaming - A packet loss reduction system. In particular implementations, a method includes responsive to indications of roaming intent of a wireless client relative to currently associated wireless access point, determining if a traffic stream associated with the wireless client is to be proactively buffered by one or more potential wireless access points; conditionally transmitting a command to the one or more potential wireless access points to cause the potential, wireless access points to set up resources to proactively buffer packets of the traffic stream; duplicating received packets of the traffic stream destined for the wireless client; and transmitting the duplicate packets to the potential wireless access points for storage in a proactive stream buffer. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052413 | INVOKING MULTIPLE SIP BASED SERVICES DURING A SINGLE COMMUNICATION SESSION USING RESOURCE LISTS - The present invention discloses use of resource lists to invoke multiple services in an IMS environment. More specifically, SIP clients can exchange XML content with each other and/or with SIP servers that includes an XCAP resource list. A list entry can exist for each service that is to be included within a communication session. Each service specifying entry can include sub-attributes for the service, which comprise attribute-value pairs able to be read using standard conventions. Use of the resource lists alleviates a need to define a schema and write custom code each time a new service is developed. In one embodiment, additional nested XCAP resource lists can be used to define content that is to be shared among multiple services. For example, a resource list can be used to define a participant list, which is shared as common input data across the multiple services. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052414 | Communication management apparatus, communication control apparatus, and wireless communication system - A 3G authentication apparatus ( | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052415 | Radio Communication System and Radio Communication Method - A terminal ( | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052416 | MOBILE ROUTER, HOME AGENT, AND TERMINAL POSITION MANAGEMENT METHOD - In a mobile network system composed of plural mobile networks and a home agent, the home agent inquires mobile routers in a mobile network whether or not a terminal is connected, if detecting the absence of the terminal, when data addressed to the terminal arrives at a home network of the terminal in the mobile network. Responding to this inquiry, the mobile routers search whether or not the terminal is connected to the own mobile networks. If the terminal is connected, the mobile routers inform the home agent of the presence of the terminal. When receiving this notice, the home agent transfers data addressed to this terminal to a mobile router as a notice source. This process, even if a terminal moves to a mobile network having a same network prefix as that of the home network, allows transferring a packet accurately to the terminal. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052417 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication device includes: a detection part detecting presence/absence of a reception of a packet; a judgment part judging whether or not temporal change of presence/absence of the reception of the packet detected in the detection part corresponds to a predetermined identifier; and a power source control unit controlling a power source based on a result of a judgment in the judgment part. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052418 | IAS-based configuration for UMB femto devices - A method and apparatus for configuring Femto Devices in an Ultra Mobile Broadband network system. A Femto Device transmits a Femto pilot signal to an Access Terminal, which is served by a plurality of base stations in the Ultra Mobile Broadband network system. The Access Terminal then transmits to the Femto Device an identifier of a base station that controls a macrocell where the Femto Device is located. Next, a Neighbor Discovery Request message is transmitted from the Femto Device to the base station in dependence upon the received identifier of the base station. In response to the Neighbor Discovery Request message received, a Neighbor Discovery Report message is transmitted from the base station to the Femto device. The Neighbor Discovery Report message includes a field indicating network addresses of a Session Reference Network Controller and an Access Gateway that connect to the base station. Finally, the Femto Device connects to the Session Reference Network Controller and the Access Gateway via the Femto device in dependence upon the network addresses of the Session Reference Network Controller and the Access Gateway. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052419 | Redirecting Data Flow Of A Secondary PDP To A Primary PDP Before Establishing The Secondary PDP Context - A solution in a telecommunications infrastructure network for creating a secondary PDP context for a time critical application, ensuring that no packets are lost by masquerading a primary PDP context as the secondary PDP context. This may be achieved by for instance sending a fake TEID or including a filter in a PDP creation request for the secondary PDP context and updating the GGSN with a correct TEID or a new Traffic Flow Template (TFT) when the secondary PDP context is established. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052420 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA AND BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, WIRELESS DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING SUCH METHOD - The method provides buffer status reporting for the transmission of uplink data from a wireless device ( | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052421 | DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN DEVICES OF DIFFERENT TYPES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A method and system for distinguishing between devices of different types (e.g., mobile and stationary devices) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) in order to provide additional services to one or the other. The method includes obtaining a device type for the terminal, and providing specific services to the terminal if the terminal is a device of a certain type. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052422 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING LOCATION INFORMATION - Disclosed is a method for providing location information of a terminal by using an Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). To this end, a location request and a location estimate are transferred between terminals by using messages used in the SIP. In particular, it is possible to receive location information of a counterpart during communication, or transfer the location information of its own to a counterpart, in consideration of the fact that real-time voice service mainly uses the SIR Moreover, it is possible to request and transmit location information on using multimedia services. Therefore, a terminal or a server using the SIP easily uses location information, so that it is possible to provide new services inter-working with location services. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052423 | Systems and Methods for Improved Mobility and Quality of Service in a Wireless Network - For a mobile node visiting a packet-switched wireless access network, said access network using a tunnelling-type micro-mobility protocol and a Quality of Service (QoS) routing protocol to route packet data to and from said mobile node, and comprising an access router to which said mobile node may attach, a mobility agent and a gateway, a method of configuring said access network to route packet data toward said mobile node which method comprises the steps of: (a) receiving in said access network a handover indication of said mobile node or a login request therefrom; (b) in response to said handover indication or login request computing a QoS route for said mobile node, which QoS route is useable to route packets between said mobility agent and said mobile node; (c) performing step (b) at a location in said access network remote from said mobility agent; and (d) transmitting said QoS route and said handover indication or login request from said remote location toward said mobility agent; whereby upon receipt of data transmitted in step (d) said mobility agent may handle both mobility configuration and QoS route configuration for said mobile node as part of said network layer handover. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052424 | SHARING OF WIRELESS TELEPHONE SERVICES FOR A PERSONAL WIRELESS TELEPHONE AND A VEHICULAR WIRELESS TELEPHONE - Sharing of wireless telephone services between a subscriber's personal wireless telephone and the subscriber's vehicular wireless telephone. The shared service may be a connectivity service, allowing the subscriber's personal wireless telephone to communicate directly with the subscriber's vehicular wireless telephone. Alternately, or additionally, the shared service may be one or more services provided for by the wireless service agreement plan of the subscriber's vehicular wireless telephone or the subscriber's personal wireless telephone. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052425 | PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE AND MOBILE NODE - Disclosed is technique for avoiding packet reflection between home agents. According to the technique, a MN | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED DATA RATE ADAPTATION AND LOWER POWER CONTROL IN A WLAN SEMICONDUCTOR CHIP - A method of optimising the operation of a WLAN device which is used in the transmission and reception of a service over a medium, the WLAN device comprising a WLAN chip set and power amplifier, the method comprising the steps of: determining a the value of a collision avoidance metric of the chip set at a specific time; predicting the available bandwidth of the WLAN from the value of the metric; determining the current data rate of the WLAN based on predicted available bandwidth and the type of service; and selecting a power amplifier bias voltage that is the minimum permitted for the determined current data rate to reduce the power consumption of the WLAN device. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090059872 | WIRELESS DYNAMIC RATE ADAPTATION ALGORITHM - A wireless switch is provided. A processor is adapted to set a radio frequency (RF) transmission speed for a wireless client based on a location of the wireless client and a signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) of a radio frequency signal received by the wireless client. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059873 | Characterizing uncoordinated interference of a wireless network - An apparatus and method of a wireless access node within a network characterizing uncoordinated interference is disclosed. One method includes the wireless node collecting air-time usage history as perceived by the wireless access node. The wireless access node receives air-time usage history as perceived by at least one neighboring wireless node. The wireless access node comparatively analyzes the collected air-time usage and the received air-time usage. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059874 | WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEMS - The invention provides method of, apparatus capable of, and computer software for, providing a user with access to a communications system including a plurality of wireless access points, said method comprising providing set of functions for use on a user terminal, said functions including functions for: storing a plurality of sets of user identification data, said user identification data relating to one or more wireless access points via which the user has authorisation to access the communications system; providing a directory of wireless access points in said communications system, said directory including wireless access point identification data; using said directory to identify a wireless access point; and using one of said plurality of sets of user identification data to access the communications system via an identified wireless access point. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059875 | NODE FAULT IDENTIFICATION IN WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINTS - A wireless access point array having a plurality of access point radios, a monitor radio and an array controller. The array controller includes processes, methods and functions for verifying the operation of the access point radios. The access point radios may be verified by attempting to establish a data connection between the monitor radio and each of the access point radios. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059876 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPDATING MAC TABLE OF LAYER-2 SWITCH IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. An apparatus for a Base Station (BS) comprises a controller for determining whether to accept an entry of a mobile terminal (MT) by handover from an adjacent BS, a handler for generating a message to get an L2 switch to update a Media Access Control (MAC) table, and a communicator for transmitting the message to the L2 switch. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059877 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: a determination unit that determines a selected first and second numbers based on relationship information; a calculation unit that calculates the number of frames transmittable through the first channel within a time period as a first frame number based on the selected first number, and the number of frames transmittable through the second channel within the time period as a second frame number based on the selected second number; a selection unit that selects smaller one of the first and second frame numbers; an aggregation unit that aggregates frames for the selected frame number to generate a single aggregation frame; and a transmission unit that transmits the aggregation frame through one of the first channels or the second channel for which a transmission permission is acquired based on a channel status of the first and the second channels. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059878 | WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A wireless LAN (Local Area Network) access point includes: a housing; and a plurality of sub-access points provided in the housing. The plurality of sub-access points being operable independently of one another. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059879 | Wireless communication system for communicating via wireless LAN - Provided is a wireless communication system, comprising: a base station providing communication by a plurality of communication methods; and a mobile node for communicating with the base station by the plurality of communication methods. The mobile node calculates a first distance between a wireless LAN access point and the mobile node; and judges whether the communication by the wireless LAN is possible by comparing the calculated first distance and a second distance that is a distance within which communication by a wireless LAN is available. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059880 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In performing SVD-MIMO transmission, a set-up procedure is simplified while assuring a satisfactory decoding capability with a reduced number of antennas. A transmitter estimates channel information based on reference signals sent from a receiver, determines a transmit antenna weighting coefficient matrix based on the channel information, calculates a weight to be assigned to each of components of a multiplexed signal, and sends, to the receiver, training signals for respective signal components, the training signals being weighted by the calculated weights. On the other hand, the receiver determines a receive antenna weighting coefficient matrix based on the received training signals. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059881 | WIRELESS NETWORK SELF-ADAPTIVE LOAD BALANCER - A load balancer is provided for balancing distribution of wireless clients among wireless access points. The load balancer includes a tracking implementation for tracking at least one telemetry parameter of each wireless client's wireless link with each respective wireless access point. A goal implementation is included for comparing one or more telemetry parameter against at least one predetermined goal to obtain a fitness measure. A control implementation is also provided for varying the operation of at least one of the respective wireless access points and wireless clients in response to the fitness measure, so as to balance the distribution of load among the respective wireless access points. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090067392 | FLOOR DETERMINATION FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus configured to acquire received signal strength intensities (RSSIs) for a wireless device from a plurality of access points (APs) located on a plurality floors. The apparatus is configured to determine which floor the wireless device is on by analyzing the RSSIs. In an example embodiment, the RSSIs are adjusted, and the adjusted RSSIs for each floor are summed. The floor with highest sum of adjusted RSSIs is determined to be the floor the wireless device is on. In an example embodiment, the floor that the wireless device is on is determined by calculating the probability that the wireless device is within the cell of each AP on the network, and combining the probabilities for each floor. Known RSSIs between APs can be employed for comparing measured RSSIs with the known RSSIs to determine the probability that the wireless device is within the cell of each AP. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067393 | Concentric rings wireless network architecture - A wireless network includes access points arranged in concentric rings and grids of concentric rings. At low network loads, only access points in the center are on to reduce power consumption. As network loads increase, access points in concentric rings are turned on. As network loads decrease, access points in concentric rings are turned off. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067394 | Mobile Network user Terminal Status Monitoring | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067395 | Routing Network Requests Based on a Mobile Network Signature - Disclosed are systems and methods for responding to a web page request from a mobile device by providing the network address of a server hosting content formatted for the mobile device. The systems and methods include means and ways for redirecting a request for URL resolution from a DNS server to an enhanced DNS server with facilities to determine the kind of the requesting device, e.g., whether the requesting device is fixed or mobile. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067396 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH (BT) DELAYED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT (ACK) - A method and system for Bluetooth (BT) delayed acknowledgment is presented. Aspects of the system may include an initiator device, such as a WLAN access point (AP), which enables transmission of a protocol data unit, such as a BlockAckReq frame, to a responder device, such as a Smartphone, via a first network, for example a WLAN. The Smartphone may be equipped with capabilities that enable communication via WLAN and Bluetooth networks. The AP may wait to receive a response protocol data unit, such as a BlockAck frame, via the first network (WLAN) for a response time duration. The response time duration may be based on the communication slot time duration for communication by the Smartphone on a second network, for example a BT piconet. The communication slot time duration may correspond to the time duration for a BT slot. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067397 | PROCEDURE FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - There is provided a procedure for wireless network management and a station supporting the procedure. In the procedure, non-AP station which wants to us a traffic filter service (TFS) transmits a TFS request message including one or more TFS request elements for defining information about the requesting traffic filters to an access point (AP). And, the non-AP station receives, from the AP in response to the first TFS request message, a TFS response message including one or more TFS response elements for defining information about the status of the requesting traffic filters. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067398 | Implementing Location Awareness In WLAN Devices - A set of global location signals, an SBAS (Satellite Based Augmentation System), or an ACI (ambient country identifier) signal can be used to automatically provide location awareness for a WLAN device. If one of the set of global location signals, the SBAS signal, or the ACI signal is detected, then the WLAN device can configure itself to comply with channel and power settings for the country/region having the detected signal(s). After configuration, the WLAN device can be “locked” to the country/region having the signal(s), thereby ensuring legal operation of the WLAN device even after subsequent restarts. If one of the signals is not detected, then the WLAN device can be configured in a default mode, e.g. an “open mode” in which end users can configure the WLAN device by entering a country of operation or a “common mode” in which the channel and transmit power settings meet global spectrum usage requirements. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067399 | Method and System for Imposing Air Interface Service Level - A method and system for providing services in communications networks. A gateway layer determines information about a communication session and responsively sends a signaling message to a session manager, providing the information. The session manager may then send a signaling message to a service agent, also providing the information. The service agent may in turn apply a set of service logic based at least in part on the information, so as to derive a service treatment, and the service agent may send a signaling message so as to cause an enforcement engine (such as the gateway or session manager) to carry out the service treatment. Advantageously, this arrangement may facilitate imposition of services across various types of communication sessions (such as voice sessions and/or data sessions) and access networks (such as circuit-switched and/or packet-switched), at session initiation and during the course of an ongoing session. A variety of useful services may thereby be provided. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067400 | METHOD OF SUPERVISING AT LEAST ONE TUNNEL SET UP FOR ROUTING PACKETS BETWEEN A MOBILE ROUTER AND A REFERRING EQUIPMENT ITEM IN A HOME NETWORK OF THE MOBILE ROUTER - A method supervises at least one tunnel set up for routing packets between a mobile router and a referring piece of equipment in a home network of the mobile router. The method detects a change in an availability state of the tunnel and sends notification of the change in the availability state of the tunnel to at least one node connected to the mobile router, and uses the tunnel set up for routing packets between itself and a network. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090073941 | MESH NETWORK CONNECTING 3G WIRELESS ROUTERS - A communication routing arrangement includes two or more wireless routers coupled to a communication network, and a user device adapted to couple with the communication network through a communication path including at least one of the two or more wireless routers. The communication path between the user device and the communication network is selected based on available resources of the two or more wireless routers. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073942 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK OF DEVICES HAVING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS - A system and method for wireless communication are disclosed. One aspect of the system includes a plurality of wireless devices forming a wireless network. The plurality of wireless devices are configured to wirelessly communicate with one another. Each of the wireless devices includes a device table including a list of one or more of the wireless devices and the directions of the one or more of the wireless devices with respect to the wireless device including the device table. In the wireless system, any one of the plurality of wireless devices is configured to perform device discovery directly with a new wireless device entering the wireless network. The one wireless device is further configured to update the device table therein and to transmit the updated device table to other wireless devices in the wireless network. Other devices in the wireless system can update their device tables, based at least partly on the updated device table without performing device discovery directly with the new wireless device. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073943 | HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORK - A heterogeneous wireless ad-hoc network includes a server and a number of ad-hoc service providers that provide connectivity to a network for mobile clients. The mobile client is configured to search for ad-hoc service providers with wireless backhauls to the network and associate with one of the ad-hoc service providers detected in the search based on one or more parameters. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073944 | Restricted Cyclic Shift Configuration for Random Access Preambles in Wireless Networks - Transmission of random access preamble structures within a cellular wireless network is based on the use of cyclic shifted constant amplitude zero autocorrelation (“CAZAC”) sequences to generate the random access preamble signal. A pre-defined set of sequences is arranged in a specific order. Within the predefined set of sequences is an ordered group of sequences that is a proper subset of the pre-defined set of sequences. Within a given cell, up to 64 sequences may need to be signaled. In order to minimize the associated overhead due to signaling multiple sequences, only one logical index is transmitted by a base station serving the cell and a user equipment within the cell derives the subsequent indexes according to the pre-defined ordering. Each sequence has a unique logical index. The ordering of sequences is identified by the logical indexes of the sequences, with each logical index uniquely mapped to a generating index. When a UE needs to transmit, it produces a second sequence using the received indication of the logical index of the first sequence and an auxiliary value and then produces a transmission signal by modulating the second sequence. The auxiliary value is selected from one of two sets based on a set indicator broadcast by the eNB | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073945 | DIRECT LINK SETUP PROCEDURE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - Provided are a Tunneled Direct Link Setup (TDLS) establishment procedure for a TDLS initiator and a station supporting the establishment procedure. In the establishment procedure, a requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup request frame via an access point(AP) to an intended peer Non-AP QSTA. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA receives a TDLS setup response frame via the AP from the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup request frame. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup confirm frame via the AP to the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup response frame. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073946 | Wireless Transmission System - A wireless transmission device makes it possible to access the internet from a wireless LAN terminal, and notifies the state of wireless connection to a public wireless transmission network to the wireless LAN terminal, thereby alleviating uncertainty and disquiet on the part of the user when connecting to this network. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073947 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A network controller for facilitating roaming of a mobile wireless communications device between access points communicates with at least one access point over a wired network which, in turn, communicate with a mobile wireless communications device over a wireless network. The network controller includes a data processing system including a protocol stack that facilitates a communication session between the mobile device and a network device on the wired network, and a session table identifying session information for each said communication session. The session information identifies the current access point with which the mobile device is currently associated. The protocol stack updates the session table from session information received from the current access point, maintains a first virtual circuit with the network device, maintains a second virtual circuit with the current access point, and bridges communication between the virtual circuits in accordance with the session information. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073948 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING PACKETS ORIGINATING FROM LOCAL AND NEIGHBORING BASIC SERVICE SETS - A method and apparatus for efficiently processing packets from neighboring basic service sets (BSSs) to characterize the traffic within a wireless local area network (WLAN), mesh network, or similar wireless communication system is disclosed. The apparatus may be an access point (AP) in a BSS which includes a measurement period (MP) interval timer, a promiscuous measurement period (PMP) timer and a receiver filter. An interval of the MP interval timer is set while the receiver filter is enabled. During the interval, the AP only processes packets which originated from the AP's own BSS. When the MP interval timer expires, a value of the PMP timer is set to a predetermined time duration and the receiver filter is disabled. During the predetermined time duration, the AP processes all received packets irrespective of which BSS the packets originated from. The receiver filter is again enabled when the PMP timer expires. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090080387 | Method and system for controlling operation of a communication network, related network and computer program product therefor - In a network wherein nodes request services adapted to be provided via a plurality of home agents, a system includes nodes configured for having associated a service identifier identifying a service requested by the at least one node, the system being configured for selecting the home agents to provide the services requested, wherein the home agents are selected based on the service identifiers. A node may thus have a first service identifier and a second service identifier identifying two different services adapted to be provided, even simultaneously, by a first and a second home agent respectively. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080388 | Wireless Local Area Network and access point for a Wireless Local Area Network - Embodiments related to Wireless Local Area Networks and access points for a Wireless Local Area Network are described and depicted. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080389 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND A DATA FRAME FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A means for determining a channel for communication in a wireless communication system is provided. A method includes receiving one or more sub-frames of a beacon signal on a beaconing channel until a legitimacy condition of the beacon signal is met. The beacon signal is transmitted by a beaconing device. The method further includes determining a suitability of the channel for communication in the wireless communication system based on the legitimacy condition. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080390 | Method of Discovering Devices Located in Different Wireless Networks - The invention discloses a method of discovering devices located in different wireless networks, a wireless network being built up for a device, wherein network is identified with a wireless network identification (Service Set Identification (SSID)) having an array for identifying device types, a correspondence between the array for identifying the device types and the device types being arranged at a user terminal, the method comprising steps of: A. searching for a currently available wireless network by the user terminal in a wireless network environment in order to obtain an SSID corresponding to the currently available wireless network; B. determining a device type corresponding to an array owned by the obtained SSID according to the arranged correspondence, and displaying a device icon for the device type corresponding to the SSID, by the user terminal. The method enables the user terminal to discover a device located in a wireless network different from the user terminal rapidly and conveniently. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080391 | Network interworking system and method for negotiating qos in network interworking system - A 3GPP-WLAN interworking system to which WLAN user equipment is accessed includes a WLAN access network including a WLAN access point, a 3GPP packet-switched service network including terminal equipment, a 3GPP core network connecting the WLAN access network and the 3GPP packet-switched service network, and a packet data gateway relaying the 3GPP core network and the 3GPP packet-switched service network. The WLAN user equipment negotiates a QoS according to a wireless environment with the WLAN access point to generate a WLAN bearer, negotiates a QoS according to a type of user data with the packet data gateway to generate a WLAN 3GPP IP access bearer, and negotiates a QoS according to data process performance of the terminal equipment with the terminal equipment to generate an end-to-end bearer. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080392 | Communication terminal device and communication transmission method - A communication terminal device is provided. The communication device includes a control unit, a WLAN module, a WMAN module and a VoIP module. The control unit provides a drive module for driving the WLAN module, the WMAN module and the VoIP module, and provides a real-time kernel module for achieving quality performance of the communication terminal device. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080393 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system which includes first to third terminals which belong to a first network, and the first and the third terminals belong to a second network. The first terminal transmits a first packet generated by the first terminal to a second terminal through the first network. When the second terminal receives the first packet, the second terminal monitors a route between the first and the second terminals. When the monitored results satisfy prescribed conditions, the second terminal transmits a second packet to the third terminal. When the third terminal receives the second packet, the third terminal transmits a third packet, which indicates that the third terminal can be connected to the second network, to the second terminal. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080394 | WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM - The invention realizes a wireless control system capable of reducing loads on a wireless network and gateway nodes and improving reliability of the system. The wireless control system for collecting data from a plurality of wireless nodes constituting a wireless network to a supervisory node via gateway nodes, wherein said each gateway node and said each wireless node have group IDs assigned thereto in advance and said each wireless node selects a route having the most excellent communication quality of routes leading to the gateway nodes having the same group ID as a self-node and transmits data to the selected route. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080395 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a mobile communication system including a plurality of communication terminals each equipped with a wireless communication device for performing wireless communication between the local station and the secondary station and a base station apparatus wirelessly connected to the plurality of communication terminals, the communication terminal comprises identification information regarding the local station and the secondary station, with which wireless communication can be performed, to the base station apparatus, while the base station apparatus comprises a receiving device for receiving the identification information, a interlinking device for interlinking communication packets for the plurality of communication terminals in accordance with a communication method adapted to the communication terminal and the received identification information, a selecting device for selecting the communication terminal corresponding to a transmission destination of the interlinked communication packets based on information representing communication conditions of the plurality of communication terminals, and a transmitting device for transmitting the interlinked packets to the selected communication terminal, wherein the communication terminal is constituted such that the interlinked packets are received, then, at least packets for the secondary station within the received interlinked packets are transferred to the secondary station by the wireless communication device. Thus, it is possible to apparently improve the throughput by effectively using time slots. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080396 | SELECTIVE REVIEW OF BUNDLED MESSAGES FROM A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system, method, and computer device that allow a wireless communication device to selectively bundle messages in an access channel communication packet being sent to another computer device on the wireless communication network, such as a base station are disclosed. The bundled messages are typically sent in response to a request sent to the wireless communication device for response to a specific event, such as the setup of a group communication call. The receiving computer device determines if the access channel communication packet contains data indicating one or more bundled messages are therewithin such that resources only then will expended to review the bundled messages to check for the availability of the requested resources. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080397 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING RESOURCE REGION TO REDUCE MAP OVERHEAD - A method of allocating a radio resource in a wireless access system is disclosed. The method includes receiving a control message associated with radio resource allocation for transmitting uplink data to the base station, wherein the control message comprises a first persistent uplink allocation information element comprising first resource allocation information associated with a first resource allocation region for transmitting the uplink data of a mobile station and transmitting an acknowledgment (ACK) message from the mobile station to the base station in response to successfully receiving the first persistent uplink allocation information element. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080398 | Hierarchical Communication System Providing Intelligent Data, Program and Processing Migration - A hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. Copies of data, program code and processing resources are migrated from their source toward requesting destinations based on request frequency, communication link costs and available local storage and/or processing resources. Each appropriately configured network device acts as an active participant in network migration. In addition, portable two-dimensional (2-D) code reading terminals are configured to wirelessly communicate compressed 2-D images toward stationary access servers that identify the code image through decoding and through comparison with a database of images that have previously been decoded and stored. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080399 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING PROXY MOBILE IP REGISTRATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for enabling mobility of a node that does not support Mobile IP are disclosed. When an AP receives a data packet, the AP may compare the data packet (e.g., source address) with the AP information for one or more APs to determine whether to send a registration request on behalf of the node. More particularly, the AP determines from the source address whether the node is located on a subnet identical to a subnet of the AP. If the node is located on the subnet of the AP, no Mobile IP service is required on behalf of the node. However, when it is determined from the source address that the node is not located on the subnet identical to the subnet of the Access Point, the AP composes and sends a mobile IP registration request on behalf of the node. For instance, the mobile IP registration request may be composed using the gateway associated with the “home” AP (e.g., having a matching subnet) as the node's Home Agent. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080400 | RADIO GATEWAY SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERFACING A RADIO SYSTEM AND AN IP NETWORK - A radio gateway system and method for interfacing one or more radio systems and a packet network. The system comprises a plurality of gateways, each gateway including a radio interface port, a protocol converter and packet interface. The gateways convert audio and signaling from the radio system into packet signals in a generic protocol. The gateways also convert packet signals in the generic protocol into audio and signaling in a protocol understandable by a respective radio system. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090086687 | CONFIGURABLE AND FLEXIBLE WIRELESS LINK ADAPTATION METHOD AND DEVICE - A method and apparatus for implementing user defined Link Adaptation solutions in a wireless system. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086688 | REMOTE ACCESS TO A CUSTOMER HOME NETWORK - A wireless application server may receive, from a wireless device, information identifying an application residing on a network device in a home network. The wireless application server may further cause a connection to be established to the application and transfer traffic between the application and the wireless device. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086689 | CAPWAP/LWAPP MULTICAST FLOOD CONTROL FOR ROAMING CLIENTS - A method, an apparatus, a system, and logic encoded in one or more computer-readable tangible medium to carry out a method. The method includes maintaining the state of clients of an access point controlled by a controller in the controller of the access point, including multicast group information, and updating the access point with multicast group identification for the clients, such that the controller in combination with the access point can forward packets, and such that multicast group information for a roaming client of the access point is maintained. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086690 | Method for Selecting Antennas and Beams in MIMO Wireless LANs - A computer implemented method selects antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output wireless local area network that includes multiple stations, and each station includes a set of antennas. Multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets are received in a station. Each sounding packet corresponds to a different subset of the set of antennas. A channel matrix is estimated from the multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets. A frame including a high throughput (HT) control field is sent to initiate a selecting of antennas, and a subset of antennas is selected according to the channel matrix. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086691 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO FACILITATE HANDLING OF ACCESS TERMINALS CAMPED ONTO AN ACCESS POINT BASE STATION - Devices and methods are provided for handling a visitor access terminal (AT) associated with a macro network, in response to the visitor AT entering a coverage area of an access point (AP) base station. In one approach, the method involves allowing registration of the visitor AT with the AP base station, and forwarding information regarding the registration to the macro network. Upon activation of the visitor AT, communication between the visitor AT and the macro network may be facilitated by, for example, forwarding a paging request to the visitor AT through the AP base station. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086692 | APPARATUS AND METHOD SUPPORTING WIRELESS ACCESS TO MULTIPLE SECURITY LAYERS IN AN INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND AUTOMATION SYSTEM OR OTHER SYSTEM - A method includes receiving a message at a first wireless node. The first wireless node is associated with a first wired network, and the first wired network is associated with a first security layer. The method also includes transmitting the message over the first wired network when at least one destination of the message is located in the first security layer. The method further includes wirelessly transmitting the message for delivery to a second wireless node when at least one destination of the message is located in a second security layer. The second wireless node is associated with a second wired network, and the second wired network is associated with the second security layer. The first and second security layers may be associated with different security paradigms and/or different security domains. Also, the message could be associated with destinations in the first and second security layers. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086693 | System and method for RF space protection and control - A system and method of controlling the operation of the wireless communications between a mobile device and access point by monitoring and modifying the communications. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086694 | Multimedia communication gateway for hospitality and convention facilities - The present invention may be used for interfacing disparate forms of communication media and networks in hospitality and convention facilities. A gateway unit that may be used in a guest room may have a front panel, a connector panel and at least one antenna. A computing device, multiple memory elements and communication interface elements may be interconnected in the gateway unit for communication sensors, controls, ports and antennas of the gateway unit. The gateway unit may include hub and router functional elements and may integrate the external and internal media and network system content for a user to interface user elements while in a guest room. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086695 | Mechanism for communication with multiple wireless video area networks - A device is disclosed having a first radio component to enable the device to communicate with devices in a first wireless network via a first wireless communication protocol and a second radio component to enable the device to communicate with devices in a second wireless network via a second wireless communication protocol. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086696 | Wireless Transmission Device, Wireless Transmission Method, Wireless Communication System, and Program - A wireless transmission device according to the present invention includes a packet transmission portion, a Block ACK receiving portion, a retransmission control portion, and a transmission rate revision portion. The packet transmission portion transmits a plurality of packets to a receiving terminal. The Block ACK receiving portion receives a Block ACK that is received from the receiving terminal after the plurality of the packets are transmitted. The retransmission control portion determines a plurality of the packets to be consecutively transmitted, based on the Block ACK. The transmission rate revision portion revises a transmission rate that is used when the plurality of the packets are consecutively transmitted from a value that is normally used in accordance with a wireless channel quality. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086697 | Information Communication Terminal Having Wireless Communication Function - A terminal includes a communication unit. The communication unit determines which one of an AP mode and an ST mode is set as an operating mode of the terminal. In the ST mode, the communication unit accepts a received frame, and then outputs the accepted frame to a host system. In the AP mode, the communication unit transmits the received frame as it is to a wireless network, that is, relays the frame. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING A COLLISION IN COMMON E-DCH TRANSMISSIONS - A method and apparatus for managing a collision in random access channel (RACH) access transmissions are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) transmits WTRU-dependent information to confirm that a detected acquisition indicator (AI) is intended to the WTRU. The WTRU-dependent information may be transmitted separately after detecting the AI, may be transmitted along with a RACH preamble, or may be sent in an E-RACH message. The WTRU-dependent information may be a random number, a sequence or scrambling code randomly selected from a pre-determined set of sequences or scrambling codes. Alternatively, the WTRU-dependent information may be a pre-configured identifier, or information derived from the pre-configured identifier. Alternatively, after detecting an AI, the WTRU may randomly select an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) resource from a set of E-DCH resources associated with an RACH resource used for transmission of the RACH preamble and transmit an E-RACH message using the selected E-DCH resource. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090092106 | WIRELESS LAN SETTING SYSTEM IN AN IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS, AND A WIRELESS LAN SETTING METHOD - A wireless LAN setting system mounted on an image forming apparatus that performs network connection through a wireless LAN and used for performing wireless communication with plural terminals, the wireless LAN setting system including a mode for checking, before setting is performed, existing setting contents (setting items and setting states) presently set. Guide indications are attached to respective setting screens. With the wireless LAN setting system, proper determination is performed and setting operation is correctly performed even if a user (an administrator) does not have professional knowledge. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092107 | System and Method for Inter-Radio Access Technology Signal Measurement - A multi-mode user equipment is provided. The multi-mode user equipment includes a processor configured to promote measurement of a signal strength of a microtechnology-based network during a portion of a macrotechnology-based communication from a network component to the multi-mode user equipment. The signal strength of the microtechnology-based network is measured during a portion of the macrotechnology-based communication when no user data is being transmitted. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092108 | System, method and computer readable medium for re-connecting to a Zigbee network - An end device on a Zigbee network exits a power saving mode and transmits a wake notification message to the network. The network retrieves a cached status flag indicating whether the end device is defined on the Zigbee network and transmits the status flag to the end device. If the end device is undefined on the Zigbee network, the end device attempts to re-join the network. During the power saving mode, the network can cache messages intended for the end device and transmit the messages to the end device when the device exits the power saving mode. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092109 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling Discovery Within a Home Network - A method and Home IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Gateway for enabling a non-IMS enabled device within a home network to discover the availability of the Home IMS Gateway. The Home IMS Gateway is interposed at a control plane between a remote network and the non-IMS enabled device. The Home IMS Gateway sends an advertisement message to the non-IMS enabled device advertising the availability of services on the remote network via the Home IMS Gateway. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092110 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD USING VARIABLE TRANSMISSION RATE - A wireless communication apparatus includes a transmission section and a control section. The transmission section transmits data using wireless communication. The control section controls a transmission rate for the transmission section. The control section limits data size of data to be transmitted to at most a prescribed value and requests a transmission acknowledgement, during a period from immediately after a change in the transmission rate until number of times that the transmission section transmits data reaches a prescribed number of times. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092111 | CONTROL OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSION BASED ON NODE STATUS - Transmission by a first node may be controlled based on a status of a second node. The status of the second node may indicate, for example, whether the second node will be communicating with the first node. Thus, if it is determined based on the status of the second node that the second node may not be communicating with the first node, transmissions by the first node may be temporarily disabled until there is a change in status, and vice versa. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092112 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK SYSTEM AND CLUSTER MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - A wireless sensor network system and a cluster management method thereof. The wireless sensor network system includes at least one cluster having at least one sensor node for collecting sensing data, and a cluster head for aggregating the sensing data from the at least one sensor node. A sink node collects the aggregated sensing data from the at least one cluster, wherein the cluster head of a first cluster determines a cluster size of the first cluster, and when the first cluster is a master cluster and the cluster size of the first cluster is less than a threshold size, merges, the first cluster into a second master cluster, and switches the first cluster to a slave cluster. In each cluster, management efficiency can thereby be maintained within a specified range, and the lifetime of a wireless sensor network can be prolonged by reducing energy consumption. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092113 | Graphical Display of Status Information in a Wireless Network Management System - Methods, apparatuses and systems directed to, or facilitating, the graphical display of status information in wireless network management systems. In one implementation, the present invention provides a graphical user interface that allows a network administrator to readily ascertain the overall status of a wireless network, and quickly identify the network element(s) within the network that are associated with any potential problem or condition. In another implementation, the present invention provides a graphical user interface that provides status icons that efficiently convey status information for corresponding access points. In another implementation, the present invention provides a hierarchical network model that facilitates network data management, configuration and display tasks associated with wireless network management systems. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092114 | WLAN AND WIRED MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND LOCATION FINDING SYSTEM - Wired and mobile cascaded communication systems and processors used in wired and wireless local area network (WLAN) and mobile systems with touch screen generated communication and control signal and position finding signals. Systems with distinct modulators for wired, WLAN and mobile systems operated in separate network and systems. The WLAN includes use of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) signal, the mobile communication system includes use of time division multiple access (TDMA) signal and Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) signal. Cascaded communication system includes receiving, processing and transmitting a Bluetooth signal. Communication system and WLAN has non-linearly amplified amplifier and linearly amplified amplifier for signal amplification and transmission and non-quadrature modulator and a quadrature modulator. Quadrature modulator is used for modulation of TDMA or CDMA filtered cross-correlated in-phase and quadrature-phase baseband signals. Position finding with processor for processing and providing processed location finding signals received from multiple GPS satellites and processed location finding signals received from land based cellular transmitters. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092115 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CENTRAL CONTROL OF MESH NETWORKS - A method and a wireless communication device that implements a control node for a mesh network. Preferably, the device and method are used in an 802.11 LAN. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090097458 | Method and System for Agent Redirecting the Terminal Request - A method and system for agent redirecting the terminal request is provided. Firstly a uniform service address is preset for each service in the terminals. The terminal initiates a service access request. The agent gateway queries the service subscribing information of the user. The agent gateway determines the type of the service requested by the terminal according to the uniform service address and queries the address of the corresponding service server. The agent gateway transmits the service access request to the service server obtained by query. The service server returns the access response of the service to the terminal via the agent gateway. The present invention can choose the suitable service server and agent redirect the service access request to the designated service server in the case that multiple servers exist by presetting the uniform service address in the terminal. In the meantime, presetting the uniform service address in the terminal can avoid the complicated configuration process of the server address in the terminal and improve the service level for the users. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097459 | METHOD FOR WAN ACCESS TO HOME NETWORK USING ONE TIME-PASSWORD - A mobile device is configured to securely access a trusted network over of wide area network. The mobile device includes a communication interface, a processor, and a memory. The mobile device connects to the trusted network via a local access point in the trusted network at a first point in time, receives a password list containing a plurality of one-time passwords from the trusted network while the mobile device is connected to the trusted network via the local access point, stores the password list in memory, subsequently connects remotely to the trusted network over a wide area network, and sends a selected one-time password from the password list to access network resources in the trusted network. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097460 | Method for contention-free NPD periodic updating - Methods and apparatus for a next-in-line protecting device to periodically broadcasting its existence in a communication system. A next-in-line protecting device periodically transmits the next-in-line codeword to inform a primary protecting device and a plurality of secondary devices that the next-in-line device still exists in a communication system. The NPD transmits the NPD codeword intelligently in order to reduce the probability of collision with the RTS codewords transmitted by the other SPDs. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097461 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONTENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing one or more contents to one or more devices in a wireless communication network. The method includes associating the one or more contents with one or more headers corresponding to one or more data packets transmitted for the one or more devices at an anchor datapath gateway in the wireless communication network The method further includes rendering the one or more contents with data represented by the one or more data packets to the one or more devices in response to associating the one or more contents with the one or more headers. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097462 | Deployable Cellular Communication Extension System - Embodiments of systems and methods provide deployable cellular telecommunication base stations capable of sending, receiving, and extending telephone calls in areas where commercial cellular communications are unavailable. The deployable base station can send and receive cellular telephone calls via cellular communication transceivers, and relay such calls to a distant teleport via a satellite communication link. The deployable base station includes routers for encoding voice calls in voice-over IP data format and for routing calls via the satellite communication link. The deployable base station may also include land mobile radio (LMR) communication interoperability circuits to enable LMR communications to be relayed to a distant teleport. At the teleport, received communications can be routed via a public switched telephone network to an intended receiver to enable telephone communications with the global commercial network from areas lacking commercial cellular communications. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097463 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097464 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090103502 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A display apparatus selects one of multiple wireless communication apparatuses and activates the selected wireless communication apparatus as a second access point of a second group. The activated wireless communication apparatus establishes the second group including multiple wireless communication apparatuses. After the second group is thus established, the transmission power of the wireless communication apparatus activated as the access point and the multiple wireless communication apparatuses included in the second group is controlled. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103503 | Location Aware Background Access Point Scanning for WLAN - Respective distances between a communication device and a plurality of wireless local area network (WLAN) access points are determined. One of the plurality of WLAN access points with which the communication device is to associate is selected based on the determined distances | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103504 | Multiplexed Communication System and Multiplexed Communication Method - A transmission processing apparatus selects, based on flow control information, user packets to be multiplexed, stores the user packets in the payload of a multiplexed packet based on the position order of multiplex flags corresponding to destination users, stores a multiplex flag group in which only the multiplex flags of the user packets are set in the header of the multiplexed packet, and transmits the multiplexed packet. A reception processing apparatus extracts the multiplex flag group from the header of the received multiplexed packet, transmits flow control information according to the storage state of a reception buffer to the transmission processing apparatus, demultiplexes the user packets from the payload of the multiplexed packet, extracts destination user information corresponding to the set multiplex flags from user management information, and outputs the user packets to the destination users corresponding to the user management information. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103505 | Method and Apparatus of Selectively Tying the Opening and Closing of EVDO and PPP Sessions - Method, and associated apparatus, for operating a hybrid access terminal operable in a CDMA 1x/EVDO hybrid communication session system. The hybrid access terminal is operable to communicate pursuant to an EVDO communication session and to a PPP communication session. The opening and closing of the communication sessions are independent of one another. Opening of one session does not require opening of another of the sessions. And, closing of one of the sessions does not require closing of the other of the sessions. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103506 | Separating Control and Data in Wireless Networks - Wireless communication techniques are described in which control and data are separated. In an implementation, a method is described which includes sending data packets on a first wireless channel and sending control data relating to the data packets on a second wireless channel having a data rate that is lower than a data rate of the first wireless channel. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090109940 | Headphone with Enhanced Voice Communication - A headphone having ability to communicate using Internet Protocol (IP) standard. The capability may be used as a basis to facilitate a user to conduct voice calls using voice over IP (VoIP). The headphone may also facilitate voice calls with users connected via cellular networks (e.g., GSM, CDMA, etc.). In an embodiment, the headphone is provided a wireless LAN (WLAN) network interface such that VoIP calls are conducted using wireless medium. Similarly, a Bluetooth protocol type interface is also provided to communicate with a cellular phone and the communication forms the basis for the voice calls between the headphone and other cellular phones connected via the cellular network. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109941 | WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method of providing access to a communications system via a plurality of wireless hotspot access points, comprising:
| 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109942 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Controlling Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) For Voice Communications In A Network - In one illustrative example, a mobile communication device receives, via a generic access network (GAN) from a GAN controller, a message having a discontinuous transmission (DTX) indication. For a voice communication session, the mobile device causes a connection to be established with the GANC, via the GAN and over a wireless communication link with a wireless access point of the GAN, for the communication of voice data of the voice session which is provided via a core network of a mobile telecommunications network. In response to identifying that the DTX indication indicates that the DTX functions are instructed or supported by the GANC, the mobile device causes DTX functions to be performed for the communication of the voice data of the voice session over the wireless link. On the other hand, in response to identifying that the DTX indication fails to indicate that DTX functions are supported or instructed by the GANC, the mobile device refrains from causing the DTX functions to be performed for the communication of the voice data of the voice session over the wireless link. Preferably, the message which carries the DTX indication is a GA-RC REGISTER ACCEPT message or a GA-RC REGISTER UPDATE DOWNLINK message. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109943 | RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless network system including a first terminal for sending a request-to-send signal including information on a medium use period to a second terminal before sending data, receiving a clear-to-send signal from the second terminal, and sending data to the second terminal during the medium use period; the second terminal for receiving the request-to-send signal and sending the clear-to-send signal; a third terminal for receiving the request-to-send signal and transmitting data to a fourth terminal during the medium use period; ant the fourth terminal. Thus, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a problem that when it is judged that the wireless channel is being used, transmission of the station is suppressed. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109944 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING DATA FRAME IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method of generating a data frame used in a wireless personal area network (WPAN). The method of generating a data frame used in a wireless personal area network (WPAN), the method including: generating a plurality of sub frames by using one or more MAC service data units (MSDUs); and generating sub headers including information about each sub frame; generating a PHY service data unit (PSDU) by using the plurality of sub frames, the sub headers, and a MAC header, wherein each sub frame includes a frame check sequence (FCS) field for detecting an error of a corresponding sub frame. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109945 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED DATA DEMODULATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless network uses an improved frame structure to increase timing acquisition capabilities as well as reduction of spectral lines. In one aspect, the frame packet can be used to communicate the different modes of operation under which the packet was created. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109946 | Open-Host Wireless Access System - An “open-host” wireless access system includes a wireless access point (AP) that identifies the SSID from a WLAN connection request. A wireless service provider (WSP) is associated with the SSID. The AP is coupled to a demarcation switch within the access system. The demarcation switch includes a series of ports, where one or more ports are associated with a particular WSP. A WSP can connect equipment such as a router to its associated port or ports. The AP opens a VLAN to the designated port or ports to establish connections to the WSPS equipment based on the SSID. The WSP provides IP address assignments and authentication as a native process on the network such that the user experience is customizable by each WSP. Unique login screens and authentication methods can be employed by each WSP. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090116462 | High Speed Overlay Mode for Burst Data and Real Time Streaming (Audio) Applications - In a wireless 802.15.4 communication system ( | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116463 | MOBILE NODE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A technology is disclosed for a mobile device with multiple interfaces to make use of its multiple interfaces capability with Mobile IP. According to this technology, MN (Mobile Node) | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116464 | ACCESS POINTS WITH SELECTIVE COMMUNICATION RATE AND SCHEDULING CONTROL AND RELATED METHODS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANs) - The present invention is directed to methods and wireless communication devices that are configured to enhance communication capacity in a wireless network. In one aspect of the invention various scheduling processes and schedulers for the transmissions of data packets are disclosed. In another aspect of the invention, the selection of appropriate transmission rates to advertise by a common unit which provides wireless service to different types of wireless transmit receive units (WTRUs) is addressed. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116465 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL AND BASE STATION SEARCHING METHOD FOR SUCH SYSTEM AND TERMINAL - In terminal ( | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116466 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile communications handset ( | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116467 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ACCESSING NETWORK - The present disclosure discloses a method and system for a user accessing a network in which a user terminal obtains a requirement for an attribute of a network element, selects a network element meeting a capability requirement of a service to be used according to the requirement for the attribute of the network element, and accesses the network element meeting the capability requirement of the service to be used. The service requested by the user terminal can be implemented normally. Meanwhile, the present disclosure also discloses a user terminal and a Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF) discovery device. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090122768 | Communication Device, Communication Method, Communication Program, and Storage Medium Thereof - In the present invention, when a CP is extended longer than that of a preset schedule, a CP having been set in a subsequent schedule cycle in the preset schedule is omitted until the delay is recovered, that is, until the preset schedule and an actual schedule are synchronized with each other. In case where the CP indicative of a period for executing a communication method in which a QAP does not manage spectrum allocation is extended longer than a period the QAP has set in the preset schedule, subsequent spectrum allocation in a QAP delays from the schedule, so that a power save efficiency of a QSTA drops. The foregoing technique suppresses the drop of the power save efficiency. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122769 | NETWORK NODE - A technology is disclosed for efficiently and effectively conveying location and mobility related information about a mobile node to the network in order to facilitate Location and mobility related functions and services. According to this technology, in order to detect location and mobility (for example, movement velocity) of the mobile node, dissemination of information including the identification information of the mobile node and the count metric indicating the distance to the mobile node is performed among adjacent network nodes. The network node, upon receiving this message, stores the information in the message, and generates a new count metric by decreasing the count metric. The network node then sends the message including the identification information of the mobile node and this newly generated count metric to the other network nodes. For example the network node determines the priority of resource reservation for each mobile node based on the count metric of each mobile node. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122770 | SENDER AND/OR HELPER NODE MODIFICATIONS TO ENABLE SECURITY FEATURES IN COOPERATIVE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Wireless protocols that employ a helper node are adapted so that they may take advantage of authentication security (and perhaps encryption security). Thus, such protocols may be used with security protocols such as 802.11i protocol (or the like) for example. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122771 | OFDM/OFDMA FRAME STRUCTURE FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology for communication systems is disclosed. The OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology comprises a variable length sub-frame structure with efficiently sized cyclic prefixes and efficient transition gap durations operable to effectively utilize OFDM/OFDMA bandwidth. Furthermore, the frame structure provides compatibility with multiple wireless communication systems. An uplink frame structure and a downlink frame structure are provided. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122772 | NETWORK SWITCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MOBILE TERMINAL - A network switching method and apparatus of a mobile terminal for enabling the mobile terminal to switch between private and public networks for portable Internet access is provided. The network switching apparatus of a mobile terminal includes a connection manager for managing public network information, private network information including mappings between public base stations of a public network and private base stations of a private network, and authentication information, and a control unit for determining whether a signal strength of a signal received from a public base station, that is associated with a mobile terminal, is less than a threshold value, for determining, when the signal strength is less than the threshold value, whether to switch to a private base station of a private network mapped to the public base station, and for establishing, after determining to switch to the private base station, a connection with the private base station of the private network. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122773 | ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION BASED ON RECEIVED ACCESS POINT SIGNALS - An access point is configured based on signals received from one or more access points on a forward link. Such an access point may comprise, for example, a relatively small coverage area access point and/or an access point that is deployed in an ad-hoc manner. In some aspects, an access point may determine its location based on signals received from several neighboring macro access points. In some aspects, the timing of an access point may be synchronized to timing indicated by signals that are received from one or more neighboring access points. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122774 | MESH DETERMINISTIC ACCESS (MDA) PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND WIRELESS DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - Provided are a procedure for mesh deterministic access (MDA) in wireless mesh network and a wireless device supporting the procedure. In the method, an intended transmitter transmits an a mesh deterministic access opportunity (MDAOP) setup request message including information for specifying times of a new MDAOP set and information for identifying the new MDAOP set to intended receivers. In this case, the MDAOP setup request message is a setup request message for a broadcast MDAOP. And, the intended transmitter receives an MDAOP setup reply message including a reply code from the intended receivers. The reply code may indicate either accept or refusal of the request for the new MDAOP set. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122775 | METHODS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES FOR WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS USING RECEIVER DETERMINED CHANNELS AND TRANSMITTED REFERENCE SIGNALS - Electronic devices for communicating in wireless ad-hoc networks and multiple access systems (such as mobile radio telephone communications systems) are disclosed. For example, a disclosed transmitter can transmit data to a first receiver in an ad-hoc wireless network (or multiple access system) over a first channel and can, further, transmit data to a second receiver in the ad-hoc wireless network (or multiple access system) over a second channel that is separate from the first channel, where the first and second channels are determined by the respective receivers which will receive the first and second transmitted data. Accordingly, communications between transmitters and different receivers in the ad-hoc wireless network (or multiple access system) can be carried on simultaneously. Related receivers as well as methods, computer program products, and systems for communicating are also disclosed. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090129346 | Method and Apparatus for Monitoring TCP Sessions in a Mobile Data Network and Developing Corresponding Performance Metrics - These teachings provide for receiving ( | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129347 | Approach For Configuring Wi-Fi Devices - According to an approach for configuring Wi-Fi devices, a wireless access point changes its mode of operation from a normal operating mode to a configuration operating mode to configure one or more Wi-Fi devices. When operating in the configuration operating mode, it is more difficult for an eavesdropper to intercept messages between the wireless access point and the Wi-Fi devices being configured. Upon completion of the configuration process, the wireless access point changes its mode of operation from the configuration operating mode back to the normal operating mode. This approach reduces the likelihood of an eavesdropper intercepting configuration messages exchanged between a wireless access point and one or more Wi-Fi devices during the configuration process. The approach also allows automated configuration of Wi-Fi devices and reduces the amount of user interaction required to configure Wi-Fi devices. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129348 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR MOBILE TERMINATED CALL PROCESSING BY A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for processing a call setup in a network system are provided. A femtocell system receives a call origination for a call to be terminated with a user equipment serviced by the femtocell system from a core network, transmits a page message to the user equipment, performs a service connection with the user equipment, creates a connection for the core network, and completes the call setup with the user equipment. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129349 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE PROCESSING BY A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for processing messaging services in a network system are provided. A femtocell system receives a message delivery request and message content to be delivered to a destination device from a user equipment serviced thereby. The femtocell system packetizes the message content and transmits the packetized message content to a core network. A confirmation is then received by the femtocell system from the core network. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129350 | PREAMBLE DESIGN FOR A WIRELESS SIGNAL - Providing for management of wireless communications in a heterogeneous wireless access point (AP) environment is described herein. By way of example, system data of an over-the-air message can be configured to include information identifying a distinct type of transmitting base station. In some aspects, the information can include an access type of the base station and/or a sector ID for distinguishing the base station among large numbers of other base stations. According to other aspects, the information can include wireless channel resources designated for a particular type of base station, or blanked by the transmitting base station, to facilitate interference reduction on such resources. By employing aspects of wireless communication management disclosed herein, efficient and reliable communication can be affected in large heterogeneous AP networks. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129351 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT - An apparatus and method are provided for transmitting data by a Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) that communicates with a first communication equipment supporting a first communication protocol and a second communication equipment supporting a second communication protocol. The apparatus and method includes receiving data packets from the second communication equipment, determining a data grant interval of the first communication equipment according to a preset Quality of Service (QoS) scheme of the first communication equipment, determining an amount of data to be transmitted for the data grant interval, collecting data packets from the received data packets below the determined amount of transmission data, and transmitting the collected data packets to the first communication equipment every data grant interval. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129352 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SPLIT POLICY ENFORCEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless local area network system allows policy enforcement execution to be split between an access port and a centralized wireless controller. The policy may be of various types, including, but not limited to, a firewall policy, a QoS policy, a traffic shaping policy, and a bandwidth-management policy. On the AP, for all the traffic that is to be bridged or forwarded to specified ports, the policy table on the AP is checked. If it matches the policy table entry, then the specified action is taken. For all the traffic that gets forwarded to the controller by the AP, the match is checked with the policy table at the controller. If a match is detected, then the appropriate action specified by the policy is taken. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129353 | METHOD FOR RECOGNIZING AVAILABLE CHANNEL IN IEEE 802.15.4 PROTOCOL CSMA/CA MECHANISM - Disclosed is a method of recognizing an available channel in order to prevent channel occupation requirements from colliding with each other when one wireless channel is shared by plural terminals in a CSMA/CA mechanism using an IEEE 802.15.4 protocol slot, the method including: a first step of initializing a counter, CW, as 2, the CW being used for CCA which an attempt to perform is made before frame transmission; a second step of determining if a required channel is occupied; a third step of decreasing the CW by 1 when the channel is idle in the second step; a fourth step of re-determining if the channel is occupied; and a fifth step of, based on a determination result in the fourth step, determining if the CW is 1 when the channel is occupied. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129354 | ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION SCHEMES - An access point is configured based on acquired information. An access point may be configured based on the configuration(s) of at least one other access point. An identifier to be transmitted by an access point may be selected based on the identifier(s) transmitted by at least one other access point. An access point may configure itself with assistance from a configuration server. For example, the access point may send information such as the location of the access point to a configuration server and the configuration server may respond with a list of neighboring access points for that access point. A configuration server may provide configuration information to an access point based on the location of the access point. A configuration server also may direct an access point to a different configuration server. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129355 | APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING PACKETS OF WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORK AND METHOD FOR USING THE SAME - An apparatus for transmitting packets of a wireless local area network comprises a packet buffer area, a host controller and a timer. The packet buffer area is configured to temporarily store a plurality of packets. The host controller is configured to aggregate and control the plurality of packets in the packet buffer area. The timer is used to determine whether there are time-limited packets in the packet buffer area. While the host controller is aggregating the packets in the packet buffer area, an aggregation busy flag is enabled; and when the packet buffer area is outputting the time-limited packets, a timer busy flag is enabled. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129356 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION - A method, an apparatus and a system for information transmission are provided. The method includes the following steps. A second user equipment receives update information issued by a wireless access point (AP). The second user equipment is located within a coverage area of the wireless AP. After detecting that the second user equipment has the update information, a first user equipment establishes a connection with the second user equipment and obtains the update information from the second user equipment. The first user equipment is located outside the coverage area of the wireless AP. In the present invention, the user equipment can update the information without additionally increasing the transmit powers of the wireless AP and the user equipments when located outside the coverage area of the wireless AP, and thus the interference to other equipments is minimized. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090135792 | Method and System for Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Phase Shifter Training - Aspects of a method and system for wireless local area network (WLAN) phase shifter training are presented. Aspect of the system may enable a receiving station, at which is located a plurality of receiving antennas, to estimate the relative phase at which each of the receiving antennas receives signals from a transmitting station. This process may be referred to as phase shifter training. After determining the relative phase for each of the receiving antennas, the receiving station may process received signals by phase shifting the signals received via each of the receiving antennas in accordance with the relative phase shifts determined during the phase shifter training process. Signals received via a selected one of the receiving antennas may be unshifted. The processed signals may be combined to generate a diversity reception signal. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135793 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING AN IP ADDRESS SPACE OF AN ADDRESS SERVER IN A MOBILITY NETWORK - The invention manages an IP address space in a mobility network, including partitioning of the IP address space, assignment of IP addresses from the IP address space, and/or use of hysteresis to control reassignment of IP addresses from the IP address space. The IP address assignment is performed using one or more residual time statistics from a residual time profile maintained for the mobile node requesting assignment of an IP address. A residual time profile of a mobile node includes one or more residual time statistics associated with the mobile node. The residual time statistics for a mobile node are determined using a residual time associated with each IP address assigned to the mobile node. The IP address space partitioning is performed using residual time statistics maintained for mobile nodes of the network. The reassignment of IP addresses from the IP address space is controlled using hysteresis. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135794 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND ROAMING METHOD - A wireless communication terminal roaming from a current access point (AP) to a destination AP within a plurality of APs includes various functional modules. The wireless communication terminal detects a current service quality parameter of each of the plurality of APs, a roaming frequency, and a packet retransmission rate of the wireless communication terminal in a predetermined detection period. Furthermore, the wireless communication terminal calculates a value of an RQI according to the current service quality parameter of each of the plurality of APs, the roaming frequency, and the packet retransmission rate of the wireless communication terminal, and regulates a roaming threshold of the current AP according to the value of the RQI and determines the destination AP that has satisfied a roaming condition corresponding to the value of the RQI. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135795 | FEMTOCELL ARCHITECTURE IN SUPPORT OF VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and systems for providing voice and date services in a femtocell wireless network. The proposed approach integrates IWLAN architecture into femtocell architecture by introducing a gateway to serve both IWLAN and femtocell users. The proposed approach handles the voice and data in a different way so that it enhances the data handling efficiency while re-using existing MSC investment. The proposed approach carries the data traffic from a femtocell base station to the gateway in native IP packet, instead of encapsulating them in 3G data, thus enhancing the efficiency and performance for the data traffic. The data traffic can then be sent to GGSN or directly to packet data network. The approach tunnels voice traffic to MSC through the gateway as in conventional Iu-CS approach. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135796 | INTERFACE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING SUBFRAME TIME REUSE - Interference that occurs during wireless communication may be managed by subframe time reuse. A method, apparatus amend medium of communication determines interfering subframe gating sequences. The transmission gating in a home access point is adjusted by determining a first gating sequence from a first unplanned access point. A second gating sequence is selected based on the first gating sequence, wherein the first and second gating sequences are non-interfering. Signals are transmitted according to the second gating sequence from a second unplanned access point to an associated access terminal. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135797 | Mobile telecommunications architecture - A mobile telecommunications architecture is disclosed. A downlink mobile telecommunications signaling message is received via a first communication interface associated with a single shared network controller connection to a mobile switching center (MSC) server. The downlink mobile telecommunications signaling message is mapped to one of a plurality of small scale base stations each of which is configured to perform at least some network controller functions. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135798 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Switching Communication Operations Between A Wireless Wide Area Network And A Wireless Local Area Network - Methods and apparatus for use by a mobile communication device in switching operation for communications from a wireless wide area network (WWAN) to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are disclosed. While providing operation for communications in the WWAN, the mobile device continually maintains visited cell site history information in its memory. The visited cell site history information is indicative of one or more visited cell sites of the WWAN that served the mobile device over a moving time period of its operation. The mobile device continually monitors the visited cell site history information to identify whether it has been contained within a local geographic region over the moving time period. When the mobile device is identified to have been contained within the local geographic region, it is permitted to operate for communications with the WLAN. In response to such permission, the mobile device may enable its WLAN radio transceiver and select the WLAN for communications. Advantageously, switching operation for communications from the WWAN to the WLAN is performed only when appropriate. The WLAN radio transceiver may be enabled only when needed, which reduces power consumption and saves battery life in mobile device. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090141691 | Access Point for Wireless Local Area Network - Embodiments of an access point for an expanded wireless local area network are described and depicted. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141692 | OPTIMIZED AD HOC NETWORKING - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to improve network performance for ad hoc WLANs save power in service discovery phase and provide service availability information quickly and independently from the wireless channels used in the WLAN ad hoc networks. The embodiments perform link-local addressing, Multicast Domain Name Service (DNS), and DNS Service Discovery operations one or more channels of an ad hoc IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN. A protocol handler in a wireless device is coupled between a standard service discovery protocol module in the device, such as a Zeroconf protocol module or a UPnP protocol module, and at least one internet protocol stack in the device. The Transport, Internet, and Network Interface layers of the IP protocol stack are mapped by the protocol handler to corresponding functions in the standard service discovery protocol module, using a service table for storing information on relationships between available services, wireless devices, and channels on one or more ad hoc wireless networks. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141693 | Technique for Achieving Connectivity between Telecommunication Stations - A technique for enabling a secure, point-to-point wireless connection between a secondary computer (e.g., a personal digital assistant, etc.) and a primary computer (e.g., a notebook, a desktop, etc.) is disclosed. The primary computer is associated with an extended infrastructure through an access point. The present invention enables the secondary computer to communicate either with the associated primary computer or with an extended network indirectly through the access point. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141694 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING AND MANAGING ACCESS POINT AND ACCESS CONTROLLER - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for configuring and managing access points AP and an access controller AC. The method includes: creating at least one virtual radio interface, each of which is assigned a standard Management Information Base (MIB) interface index, wherein each of the at least one virtual radio interface corresponds to at least one physical radio interface of at least one AP; determining a physical radio interface to which a virtual radio interface corresponds and sending configuration information on the virtual radio interface to the determined physical radio interface when there is a need to send the configuration information to the physical radio interface. By using embodiments of the present invention, a standard MIB can be re-used for operating APs, thereby costs for managing the APs are reduced. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141695 | METHOD OF CREATING INCENTIVES FOR USING WIRELESS HOTSPOT LOCATIONS - A system and method of distributing incentives for wireless hotspots is provided. The method includes providing an access point to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location, evaluating use statistics of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portable devices, and providing an inducement to a user of the wireless hotspot based on the evaluated use statistics. The system includes a first provider for providing an access point to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location, an evaluator for evaluating use statistics of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portables devices, and a second provider for providing an inducement to a user of the wireless hotspot based on the evaluated use statistics | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090147758 | MOBILE INTERNET DEVICE WITH DETACHABLE WIRELESS MODULE - Mobile computing systems are provided having an ultra-mobile PC and a detachable wireless communications module operable as phone and a short range and long range wireless data link. In one embodiment, the wireless communications module is capable of synchronizing data with the ultra-mobile PC. Another embodiment provides parasitic charging of the wireless communications module from the ultra-mobile PC battery for extended battery life. Another embodiment provides ability to synchronize data to and from the ultra-mobile PC even when it is powered off. Another embodiment provides drag and drop capability between the wireless module screen and the UMPC screen, which may provide application or operating system data transfers. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147759 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF NODE USING LAYER 2/LAYER 3 ADDRESSES - Provided is a network-based mobility supporting method for supporting mobility of a node not having a mobility supporting function. The network-based mobility supporting method which is performed by a plurality of agents that connect a plurality of access networks to an Internet protocol core network integrating the plurality of access networks, includes: acquiring address information of a mobile node connected to an access point from the access point; transmitting the address information of the mobile node and layer 3 address information of an agent to a management unit which is located on the Internet protocol core network and manages the plurality of access networks, and registering a location of the mobile node; transmitting the layer 3 address information of the correspondent agent to the mobile node, in order to allow the mobile node to transmit a data packet to the agent; and receiving and transmitting the data packet between the mobile node and a correspondent node in consideration of the address information of the mobile node and information registered in the management unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide high-speed mobility to a mobile node. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147760 | Method and apparatus for routing in wireless sensor network - Provided are a method and apparatus for efficiently performing routing in a wireless sensor network having a tree-hierarchical structure, the method and apparatus reducing the number of hops required for transmitting data. According to the method and apparatus, a node is determined as a proximal node from among nodes within range of a wireless signal of a transmission node, wherein the node is a node having the smallest difference from among differences between each of address values of the nodes within the range and an address value of a target node, and data is directly transmitted from the transmission node to the proximal node. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147761 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS STATION - A station determines the presence/absence of directional beam control in an access point, on the basis of received power measured when data transmitted from the access point are received, and the type of the received data. In accordance with the result of this determination, the station controls transmitting power to transmit data to the access point. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090154431 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL FOR XOR-ED PACKETS - Various example embodiment are disclosed. An example embodiment may include sending, by a relay node in a wireless network, a ready to send message to a plurality of wireless nodes. The ready to send message may indicate access channels for each of the wireless nodes to send clear to send messages. This example may also include receiving, via the indicated access channels for sending the clear to send messages, the clear to send messages from each of the wireless nodes. This example may also include sending an XOR-ed packet to the wireless nodes in response to receiving the clear to send messages. The XOR-ed packet may indicate access channels for each of the wireless nodes to send acknowledgment messages. An example may also include receiving, via the indicated access channels for sending the acknowledgment messages, the acknowledgment messages from each of the wireless nodes | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154432 | COMPUTER RADIO WITH PRE-DEFINED CONFIGURATION SET - A computer with a software defined radio that can be configured based on a wireless technology specification. The computer may negotiate with a second computer that also includes a software defined radio to define a set of wireless technology specifications and trigger events indicating when each of the wireless technology specifications is to be used. As the computers communicate, if a trigger event occurs, both computers may reconfigure their software defined radios using a different specification in the set. By appropriately defining the wireless technology specifications in the set and the trigger events, the computers can operate with configurations that allow communication despite events that might otherwise disrupt communication between the computers. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154433 | LOCAL AREA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - An apparatus and method for local area communication between Bluetooth and MBOA-MAC devices is provided. A new Bluetooth Protocol Adaptation Layer (PAL) is implemented to adapt a Bluetooth host module and an MBOA-MAC to each other so as to enable use of conventional legacy Bluetooth applications in a wireless network environment employing a WiMedia Multiband OFDM Alliance (MBOA)-based Media Access Control (MAC) layer. This allows devices equipped with a conventional Bluetooth host module to perform high-speed data communication based on MBOA-MAC, thereby increasing the efficiency of utilization of networks. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154434 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In a system and method for facilitating wireless communication between agents in a wireless network, each agent is equipped with an agent's device using a main wireless infrastructure and a separate auxiliary wireless infrastructure. Initial contact between any first agent's device and any other agent's device is made within the auxiliary wireless infrastructure, whereas, once this initial contact has been established, all ensuing communications between the first agent's device and the other agent's device take place within the main wireless infrastructure. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154435 | PORTABLE INTERNET RADIO ACCESS STATION INCLUDING MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT PROCESSORS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT PROCESSORS - The present invention relates to a portable internet radio access station, and more particularly, to a portable internet radio access station including a plurality of management processors and a method of controlling the plurality of management processors. A first management processor of a portable internet radio access station according to the present invention includes: an obstruction sensing unit sensing an obstruction in the first and second management processors; a call processing database storing a call processing information of the portable internet radio access station; an operation state determining unit determining an operation state of the first management processor based on the obstruction; and a database synchronizing unit synchronizing the call processing database with a call processing database of the second management processor based on the operation state of the first management processor Accordingly, continuity and reliability in call processing are obtained in the portable internet radio access station of the present invention. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA OVER WIRELESS LAN MESH NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting data over a WLAN mesh network. Transmission sections of priority frames and general frames are initially set, and the priority frame transmission section is varied step-by-step within a specific range. Thus, QoS with respect to data requiring the real-time property can be guaranteed and transmission of general frames can be guaranteed to some degree. Accordingly, there is an effect that data transmission efficiency can be improved significantly. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154437 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION THEREIN - A method for performing communication in the wireless sensor network is disclosed. The upper node transmits a beacon message to the lower nodes, wherein the beacon message distinguishes an indirect transmission interval, in which the upper node transmits downlink data to the plurality of lower nodes, from a direct transmission interval adjacent to the indirect transmission interval, in which the upper node receives uplink data from the plurality of lower nodes. The lower nodes determine the indirect transmission interval and the direct transmission interval from the received beacon message. The downlink data is transmitted from the upper node to the lower nodes in the indirect transmission interval. The uplink data is transmitted from the lower nodes to the upper node in the direct transmission interval. When communication is performed between the upper node and the lower nodes, the data can be efficiently transmitted from the upper node to the lower nodes. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154438 | PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A packet transmission method for a WPAN that for alleviating traffic concentration in an active period and improving network throughput by controlling packet transmission timing in the active period. A packet transmission method for a wireless personal area network including a coordinator operating with a specific duty cycle and a plurality of devices includes determining, when a packet is generated, whether there is another packet waiting to be sent; determining, if there is no other packet waiting to be sent, whether the network is in an inactive period; setting, when network is in an inactive period, a backoff time; and sending the packet when the backoff time has expired. The packet transmission method controls an initial backoff value adaptively to a duty cycle of the network. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154439 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, CONNECTION DEVICE, AND CONNECTION DEVICE DESIGNATION METHOD FOR DESIGNATING CONNECTION DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO CONNECT TO - When connecting a wireless LAN terminal to a specific wireless access point, an inquiry is made to a server about the specific wireless access point, via the wireless access point which the wireless LAN terminal is connecting to, and then connection information for connecting to the specific wireless access point is automatically received, whereby wireless communication are established between the wireless LAN terminal and the specific wireless access point. Furthermore, in a case where wireless LAN terminals which are permitted to connect are registered into each wireless access point, when a wireless access point receives a connection request from a wireless LAN terminal that is not permitted to connect, an inquiry is made to another wireless access point regarding whether there is a wireless access point which that wireless LAN terminal is permitted to connect to. Then, if a wireless access point which that wireless LAN terminal is permitted to connect to is found as a result of the inquiry, then connection information for connecting to that wireless access point is notified to the wireless LAN terminal. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154440 | Wireless Communications Systems and Wireless Communications Methods - Wireless network access methods, communication device configuration methods, configuration devices, communications systems, and articles of manufacture are described. According to one aspect, a wireless network access method includes providing a communications device, providing a wireless network including access to a service, storing wireless network access data and service access data using a configuration device, communicating the wireless network access data and the service access data to the communications device using the configuration device, communicating the wireless network access data to the wireless network using the communications device to establish the communications device as a node on the wireless network, communicating the service access data to the wireless network using the communications device, and accessing the service using the communications device responsive to the communicating the service access data. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090161639 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EVALUATING PROXIMITY TO A WLAN FOR A UMA/GAN COMPATIBLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and system for evaluating proximity of the electronic device to a wireless local area network (WLAN) involves generating a location where the location is defined by a list of cellular communication access points that is sorted based on signal strength for each access point. The list may be scored against one or more similarly defined reference locations to determine if the electronic device is at a geographic position that is favorable to probe for a WLAN that the electronic device was connected to at a prior time, but is presently not connected. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161640 | Mobile Wireless Access Router for Separately Controlling Traffic Signal and Control Signal - A wireless access router for separately controlling a traffic signal and a control signal is provided. In a mobile communication access network structure, in order to optimally support a mobile communication terminal, a control signal and a traffic signal of a base station are divided, and a router is controlled by mobile communication system functions such as a mobility management function, a QoS management function, a session control of the terminal, a mobility control, and a QoS control function that are effectively processed. With a wireless access router having the divided control signal and traffic signal, it is expected the traffic concentration and a packet transmission delay can be prevented. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161641 | Method and System for Rate Selection Algorithm to Maximize Throughput in Close Loop Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) System - Aspects of a method and system for rate selection algorithm to maximize throughput in closed loop multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) system are provided and may comprise computing a maximum number of binary bits to be, simultaneously transmitted via an RF channel based on signal quality. A modulation technique may be selected based on the computed maximum, communicating feedback information comprising the selected modulation technique. Subsequently transmitted data may be received via an RF channel which is modulated based on the feedback information. Another aspect of the method may comprise receiving feedback information comprising at least one of a selected modulation technique and coding rate via an RF channel, and transmitting subsequent data via said at least one of a plurality of RF channels which either modulated, or coded, based on the feedback information. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161642 | AUTOMATIC AND DYNAMIC CHANGING OF CLASS IN CLASS-BASED NETWORKS - A wireless radio frequency data communication device includes memory in which is stored a common designation; a radio frequency transmitter component and receiver component for wirelessly sending and receiving data packets; and electronics for processing data. The device is configured to filter a wireless communication received by it for an identification of its common designation within the communication, and process the communication if an identification of its common designation is found therein, and not process the communication if an identification of its common designation is not found therein. The device includes a profile stored in its memory and is configured to automatically and dynamically change its common designation in accordance with its profile. The profile may include a plurality of common designations, which may be conditional. The foregoing common designations may be class designations for use in class-based asset tracking systems. The device may include an interface for sensor-acquired data. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161643 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A radio communication system and apparatus is disclosed wherein setting necessary for communication with a desired radio communication apparatus with which a user wants to communicate can be performed with certainty by an operation system familiar to the user and a high security level can be assured for the communication which uses the setting. When a first radio communication apparatus receives a request for communication information necessary for communication through a radio network from a second radio communication apparatus through a radio circuit, it transmits identification information for the radio network and information regarding the security set in advance as communication information therein to the second radio communication apparatus through the radio circuit. The second radio communication apparatus sets the communication information to itself. The invention can be applied to a radio LAN for which a household electric appliance is used. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090168733 | Wireless Access Points - A floor chamber ( | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168734 | BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS APPARATUS AND FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE AVOIDING METHOD THEREOF - A broadband wireless access apparatus that can be separated to improve its portability and mobility and its frequency interference avoiding method are disclosed. The broadband wireless access device includes: a main body unit having a power and multi-network management function; an antenna cradle rotatably combined with the main body unit; and a detachable (separation-type) wireless access device detachably attached to the antenna cradle. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168735 | STATION, SETTING INFORMATION MANAGING DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SETTING INFORMATION OBTAINING METHOD, COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - In a wireless communication system including a setting information managing device for managing setting information required for wireless communication, an access point, and a base station belonging to the access point for conducting wireless communication, the station belongs to the access point using connecting information for wireless connection to a setting network, connects via the access point to the managing device on the setting network, and obtains the setting information from the managing device. In this way, in the wireless communication system, the setting information required for wireless communication can be obtained by use of the connecting information for wireless connection to connect to the setting network. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168736 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a first wireless communication device, a second wireless communication device, and a base station that relays wireless communication between the first and second wireless communication devices. The first wireless communication device is capable of direct communication with another wireless communication device, and transmits a first data frame of a particular frame type to the second wireless communication device via the base station. If the second wireless communication device is capable of the direct communication, when receiving the first data frame of the particular frame type, the second wireless communication device transmits a second data frame of the particular frame type via the base station. When the first wireless communication device receives the second data frame from the second wireless communication device, it determines that the second wireless communication device is capable of the direct communication. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168737 | Transmission Using a Plurality of Protocols - Included are embodiments for communicating data using a plurality of formats. At least one embodiment of a method includes transmitting a plurality of first format data frames with a predetermined time period between transmitted first format data frames and determining a duration of the time period between the transmitted first format data frames. Similarly, some embodiments include fragmenting a second format data frame into a plurality of second format subframes such that the second format subframes may be transmitted during the time period between the transmitted first format data frames. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090175250 | Method for mobile terminal access to wireless lan based on access point services and service parameters - A wireless LAN provides access to a mobile terminal (MT) utilizing beacon frames to broadcast access point (AP) service specific information. The MT listens to the beacon frames and compares the broadcast service(s) and service parameters to a predetermined service profile stored in the MT. When the services offered by an AP matches the services designated in the stored service profile, the MT associates with that particular AP. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175251 | Multiple Wireless Local Area Networks For Reliable Video Streaming - A media center system comprises a first wireless controller operative to communicate with a first set of devices on a first WLAN using a first wireless standard; a first network processor coupled to the first wireless controller and operative to establish wireless communication over a first channel with the first set of devices on the first WLAN; a second wireless controller operative to communicate with a second set of devices on a second WLAN using a second wireless standard, the second wireless controller substantially dedicated for multimedia content delivery; and a second network processor coupled to the second wireless controller and operative to establish wireless communication over a second channel with the second set of devices on the second WLAN, the second channel being different than the first channel. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175252 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING NODES TO A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK WITHOUT USING A BRIDGE CONCEPT - A wireless station ( | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175253 | Frame format for random access response of wireless communication transmission - A frame format for random access response of wireless communication transmission is provided. The frame format comprises a header segment and a variable length data segment. The header segment includes one or more random access response subheader and 0 to N load control subheader. The variable length data segment including one or more random access response data payload corresponding to the one or more random access response subheader. The one or more random access response subheader includes a status indication field to represent a last random access response subheader, a load control subheader, a random access response data payload with a T-CRNTI field, or a random access response data payload without a T-CRNTI field. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175254 | Secure Integrated Mobile Internet Protocol Transit Case - A self-contained wireless internet protocol system includes a power supply converter for receiving input power of any type and converting the input power to a system power. A wireless local area network (WLAN) bridge and a wireless wide area network (WWAN) bridge contained within a case receives the system power. A mobile access router also receives the system power and facilitates data communications between the WLAN bridge and the WWAN bridge. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175255 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND BASE STATION DEVICES FOR MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION - A wireless terminal device and a wireless base station device can reduce power consumption required to transmit or receive data in a wireless manner. A frame sent from a wireless LAN terminal station, transfer source, is sent to another wireless LAN terminal station, transfer destination, on a transfer route indicated by routing information stored in a memory to establish a multi-hop communication with a wireless LAN base station. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090180447 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR MONITORING WIRELESS LINKS DURING TRANSMISSION GAPS - Provided is a communication system in which a wireless access network communicates with a mobile station via a wireless link. One of the mobile station and the wireless access network proposes a plurality of candidate transmission gap configurations to the other of the mobile station and the wireless access network, and the other selects one of the candidate transmission gap configurations. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180448 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND AD HOC ROUTE INFORMATION ACQUIRING METHOD - The invention is to provide a wireless commutation device which can maintain fairness of transmission powers for wireless communication devices in an ad hoc network and reduce processing load and power consumption of a wireless commutation device. In a case when receiving a communication request from the upper layer processing unit | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180449 | Mobile WLAN Gateway - A technique for operating a mobile station as wireless local-area network [“WLAN”] gateway. The mobile station is provided with a gateway application to control the following operations: activating ( | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180450 | INSERTION OF NULL PACKETS TO MITIGATE THE EFFECTS OF INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Mitigation of interference effects in certain wireless communications is accomplished by the disclosed method. A wireless communications device communicates utilizing a protocol which requires hopping from channel to channel within a communications frequency band while transmitting. Operating according to the disclosed method, the device scans the available communications channels and identifies channel(s) experiencing interference from other transmitting devices. When hopping to such identified channels, the device transmits only null packets, thus avoiding the need to re-transmit packets due to interference and mitigating the effects of such interference on the communications data rate. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180451 | APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF COORDINATING TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OPPORTUNITIES IN A COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE INCORPORATING MULTIPLE RADIOS - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of coordinating the allocation of transmission and reception availability and/or unavailability periods for use in a communications device incorporating collocated multiple radios. The mechanism provide both centralized and distributed coordination to enable the coordination (e.g., to achieve coexistence) of multiple radio access communication devices (RACDs) collocated in a single device such as a mobile station. A distributed activity coordinator modifies the activity pattern of multiple RACDs. The activity pattern comprises a set of radio access specific modes of operation, (e.g., IEEE 802.16 Normal, Sleep, Scan or Idle modes, 3GPP GSM/EDGE operation mode (PTM, IDLE, Connected, DTM modes), etc.) and a compatible set of wake-up events, such as reception and transmission availability periods. To prevent interference and possible loss of data, a radio access is prevented from transmitting or receiving data packets while another radio access is transmitting or receiving. In the event two or more RATs desire to be active at the same time, the mechanism negotiates an availability pattern between the MS and a corresponding BS to achieve coordination between the RATs. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090180452 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A communication terminal and method is provided for improving channel utilization efficiency in a wireless sensor network using contention-based channel access mechanism is disclosed. The communication method according to the present invention comprises initializing, when a packet transmission is required, a contention window to a size; resetting, when a channel is assessed to be busy, the size of the contention window in a hybrid expansion mode; and attempting, when the channel is assessed to be idle, the packet transmission through the channel. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090185542 | Method And Apparatus For Controlling Energy Expanding Of Sensor Network Nodes - Present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for controlling energy expanding of sensor network nodes, wherein the method comprises steps of: acquiring energy information, said energy information being indicative of an energy status of a node in the network; and adjusting at least one data transmission parameter accordingly based on the energy information. With present invention, on the premise that the communication capacity and power energy of sensor nodes are limited in a wireless sensor network, it is capable of efficiently utilize the network resource, save the power consumption of sensor node, and prolong the whole life of sensor network. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185543 | METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION BIT STREAMS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for transmitting system information bit streams of one or more base stations in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: identifying network-entry-related bit streams and non-network-entry-related bit streams from the system information bit streams, where the network-entry-related bit streams carry essential system information for a terminal to access a network through at least one of the base stations; modulating the network-entry-related bit streams according to a first set of modulation and coding schemes (MCSs) and modulating the non-network-entry-related bit streams according to a second set of MCSs; and transmitting the system information bit streams with different frequencies, where the network-entry-related bit streams are periodically transmitted according to a first predetermined period. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090190564 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE HOME AGENT - A technique is disclosed to decrease unnecessary routing during communication between a mobile node and a correspondent node in case a home agent of the mobile node is a mobile home agent. According to this technique, HA | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090196265 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A VISITED NETWORK - The present invention is aimed to provide a mechanism whereby a roaming user can select a visited network allowed for roaming by the home network operator among a plurality of visited networks accessible through an access network. Therefore, the present invention provides a new method, a new roaming device likely embedded in another network entity and enhanced user equipment whereby the home network, upon a user equipment indication, may submit towards the user equipment a list of allowed or preferred visited networks as well as selection criteria for selecting one visited network from the list. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196266 | Method and apparatuses for mobile communication - According to an embodiment, an apparatus such as a femto base station may include a transmitter to send via a local network an information to a mobile network for informing on an active state of apparatus. The apparatus may be configured to send the information when being switched on, or on a periodical or repeated basis in a switched-on state of the apparatus. A macro base station may add the femto base station to a network configuration list. Respective methods are also provided. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196267 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING LOCATION BASED SERVICES (LBS) UTILIZING WLAN AND/OR GPS SIGNALS FOR SEAMLESS INDOOR AND OUTDOOR TRACKING - Systems and methods for tracking a wireless device are disclosed. According to one aspect, the wireless device includes a hybrid global positioning system (GPS) and wireless local area network (WLAN) circuit board for seamless indoor and outdoor tracking. In embodiments, GPS and WLAN data are combined to obtain a position estimate of the device. In other embodiments, the circuit board automatically switches between WLAN and GPS data for indoor and outdoor environments. A Location Based Services (LBS) algorithm for determining the position of a wireless device using WLAN and/or GPS signals is also disclosed. The LBS algorithm is implemented by way of method steps including: sensing GPS and/or WLAN signals, measuring and/or converting the sensed signals to obtain distance data, fusing the distance data, and applying one or more approximation algorithms to the distance data to obtain a position estimate of the wireless device. A method for rendering position data using a Marching Cubes algorithm is further disclosed. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196268 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDICATING A SUBSCRIBER'S ZONE WITHIN CONVERGED TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system and related method provide a registration request via an access point, wherein the access point is associated with a defined service zone. In response, an authorization signal to access telecommunications services is received. The authorization signal includes service zone name data for the service zone and/or at least one service zone icon indicator for the service zone. Further details are described herein. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090201895 | Telecommunications - In a MIPv6 network, a mobile home agent (MHA) in a foreign network (FN) acts as an intermediate node between a mobile node (MN) and a correspondent node (CN) and allocates itself a secondary care-of address (SCoA) different from the care-of address (CoA) of the mobile node (MN), with a one-to-one relationship between the secondary care-of address (SCoA) and the home address (HAddr) of the mobile node. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201896 | DATA SHARING BASED ON PROXIMITY-BASED AD HOC NETWORK - A system and method is described for constructing a proximity-based ad hoc network among a plurality of sensor-enabled devices and for using such a network to facilitate data sharing among users of those devices (referred to herein for simplicity as “sensors”). The system and method advantageously enables data to be shared among co-located sensors in a manner that does not require local connections or communication among those sensors and that protects user privacy. The system and method also beneficially enables data to be transferred among heterogeneous sensor types that would otherwise be incapable of detecting and/or communicating with each other. The system and method may perform user-initiated data transfer as well as automatic data transfer responsive to sensor proximity and other factors, such as commonality of user interests or activities or membership in a social network. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201897 | CLASSIFICATION PROCESS INVOLVING MOBILE STATIONS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. In an example embodiment, a method may comprise receiving data from a home agent, wherein the data is directed to a mobile station that is coupled with a foreign network and the data includes an outer header having a foreign network address associated with the mobile station and an encapsulated header having a home network address associated with the mobile station; reading the encapsulated header to determine the home network address; and performing data classification using at least the home network address of the encapsulated header. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201898 | End-to-End Packet Aggregation in Mesh Networks - A packet aggregation system. In particular implementations, a method includes accessing one or more transmit queues, each corresponding to a wireless client associated with a given wireless mesh access point of a plurality of mesh access points. The method further includes selecting a mesh access point of the plurality of mesh access points and selecting a transmit queue corresponding to a wireless client associated with the selected mesh access point. The method further includes aggregating packets that are destined for the selected wireless client, up to a size limit, taking into account the path to the selected mesh point as well as quality of service constraints, and composing and transmitting the aggregated packet to the selected mesh access point. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201899 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method includes identifying, at a first wireless node, routing costs associated with routing data to a destination through multiple paths in a wireless network. The method also includes identifying, at the first wireless node, information propagation values associated with the first wireless node and at least one second wireless node. The information propagation values are based on the routing costs and wireless link qualities associated with the wireless nodes. The method further includes scheduling transmission of the data by the first wireless node based on the information propagation values and transmitting the data based on the scheduling. The routing costs may include potential values associated with distances of the wireless nodes from the destination. Also, the information propagation values indicate which of the wireless nodes have a greater chance of propagating the data towards the destination in a single broadcast. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201900 | Radio Base Station, Relay Station, Radio Relay System, And Radio Relay Method - A radio base station for performing communication with a radio terminal via a relay station, including a radio frame generation unit which generates a radio frame including a signal relay region allocated in the relay station to transmit received data with predetermined delay from the radio terminal or the radio base station to the radio base station or the radio terminal respectively, and a data relay region allocated in the relay station to perform demodulation and decode, further encode and modulation processing for receive data and to transmit from the radio terminal or the radio base station to the radio base station or the radio terminal respectively; and a transmission unit which transmits the generated radio frame to the relay station. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201901 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090207816 | Method for Ensuring the Service Platform the Acquisition of the User Terminal Information Under Multiple Application Protocols - The present invention discloses a method for ensuring the service platform the acquisition of the user terminal information under multiple application protocols, wherein client terminal service connection software is set in the user terminal or the user card, and said client terminal service connection software has service connection user interface and is able to inspect and control the mobile service connection carried out by the mobile terminal. By adding the step of sending the general application protocol request to the proxy server before the service request of the user terminal, it is ensured that the service platform is still capable of acquiring the user's cellphone number without upgrading the proxy server, so that it avoids the problem of frequent upgrading for equipments caused by new application protocol's appearance, increases the adaptability to the upgrading of application protocols, decreases the network rebuilding cost, increases the flexibility of the management for terminals, and improves the service serving level and the user's feelings. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207817 | Policy-Based Data Routing For A Multi-Mode Device - Communication devices capable of at least two communication modes (e.g. WLAN, WMAN and WWAN and/or wired modes) can be configured to optimize communications using a policy-based mechanism to configure connections and routes. A rules engine evaluates its policies on a state change (e.g. network availability, time of day, etc.) to configure a routing table and, together with communication APIs, provides an appropriate connection to an application for its respective communications. Policies may be responsive to various factors such as Radio Access Technology (high/low bandwidth), cost, presence, time of day, location, application type and quality of service (QoS) requirements among others to optimize communications. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207818 | PACKET DECODING FOR H-ARQ TRANSMISSION - Techniques for efficiently decoding packets sent with H-ARQ are described. Packet decoding for H-ARQ may be performed based on local search around a start of packet (SOP) decision for a packet. The SOP decision for the packet may be made based on traffic detection results for received transmissions. At least one SOP hypothesis may be determined for the packet based on the SOP decision, and the received transmissions may be decoded based on the at least one SOP hypothesis. A sliding SOP window may be used to keep track of SOP hypotheses for the packet. The sliding window may be initialized at an earliest received transmission, moved forward for each subsequent received transmission with no detected packet data, and maintained at the first received transmission with detected traffic. Rotating buffers may be used to store received transmissions for packets for decoding. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207819 | MOBILE STATION AS A GATEWAY FOR MOBILE TERMINALS TO AN ACCESS NETWORK, AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING THE MOBILE STATION AND THE MOBILE TERMINALS IN A NETWORK - A mobile station is designed, as a gateway for one or several mobile terminals, to establish a connection between the mobile terminal(s) and an access network. The mobile station supports a network-based mobility management such that the mobile station acts as a client instead of the mobile terminals during communication with a home agent of a home network or intermediate network connected to the access network in the framework of a mobile IP connection. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207820 | TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKETS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for retransmitting data packets in a network. Further, the invention relates to an adapted system for performing the method. To improve the robustness in the transmission of an acknowledgment message by a mobile terminal to the network, while minimizing a signaling overhead, the invention provides mechanisms that optimize the retransmission of data packets and manage acknowledgement messages. The mechanisms disclosed are particular applicable to heterogeneous radio access networks. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207821 | MAINTAINING PREFIX CONSISTENCY IN DYNAMIC MOVING NETWORKS - The present invention relates to arrangements providing a solution for maintaining prefix consistency in dynamic (splitting and merging) moving networks and reducing the negative consequences of splits and mergers. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207822 | Method for transmitting and receiving signals using collaborative MIMO scheme - A method for reducing inter-cell interference and a method for transmitting a signal by a collaborative MIMO scheme, in a communication system having a multi-cell environment are disclosed. An example of a method for transmitting, by a mobile station, precoding information in a collaborative MIMO communication system includes determining a precoding matrix set including precoding matrices of one more base stations including a serving base station, based on signal strength of the serving base station, and transmitting information about the precoding matrix set to the serving base station. A mobile station in an edge of a cell performs a collaborative MIMO mode or inter-cell interference mitigation mode using the information about the precoding matrix set collaboratively with neighboring base stations. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207823 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SELECTIVE MOBILITY INVOCATION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes invoking a mobile access gateway function based on an end user requesting an Internet Protocol (IP) address in a wireless or a wireline network. The invocation is selective such that the mobile access gateway function is invoked if the end user requires IP mobility services. The method also includes communicating with a gateway in order to obtain the IP address. The mobile access gateway function is coupled to a network element that receives packets for a communications flow from the end user that can conduct the flow through the wireless network and through the wireline network. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207824 | Wireless Access Point Device - A wireless (such as Wi-Fi or similar) access point is included in or attached to a device, such as a cellular phone, WiMAX device, other mobile device, etc. One or more wireless units wirelessly access a communication network (and in some cases the Internet) through the wireless access point device. Additionally, such a wireless access point device can receive a transmission from a wireless tag that has been attached to an object to be monitored and can forward information from the wireless tag to a target device along with location information. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207825 | MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN WIRELESS LAN - A media access control (MAC) apparatus and corresponding methods for guaranteeing quality-of-service in a wireless local area network (LAN) are presented. The MAC method includes the steps of extracting, performing, determining, a first transmitting step, and a second transmitting step. The extracting step includes extracting a user priority from a frame received from an upper layer and separately storing a voice frame and a non-voice frame according to an access category (AC). The performing step includes independently performing backoff operations for the voice frame and the non-voice frame. The determining step includes determining whether the backoff operations for the voice frame and the non-voice frame have simultaneously ended. The first transmitting step includes transmitting the voice frame having a higher priority first and performing the backoff operation for the non-voice frame if the backoff operations have simultaneously ended. The second transmitting step includes transmitting a frame whose backoff operation ends if the backoff operations have not simultaneously ended. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207826 | Simultaneous Operation of Wireless LAN and Long-Range Wireless Connections - A method for communication includes establishing a first connection between a wireless terminal and a base station of a long-range wireless data network, which operates in accordance with a first protocol that defines a sequence of time frames for transmission of data between the wireless terminal and the base station. A signal is sent from the wireless terminal to the base station identifying an interval including one or more of the time frames during which the wireless terminal will not receive data from the base station. During the interval, a second connection is established between the wireless terminal and an access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) in accordance with a second protocol, different from the first protocol. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207827 | HIGH DATA THROUGHPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVER - A method for receiving a frame in a high data throughput wireless local area network begins by receiving a preamble of the frame via a channel in accordance with a default receiver filter mask. The processing continues by validating the preamble. The processing continues by, when the preamble is validated, interpreting the preamble to determine a high data throughput channel configuration. The processing continues by reconfiguring the default receiver filter mask in accordance with the high data throughput channel configuration to produce a reconfigured receiver filter mask. The processing continues by receiving a data segment of the frame in accordance with the reconfigured receiver filter mask. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207828 | TRANSPARENT SESSION INITIATED PROTOCOL - Method and apparatus employing a transparent session initiation protocol (SIP) technique for communication especially between a user device in one domain and an application/service provided in an external domain. The transparent SIP technique is usable in wired or wireless systems such as 3G systems and wireless local area networks (WLANs). | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090213819 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INITIATING WLAN SERVICE USING BEACON SIGNALS - An access point transmits a beacon signal when a multimode communication device is within a maximum proximity of the access point. A wireless wide area network (WWAN) receiver in the access point monitors a WWAN uplink channel used by the multimode wireless communication device to communicate with a WWAN base station. The access point determines, or at least estimates, a proximity of the multimode communication device to the access point based on a received WWAN uplink signal transmitted by the multimode wireless communication device. If the proximity is less than a proximity threshold, the access point transmits the beacon signal. The beacon signal at least indicates the presence of the access point and, in some circumstances, includes instructions or information to assist in a handoff from the WWAN to the WLAN. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213820 | Appending a Ranging Waveform to a Frame to Maintain Communication Protocol Interoperability - A technique is provided to enable a ranging-enhanced communication device that operates according to a legacy communication protocol to transmit a ranging waveform that is not defined in, or part of, the rules of the legacy communication protocol. In one embodiment, a ranging-enhanced communication device that is to transmit the ranging waveform generates information representing a time interval within which to wirelessly transmit a ranging waveform that is not defined by a legacy communication protocol. This information is encoded into a field of a frame that is formatted according to the legacy communication protocol to protect the time interval from transmissions by legacy communication devices that operate according to the legacy communication protocol. The ranging-enhanced communication device transmits the frame and transmits the ranging waveform during the time interval following the frame. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213821 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A WAKE UP RATE OF NODES OPERATING WITHIN A MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided which enables the connection of nodes out of communication range while minimizing the energy consumption in standby nodes. Specifically, the present invention provides a method to control the wake up rate of standby nodes in a multi-hop communication system. An access point collects, processes, and refines statistical information regarding one or more system parameters; determines a wake up rate based on the statistical information and one or more historical information; and transmits the wake up rate to nodes in its coverage area. A node receives the wake up rate; and periodically changes from a sleep state to a wake up state at the wake up rate to support routing functions for providing multi-hop communication to the one or more access points. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213822 | METHOD FOR DATA COLLECTION AND SUPERVISION IN WIRELESS NODE NETWORKS - A wireless networking method includes providing a plurality of different sets of wireless links and a plurality of wireless nodes. The nodes are in mutual bidirectional wireless communication via the wireless links. Each of the links enables the communication between a respective pair of the nodes. Information is transmitted to a selected one of the nodes from each of other ones of the nodes via a first of the sets of the wireless links. The step of transmitting information to the selected one of the nodes from each of other ones of the nodes is repeated via each of other ones of the sets of the wireless links, respectively. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213823 | NETWORK GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR RELOCATING THE SAME - A method for relocating network gateways comprises the steps of obtaining a moving average of drop ratios and setting the duration of the next detection interval based on the moving average of drop ratios, and requesting at least one mobile station to perform a CSN mobility management procedure when the moving average of drop ratios exceeds a high drop ratio. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213824 | Wireless local area network packet transmitting and receiving system - A wireless local area network transmitting and receiving system includes a network driver interface, a random network layer, an infrastructure layer, a packet format conversion module and a distributed module. The packet format conversion module provides the wireless local area network with bridges to receive and convert wireless local area packets of the infrastructure layer, and then executes processes of transmitting and receiving the wireless local area network packets instructed by the network driver interface. The distribution module is connected to the infrastructure layer and the random network layer and then transmits the wireless local area network packets. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213825 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF A BASE STATION - Methods and apparatus for controlling transmission of a base station, such as a Femto cell, based on the determined quality of a backhaul connection to a network are disclosed. In particular, a quality of a backhaul connection of a base station to a node in a communication network is determined. Based on this quality determination, transmission from the base station is either limited or stopped when the determined quality fails to meet a predefined condition. The degradation in quality of the backhaul connection, for example, affects the ability of the base station to offer sufficient service to access terminals. By limiting or stopping wireless transmission of the base station when the backhaul quality is degraded, access terminals either currently accessing the base station or attempting to connect to the base station can then more efficaciously hand off to another base station or access point. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213826 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING SHORT MESSAGES IN AN IMS - The present invention discloses a method for delivering short messages in an IMS. The method includes: The sender encapsulates multiple concatenated short message segments into an IMS message, and sends the IMS message to the receiver. The present invention also discloses a system and apparatus for delivering short messages in an IMS. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the receiver can obtain a complete short message upon receiving the message. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213827 | Dual-Function Wireless Data Terminal - Apparatus for communication includes at least one RF receiver circuit, which is coupled to receive and downconvert first and second RF signals that are transmitted respectively over different, first and second wireless networks in accordance with different, first and second network protocols, so as to output first and second downconverted signals. A baseband processing circuit includes processing components that are coupled to receive and process the first and second downconverted signals so as to extract first and second data from the signals. The processing components have a first configuration for demodulating the first downconverted signals in accordance with the first network protocol and a second configuration for demodulating the second downconverted signals in accordance with the second network protocol. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213828 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK-BASED POSITION LOCATING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - The location of one or more mobile nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN) is determined. Nodes in the WLAN include respective ping drivers to generate ping event values related to transmit count stamps and receive count stamps for wireless messages exchanged between the nodes. Each wireless message is associated with a transmit offset corresponding to an expected transmit time. A sorting module groups the ping event values and produces a difference between the respective receive count stamps and the transmit count stamps for each wireless message. Based on the sorted ping event values, the sorting module generates transmit offset values relating to the transmit offsets. A space-time calibration unit generates, from the sorted differences and the transmit offset values, a clock rate solution and a location solution for at least one of the nodes in the WLAN. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090219898 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR INCREASING THE ROBUSTNESS OR THE CAPACITY OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The invention relates to a method for increasing the capacity of a wireless communications system comprising at least two users U | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219899 | Method for Interfacing a Second Communication Network Comprising an Access Node with a First Communication Network Comprising a Contact Node - An operational method interfaces a second communication network containing an access node with a first communication network encompassing a contact node. In a first step, an access node reads or receives an identity which is specific for the second communication network and is stored in a storage medium of a memory node. Then an interfacing message containing the identity that is specific for the second communication network is transmitted from the access node to the contact node, which is defined by an address stored in the storage medium. A packet data service to the access node is supplied by the contact node such that the second communication network is interfaced with the first communication network. An assembly and a storage medium are provided for interfacing the second communication network with the first communication network. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219900 | Method, System and Arrangements for Setting Up and Maintaining a WLAN Connection within predictably moving vehicles - Setting up and maintaining wireless communication connections with end user's terminals ( | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219901 | Wireless Content Aquisition for Mobile Electronic Devices - Improved methods, computer readable media and systems that facilitate data acquisition by mobile electronic devices are disclosed. One aspect pertains to content acquisition between mobile electronic devices that are within range of a local wireless network. Another aspect pertains to content acquisition by mobile electronic devices capable of communicating across a peer-to-peer wireless network. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219902 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio communication terminal device, a radio communication control station device, and a radio communication method capable of effectively managing a radio resource allocated to a terminal and context such as registration information when the terminal compatible with a plurality of different RATs moves between the RATs. According to them, when the WLAN Network control unit ( | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219903 | MILLIMETER-WAVE REFLECTOR ANTENNA SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING USING MILLIMETER-WAVE SIGNALS - Embodiments of millimeter-wave chip-array reflector antenna system are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. In some embodiments, the millimeter-wave chip-array reflector antenna system includes a millimeter-wave reflector to shape and reflect an incident antenna beam and a chip-array antenna comprising an array of antenna elements to direct the incident antenna beam at the surface of the reflector to provide a reflected antenna beam. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219904 | Method and apparatus for enabling coexistence of plurality of communication technologies on communication device - A method and apparatus for enabling coexistence of a plurality of communication technologies on a communication device is provided. The method includes receiving one or more first communication events from a first communication technology of the plurality of communication technologies. The method further includes converting the one or more first communication events to one or more second communication events for one or more second communication technologies of the plurality of communication technologies. Converting emulates one or more first peer to peer communication links of the one or more first communication technologies as one or more second peer to peer communication links of the one or more second communication technologies. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219905 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COLLISION DETECTION - Collisions in a wireless network are detected and resolved through the use of transmissions by access points in the network. In some aspects, each access point may select a resource from a set of resources and transmit an indication of a unique identifier (e.g., a long identifier) of that access point on the selected resource. In some aspects, each access point may select a bit and append that bit to a reused identifier (e.g., a short identifier) of that access point to provide a channelization parameter that is used to channelize signals transmitted by the access point. The selection by a given access point may be based on a unique identifier assigned to that access point. The selection by a given access point may be a pseudorandom selection (e.g., based on a corresponding unique identifier). Another node (e.g., an access terminal) in the network may identify a collision based on the transmissions by the access points. In this case, the node may transmit an indication of the collision to cause one of the access points to cease transmitting. The node may then inform one colliding access point of the existence and identity of the other colliding access point to enable the access points to resolve the collision. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090232114 | PRIORITY-BASED MULTIMEDIA STREAM TRANSMISSIONS - A method is provided that accesses a priority and a multimedia stream to be transmitted. The priority then is embedded within the multimedia stream. The multimedia stream thereafter is transmitted. Another method is provided that receives the multimedia stream that includes the priority. Here, another priority is accessed and both priorities are compared. The control of multimedia stream transmissions to other communication devices is based on this comparison. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232115 | SUPPORTING COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING AN IP ADDRESS - An apparatus for wireless communications and method for the same are provided. The apparatus is configured receive an identifier associated with a first node, determine an IP address of the first node from the identifier, and use the IP address to communicate data with the first node through a second node, wherein the data relates to managing air link resources of the first node. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232116 | MECHANISM TO AVOID INTERFERENCE AND IMPROVE CHANNEL EFFICIENCY IN MMWAVE WPANS - Briefly, a mechanism to avoid interference and improve channel efficiency in mmWave Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs) is disclosed. According to an embodiment of the present invention, neighbor devices can identify whether a certain high rate channel is being used or not through a communication on another channel, and thus avoidance actions may be taken by neighbor devices even if they do not receive signals from the high rate channel. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232117 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD - A mobile phone terminal acquires and stores therein current position information thereof from a public wireless base station. The mobile phone terminal reads out a profile name corresponding to the acquired position information from a public wireless base station WLAN profile association table, and sets the read WLAN profile as a scan profile. Then, the mobile phone terminal scans the wireless LAN access point with the set WLAN profile when the mobile phone terminal is out of the WLAN service area. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232118 | COORDINATED UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN LTE DRX OPERATIONS FOR A WIRELESS TRANSMIT RECEIVE UNIT - A method and apparatus for discontinuous reception (DRX) operation in a wireless transmit receive unit aligns uplink and downlink transmissions with a DRX cycle. The transmission may be a channel quality indicator report, a sounding reference signal, or a silence descriptor among other downlink and uplink transmissions. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232119 | METHOD OF UPDATING PROXY INFORMATION - A method of updating proxy information in a mesh network is provided. The method includes transmitting a first multi-hop management frame from a source mesh point (MP) to a destination MP, the first multi-hop management frame comprising a proxy update information element (IE) to update the source MP's proxy information, and receiving a second multi-hop management frame from the destination MP, the second multi-hop management frame comprising a proxy update confirmation IE in response to the first multi-hop management frame. When proxy information updated, flooding overhead may be released. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090238157 | Enhanced scanning for access entities - The invention proposes a method for detecting an access entity in a network comprising the access entity and a device for wireless communication, wherein the detection is performed with respect to a changeable parameter, and for each specified parameter the following steps are performed: buffering data packets to be transmitted between the device for wireless communication and the access entity, performing the scan process, by the device for wireless communication, based on the specified parameter, and transmitting the buffered packets between the device for wireless communication and the access entity. The invention also proposes a corresponding device for wireless communication. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238158 | Packet Fragment Adaptation for Improved Coexistence - This disclosure relates to transmitting wireless packets between multiple stations and changing the duration or fragmentation of the packets. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238159 | Mobile communication system and communication control method - A mobile communication system for connecting a terminal to service networks includes a wireless access network device, a gateway device, and a mobility management device. The wireless access network device connects to the terminal. The gateway device establishes a plurality of tunnels connecting the terminal to the service networks and switches the plurality of tunnels according to a request. The mobility management device sends to the gateway device the request to collectively switch the plurality of tunnels. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238160 | Hybrid Multiple Access Method and System in Wireless Networks with extended Content Free Access Period - A method for communicating in a network including a coordinator node and a set of leaf nodes transmits periodically, from the coordinator node to the set of leaf nodes, a beacon defining a superframe, wherein the supper frame includes an active period and an inactive period, and wherein the active period includes a first contention access period (CAP- | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238161 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING WIRELESS BASE STATIONS - A system for detecting wireless base stations and a method thereof are provided. The system includes a detection module, a count module, a storage module, and a switch module. The method includes sending a detection request to a channel, determining whether a wireless base station corresponding to the channel physically exits, and whether the channel is detected, based on a detection response returned by the channel; returning a detection response; calculating the sum of the detection request and the detection response so as to create a count result to be stored in the storage module; and switching directly from the wireless base station currently in use and the corresponding channel to the next undetected channel and a corresponding wireless base station, based on the count result. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238162 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless base station according to an aspect of the present invention is one of a plurality of base stations each forming a wireless area and communicating with a mobile station within the wireless area. The wireless base station includes a reception unit configured to receive a connect request from a mobile station that exists within the wireless area; an information acquirer configured to acquire connection history information indicating connection history to a base station which was connected by the mobile station in the past; a condition storage configured to store a connection permission condition to permit connection with the mobile station; a judgment unit configured to judge whether or not the connection permission condition is satisfied based on the connection history information; and a reporting unit configured to report a message of connection permission to the mobile station when the connection permission condition is satisfied. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238163 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AND OPTIMIZING THROUGHPUT OF SHORT RANGE WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and systems for determining and optimizing a throughput of a short range wireless network are provided. The method mainly includes acquiring respective time parameters in a contention access period based on information transmission characteristics of the short range wireless network; and computing and optimizing the throughput of the short range wireless network based on the respective time parameters. These time parameters are determined based on a non-persistent Carrier Sense Multiple Access CSMA mechanism. Therefore, the present invention employs a non-persistent CSMA mechanism to analyze the CAP of a short range wireless network and thus simplifies complexity in determining the network throughput and the analysis process of network optimization. As such, accurate throughput parameters of the standard network of the short range wireless network may be obtained, the network performance may be optimized and the performance of the short range wireless network is improved. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238164 | ADAPTIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND ACCESS POINT - The embodiments of the present disclosure disclose an adaptive communication system, communication method, communication terminal and Access Point (AP). The system includes: an application mode information obtaining module, configured to obtain information about the application mode supported by the network; and an AP, configured to: provide a communication terminal with application mode information obtained by the application mode information obtaining module, wherein the application mode information indicates the application mode supported by the network; and create a communication connection with the communication terminal based on the application mode negotiated and determined according to the information about the application mode supported by the communication terminal and the information about the application mode supported by the network. The embodiments of the present disclosure may make the most of the access resources, improve the success ratio of access, and reduce unnecessary delay and power consumption. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090245214 | Selecting uplink sounding sub-carriers - A method and apparatus of selecting a number of uplink sounding sub-carriers are disclosed. One method includes estimating an uplink channel of between a base station and a subscriber. A time domain channel response is determined from the estimated uplink channel. A sub-carrier distribution of uplink sounding sub-carriers is selected based on characteristics of the time domain channel response, wherein the distribution defines a spacing of pilot sub-carriers within the uplink sounding symbol. The subscriber transmits uplink sounding symbols having the selected sub-carrier distribution. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245215 | Mobile Communication Terminal, Mode Switching Method, and Network Switching Method - In order to input/output only necessary information in accordance with the form of application, a mobile phone includes: a wireless circuit | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245216 | COEXISTENCE MECHANISM FOR WIMAX AND IEEE 802.11 - A network device includes a first communication module and a second communication module. The first communication module communicates with a first device using a first wireless communication standard. The first communication module receives data from the first device during a first time period and transmits data to the first device during a second time period. The second communication module communicates with a second device using a second wireless communication standard. The second communication module receives a block of packets from the second device during the first time period. The second communication module transmits an acknowledgement to the second device during the second time period when the block of the packets is received. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245217 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - An information processing apparatus includes a storage unit including plural memory banks, a wireless communication unit for executing the wireless communication process, a communication quality information storage unit for storing the communication quality information indicating the communication quality of the wireless communication unit in the case where one of the plural memory banks is used, a memory bank selection unit for selecting the memory bank based on the communication quality information stored in the communication quality information storage unit in the case where the wireless communication process is executed by the wireless communication unit, and a memory bank switching unit for switching to the memory bank selected by the memory bank selection unit. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090252126 | SELECTING PORTALS TO SERVICE NETWORK TRANSMISSIONS - A system, apparatus, and method to dynamically select and establish connections with portals of a mesh network are described herein. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252127 | BUILDING WIRELESS ROUTING STRUCTURES USING OUT OF BAND SIGNALING - In an example embodiment, an access point (AP) uses out-of-band signaling on a single non-DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection) frequency band radio in an N-radio system to synchronize information with neighboring APs and to learn about their radio interfaces. This enables the AP to be able to acquire information about neighbor APs on different frequency bands and to build and maintain mesh routing structures while minimizing backhaul down-time. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252128 | MULTI-TRANSCEIVER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHODS FOR OPERATING DURING DEVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - Embodiments of a multi-transceiver wireless communication device and methods for operating during device discovery and connection establishment are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the multi-transceiver wireless communication device includes a broadband wireless access network (BWAN) transceiver and a short-range frequency-hopping (SRFH) transceiver. The SRFH transceiver transmits a non-continuous sequence of either page or inquiry trains to either discover or establish an initial connection with a SRFH device when an active BWAN connection exists with a base station. The non-continuous sequence of trains may include a regularly repeating vacant transmission interval selected to coincide with listen intervals of frames when the BWAN transceiver is in sleep mode. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252129 | Known station hidden network discovery - A method includes storing a table that contains identifications of certain ones of network devices and, when operating a wireless network access node in a hidden mode of operation, transmitting a probe response only to a probe request that is received from a network device having an identification stored in the table. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252130 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING CLIENT-HOST ASSOCIATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In embodiments, a one-to-one association is established between a client and a host in a wireless network, such as a wireless local area network or a wireless personal communication network. The client may be a display device. The host may be a cellular telephone. Active association corresponds to the host exclusively using a shared resource of the client. When the association is solid, requests from other hosts to establish an active association are denied. When the association is fragile, such requests are granted. In the case of a semi-solid association, a request from another host to establish an active association causes the client to generate a query to the host currently owning the active association. If the host currently owning the association grants a release, a new active association is established between the requesting host and the client. Otherwise, the request from the other host is denied. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252131 | RADIO TERMINAL AND BASE STATION SEARCH METHOD BY MEANS OF RADIO TERMINAL - Provided is a base station search method by means of a radio terminal that includes an out-of-zone power saving base station search control function that, by setting a timer, sequentially extends an interval of a base station search during which the radio terminal returns to a communication zone after moving outside a communication zone from an initial interval. According to this base station search method, when a predetermined change of state is detected in the radio terminal during execution of a base station search, the timer is reset, an interval of the base station search is returned to the initial interval, and the base station search is resumed. If the predetermined change of state is detected again before a predetermined time elapses from the moment of resetting the timer due to detecting the predetermined change of state, the base station search is continued without resetting the timer. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252132 | SELECTIVE BEARER ESTABLISHMENT IN E-UTRAN/EPS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate selectively and simultaneously establishing multiple bearers in wireless communication networks. A core network entity in a wireless network can transmit a bearer establishment request to an access point comprising a list of bearers to establish with a related mobile device. The bearer establishment request comprising list of bearers includes separate non-access stratum (NAS) messages corresponding to each bearer in the list. The separate NAS messages can be linked to each bearer entry in the list. The access point can receive the list and attempt to initialize one or more radio bearers in the list. Since the NAS messages individually correspond to a given bearer, the access point can forward NAS messages to the mobile device only for bearers that are successfully initialized allowing selective establishment thereof. In addition, the access point can provide initialization status for the individual bearers to the core network. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252133 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS GATEWAY HAVING PLURAL USER PLANE AGWS - In a mobile communication system including an access gateway (AGW) comprising a C-AGW for handling control messages and a plurality of U-AGWs for forwarding data packets, the C-AGW is provided with a management table indicating an address of U-AGW to be an endpoint of tunnel, in association with each of mobile station IDs. When a tunnel setup request message including a mobile station ID is received from one of base stations, the C-AGW searches the management table for the address of U-AGW corresponding to the mobile station ID and notifies the base station of the U-AGW address, and if the mobile station ID is not found in the management table, the C-AGW notifies the base station of an address of a particular U-AGW selected out of the U-AGWs, so that the base station establishes a tunnel for forwarding data packets toward the notified U-AGW. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252134 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile broadband routable internet (MBRI) providing for carrier-grade, networked, broadband, IP-routable communication among a plurality of mobile devices, where the mobile devices may represent a plurality of nodes that are linked together through a mobile ad-hoc network (MANET). Mobile devices may operate as peers in a peer-to-peer network, with full IP routing capabilities enabled within each mobile device, thereby allowing routing of IP-based traffic, including deployment of applications, to the mobile device without need for infrastructure conventionally required for mobile ad hoc networks, such as cellular telephony infrastructure. Full IP-routing to mobile devices may allow seamless integration to the fixed Internet, such as through fixed or mobile access points, such as for backhaul purposes. Thus, the MBRI may function as a standalone mobile Internet, without connection to the fixed Internet, or as an IP-routable extension of another network, whether it be the Internet, a local area network, a wide area network, a cellular network, a personal area network, or some other type of network that is capable of integration with an IP-based network. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252135 | EFFICIENT POWER MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method of providing power management in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is presented. The method includes receiving a Traffic Indication Map (TIM) at a station, indicating the presence of buffered frames, associated with any AC, for the station at an Access Point (AP). The method further includes sending, by the station, one of an uplink data frame if one is buffered, and a null frame to retrieve the buffered frames from said AP. The station remains awake to receive frames from the AP until a downlink frame is received containing an indication that it is the last frame to be transmitted in the service period. The method may further include determining at the end of service period whether there are more frames remaining buffered for the station at the AP. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252136 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY ROUTING INFORMATION - A hierarchical communication system is described in which two wireless local area networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed to link inherently portable or mobile computer devices. A series of radio base stations make up a infrastructure network. The infrastructure network and at least one portable computer device make up the first local area network. The communication on the first local area network is accomplished by spread spectrum frequency hopping communication A second local area network allows for radio communication between a portable computer device and peripheral devices with built-in transceivers utilized by the portable computer device. The communication in each local area network is controlled by a reservation access communication protocol. The communication protocol facilitates frequency hopping synchronization and supports adaptive data rate selection based upon the quality of communication on the communication channel. The communication protocol prevents interference between communication on the first local area network and communication on the second local area network. In a premises LAN, a series of radio base stations and a backbone LAN make up an infrastructure network. The infrastructure network and at least one mobile computing device make up a higher-power LAN, utilizing a frequency hopping protocol. A lower-power LAN allows for radio communication between a mobile computing device and peripheral devices, utilizing a single-frequency spread spectrum protocol. A vehicular LAN provides for short-range communication between a vehicle terminal and a portable terminal. When out of direct RF range of the premises LAN, the vehicle terminal maintains indirect communication when necessary with the premises LAN via one of several alternate RF channels. A microprocessor, located inside radio units which participate in multiple LAN's, selects the appropriate protocol, frequency band and power level for communicating through the network. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252137 | SCANNING FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS WITH VARIABLE SCAN RATE - A wireless communication terminal includes a radio frequency (RF) transceiver and a baseband processing circuit, which is arranged to detect an indication of a rate of movement of the terminal. The baseband processing circuit is coupled to cause the RF transceiver to scan periodically for access points that are available to communicate with the mobile terminal at a scan rate that is selected responsively to the indication, and upon detecting an available access point, to establish a wireless connection between the terminal and the available access point. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252138 | ESTIMATION OF SPEED AND DIRECTION OF TRAVEL IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE POSITION ESTIMATIONS - A method for estimating the speed and bearing of a Wi-Fi enabled device using WLAN radio signals in a WLAN based location service is provided. A method used to estimate a speed of travel of a Wi-Fi enabled device comprises the Wi-Fi enabled device receiving signals transmitted by Wi-Fi access points in range of the Wi-Fi enabled device, and using the signals to estimate the speed of and/or direction of travel of the Wi-Fi enabled device. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090257412 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK REGISTRATION BY A MOBILE STATION DURING NETWORK CONGESTION - Systems and methods for providing mobile stations (“MS”) registration to a generic access network (“GAN”) via a wireless LAN interface are disclosed. The MS may receive a rejection message from a GAN controller with a “network congestion” indication set. The MS may also receive a “connection status” information element as part of the rejection message. The MS can determine from the information element whether the MS can release the connections made to a security gateway (“SEGW”) and to the GAN controller and whether it can release its WLAN connection facility. When the MS releases these connections, battery power is conserved while performing a timer decrement loop. At the end of the timer decrement loop, the MS makes another registration request. The network can reallocate resources when the MS releases the connections to the SEGW and the GAN controller. Methods for performing the GAN registration during network congestions are described. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257413 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING CHANNEL MEASUREMENTS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and system for facilitating channel measurements in a communication network is disclosed. The method includes contending for a control channel to reserve a logical subchannel of a data channel. The control channel operates in a first frequency band and the data channel operates in a second frequency band. Further, the method includes sending an announce message on the control channel for announcing a reservation at a particular time period of the logical subchannel of the data channel when the contention for the control channel is successful, sending a channel sense message on the logical subchannel of the data channel at the particular time period to facilitate at least one other node to perform channel measurements based on the channel sense message, and monitoring the data channel and performing channel measurements based on at least one other channel sense message received from the at least one other node. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257414 | Heterogeneous MAC protocol for multiple base stations in wireless networks - This disclosure describes a new Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations which addresses the need to transport high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257415 | Heterogeneous MAC protocol for multiple base stations in wireless networks - This disclosure describes a new interference avoidance Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations which addresses additional interference elimination and the need to transport high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257416 | ACCESS POINT - An access point has a connection to a wide area network, and is configured to allow a device to connect thereto, and includes an Application Programming Interface for allowing a remote application to connect to the access point over the wide area network, and to obtain information relating to the device connected to the access point. In particular, the access point is configured to allow a device to connect thereto over a wireless interface, and to provide bearer translation such that traffic over the wireless interface can be directed over the wide area network. The Application Programming Interface may then allow the application to obtain information relating to a connection status of a wireless device associated with the access point. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257417 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION WITH AN ICS-CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating communication operations with a wireless device that is ICS or DTM capable. Signaling protocols and apparatus are provided for operation of the wireless device when an ICS with the wireless device is ongoing, and the device leaves an area that provides for ICS as well as when the ICS can be provided using circuit-switched connections. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257418 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION WITH AN ICS-CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating communication operations with a wireless device that is ICS or DTM capable. A message generator is provided, configured to generate a network-terminated message, the network-terminated message including a media feature tag that identifies support of ICS. When transmitted to a network node, the message is detected. And, a wireless-device-terminated message that provides for mapping of a SIP URI into a calling name presentation. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257419 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090262714 | Network gateway and network system for a vehicle - The present invention relates to the network gateway for a vehicle and network system in which the mobile device which supports the wireless LAN is able to use the Internet by using the telematics module of a vehicle. For this, the present invention includes an user interface in which a user command is inputted and the process result for the user command is indicated; a telematics module in which a mobile communications network connecter is mounted to be able be connected to Internet that the mobile communications network provides; a mobile device equipped with a wireless LAN; and a network gateway which connects the mobile device to the Internet through the telematics module according to the request of the user interface or the mobile device in the state of being connected to the mobile device through the wireless LAN. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262715 | BRIDGE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR BRIDGING A WLAN TO A WWAN - A bridge device for bridging a wireless local area network (WLAN) and a plurality of wireless wide area networks (WWANs) includes a first communication port, a second communication port, a third communication port, a first media controller, a second media controller, a third media controller and a bridge module. The bridge module includes a flow controller and a data converter. The media controllers receive inbound data packets from corresponding communication ports and transmitting outbound data packets to corresponding communication ports. The flow controller controls data packet flow between the WLAN and the WWANs and records current bandwidths and utilization statuses of the WWANs, and the data converter converts between the inbound data packets and the outbound data packets accordingly. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262716 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system includes: a service terminal configured to have a wireless LAN access point capability and a proximity communication capability, the wireless LAN access point capability enabling the service terminal to act as a wireless LAN access point to be connected via a network to a service provider providing a network connection service on a chargeable basis, the service terminal thereby offering the chargeable network connection service; and a user terminal configured to have a wireless LAN terminal capability and a proximity communication capability, the wireless LAN terminal capability enabling the user terminal to connect with the wireless LAN access point, the user terminal further connecting to the network using the chargeable network connection service. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262717 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication device in a wireless network sets management information notification cycles at specified time intervals and transmits management information containing receive timing information showing its own position to start receiving information, receive window information, and receive cycle information. Another wireless communication device receiving that management information links it to a communication device number for the corresponding wireless communication device and stores the receive timing, the receive window information, and the receive cycle information. When sending information, the receive start position of the corresponding communication device is found from the receive timing information, the receive window information, and the receive cycle information of the other communication and information is then transmitted at that timing. An asynchronous ad-hoc communication wireless network can therefore be configured without a particular control station. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262718 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK CONTEXT CONTROL PROTOCOL - A Wireless LAN Context Control Protocol (WLCCP) is used to establish and manage a wireless network topology and securely manages the “operational context” for mobile stations in a campus network. The WLCCP registration protocol can automatically create and delete links in the network, securely distribute operational context, and reliably establish Layer 2 forwarding paths on wireless links. A single infrastructure node is established as the central control point for each subnet, and enables APs and MNs to select the parent node that provides the “least-cost path” to a backbone LAN. Context messages provide a general-purpose transport for context and management information. WLCCP “Trace” messages facilitate network diagnostic tools. Ethernet or UDP/IP encapsulation can be used for WLCCP messages. Ethernet encapsulation is employed for intra-subnet (e.g. AP-to-AP or AP-to-SCM) WLCCP messages. IP encapsulation is used for inter-subnet WLCCP messages and may also be used for intra-subnet WLCCP messages. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090268702 | SYNCHRONIZING CALL FEATURE DATA BETWEEN AN IMS NETWORK AND A LEGACY NETWORK - Communication networks and methods are disclosed that synchronize call feature data between an IMS network and a legacy network, such as a cellular network. An IMS subscriber server (e.g., a Home Subscriber Server (HSS)) is notified of changes to feature data for a call feature (e.g., call forwarding, call waiting, etc) in the IMS network. Responsive to the notification, the IMS subscriber server updates a legacy subscriber server (e.g., a Home Location Register (HLR)) in the legacy network based on the change to the feature data. Similarly, the IMS subscriber server identifies changes to feature data for a call feature in the legacy network. Responsive to the change, the IMS subscriber server notifies one or more application servers in the IMS network of the change to the feature data. Through the IMS subscriber server, feature data for call features is synchronized between the IMS network and the legacy network. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090274128 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A radio device, which is the source, transmits a route request packet (RREQ) to a radio device. In response to the route request packet (RREQ), the radio device transmits to the radio device a route setup packet (RSET) including a route Radio Device Radio Device Radio Device Radio Device by looking-up topology information (TPIF). In response to the route setup packet (RSET), the radio device produces a route notification packet (RNTF) and transmits the produced route notification packet (RNTF) to radio devices, and. In response to the route notification packet (RNTF), the radio device, which is the destination, produces a route reply packet (RREP) and transmits the produced route reply packet (RREP) to the radio device, which is the source. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274129 | DISTRIBUTED LOAD BALANCING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Distributed load balancing in wireless digital networks. In a network having a plurality of access nodes with at least one wireless client connected to a first access node, the client is encouraged to move to a different access node by reducing the apparent signal strength of transmissions from the access node to the client. Apparent signal strength can be reduced by reducing transmit power, by using beam forming, antenna switching, or a combination. Other access nodes may send unsolicited frames, such as probe response frames to the client, encouraging the client to move. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274130 | Wireless network communication apparatus, methods, and integrated antenna structures - Wireless mesh network communication apparatus and methods are disclosed. Directional antennas are respectively operatively coupled to dedicated communication devices to provide multiple independent wireless communication links. Exchange of communication traffic through the wireless communication links provided by the communication devices and the antennas is controlled by a switch. Any or all of the antennas may be adjustable so as to provide for flexibility in antenna beam alignment. Beam alignment may be physically or electronically adjustable. Radio units including the communication devices and the antennas, and possibly also the switch, may be enclosed in a single housing. The housing may be shared with other components such as wireless communication network base station antennas. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274131 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC DISTRIBUTION OF TRAFFIC IN CHANNEL BONDING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK(LAN) SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for dynamically distributing traffic in a channel bonding wireless local area network (LAN) system. The method includes extracting information regarding a flow from an arrived packet and classifying the packet in the unit of the flow based on the extracted flow information; monitoring the state of each of bonded channels; and allocating the flow sorted in the extracting to the optimum channel by referring to information regarding the channel state monitored in the monitoring. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274132 | ACCESS POINT USED IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The access point used in the wireless LAN system acquires, from a network, an IP address of a management device that holds a list of wireless LAN control devices to each of which the access point can be subordinate, in response to an event start input, acquires the list from the management device via the network by using the IP address of the management device, and accesses at least one of the wireless LAN control devices registered in the list via the network and determines a wireless LAN control device to which the access point should be subordinate, based on a response sent from the at least one of the wireless LAN control devices. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274133 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM THEREOF - A communication apparatus that can perform communication with an external apparatus by switching between a plurality of communication methods, the communication apparatus comprises: a detection unit that detects a change in a position and/or orientation of the communication apparatus; and a switching unit that switches a communication method for use in accordance with a detection result by the detection unit. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274134 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A communication network includes a plurality of network interface devices each covering a respective one of a plurality of cells. Each of the plurality of network interface devices communicates with communication entities in the respective cell using radio frames of the respective cell. The radio frames of a first one of the plurality of cells are shifted in time with respect to the radio frames of a second one of the plurality of cells. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274135 | DIRECT LINK SETUP METHOD IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE METHOD - Provided are a Tunneled Direct Link Setup (TDLS) establishment method for a TDLS initiator and a station supporting the establishment method. In the establishment method, a requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup request frame via an access point(AP) to an intended peer Non-AP QSTA. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA receives a TDLS setup response frame via the AP from the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup request frame. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup confirm frame via the AP to the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup response frame. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274136 | Automatic Partitioning of Wireless Access Points Into Overlay and Underlay Networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems directed to partitioning access points into two or more network access layers, such as overlay and underlay network access layers. According to one implementation of the present invention, a wireless network management system partitions a set of wireless access points into an overlay network for low-functionality clients and an underlay network for high-functionality clients. As described in further detail below, each of the overlay and underlay networks provides a class of network service, where each class of network service differs relative to at least one attribute (e.g., type of 802.11 access, data rates, High-Density, Quality-of-Service, encryption, compression, etc.). For didactic purposes, the overlay network is also referred to as the overlay network service layer (NSL) and the underlay network is referred to as the underlay NSL. In one implementation of the present invention, a partitioning algorithm is used to partition wireless access points into overlay and underlay networks. As described in further detail below, the partitioning algorithm, in one implementation, automatically assigns access points to the overlay and underlay networks based on the coverage needs of each network and the coverage parameters of each access point. In one implementation, the partitioning algorithm can be configured such that the overlay network provides maximum coverage for low-functionality clients, and the underlay network enables maximum performance for high-functionality clients. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090279515 | Apparatus and a method for service continuity between umts network and wlan - The present invention relates to a method for guaranteeing service continuity between a 3GPP network and a non-3GPP network. According to the exemplary embodiment of the present invention, when a mobile station receiving a service from the 3GPP network moves to the non-3GPP network or it moves back to the 3GPP network from the non-3GPP network, an inter-working gateway inter-works with a SGSN or a GGSN through the 3GPP network to provide a seamless service to a mobile subscriber. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279516 | UN-INTERRUPTED VOIP RADIO GATEWAY SERVICES THROUGH CLUSTERING - A voice-over-internet system and method is disclosed which comprises a gateway ( | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279517 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-MODE TERMINAL SCANNING - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method for scanning for paging messages in a second radio access technology (RAT) network, such as a CDMA network, while connected to a first RAT network, such as a WiMAX network. For certain embodiments, an enhanced scanning request message may facilitate establishing a scanning cycle in the first RAT that aligns with a paging cycle of the second RAT. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279518 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR PROVIDING A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method and an arrangement for providing a wire-free mesh network are provided. An approval procedure is carried out in situations in which a subscriber who is registering on the mesh network transmits an MAC address which already exists in the mesh network, such that two different subscribers within the mesh network never have identical MAC addresses. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279519 | LOCATION SURVEY FOR POWER CALIBRATION IN A FEMTO CELL - System(s) and method(s) are provided to survey a confined area serviced by femto cell for power calibration. Building survey facilitates calibration of femto cell power to suit actual coverage conditions within the building. A femto access point (AP) is set to “calibration mode” while a “calibration call” is effected (e.g., by a subscriber) throughout the intended in-building coverage area. Wireless signal strength for macro and femto coverage is measured and employed to establish an optimal femto AP power. Building survey for power calibration affects operation of the both a building-based AP serving the femto cell and wireless devices, and enhances subscriber experience. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279520 | Scalable WLAN Gateway - A technique for combining transmission bandwidths of several mobile stations (MS | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279521 | BASE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND BASE STATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A base station device connected to a base station management device including: a wireless receiving unit receiving transmission data from a wireless terminal; a mode retaining unit stored with a centralized mode for setting a transmission destination of the transmission data in the base station management device, or a distributed mode for setting the transmission destination of the transmission data in none of the base station management device; and a wired transmitting unit transmitting the transmission data, wherein the wired transmitting unit, when the mode set in the mode retaining unit is the centralized mode, transmits the transmission data received from the wireless terminal to the base station management device, and, when the mode set in the mode retaining unit is the distributed mode, transmits the transmission data received from said wireless terminal toward a destination device of the transmission data. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279522 | Network device and method for local routing of data traffic - The present invention is related to a network device for serving a local network being in connection with a mobile network. The network device comprises interfaces for exchanging a data packet and further comprises a packet filter arranged for being connected to a local anchor point replicating the data connection context of an anchor point in the mobile network and arranged for determining, based on at least a destination address contained in the data packet, whether the data packet has a destination within the local network. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279523 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a wireless communication apparatus wherein random multi-access can be performed while ensuring a transmission distance, even with a radio wave having directivity. A wireless communication apparatus ( | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279524 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING CONTROL SIGNALING OVERHEAD IN HYBRID WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention include a method and apparatus for reducing control signaling overhead in a hybrid wireless network. The method comprises receiving a wireless frame in the hybrid wireless network at a first terminal, and determining whether the received wireless frame is a control frame for a wireless channel reservation; if the received wireless frame is a control frame for the wireless channel reservation, reading by the first terminal a value of Duration field in control frame, and updating a timer for a channel reservation period in the first terminal with the value of Duration field, instead of updating network allocation vector of the first terminal; determining whether the remaining time of the timer for the channel reservation period is longer than the time required for transmitting the data frame or not before transmitting a data frame by the first terminal; and transmitting the data frame directly by the first terminal without transmission of a control frame for the wireless channel reservation if the remaining time is longer than the time required for transmitting the data frame. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279525 | ASSOCIATION IN CONTENTION ACCESS PERIOD - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for association in contention access periods and to a method for multi-cycle training in channel time allocation periods. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279526 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, A TERMINAL AND A RECORDING MEDIUM READABLE BY A COMPUTER - In a wireless LAN system, a terminal that includes a device for wireless LAN connection is capable of simple connection setting for wireless LAN. In said terminal, a simple connection setting recorder records each methods of simple connection setting that easily sets the simple connection setting for the wireless LAN, and an access point identifier identifies connected access point by detecting an information that is output by the access point. And a connection setting selector selects a simple connection setting corresponding to the access point, which the access point identifier identified from the simple connection settings recorded in the simple connection setting recorder. Finally, a connection setting processor processes connection setting, which corresponds to each method of the simple connection settings that the connection setting selector selected. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090285189 | Wlan Combo Access Point Device for Interface With WiMedia UWB Based Wireless USB and Software Layer Structure of Combo Access Point Device - Provided is a combo access point (AP) device integrated with an WiMedia ultra wideband (UWB) based wireless universal serial bus (WUSB) and a wireless local area network (WLAN) AP. A combo AP device includes a wireless local area network (WLAN) AP block providing wire and wireless telecommunications interfaces, and a wireless universal serial bus (WUSB) block configured in one integral structure with the WLAN AP block and providing a ultra wideband (UWB) based wireless interface with WUSB devices using a WiMedia UWB interface mode. Configuring the combo AP device by matching the functions of the WLAN AP with the WiMedia UWB based WUSB interface can provide dual functions of the WUSB and the WLAN AP and allows personal computer users to easily access commonly shared WUSB devices. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285190 | PERFORMING NETWORKING TASKS BASED ON DESTINATION NETWORKS - Methods and systems which identify and interact with network interfaces based on the network to which they provide access. A computing device operating in accordance with one or more of the principles described herein may examine available network interfaces and identify the network to which the network interfaces provide access, and perform networking tasks on interfaces based on the network identified. For example, a user may instruct a computing device to connect to a specified network, and the computing device will select a particular network interface by which to connect from the one or more available network interfaces that are able to connect to that network. Alternatively, a user may manage policies (e.g., security, connection, and application policies) based on the network to which a network interface provides access and thereby manage a network regardless of which of multiple network interfaces is used to access the network. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING TRANSMISSION EFFICIENCY OF A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for enhancing transmission efficiency of an access point in a wireless local area network includes generating a threshold, which is a maximum service number of clients in Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (UAPSD) mode of the access point, and a number of counts of packet retransmissions, counting a number of clients currently in UAPSD mode, and adjusting the number of counts of packet retransmissions according to the number of clients currently in UAPSD mode and the threshold. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285192 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CAPABLE OF PERFORMING AGGREGATED TRANSMISSION - When a communication is performed between an access point and a wireless terminal according to the IEEE 802.11 of a wireless LAN communication, a MAC layer block of a wireless communication apparatus used as the access point adds an identifier showing a support of aggregated transmission of a MAC layer management frame or upper layer several frames to a body of a beacon frame. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090290561 | Method for Controlling Base Stations in Wireless Communication Networks - A base station is controlled inactively provided that no radio signal is received from a mobile terminal in the radio range thereof while radio signals can still be receive from mobile terminals. An inactively controlled base station is once again controlled actively when a radio signal of at least one mobile terminal is received. The radio range, of the base station, is deactivated while radio signals can be received from the mobile terminal when the base station is controlled inactively. Thus, the number of actively controlled base station may be minimized and the environmental impact of radio signals caused by the base stations reduced. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290562 | METHOD OF DELIVERING MULTICAST PACKETS IN A MESH NETWORK - In a mesh network, when a wireless mesh link exists between a first mesh access point and a second mesh access point, the first mesh access point can deliver a multicast packet to the second mesh access point through the wireless mesh link. When the second mesh access point determines that the multicast packet from the first mesh access point is a redundant packet, the second mesh access point will send a multi-path notice to the first mesh access point. After receiving the multi-path notice, the first mesh access point stops delivering the multicast packet through the path. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290563 | Antenna/Beam Selection Training in MIMO Wireless LANs with Different Sounding Frames - A method selects antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) that includes a plurality of stations, and each station includes a set of antennas. Plural consecutive packets, received at a station, include plural consecutive sounding packets. Each sounding packet corresponds to a different subset of the set of antennas, and at least one of the plural consecutive packets includes a high throughput (HT) control field including a signal to initiate antenna selection and a number N indicative of a number of sounding packets which follow the at least one packet including the HT control field and which are to be used for antenna selection. A channel matrix is estimated based on a characteristic of the channel as indicated by the received N sounding packets, and a subset of antennas is selected according to the channel matrix. Station and computer program product embodiments include similar features. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290564 | APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF SUPPORTING NETWORK-BASED MOBILITY FOR DUAL STACK NODES - An apparatus for and method of supporting network-based mobility for a dual stack terminal are provided. More particularly, a mobile anchor point (MAP) apparatus for binding and data transmission of a dual stack terminal which has moved from a dual network to an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) network or an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) network, and a method of implementing the MAP apparatus are provided. If the IPv6, which is a next-generation Internet protocol, begins to be applied to networks, a dual stack terminal supporting both the IPv4 and IPv6 will also be introduced. In an environment in which this dual stack terminal moves, movement of the dual stack terminal to an IPv4-only network or an IPv6-only network as well as movement between IPv4/IPv6 dual networks will be considered. According to the apparatus and method, a MAP used in a conventional network-based mobility supporting method is extended. Accordingly, when a dual stack terminal moves between different network-based localized mobility management domains, such as an IPv4-only network or an IPv6-only network, a binding management message is made to be exchanged between two MAPs of the networks, thereby establishing an IPv6-in-IPv4 tunnel or an IPv4-in-IPv6 tunnel between the two MAPs. In this way, even when the dual stack terminal moves to an IPv4-only network or an IPv6-only network, communication with an external terminal is enabled. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290565 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A ROUTER AND A COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A router has a function of handling a plurality of sessions and includes, a communication control unit for communicating with a plurality of terminals, and receiving a desired priority level of each session from each terminal at a time of starting communication; a priority adjustment unit for adjusting the desired priority level among terminals when it is determined that simultaneous communication of all sessions cannot be performed and the desired priority level competes among terminals if every desired priority level is permitted as it is without changing; and a priority control unit for assigning a transmission bandwidth to each session according to a determined priority level corresponding to each of the plurality of sessions. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290566 | Receiving Apparatus and Receiving Method - There is provided a receiving apparatus including a radio receiving section that receives a first radio signal transmitted according to a first communication system and a second radio signal transmitted according to a second communication system, a first detection section that detects the first radio signal among radio signals received by the radio receiving section, a second detection section that detects the second radio signal among radio signals received by the radio receiving section using a predetermined correlation threshold, and a threshold control section that temporarily changes the correlation threshold of the second detection section when the first radio signal is detected by the first detection section. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290567 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PERFORMING WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION - A local station of an example of the invention performing TCP/IP communication conforming to a IEEE 802.11 standard comprises an unit for receiving a WLANDATA frame formed by encapsulating a TCPDATA segment from a center station, an unit for transmitting a WLANACK frame which is delivery confirmation information corresponding to the WLANDATA frame to the local station, and an unit for executing processing of stopping transmission of a TCPACK segment which is delivery confirmation information corresponding to the TCPDATA segment when the WLANACK frame is transmitted to the center station. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090296669 | Access control system in wirelesss lan system - In a wireless LAN system using an access point to perform access control for accesses from a plurality of client terminals, an access point and each of a plurality of client terminals have a transmission means using a data transmission carrier wave frequency and a control signal transmission carrier wave frequency; each of the plurality of client terminals has a memory storing priority information; when the data transmission carrier wave frequency is not sensed on the wireless LAN, data are transmitted to the access point at a relevant data transmission carrier wave frequency; when the data transmission carrier wave frequency is sensed on the wireless LAN, a band reservation request is sent to the access point at a relevant control signal transmission carrier wave frequency along with priority information stored in the memory; and after a transmission confirmation is received from the access point for the band reservation request, data is transmitted to the access point at a relevant data transmission carrier wave frequency. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296670 | PULL-BASED DATA TRANSMISSION APPROACH - A network can include a number of nodes that link a source node to a sink node. When a first node in a network sends a packet to its downstream node, this information is also received at its upstream node. In response to learning that the first node has sent a packet, the upstream node sends another packet to the first node. In essence, a pull-based transmission approach is used to mitigate congestion and address the funneling effect in data transmission networks such as wireless video sensor networks. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296671 | COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A CLIENT DEVICE AND AN INFRASTRUTURE DEVICE - Techniques are provided for communicating information between a wireless client device (CD) and an infrastructure device (ID) in a WLAN in which the CD wirelessly communicates with the ID in IBSS mode over a pseudo-BSS/IBSS air interface. The CD includes a WLAN NIC that operates in IBSS mode and a client host system that includes a client custom driver module (CCDM) and a WLAN NIC driver module configured to operate in IBSS mode. The ID includes a hardware interface and a host system which includes a packet separation driver module (PSDM) and an infrastructure custom driver module (ICDM). The CD operates in pseudo-BSS/IBSS mode (PBIM). The CCDM provides pseudo BSS-like service(s) with respect to packets generated by upper protocol layer modules to generate pseudo-BSS-like packets that it provides to the WLAN NIC via WLAN NIC driver module. Based on the pseudo-BSS-like packets, the WLAN NIC generates PBIM packets and transmits them. The PSDM receives packets from the hardware interface and separates them. When the PSDM receives PBIM packets, the PDSM sends the PBIM packets to the ICDM which performs one or more BSS-like services with respect to the PBIM packets. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296672 | METHODS FOR WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATING INFORMATION BETWEEN A CLIENT DEVICE AND AN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVICE - Techniques are provided for communicating information between a wireless client device (CD) and an infrastructure device (ID) in a WLAN in which the CD wirelessly communicates with the ID in IBSS mode over a pseudo-BSS/IBSS air interface. The CD includes a WLAN NIC that operates in IBSS mode and a client host system that includes a client custom driver module (CCDM) and a WLAN NIC driver module configured to operate in IBSS mode. The ID includes a hardware interface and a host system which includes a packet separation driver module (PSDM) and an infrastructure custom driver module (ICDM). The CD operates in pseudo-BSS/IBSS mode (PBIM). The CCDM provides pseudo BSS-like service(s) with respect to packets generated by upper protocol layer modules to generate pseudo-BSS-like packets that it provides to the WLAN NIC via WLAN NIC driver module. Based on the pseudo-BSS-like packets, the WLAN NIC generates PBIM packets and transmits them. The PSDM receives packets from the hardware interface and separates them. When the PSDM receives PBIM packets, the PDSM sends the PBIM packets to the ICDM which performs one or more BSS-like services with respect to the PBIM packets. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296673 | APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A PSEUDO-BASIC SERVICE SET (BSS)-LIKE NETWORK OVER AN INDEPENDENT BASIC SERVICE SET (IBSS) MODE AIR INTERFACE - Techniques are provided for communicating information between a wireless client device (CD) and an infrastructure device (ID) in a WLAN in which the CD wirelessly communicates with the ID in IBSS mode over a pseudo-BSS/IBSS air interface. The CD includes a WLAN NIC that operates in IBSS mode and a client host system that includes a client custom driver module (CCDM) and a WLAN NIC driver module configured to operate in IBSS mode. The ID includes a hardware interface and a host system which includes a packet separation driver module (PSDM) and an infrastructure custom driver module (ICDM). The CD operates in pseudo-BSS/IBSS mode (PBIM). The CCDM provides pseudo BSS-like service(s) with respect to packets generated by upper protocol layer modules to generate pseudo-BSS-like packets that it provides to the WLAN NIC via WLAN NIC driver module. Based on the pseudo-BSS-like packets, the WLAN NIC generates PBIM packets and transmits them. The PSDM receives packets from the hardware interface and separates them. When the PSDM receives PBIM packets, the PDSM sends the PBIM packets to the ICDM which performs one or more BSS-like services with respect to the PBIM packets. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296674 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DENSITY DETERMINATIOIN IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Each node in a wireless communication network adds information in hello messages wherein the information comprises the number of hello messages received at the node from a plurality of nodes. Also, the nodes are configured to determine the node density based on additional information extracted from the received hello messages. For example, a first node in the wireless communication network receives a hello message from a second node, wherein the hello message comprises additional information indicating at least a number of hello messages received by the second node from a plurality of nodes in the wireless communication network. The first node extracts the additional information from the received hello message and based on the extracted additional information, the first node determines at least one channel performance metric. Based on the at least one channel performance metric the first node determines density of neighboring nodes in the wireless communication network. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296675 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING RRC CONNECTIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate selective release of mobile devices using conflicting identifiers when communicating with an access point. The access point can detect the conflicting identifier and transmit a selective release message to the mobile devices. The selective release message can include a disambiguation identifier so the appropriate mobile device can identify that it is incorrectly connected to the access point and can release its connection. The disambiguation identifier can be one or more unique aspects of the correctly or incorrectly connected mobile device, such as an identifier, previous message related aspects, whether a security or context check can be decoded, etc. Thus, connection of the incorrectly connected mobile device can be released without additionally releasing the correctly connected mobile device. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296676 | Seamless Wireless Mobility - Seamless wireless mobility is described. In one embodiment, a mobility manager can query a subscriber catalog for a current registration status of handset. The mobility manager can then use the registration status to send a first signal to the handset over either a wireless network or an Internet protocol-based network. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296677 | WIRELESS PERSONAL LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A transceiver apparatus for creating a wireless personal local area network between a computer terminal and one or more peripheral devices. A separate transceiver is connected to the computer terminal and to each peripheral device. The transceivers can be connected to the terminal or peripheral device either internally or externally. A low power radio is used to communicate information between the computer terminal and peripheral devices. Different transceivers can be used for modifying the carrier frequency and power of the local area network. The microprocessor is located inside each transceiver and controls the information flow of the transceiver including the communication protocol which allows each device to know if other devices are communicating, which devices are being communicated to, and selectively address the peripheral devices. An Idle Sense communication protocol is used for information transfer between the computer terminal and the peripheral devices, increasing efficiency in power management and compensating for transmission collisions. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296678 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERIC DATA MAPPING BETWEEN WIRELESS COMPONENT APPLICATIONS AND APPLICATION DATA SOURCES - An application gateway is configured to facilitate message communication between an application executing on a wireless device and a backend server. The application gateway comprises a message interface, a backend connector and a transformer. The message interface facilitates communication between the wireless device and the application gateway in a compact format. The backend connector facilitates communication between the application gateway and the backend server using a schema-based internal format. The transformer translates data between the compact format and the internal format. The transformer further includes a transformer mapping document for correlating elements in the compact format with elements in the internal format. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090303971 | Method and Apparatus For Transmitting/Receiving Control Message Related to Packet Call Service in an IP Multimedia Subsystem - Apparatus and Method for transmitting control message related to a packet call service in an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) that transmits/receives an IMS control message using a control plane to reduce a delay caused by setting of a user plane in a packet call setup process. A user equipment (UE) determines whether an IMS service is registered in response to a radio resource control (RRC) connection request. The UE sets an SRB_IMS request parameter requiring that the IMS control message be processed through a signaling radio bearer (SRB) depending on whether the IMS service is registered. The UE transmits an RRC connection request message including the SRB_IMS request parameter to a radio network controller (RNC). The UE configures an SRB_IMS entity. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303972 | Dynamic Scrambling Techniques for Reducing Killer Packets in a Wireless Network - Techniques are disclosed in which a parameter used for scrambling packet data is changed. If the initial scrambling of a packet causes a killer packet to be generated, the packet is re-scrambled using a different value for the parameter, so that a killer packet is avoided. In a network that employs frequency-hopping spread spectrum communications, a channel identifier can be employed as an input to the scrambling algorithm. In this implementation, a given packet of data will be transmitted on one channel with a first sequence of bits when it is scrambled, and on another channel with a different sequence of bits. If the scrambled packet for one of these channels results in a killer packet, it is statistically unlikely that it will also be a killer packet when it is re-transmitted on the other channel. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303973 | PACKET DATA NETWORK SELECTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a mobile station in a wireless network, a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) message to a DHCP server via a base station. The DHCP message may identify a packet data network (PDN) by access point node (APN). The method may also include exchanging data with the indicated packet data network via the base station. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303974 | WIRELESS NETWORK, ACCESS POINT, AND LOAD BALANCING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless network, an access point (AP), and a load balancing method thereof are provided. Each AP of the wireless network obtains data related to bandwidth and radio frequency (RF) signal strength by interchanging messages with the other APs. Each AP performs a calculation according to the data to evaluate the advantage of potential bandwidth of the AP with respect to a user side mobile station (MS). By this advantage evaluation, one of the APs is selected to accept the association request of the MS. This method can be used to balance the load of the APs of the wireless network. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303975 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS COEXISTENCE - A system and method for reducing wireless local area network (WLAN) interference with a different wireless network (non-WLAN). A wireless device includes a WLAN transceiver and a non-WLAN transceiver. The WLAN transceiver is configured to operate in a WLAN, and configured to operate selectively using one of a greater bandwidth and a lesser bandwidth in a frequency band. The wireless communication of the non-WLAN is incompatible with the WLAN. The non-WLAN transceiver is configured to request the WLAN transceiver operate using the lesser bandwidth. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090310576 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION MONITORING METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ACCESS POINT AND PROGRAM - Electro-magnetic wave reachability between a wireless client and wireless access points including access points of wireless communication system components is judged for every wireless access point, useful states of wireless resources at the wireless access points are calculated for every wireless access point, and incoming and outgoing calls of a communication session are controlled or usability or vacant capacity of the wireless communication system is monitored in accordance with information including judged results of the electro-magnetic wave reachability and calculated results of the useful states of wireless resources. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310577 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A wireless LAN system of the present invention is provided with a wireless LAN client terminal ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310578 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING MULTI-CHANNEL DIRECT LINK CONNECTION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK, RELATED NETWORK AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A wireless communication network includes an access point and a plurality of stations. The access point sends towards the stations periodic information arranged in time frames or beacon intervals. The stations in the network are configured to in a first mode through the access point, and in a second mode directly with each other. The time frames are partitioned into a first time interval wherein the stations communicate in the first mode over a first channel; a second time interval wherein the stations communicate in the second mode over a second channel, and a third time interval wherein the stations communicate in either of the first or the second mode. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310579 | MOBILE STATION AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - In a mobile station UE1, a service-type information detection unit 41 for detecting service-type information contained in the header of a packet in which transmit data is carried is provided at a radio link control layer | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310580 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS - An apparatus, method and system for enabling a portable electronic device (PED) ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310581 | HRPD/3GPP EPC network connection apparatus, system, and method - An apparatus, system, and method may include a user device, an HRPD network comprising a HSGW, and a 3GPP EPC network comprising at least one gateway. The user device may be configured to detect a need to establish a connection with the 3GPP EPC network, determine an APN value that corresponds to the 3GPP EPC network, include the APN value in a connection request, and communicate the connection request to an HRPD gateway of the HRPD network. The HRPD gateway may be configured to receive the connection request from the user device, determine a PDN gateway of the 3GPP EPC network that corresponds to the APN value in the connection request, and enable a connection between the user device and the 3GPP EPC network. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310582 | Systems and Methods for Distributed Data Routing in a Wireless Network - In various embodiments, the data plane may be abstracted from a control plane in a wireless network such as WiMax, WiFi, LTE or the like. In some embodiments, a routing device comprises a control module, a service module, and a router module. The control module may be configured to receive communication instructions from a control server. The service module may be configured to process the communication instructions and provide data path instructions based on the communication instructions. The router module may be configured to receive data from a source device and route the processed data to a target device based on the data path instructions. The control server may comprise a WiMax server such as an ASN server or a CSN server. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310583 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - When a wireless communication apparatus capable of directly communicating with another communication apparatus performs communication via an access point, the wireless communication apparatus shares communication setting information with the other communication apparatus, the communication setting information being information for performing direct communication with the other communication apparatus without using that access point. If a radar signal is detected during communication with the other communication apparatus via the access point, switching to direct communication with the other communication apparatus is made based on the shared communication setting information. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310584 | Self Organizing Network - A method for implementing a self organizing network includes establishing a connection between a femto base station and a network access device operable to provide the femto base station with Internet access. The method also includes establishing a backhaul connection between the femto base station and a wireless service provider's network via the Internet. The method further includes synchronizing the femto base station with a wireless network via the backhaul connection. The method additionally includes receiving initial wireless parameters from the wireless service provider's network via the backhaul connection. The method also includes determining whether wireless operation is possible, and upon determining wireless operation is possible, operating within the wireless network. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310585 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DETERMINING LOCATION USING A CELLULAR AND WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM BY SELECTING THE BEST WLAN PS SOLUTION - The disclosed subject matter relates to a method and system for increasing the accuracy of a WLAN based position estimate using cellular positioning information. In some embodiments, the method can include determining a set of possible WLAN location solutions for a WLAN and cellular enabled device based on one or more WLAN access points, obtaining cellular measurements from at least one cell tower, and determining the best WLAN location solution from the set of possible WLAN location solutions using the cellular measurements. In one embodiment, the method can include using the cellular measurements from the at least one cell tower to provide a cellular based location estimate for the WLAN and cellular enabled device. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310586 | Cooperative Wireless Networks - A wireless local area network (WLAN) communicatively couples together a group of mobile wireless terminals configured to operate in a wireless wide area network (WWAN). A network-management operator processes WWAN-control messages used by the mobile wireless terminals and the WWAN. One or more of the mobile wireless terminals may function as the network-management operator. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090316667 | GSM HARMONIC EMISSION DESENSITIZATION IN 5-GHZ WLAN - A method for improving data communication quality in collocated GSM and WLAN subsystems. The GSM device can spuriously emit third harmonics whose frequencies depends on which GSM channel is presently being used. The WLAN receiver uses OFDM subcarriers that can be interfered with by third harmonics of particular ones of the GSM channels. Which OFDM subcarriers would be adversely affected by a particular one of the GSM channels being in use is computed. Then a corresponding particular OFDM subcarrier is deleted after a FFT process and before Viterbi decoding. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316668 | Method for generating extented route message, method for generating an extended route reply message, extended route request message, extended route reply message and first and second nodes - Route discovery of a route from a source node of an IEEE 802 connection to a destination node of an IEEE 802 connection, including a mesh network path with a source node of the mesh path and a destination node of the mesh path, is initiated by an extended route request message generated by the destination node. The extended route request message includes a flag that indicates whether the source node of the IEEE 802 connection is located inside or outside the mesh network, and either one source address of the source node, if the node is inside the mesh network, or two source addresses covering (a) the source address of the source node of the mesh path and (b) the source address of the source node of the IEEE 802 connection, if the node is outside the mesh network. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316669 | Method, Device And System For Selecting A Wireless Access Network On The Basis Of Environment Information, Computer Program And Corresponding Data Support - The method of selecting a wireless access telecommunication network in a global link between a first terminal ( | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316670 | Element-Based Method for Auto-Configuration of Handsets by a Base Station in a Heterogeneous Mac Protocol for Wireless Networks - An element-based method to automatically configure mobile handsets by the base station using a protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols for use in wireless VoIP systems with multiple base stations is disclosed. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316671 | Method and Apparatus of Transmitting, Receiving, Displaying and Playing Weather Data - A transmitter transmits time synchronized data via a pager/WiMax/802.x access to a receiver system, wherein the receiver system is programmed to receive data for specific geographic locations. The geographic locations may be specified by the user or by the receiver system, and includes state, zip codes, towns, counties, towns, or cardinal regions. The receiver is able to find its location when outside its cell region and is able to synchronize to the data transmitted in the new cell region. Further, the receiver system is able to remotely monitor weather data and other information at a different location via wireless Internet or voice over IP. A transceiver may also be used to receive weather or alert data. In response to receiving data, the transceiver transmits the data to low powered devices in a house using a different frequency band than the frequency band it received the data. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316672 | Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) With PDIF and SIP Gateway - Apparatus and methods are described for establishing a connection to a wireless subscriber network over a wireless LAN. A secure tunnel is established between a PDIF and a mobile station. Both voice and data calls are exchange via the tunnel. Voice calls are forwarded to a SIP GW while data calls are routed to the Internet. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316673 | VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION GATEWAY - A system for enabling secure access to an in-vehicle gateway module includes a mobile wireless transceiver on the vehicle in communication with the gateway module, and at least one stationary wireless transceiver in communication with a home computer system, for example, as part of the vehicle owner's home network, or via an internet connection to the home network. The home computer system authenticates all data transfer to and from the vehicle gateway module while preferably also providing a “server” or information consolidation function. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090323644 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM - If a network having the same SSID as but a different BSSID from those of a network that has been established by a first communication apparatus is detected, the network established by the first communication apparatus is terminated and the first communication apparatus participates in the detected network. This makes it possible for the first communication apparatus and another communication apparatus to participate in the same network. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323645 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE, DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication terminal is provided. The wireless communication terminal including a first wireless communication section configured to operate in a first clock system; a second wireless communication section configured to operate in a second clock system different from the first clock system, and perform short-range wireless communication; and an asynchronous interface that mediates between the first wireless communication section and the second wireless communication section. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323646 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRLESS LAN (WLAN) DATA MULTIPLEXING - Embodiments addressing MAC processing for efficient use of high throughput systems are disclosed. Data associated with at least one MAC ID can be aggregated into a single byte stream. The single byte stream can be formatted into MAC PDUs and then muxed. The muxed MAC PDUs can then be transmitted on a single MAC frame. Muxing of the MAC PDUs can be based on the priority of the MAC PDUs or other criteria. A MAC header can comprise information about the muxed PDUs, such as a pointer, that identifies the location of the MAC PDUs within the MAC frame. A MAC frame can contain partial MAC PDUs. The transmitted muxed MAC PDUs can be retransmitted, and an acknowledgment or feedback scheme may be used to help manage the transmission of the protocol data units. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323647 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PEER DISCOVERY ASSIST - Methods and apparatus related to peer/network/service discovery in a mobile wireless system, e.g., an ad hoc peer-to-peer network are described. Transmission of discovery information, e.g., upper layer discovery information, is divided into a number of portions to be transmitted separately over time. Transmission of the individual portions is structured so as to enable flexibility in the frequency of the peer discovery transmissions as well as the monitoring of such transmissions. Various embodiments facilitate rapid discovery and/or secure discovery, e.g., selective discovery by trusted peers. The structuring enables proxying of some transmissions by a third party, e.g., an assist node. The assist node receives discovery information portions being communicated at a first rate and retransmits the received discovery information portions at a second rate which is higher than the first rate. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323648 | MULTI-RATE PROXIMITY BASED PEER DISCOVERY METHODS AND APPARATUS - Various embodiments relate to wireless communications devices which support multiple modes of peer discovery operation. In some embodiments, the multiple modes of peer discovery operation include different modes which are associated with different rates of transmitting peer discovery information. In some embodiments, the multiple modes of peer discovery operation include different modes which are associated with different rates of monitoring peer discovery information. In various embodiments, a communications device determines whether or not to switch between different peer discovery modes of operation as a function of proximity to a location of interest. Proximity determinations may be, and sometimes are, based upon geographic position comparisons. Alternatively or in addition, proximity determinations may be, and sometimes are, based upon received signal strength measurements. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323649 | WIRELESS MARINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An exemplary device that is useful for facilitating wireless communications on a body of water includes a support platform that is configured to remain at least partially on a surface of the water. A transceiver station is mounted on the support platform. The transceiver station is configured to communicate over at least one wireless link with at least one mobile station. The transceiver station has a connection to an underwater cable through which the transceiver station communicates with another device. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323650 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PERFORMING EXPRESS FORWARDING FRAMES HAVING MULTIPLE FRAGMENTS - A method, apparatus and computer program product for the express forwarding frames having multiple fragments are presented. A timer (NAV) is maintained at each respective node of a wireless Local Area Network (LAN). At least two fragments of a frame are designated as a Time Sensitive Quality of Service (TSQ) frame fragments to be express forwarded. A duration field of each of the TSQ frame fragments is incremented by a first predetermined time increment (DT | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323651 | Techniques for management of shared resources in wireless multi-communication devices - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a network adapter configured for wireless communication using more than one technology, wherein the network adapter is configured to share a plurality of shared hardware (HW) components by generating a notification when a shared HW resource becomes available to a requesting device that needs the HW resource, and registering the requesting device so that it will receive the notifications when generated; and wherein upon receiving the notifications, the requesting device will wake up and perform a pending action. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323652 | Methods and apparatus for antenna isolation-dependent coexistence in wireless systems - Methods and apparatus for selectively switching one or more antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) antenna array so as to mitigate interference with another RF interface within the same space-constrained device, based on radio frequency isolation. In one embodiment, the MIMO interface comprises a WLAN interface having a 2×2 or 3×3 array of antennae which are placed in a wireless device in an asymmetric fashion with respect to the antenna of the second interface, and the other interface comprises a PAN (e.g., Bluetooth) interface operating in an overlapping frequency band (e.g., ISM band). When both interfaces are operating, interference is mitigated through selectively switching off one or more of the MIMO antennae, and using the remaining antenna(e) having the best isolation from the Bluetooth antennae. This approach allows simultaneous operation of both interferences without significant degradation to user experience or the operation of either interface, and may also provide power savings critical to mobile device battery longevity. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323653 | Communication service support device, method and program - A communication service support device includes a parameter storage, a terminal information storage, a comparator, a register, and a notifier. The parameter storage stores, in a manner associated with one another, identification information identifying multiple mobile terminal units, identification information identifying multiple points, identification information identifying service that the individual mobile terminal units can receive at the respective points, and identification information identifying management servers for managing the respective points. The comparator compares the identification information stored in the parameter storage and identifying the management servers with identification information transmitted from a mobile terminal unit at a point and identifying a management server. When agreement of the identification information is found as a result of the comparison, the notifier notifies the mobile terminal unit from which the identification information identifying the management server has been received that the mobile terminal unit is permitted to use the service. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323654 | WIRELESS AD HOC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication terminal performs wireless ad hoc communication with another terminal via a first wireless interface dedicated to reception and a second wireless interface for both transmission and reception. The terminal executes defining a communication area to be divided into cells of first polygonal shapes and each of the cells to be divided into a plurality of sub-cells of second polygonal shapes different from the first polygonal shapes; allocating, so as to prevent adjacent cells from belonging to a set of two identical wireless channels, a first wireless channel and a second wireless channel as the set of wireless channels to the cells; and setting the first wireless channel and the second wireless channel so that the same transmission channel is set for sub-cells brought into contact between the adjacent cells while different transmission channels are set for adjacent sub-cells in an own cell where an own terminal is present. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323655 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INVITING AND SHARING CONVERSATIONS BETWEEN CELLPHONES - A system and method perform wireless networking that allows a cellular phone user to invite and share conversations with other cellphones or wireless communication devices in local spatial proximity by means of a wireless mesh or infrastructure or an ad-hoc network. In the system and method, there is no per-minute cost by using wireless local area networks in the unlicensed spectrum, such as a 802.11 network. Conversations are shared with only the intended persons. To join a conversation using the method, users only require any wireless device, and not necessarily a cellphone, such as a laptop with wireless capability. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323656 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED AND MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM VOICE CONTINUITY - The present invention relates to moving session control for a user element from a circuit-switched subsystem, such as a cellular network, to a multimedia subsystem (MS), such as the Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). Session control is provided by the MS irrespective of whether the user element is using cellular or local wireless access for the sessions. Notably, multiple sessions may be controlled for a given user element at the same time. Session control for originating and terminating multiple simultaneous sessions in the CS or MS as well as transferring these sessions between the CS and MS is anchored at a continuity control function (CCF) in the MS. All session signaling for each of the multiple sessions is passed through the CCF. The CCF is a service provided in the MS, and anchors the user element's sessions as well as enables domain transfers between the CS and MS. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323657 | Tri-core architecture for reducing mac layer processing latency in base stations - A tri-core architecture for reducing MAC layer processing latency at the base stations is described. The new architecture minimizes the processing delay by introducing a pipelined approach. The fundamental concept involves splitting the Medium Access Control (MAC) layer functionality into three distinct tasks, with each processor performing a given task. All tasks will be thus performed concurrently, avoiding much of the overhead encountered while processing received packets and preparing packets to be transmitted. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323658 | Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) Architectures - Apparatus and methods are described for establishing a connection to a subscriber access network, such as a 3G network, over and untrusted network, such as a wireless LAN. A stream ID is assigned to a mobile device upon initialization of the device, and the stream ID remains active until the device powers down, loses WLAN coverage, or de-registers with the network. Both voice and data calls may be routed over the tunnel using the assigned stream ID. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323659 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING AD-HOC MODE CONNECTION USING CELLULAR NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for establishing an ad-hoc mode connection in a cellular wireless communication system are provided. In the method, a request message requesting an ad-hoc mode connection with a counterpart mobile terminal is transmitted to a base station in a cellular network. A Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Internet Protocol (IP) address information are received from the base station. The ad-hoc mode connection with the counterpart mobile terminal is established using the SSID and IP address information. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323660 | Telecommunication System for Automatically Locating by Network Connection and Selectively Delivering Calls to Mobile Client Devices - A communication system for an organization having multiple sites uses a dual-mode device capable of both cell phone communication and telephone communication on a local area network (LAN). IP LANS are established at organization sites such that a temporary IP address is assigned to a dual-mode device that logs onto an organization LAN, and the IP address is associated at a PSTN-connected server on the LAN with the cell phone number of the communication device. The IP server notifies a PSTN-connected routing server when a device logs on to a LAN, and also provides a destination number for the IP server. Cell calls directed to the device are then redirected to the IP server and directed to the device connected to the LAN. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323661 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication control apparatus comprises a terminal control part that generates available-terminal information representing a communication terminal belonging to a group of available-terminals and also generates call-status information representing one of the communication terminals having calls and also representing the media of the communication terminals; a terminal/media selecting part that, upon detection of an event occurrence, if the call-status information matches terminal/media information of a terminal/media information storing part and further if changed-terminal/media information of the terminal/media information storing part is included in the available-terminal information, then determines the communication terminal represented by the changed-terminal/media information as a communication terminal to be incorporated into the calls of the media of the communication terminals; and a session control part that establishes a call of the medium of the determined communication terminal between the determined communication terminal and a communication terminal of another user. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20100002659 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method wherein the power consumption can be reduced as compared with the conventional one and a wireless communication apparatus can synchronize its super-frame with the super-frame of another wireless communication apparatus in an ad hoc network. According to this method, in the ad hoc network where a plurality of wireless communication apparatuses use broadband signals to data-communicate with each other, a wireless communication apparatus transmits an end tone ( | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002660 | MULTI-HOMING BASED MOBILE INTERNET - In one embodiment, a method of providing mobile internet comprises receiving a down-link packet having a endpoint identity protocol element (EIP), the EIP comprising a global locator associated with a provider network, a first local locator set to a predetermined value, and an endpoint identifier associated with a mobile host; querying the provider network to obtain a second local locator value associated with the mobile host, the second local locator indicates the location of a first radio router with which the mobile host had previously exchange authentication; overwriting the first local locator portion of the EIP with the second local locator; and routing the down-link packet towards the mobile host using the second local locator. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002661 | MULTIPLE-TRX PICO BASE STATION FOR PROVIDING IMPROVED WIRELESS CAPACITY AND COVERAGE IN A BUILDING - One embodiment is directed to a system for providing wireless coverage and capacity for a public land mobile network within a building. The system comprises a pico base station comprising multiple transceiver units. The pico base station is installed in the building. The system further comprises a plurality of antennas located within the building. The plurality of antennas are located remotely from the pico base station. The pico base station is communicatively coupled to the public land mobile network. The pico base station is communicatively coupled to the plurality of antennas. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002662 | ENTERPRISE MOBILE NETWORK FOR PROVIDING CELLULAR WIRELESS SERVICE USING LICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND SUPPORTING MULTIPLE-DEVICE RING FOR INCOMING CALLS - One embodiment is directed to an enterprise mobile network for providing wireless service within a coverage area associated with an enterprise using licensed radio frequency spectrum. The enterprise mobile network is configured to have local subscribers thereof. At least one local subscriber has assigned thereto a local mobile phone number and one or more other numbers (such as a PBX extension number, a public mobile phone number, and a Unified Communications end point). The enterprise mobile network is configured so that the local mobile phone number and one or more of the other numbers ring in response to incoming calls made to the local mobile phone number or the other numbers. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002663 | Base Station and Data Transferring Method - A base station forms a communication area communicable with a mobile communication network through a local network that includes the base station. The base station includes an obtaining unit that obtains a local-network address assigned to a mobile terminal in the communication area to communicate with a communication terminal in the local network; another obtaining unit that obtains a mobile-network address assigned to the mobile terminal to communicate with the mobile communication network; a storing unit that correlates and stores therein the local-network address and the mobile-network address; a receiving unit that receives, from the communication terminal, data having a destination address that is the local-network address; a converting unit that converts the destination address into the mobile-network address correlated with the local-network address and stored in the storing unit; and a transmitting unit that transmits, to the mobile terminal, the data whose destination address has been converted. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002664 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING A COLLISION BETWEEN A SCHEDULING REQUEST AND A PERIODIC RANK INDICATOR REPORT OR A PERIODIC CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR/PRECODING MATRIX INDICATOR REPORT - A method and apparatus are described for avoiding a collision between a scheduling request (SR) and a periodic rank indicator (RI) report or a periodic channel quality indicator (CQI)/precoding matrix indicator (PMI) report. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002665 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND METHOD FOR WIDEBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A base station includes a deciding part configured to decide a period of performing data transmission/reception and a period of not performing data transmission/reception when performing intermittent communications, a generating part configured to generate a predetermined signal to a mobile station, and an adjusting part configured to adjust the period of performing data transmission/reception and/or the period of not performing data transmission/reception according to a response signal transmitted from the mobile station in response to the predetermined signal. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002666 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system capable of transmitting, at a high speed, information requested by a communication terminal to the communication terminal which moves through a spot wireless area at a high speed. In an integrated base station | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002667 | Wireless Terminal, Wireless Communication System And Method for Controling Wireless Terminal To Switch Between Networks In Wireless Communication System - The invention provides a mobile terminal having a first network module for connecting to a wireless wide area network (WWAN) and a second network module for connecting to a wireless local area network (WLAN). The WWAN and the WLAN connect to a control center. The mobile terminal connects to the WLAN and detects a WWAN signal level of a WWAN signal transmitted by the WWAN and a WLAN signal level of a WLAN signal of a WLAN signal transmitted by the WLAN. The mobile terminal calculates a modified signal level according to a first compensation value and the WLAN signal level and sends the modified signal level and the WWAN signal level to the control center. If the modified signal level is smaller than a first threshold and the WWAN signal level is greater than a second threshold, the control center sends a switch command to the mobile terminal and the mobile terminal switches the connection from the WLAN to the WWAN. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002668 | SERVICE IN WLAN INTER-WORKING, ADDRESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AND METHOD - The present invention provides a solution to the mobile terminal address management in the WLAN inter-working. By using the access control framework, the mobile terminal could obtain the address, and setup the tunnel together with the granting of service access. The management process would be shielded by the inherent encryption and protection of the access control process, and thus does not need extra security setup procedures to be performed. The invention also provides a method for the terminal to obtain address that binds to the session, using a fine grain service authorization procedure. The terminal could maintain multiple addresses when accessing multiple parallel sessions. The address management is also integrated with the policy control mechanisms. The policy control would provide means for the terminal and its home network to configure the WLAN when necessary after an address alternation. QoS, or tunnelling information would be modified and provisioned according to the new status using channels available in the existing policy control procedures. By this, a smooth address transition in the roaming time could be achieved, and QoS interruption could be minimized. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100008336 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION OF RF MODULE ACTIVITIES - An apparatus and method for synchronizing RF activities comprising receiving a notification relating to transmission activities; determining at least one of a plurality of RF modules to relay the notification; and relaying the notification to at least one of the plurality of RF modules. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008337 | METHOD PROVIDING POSITIONING AND NAVIGATION INSIDE LARGE BUILDINGS - Positioning and/or navigation of an electronic device within a building when GPS signals are unavailable is provided. The electronic device scans for available Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Access Points (APs) upon, e.g., entering a building. The electronic device detects a signal (e.g., beacon) from at least one available WLAN AP, whereupon the electronic device retrieves the indoor location of the available WLAN AP. The location information can be directly downloaded from the WLAN AP while in state-1 via, e.g., a Native Query Protocol which includes an extension to currently defined Native Query info elements that returns location information. Alternatively, the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the WLAN AP can be read from the beacon signal, which is then used to retrieve the location of the WLAN AP from an associated database. Additionally, various embodiments may be implemented with or via a mapping application or service, where the mapping application is able to display any floor's floor plan of a building and determine/obtain the position of the electronic device inside the building relative to the floor plan. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008338 | HIGH TRANSMISSION POWER USING SHARED BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK FRONT END MODULE - A novel and useful system for providing high transmission power using a shared Bluetooth and Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) front end module (FEM). A single power amplifier in the front end module is shared between the WLAN and Bluetooth radio cores, thus providing a high power transmission option (Bluetooth class 1) for the Bluetooth core. Interface circuitry in the FEM couple either the WLAN TX output or the Bluetooth TX output to the input of the power amplifier and couple the output of the power amplifier to the external antenna. In the receive direction, the interface circuitry steers the antenna input to the respective WLAN or Bluetooth receivers in accordance with one or more control signals. Alternatively, a switch in the WLAN/Bluetooth radio chip functions to switch the Bluetooth TX output to a conventional FEM, thereby allowing the FEM power amplifier to be shared between the WLAN and Bluetooth radio cores. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008339 | DUAL MODE PHONE AND METHOD FOR ACTING AS AN ACCESS POINT - A dual mode phone includes a wireless wide area network (WWAN) antenna, a WWAN module, a wireless local area network (WLAN) antenna, a WLAN module, and a processing module. The WLAN module includes a client mode sub-module, an access point (AP) mode sub-module, and a switch sub-module. The switch sub-module selectively enables the client mode sub-module or the AP mode sub-module according to a WLAN mode selection instruction. The client mode sub-module triggers the dual mode phone to enter a WLAN client mode when enabled. The AP mode sub-module triggers the dual mode phone to enter a WLAN AP mode to provide network access services to other WLAN clients when enabled. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008340 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING AN ORIGINAL CALL ANCHORING IN VOICE CALL CONTINUITY SERVICE - The present invention offers a system and method for implementing an original call anchoring in voice call continuity service, and the system comprises the MSC/VLR, HLR, MGCF and VCC application server. A UE originates a call to the MSC/VLR in the CS domain, and the MSC/VLR sends the original request ORREQ message to the HLR, and then the HLR determines whether the UE has VCC service or not, if yes, it sends the message to the VCC application server which saves the information such as the called party number and returns the VCC application server number to the HLR after receiving the message sent by the HLR, and the HLR returns the VCC application server number back to the MSC/VLR through ORREQ response message; the MSC/VLR sends initial address message (IAM) including the VCC application server number to the MGCF, and the MGCF sends the INVITE message to the VCC application server number after it receives the IAM; the VCC application server obtains the called number and proceeds to the next-step call after it receives the INVITE message. The present invention achieves anchoring a call in the CS domain even if there is no intelligent network in the CS domain. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008341 | PAGING AND POWER MANAGEMENT SCHEMES FOR LOCAL NETWORK ACCESS - Paging and power consumption are managed in conjunction with providing local breakout in a wireless wide area network. In some aspects, if a packet destined for an access terminal is received at an access point that provides local breakout, the access point may inform the network so that the network will cause the access point to page the access terminal. Alternatively, in some aspects an access point that provides local breakout may maintain idle context of the access terminal, whereby the access point may autonomously page the access terminal (i.e., without involving the core network). In some aspects local breakout traffic is filtered at an access point to reduce the number of pages or packets sent to an access terminal. In some aspects an indication of a packet type is provided with a page message to enable an access terminal to determine whether to receive the packet. In some aspects a local link interface may be selectively disabled or enabled to limit traffic at an access terminal. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008342 | OPTIMIZING IEEE 802.11 FOR TCIP/IP DATA TRANSFER - Systems and methods are described for increasing data transfer efficiency between networks. The invention being particularly well suited when establishing connectivity between wireless networks, such as based on IEEE 802 standards, and traditionally wired network protocols (often referred to as internet protocols), such as TCP/IP and UDP. The invention provides formatting of network packets and then processing of network packets according to one or more optimization processes. One optimization process comprises performing partial packet retransmissions to increase network efficiency, especially in high bit error rate networks such as wireless networks. Another optimization process comprises suppressing unnecessary packet acknowledgements, therein reducing burst traffic and saving substantial overhead in lossy networks. Additional aspects of the invention provide further benefits. The invention may be implemented within the MAC layer of a network interface, in particular within wireless network interfaces which are being increasingly utilized for both home and office short range interconnectivity. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008343 | Coverage Enhancement Using Dynamic Antennas and Virtual Access Points - Mechanisms for wireless local area network coverage enhancement using dynamic antennas are provided. The dynamic antennas may be used, for example, in an antenna apparatus of an access point. The access point maps a plurality of virtual access points (VAPs), each VAP corresponding to at least one of a plurality of directional antenna patterns of the antenna apparatus. The processor transmits broadcast communication on each of the VAPs a further distance from the access point as compared to transmitting on an omnidirectional antenna pattern of the antenna apparatus. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008344 | SELF-CONFIGURABLE WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK NODE - In a wireless local area network including an access controller (AC) and an access points (AP), the AC transmits a functionality inquiry to the AP. Upon receiving the inquiry, the AP transmits a query response including the functional capabilities of the AP. The AC then generates a map of the functional capabilities present in the network based on the inquiry response. Conflicting or redundant functional capabilities are identified and are disabled, enabled, or reconfigured by instructions from the AC. The AC may selectively enable and/or disable functional capabilities at nodes in the network to provide a more balanced load on the network, and to provide for load sharing by allocating functionalities between and among network nodes having common functional capabilities to satisfy a variety of situations encountered in the network. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008345 | DISTRIBUTED VOICE NETWORK - A method and apparatus that receives an IP packet and encapsulates the packet with an IP header. Further, time-domain multiplexed voice data is received and converted into VoIP packets. Still further, Signaling System 7 (SS7) compliant signals are decoded. The decoded SS7 signals are received and encapsulated prior to transmission to a telephony device. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100014491 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REINFORCING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY WITHIN WIRELESS NETWORK GROUP - A method and system is provided to reinforce wireless communication capabilities between multiple network nodes of an wireless network group. The method and system first detects a wireless transmission capability between a first network node and a second network node. When the wireless transmission capability is lower than a threshold value, one set of reinforcing coordinates will be derived by introducing the first geographic information and the second geographic information. Afterwards, move a third network node to a position with the set of reinforcing coordinates to establish an alternative wireless transmission route between the first network note and second network node. Therefore, when an original wireless transmission route between any two network nodes is abnormal, the alternative wireless transmission route will be available in time and reduce the risks of losing transmission signals. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014492 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINISTIC LATENCY-CONTROLLED COMMUNICATIONS IN PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS - A method includes obtaining a data message having data associated with a process system and mapping the data message to one of multiple classifications. The method also includes wirelessly transmitting the data message, where a Quality of Service (QoS) associated with the transmission is based on the mapping. Mapping the data message could include identifying a type associated with the data message and mapping the data message based on the identified type. The type may include a publish message type, an alert message type, or a management message type. The publish message type could be mapped to an Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS) class, the alert message type could be mapped to a real-time Polling Service (rtPS) class, and the management message type could be mapped to a Best Effort (BE) or non-real-time Polling Service (nrtPS) class. A WiMAX standard could be used to transmit the message, and a WiMAX or WiFi standard could be used to obtain the message. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014493 | NETWORK FOR WIRELESS DATA TRANSMISSION - A wireless data transmission network, the mode of operation of which is determined by a protocol stack according to the OSI reference model in addition to existing standards, is disclosed. In order to enable application-specific modifications during the transmission of data without having to dispense with or infringe upon the respective standard, an interoperability layer is inserted in the protocol stack between the security layer that follows the bit transmission layer and the additional protocol layers based thereon. The additional protocol layers are based on the interoperability layer with, for example, various interfaces in parallel individual stacks. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014494 | ENTERPRISE MOBILE NETWORK FOR PROVIDING CELLULAR WIRELESS SERVICE USING LICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND THE SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - Support for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) devices is provided in an enterprise mobile network that provides wireless service within a coverage area associated with an enterprise using licensed radio frequency spectrum. In various embodiments, support SIP devices is provided by, for example, incorporating SIP user agent in a mobile switching subsystem or in a base station subsystem or by incorporating SIP server functionality into a mobile switching subsystem. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014495 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ITS METHOD, AND DEVICE AND PROGRAM USED FOR SAME - Wireless LAN base station devices ( | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014496 | NODE PLACEMENT METHOD WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK, SUCH AS A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The disclosure includes a method of and associated system for placing nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method includes receiving user-specified parameters regarding the network. The parameters can include a layout of a building or other space, and requirements for the WLAN. An algorithm then employs these parameters to automatically create and optimized layout of multiple wireless access points for the WLAN. The method can display the layout and provide various types of information to the user. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014497 | SELECTIVELY RESTRICING PARTICIPATION IN COMMUNICATION SESSIONS AT A COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments are directed to determining whether to permit a server-arbitrated communication session at a wireless communications device within a wireless communications system. The wireless communications device receives a request to participate in the server-arbitrated communication session. The wireless communications device obtains information related to a current location of the wireless communications device. The wireless communications device determines whether the obtained information satisfies one or more conditions of restriction and/or permission for participation of the wireless communication device in server-arbitrated communication session. The wireless communications device selectively restricts itself from participating in the server-arbitrated communication session based on this determination. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014498 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIDE BANDWIDTH MIXED-MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A network device for implementing high-rate greenfield transmission in a mixed mode frame structure. The network device is configured to transmit a mixed mode frame on two adjacent channels. The mixed mode frame comprises at least two backward compatible portions of a first frequency and a greenfield portion of a second frequency. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014499 | Probabilistic Location Prediction for a Mobile Station - A probabilistic prediction is made of the location of a wireless-enabled mobile station in a wireless local area network. The prediction includes calculating a vector representing movement of the mobile station through a space in which two or more access points of the network are located, and determining a region surrounding the vector in which the mobile station has at least a given probability to be located within a certain period of time. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100020773 | FLOW CONTROL TECHNIQUES FOR CO-LOCALIZED WLAN AND BLUETOOTH - Flow control techniques for co-localized wireless local area network (WLAN) and Bluetooth (BT) allowing efficient sharing of radio medium are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes deriving an available medium time (T | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020774 | INTERACTIVE WiFi CONNECTIVITY FOR MOVING VEHICLES - Systems and methods are provided to enable high-performance Internet access on board moving vehicles using WiFi data communication protocols. In an illustrative implementation, an exemplary wireless data communications environment comprises a ViFi module, an instruction set comprising at least one instruction set to process data for wireless communication between a cooperating component onboard a moving vehicle and other cooperating wireless components, and one or more wide-area wireless communications links. In an illustrative operation, the ViFi module can perform one or more wireless communications techniques to exploit macro-diversity and opportunistic receptions by cooperating WiFi base stations to minimize disruptions for mobile clients. The exemplary ViFi module can communicate data to and from one or more cooperating WiFI base stations such that the one or more base stations can operatively opportunistically overhear a packet, and can probabilistically relay the packet to the intended next hop. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020775 | Mobile Communication Method and Mobile Terminal - A mobile communication method, in which communication is performed using the 3G1X protocol prescribing that mobile terminal MS receives a paging message from a 1x base station through an EV-DO base station, includes the steps of: receiving, at the mobile terminal MS, the paging message through the EV-DO base station BS# | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020776 | Wireless network-based location approximation - The invention pertains to location approximation of devices, e.g., wireless access points and client devices in a wireless network. Location estimates may be obtained by observation/analysis of packets transmitted or received by the access point. For instance, data rate information associated with a packet is used to approximate the distance between a client device and the access point. This may be coupled with known positioning information to arrive at an approximate location for the access point. Confidence information and metrics about whether a device is an access point and the location of that device may also be determined. Accuracy of the location determination may be affected by factors including propagation and environmental factors, transmit power, antenna gain and diversity, etc. A location information database of access points may employ measurements from various devices over time. Such information may identify the location of client devices and provide location-based services to them. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020777 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A management apparatus transmits a registration message to a base station when executing a wireless parameter setting sequence. The base station registers the management apparatus upon the detection of the message. This makes it possible to decrease unwanted communication traffic, and to reduce the time taken to perform the wireless parameter setting processing. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020778 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE - A communication method includes the steps of: establishing a session with one or two or more other communication terminals according to a set content before it is changed in a case where a change request for own set information about a radio communication is received; notifying a set content to be changed to the one or two or more other communication terminals with which the session is established; and changing the own set information from the set content before it is changed to the set content to be changed. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020779 | DATA ROUTING THROUGH LOCAL NETWORK CONNECTED TO A BASE STATION - A base station routes data between a wireless communication device and a local device through a local network. When a route-local indicator is received from the wireless communication device, the base station routes data through the local network to the local device without routing the data through a cellular network. Accordingly, the physical path of the data includes the base station and the local network and does not include cellular equipment other than the base station. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020780 | PSEUDO-RESPONSE FRAME COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PSEUDO-RESPONSE FRAME COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PSEUDO-RESPONSE FRAME TRANSMITTING DEVICE - A great delay in communication and deterioration in quality are avoided from occurring. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100027515 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING CONNECTIVITY OF A MOVING OBJECT TO AN EXTERNAL NETWORK - A method and a system for providing connectivity of a moving object to a external network. The method and system relate to offering high speed Internet access to moving objects that utilize electricity for power and which are powered by a power line. Exemplary applications include trains, trams or streetcars. The system and method make use of at least two stationary connection points connected to the external network and the power line of the moving object. By using the power line as a carrier in order to transfer data from the external network to the moving object and/or from the moving object to the external network and selecting one stationary connection point of the stationary connection points depending on the current position of the moving object in order to route the data to be transferred over the selected stationary connection point, a simple and reliable network connection between the moving object and the external network may be achieved. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027516 | WIRELESS SWITCH WITH VIRTUAL WIRELESS SWITCH MODULES - A wireless switch device is provided that includes a first wired Ethernet interface and a second wired Ethernet interface, and a plurality of virtual wireless switch modules (VWSMs) implemented within the wireless switch device. The VWSMs include a first VWSM that is coupled to a first access port via the first wired Ethernet interface that is allocated to the first VWSM, and a second VWSM that is coupled to a second access port via the second wired Ethernet interface that is allocated to the second VWSM. The first VWSM can be control and manage the first access port, and the second VWSM can control and manage the second access port. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027517 | METHOD FOR MULTI-BAND COMMUNICATION ROUTING WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operation of a node for multi-band communication routing within a wireless communication system comprises communicating a communication session on a default route within an identified quality of service objective on a first frequency band; broadcasting, on a second frequency band, one or more route discovery messages at each of a plurality of sets of transmission variables; storing one or more alternate route table entries in a route table, wherein each of the one or more alternate route table entries are indexed by each of the plurality of sets of transmission variables that are at least within the quality of service objective; selecting a stored alternate route that is at least within the quality of service objective of the communication session on the second frequency band; and switching the communication session to operate using the transmission variables related to the selected alternate route. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027518 | REAL-TIME VISUALIZATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK STATUS - Status of a wireless network is visualized in real-time by collecting data from the network, including locations of the wireless network nodes, and displaying this information in a geographical information service (GIS) such as Google Earth. Node information such as node status may be gathered from nodes by a display node, or may be gathered and maintained by a node controller. Unity scaled antenna models may be used to display node coverage. Updates to network status may be polled by the display node, or by the network controller and pushed to the display node. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027519 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCANNING IN WLAN - The embodiments disclose a method for scanning in a radio communication system, in particular in a WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network), including transmitting by a MS on all channels a probe message containing the IP address of the original AP of the MS and an MAC address of the MS; switching to the original channel; transmitting a response inquiry message to the original AP; and receiving a probe response message within a predetermined period, wherein, if the AP of the probe message received on the channel is not the original AP, then the AP transmits the probe response message containing the MAC address to the original AP according to the IP address; and the original AP buffers the probe response message received, and transmits the probe response message to the MS according to the MAC address after the response inquiry message sent by the MS has been received. The embodiments further disclose a scanning system in a WLAN. By using the method and system, not only the time delay during the scanning is reduced, but also the network security is improved and the difficulty for realization is decreased. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027520 | Transmission terminal, reception terminal, and information distribution system - A transmission terminal includes an information generation unit, a transmission unit, a delivery management unit, and a reception unit. The information generation unit generates information that is to be transmitted to a destination reception terminal. The transmission unit transmits information that the information generation unit has generated. The delivery management unit manages transmission of information. The reception unit receives information that the destination reception terminal transmits. Furthermore, the information generation unit generates or receives transmission information that is to be transmitted to the destination reception terminal and generates redundant information for the destination reception terminal to restore the transmission information. The delivery management unit causes the information generation unit to generate, and causes the transmission unit to retransmit, the redundant information when the reception unit has not received a successful reception reply from the destination reception terminal. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027521 | INTRA-PREMISES CONTENT AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - System(s) and method(s) are provided to route traffic and signaling between a set of networked femto access points (APs) and devices served there from, and enable management of content and equipment that is part of a network functionally coupled to the set of networked femto APs. Networked equipment spans a network deployed within the coverage area spanned by the set of femto APs. A routing platform functionally couples the networked equipment and the femto AP to enable content manipulation amongst a mobile device and the equipment. Routing platform also affords remote control of the networked equipment. Delivery of advertisement and monetary incentive(s) can be provided through the routing platform to the equipment. Routing platform further provides security features related to operation of specific equipment and wireless services supplied via the routing platform. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027522 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system capable of transmitting, at a high speed, information requested by a wireless communication terminal to the wireless communication terminal which moves through a spot wireless area at a high speed. In a wireless base station | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100034177 | TWO-TIER RANDOM BACKOFF AND COMBINED RANDOM BACKOFF AND TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for two-tier backoff interval randomization are presented. An initial message transmission can have both a chip level and an access cycle duration level backoff applied to avoid potential collisions. Additionally, improved transmit power calculations and the random backoff can be combined to further improve the probability of a successful message reception and decoding. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034178 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITY-BASED ADOPTION OF AN ACCESS DEVICE - Apparatus and methods are provided for priority-based adoption of access devices coupled to a wireless switch. A method comprises maintaining a respective adoption priority for each of a plurality of access devices adopted by the wireless switch. The method further comprises receiving, in response to a disconnection event, an adoption request from a first access device coupled to the wireless switch, wherein the first access device has an adoption priority. The method further comprises analyzing the adoption priority for the first access device, and responding to the adoption request in a manner that is influenced by the analysis. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034179 | Legacy mobile station support on sip-based Femto device - A Femto network capable of relaying wireless communications is provided. The Femto network includes a Femto Access Point (FAP) and an MSC Femto Interworking Function (MFIF). The FAP and the MFIF each include a modified XML schema. The FAP modified XML schema is configured to include subscriber station identification information in a Presence Information Data Format Location (PIDF-LO) signal. The FAP is configured to transmit said the PIDF-LO via session initiation protocol. The MFIF XML schema is configured to interpret the PIDF-LO signal and extract the subscriber station identification information from said PIDF-LO signal. The MFIF is configured to send said messages and said subscriber station information to a mobile switching center (MSC). | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034180 | Apparatus And Method For Network Access Device Localization On A Wireless Network - According to an example embodiment, a method for wireless communication includes establishing a communication session between a base station associated with a wireless network and a network access device associated with a separate communications network. The network access device provides the base station access to the communications network. The method further includes receiving location information from the network access device. The location information describes the location of the network access device. The network device receives the location information from a server on the communications network. In addition, the method includes providing a service to at least one wireless device utilizing the location information. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034181 | BASE STATION AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A base station forms a communication area enabling communication with a mobile communication network through a local network that includes the base station. The base station includes a monitoring unit that monitors an address for data communication with the mobile communication network and assigned to a mobile terminal in the communication area; a storage unit that stores combination information indicating a combination of the address monitored and identification information of the mobile terminal; a receiving unit that receives, from a communication terminal in the local network, data having the identification information; a comparing unit that compares the combination information with a combination of a destination address of the data and the identification information in the data; and a transmitting unit that transmits the data to the mobile terminal if the combination and the combination information coincide, and performs error processing if the combination and the combination information do not coincide. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034182 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - When a wireless communication apparatus transmits a data frame requesting an ACK frame, it is expected that a receiver station will transmit the ACK frame. A preamble analyzer analyzes whether or not a preamble pattern added to the header of a received frame exists from the time it is expected that the ACK frame will be received. When a desired preamble pattern is detected, the preamble analyzer supplies instructions to start an operation of demodulating a reception signal to a demodulator via a controller. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034183 | Flexible WLAN/WPAN system with high throughput - Flexible WLAN/WPAN system with high throughput. A medium access controller (MAC), that is capable to be implemented within a communication device, is operative in accordance with any one of a number of capability sets, based on which capability set is enabled when implemented within a particular communication device. Each respective capability set directs operation of the MAC in accordance with a corresponding set of operational parameters. The enabling of one of the capability sets may be based upon one or more of a type of physical layer transceiver (PHY) with which the MAC interfaces (e.g., within the communication device), a communication protocol by which the apparatus communicates with a communication network, and/or other considerations. The MAC can include an optimization module therein that is operative to adjust one or more operational parameters based on a change of an operational condition of the communication network with which the communication device communicates. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034184 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MAIN COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND AUXILIARY COMMUNICATION DEVICE OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system comprises a main communication device including a first communication unit executing wireless communication by a first method (mainly for voice data communication) and a second communication unit executing wireless communication by a second method (for communication of data other than voice data at a higher transfer rate) and an auxiliary communication device (operating on a secondary battery) including first and second auxiliary communication units executing wireless communication with the first and second communication units by the first and second methods, respectively. Whether communication of data (except voice data) should be executed by the first method or by the second method is determined based on the amount of the data. When the first method is selected, the data is segmented in prescribed data units and the communication of the segmented data is executed by the first communication unit and the first auxiliary communication unit by the first method. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100040029 | Apparatus, system, and method for obtaining local connectivity settings - An apparatus, system, and method for a communication network that includes a mobile device, a target device, and a connection settings server. The mobile device is configured to transmit a request for device-to-device connection settings data to the connection settings server, the connection settings server is configured to receive the request, determine appropriate device-to-device connection settings data, and transmit the appropriate device-to-device connection settings data to the mobile device, the mobile device is further configured to receive the appropriate device-to-device connection settings data and establish a device-to-device connection with the target device, wherein the establishing of the device-to-device connection is facilitated by the device-to-device connection settings data. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100040030 | Communication device, communication system, communication method and communication program - The object is to prevent a third party from specifying a condition of data communication executed by a radio terminal in a radio network using a radio communication device easily accessible to anyone such as WLAN. The radio base station | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100040031 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESSLY DISTRIBUTING MULTIPLEX SIGNAL COMPRISING MULTIMEDIA DATA OVER A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Described herein are various techniques for gathering multimedia data from one or more sources and transmiting that data over a local network to one or more devices, thereby providing ubiquitous multimedia across the network. In one configuration, a device comprising a server receives multimedia data from one or more devices on a local network, creates a multiplex signal from the various multimedia data received from the devices, and wirelessly transmits the multiplex signal over the local network. The server is further configured wherein the multiplex signal comprises a plurality of logical channels, with at least one of the logical channels representing multimedia data received from one of the devices on the network. By then tuning into one or more of the logical channels of the transmitted multiplex signal, a device on the local network can present to a user multimedia data that originates from or resides on another device on the network. According to other configurations, the multiplex signal contains not only multimedia data retrieved from devices on a local network, but can also include multimedia data that originated from sources on a wide area network, such as the Internet or a cellular telephone network. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100040032 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING INTER-PICONET MULTI-HOP MESH COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS THEREOF - In the environment of a wireless personal area network (WPAN) with a plurality of piconets, to allow a tree-based routing service and an optimized routing service through repeatedly building parent-child piconets, an inter-piconet mesh communication device and method for providing a multi-hop communication function among a plurality of piconets is provided by defining a mesh sublayer between a frame convergence sublayer and a MAC sublayer and providing a mesh data service to the frame convergence sublayer through a mesh service access point, defining a mesh sublayer management entity between a device management entity and a MAC sublayer management entity and providing a mesh management service to a device management entity through a mesh sublayer management entity service access point. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100040033 | REVERSE DIRECTION GRANT (RDG) FOR WIRELESS NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES SUBJECT TO COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE - In accordance with at least some embodiments, a system includes an access point and a station in communication with the access point. The station has at least two network technology subsystems subject to coexistence interference. The station selectively uses reverse direction grant (RDG) for communications by network technology subsystems subject to coexistence interference. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100046485 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE CHANNEL ACCESS AND NAV RECOVERY - An apparatus and method for communications are disclosed. The apparatus may include a processing system configured to send data to a node on a first channel and receive an acknowledgement to the data from the node, the processing system being further configured to determine whether a second channel is available from information contained in the acknowledgement. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046486 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - It is an object of the present invention to provide a wireless communication system which can allow a wireless LAN terminal device ( | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046487 | MULTICHANNEL ARCHITECTURE FOR HIGH THROUGHPUT MODEMS - An apparatus for wireless communications is disclosed herein that is configured to have a plurality of transceivers arranged to process a plurality of spatial streams, wherein each of the plurality of transceivers is configured to operate asynchronously and simultaneously with other transceivers of the plurality of transceivers. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046488 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING A SCHEDULED LEGACY PROTECTION FRAME - A method for informing a nearby device of an upcoming data transmission is described. A scheduled time is obtained. A legacy protection frame is sent within a fixed time period. The legacy protection frame can be decoded by the nearby device. A long range (LR) data transmission may be sent after the fixed time period. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046489 | Enhanced E911 network access for a call center using session initiation protocol (SIP) messaging - A switched emergency call (e.g., a 911 call, an alarm company call) forwarded by a telematics call center is converted into a session initiation protocol (SIP) packetized phone call at the call center, and routed over an IP network, for presentation to an emergency services gateway, which connects to a selective router via dedicated circuits, gaining full access to the Enhanced 911 network. This provides a PSAP receiving a call from a telematics call center or other call center with all features available in an Enhanced 911 network, e.g., callback number of the 911 caller, and location of the 911 caller. Location of the caller is provided using a VoIP positioning center (VPC), queried from the call center. In this way, the switched emergency call is converted into a SIP packetized phone call and routed without further passage through the public switched telephone network (PSTN). | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046490 | INTELLIGENT PICO-CELL FOR TRANSPORT OF WIRELESS DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS OVER WIRELINE NETWORKS - In one embodiment a pico cell may be used to detect a presence of a wireless device and receive a wireless signal from the wireless device. The wireless signal may then be converted from a protocol used by the wireless device to a converted signal in a protocol suitable for use with a broadband connection. The converted signal may then be transmitted over the broadband connection. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100054217 | REGISTRATION OF MULTIPLE CARE-OF-ADDRESSES - Systems, methods, devices and software are described which provide for bulk registration of care-of-addresses (CoAs) associated with mobility signaling in communication networks. A mobile node transmits a bulk CoA registration message towards a correspondent node. The correspondent node receives the bulk CoA message, generates tokens associated with the CoAs and transmits the tokens back toward the mobile node. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054218 | Method and System for Detecting Broadcast Receivers and Transitioning to Selective Communications - A method and a device for detecting the presence of broadcast receivers, such as mobile communication devices, within a communication network and transitioning to selective communications to one or more of the receivers. The method including sending a broadcast query to a plurality of mobile units (“MUs”), receiving at least one response from each at least one of the MUs, each of the responses specifying whether each of the at least one MU that can receive a broadcast transmission, and indicating to a user whether any of the MUs responded to the broadcast query. Described is a further method including receiving a broadcast transmission from an MU, sending a request to the MU to conduct a private communication session, and conducting the private communication session with the MU. Described is a device including means for determining whether further devices can receive a broadcast transmission from the device, and means for transitioning from a broadcast communication session to a private communication session. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054219 | Private Access Point Beacon Signals In Wireless Networks - This patent application relates to private access point beacon signals in wireless networks. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054220 | NETWORK-INITIATED IMS REGISTRATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method and a system for the network-initiated IMS registration of a telecommunication terminal. According to said method, the network transmits a message having specific characteristics to the terminal via an existing communication link, and the terminal recognizes said message as an IMS registration request based on the characteristics of the message end subsequently sends a registration message to the network to register with the IMS. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054221 | ACCESS POINT, MOBILE STATION, AND METHOD FOR DETECTING ATTACKS THEREON - A mobile station (STA) communicates with a WLAN device over a communication system includes a storage system, at least one processor, a detection module, an address determination module, a transmission module, and a response module. The STA detects a MAC management protocol data unit (MMPDU) over the communication system, determines whether the MMPDU comprises a spurious data frame posing as the STA to the WLAN device, based at least partly on a comparison of a source address and a destination address of the MMPDU with network addresses of the STA and the WLAN device, respectively, transmits a request data frame having a highest priority in a current connection state to the WLAN device, and determines whether the WLAN device has been attacked based on whether a response data frame is received from the WLAN device. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054222 | Gateway Selection Mechanism - An arrangement and method in a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) for selecting a gateway to connect a User Equipment (UE) to a home PLMN when the UE is located in an access network connected to a visited PLMN. The arrangement receives a first Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), which includes an identity of the UE user. Based on the identity of the user and knowledge of the visited PLMN, the arrangement selects whether the UE should establish a connection only to a gateway in the home PLMN, only to a gateway in the visited PLMN, or both. The arrangement transmits to the UE, an appropriate address for the home PLMN gateway, the visited PLMN gateway, or both depending on the selection. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054223 | Physical Layer Data Unit Format - In a wireless communication system wherein communication devices exchange information utilizing data units that conform to a first format, a beamforming training (BFT) data unit that conforms to a second format is transmitted, wherein a length of the BFT data unit is shorter than lengths supported by the first format, wherein the BFT data unit is for transmitting PHY beamforming training information. Information to indicate the BFT data unit conforms to the second format is transmitted to a receiving device. The BFT data unit is generated according to the second format, wherein the BFT data unit includes BFT information elements. The BFT data unit is then transmitted to the receiving device. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054224 | COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM FOR WIRELESS DEVICES OR THE LIKE - Briefly, in accordance with one embodiment of the invention, a wireless terminal may include an application subsystem and a communication subsystem. The communication subsystem in one embodiment may enable a virtual direct interface to a remote network to be presented to the application subsystem via a wireless communication system air link interface. The communication subsystem may allow applications of the application subsystem to be independent of any particular radio technology or network implementation of a wireless communication system air link interface. Once a session is established between the communication subsystem and the wireless communication system air link interface, the application subsystem may gain access to the remote network through the communication subsystem via a transport interface. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100061349 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A wireless access point is provided for transmitting radio signals that has isolators positioned about the perimeter of the wireless access point dividing the perimeter of the wireless access point into segments and reflector plates positioned within each segment for directing the transmission of the radio signals within each segment. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061350 | MULTI-CHANNEL MESH NODES EMPLOYING STACKED RESPONSES - Rather than using a large number of transceivers (transmitter/receiver pairs) operating in parallel, Access Points with multiple channels are used to aggregate, or stack, transmitted response communications, e.g., transmitting multiple acknowledgements (ACKs) in a single packet to one or more sources of received packets. The method includes sending on a plurality of channels, by each of a plurality of respective first nodes, a communication to a second node, receiving on the plurality of channels, by the second node, the communication from each of the plurality of first nodes and sending, by the second node, a transmission that contains a response to each communication that was successfully received from each of the plurality of first nodes. The response to each of the plurality of first nodes is part of a single message sent by the second node. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061351 | MULTI-COEXISTENCE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON INTERFERENCE-AWARE ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE SAME - A multi-coexistence communication technology is provided. A multi-coexistence communication system based on an interference-aware environment and a method for operating the same can remove interference detected using an interference temperature limit from at least one transmission signal and transmit the signal to a main/sub communication terminal during data communication on a wired/wireless communication network formed of a main base station, a sub base station, the main communication terminal, and the sub communication terminal, thereby smoothly providing a high-speed seamless data transmission service based on a multi-coexistence communication environment where a distributed small-scale network requiring a low transmission rate, a medium-scale network for providing various wireless communication services, and a large-scale broadcasting network requiring a high transmission rate and high quality coexist, and preventing congestion due to increased demand for frequency resources. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061352 | METHOD FOR ROUTING TRAFFIC IN A LOCAL MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for routing VoIP traffic in a local mobile communication network includes selecting a path among a set of possible paths between two nodes of the network based on the number of hops and the transmission time of a reference voice packet along the possible paths, the transmission time along each path being a function of the transmission rates associated with the links composing the path. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061353 | ULTRA WIDEBAND ETHERNET BRIDGING APPARATUS AND METHOD - Provided is an ultra wideband (UWB) Ethernet bridging apparatus and method. The UWB Ethernet bridging apparatus differentiates control frames and data frames from one another and transmits the differentiated frames to the different internal path. A processor processes the control frames, and the data frame is processed by using separate hardware so that the UWB Ethernet bridging apparatus can be miniaturized/simplified by using a small-sized embedded processor that is cheap and has low performance. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061354 | OFFSET TIME FOR RANGING REQUEST MESSAGES - Various example embodiments are disclosed. According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a base station in a wireless network, a paging message to a mobile station, the paging message identifying the mobile station. The method may also include receiving, at an offset time after the sending the paging message, a ranging request message from the mobile station, the offset time being based at least in part on an identifier of the mobile station. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061355 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DETERMINATION METHOD - A communication terminal comprising: a determination unit which determines whether or not the communication terminal is able to connect to a first external terminal using a wireless communication, based on a communication condition of wired or wireless communication with a second external terminal which is different from the first external terminal, when the communication terminal receives a connection request from the first external terminal. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061356 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE REDUCTION THROUGH PROXIMITY BASED TRANSMISSION MODE CHANGE - A method for transmission mode change in a telecommunication network, said network having a public network comprising at least one public base station (NB) covering a public cell and a private network comprising at least one private base station (PBS) covering a private cell, wherein said at least one private base station has limited access rights for User Equipment (UEs) in the private network, and where said UEs are able to also communicate with the public network, comprising the step of: performing a private base station transmission mode change when the private base station is in an interference reduction transmission mode to an active transmission mode when a UE with access right to said private base station is detected in proximity of said private base station, where a detection of said proximity is based on information being specific for said UE and its relation to said private base station. The disclosure also relates to a telecommunication system. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061357 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system for carrying out data communication among a plurality of communication stations is disclosed in which a first communication station for transmitting to other communication stations a Request To Send (RTS) signal for requesting a transmission upon the start of the data transmission; and a plurality of second communication stations transmitting to other communication stations a Clear To Send (CTS) signal for notifying the completion of preparing the reception, wherein the first communication station transmits the RTS signal describing at least each of addresses the second communication stations that are desired to receive the data, and receives a plurality of CTS signals transmitted from each of the second communication stations in order to increase communication capacity. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061358 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system for carrying out data communication among a plurality of communication stations is disclosed in which a first communication station for transmitting to other communication stations a Request To Send (RTS) signal for requesting a transmission upon the start of the data transmission; and a plurality of second communication stations transmitting to other communication stations a Clear To Send (CTS) signal for notifying the completion of preparing the reception, wherein the first communication station transmits the RTS signal describing at least each of addresses the second communication stations that are desired to receive the data, and receives a plurality of CTS signals transmitted from each of the second communication stations in order to increase communication capacity. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100067503 | Method for the Transmission of Ethernet Transmission Protocol-Based Data Packets Between at Least One Mobile Communication Unit and a Communication System - In order to transmit Ethernet transmission protocol-based data packets between at least one mobile communication unit and a communication system via generic route encapsulation tunneling established between a home agent unit and a foreign agent unit, at least one GRE key provided for establishing generic route encapsulation tunneling is linked to the media access control address assigned to the mobile communication unit. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067504 | System and method for exposing malicious clients in wireless access networks - Malicious clients within a wireless access network are identified using bait traffic transmitted between a collaborating wireless access point and a collaborating client. The bait traffic entices a malicious client to transmit malicious traffic towards the collaborating wireless access point. Upon receiving the malicious traffic, the collaborating wireless access point is able to identify the malicious client and report the presence of the malicious client within the wireless access network. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067505 | Performance of a Wireless Communication System - The invention relates to a device to be used in a wireless communication system with CSMA-based MAC, comprising means for transmitting at least a first and a second RTS message and at least a first and a second data packet on a transmission medium, and a spatially selective antenna. It is further proposed that said device uses a distributed antenna that combines the antenna elements of several devices and that said device observers the transmissions of other devices, analyzes the observed transmissions for transmission patterns and adapts its own transmissions to said detected transmission patterns. The invention further relates to a system, a method and a computer program to be used in a wireless communication system. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067506 | WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network ( | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067507 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING A SECOND RECEIVER TO ESTABLISH TIME AND FREQUENCY - Apparatus and methods for synchronizing a network element (e.g. access points, femtocells, etc.) to a master network (such as a cellular network) to provide accurate frequency and/or time references for their internal systems. In one embodiment, the network element utilizes a dedicated receiver (or transceiver) to receive timing information from the master network. The implementation of the dedicated receiver is advantageous for cost and simplicity reasons. Furthermore, the timing or frequency information, as received from the master network, is used to correct the network element's internal timing. In addition, the network element's internal timing can operate in open-loop mode, if no master network can be found, thereby allowing for the device to continue providing service to network users. Additionally, a dedicated receiver can also receive information (e.g. location, SID, NID, SSID, etc.) local to the network element, such information may be useful or required for seamless operation within the master network. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067508 | METHOD FOR SELECTING SERVING PNC BASED ON FER IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Provided is a method for selecting a serving PNC at a wireless device in a wireless mesh network for data communication. In the method, an initial PNC is selected if data is generated to transmit. Then, an initial MAC frame size is decided and data communication is performed with the selected initial serving PNC. A PNC having a best channel state is reselected from PNCs in a same coverage as a serving PNC after selecting the initial serving PNC. A MAC frame size is decided for the reselected serving PNC and data communication with the reselected serving PNC is performed. The data communication is terminated if a FER of the reselected serving PNC is larger than a maximum allowable FER or if there is no data to transmit after the data communication is performed. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067509 | RAPID LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - According to one embodiment, apparatus having corresponding computer programs comprise: a receiver to receive a first wireless signal from a wireless network; an address module to determine a type of Internet Protocol address assignment employed by the wireless network based on the first wireless signal; and a connection module to establish a network-layer connection to the wireless network based on the type of Internet Protocol address assignment determined by the address module. According to another embodiment, apparatus having corresponding computer programs comprise: a transmitter to transmit a first wireless signal, wherein the first wireless signal represents an indication of a type of Internet Protocol address assignment employed by a wireless network connected to the apparatus. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100074234 | WIRELESS NETWORKS AND METHODS USING MULTIPLE VALID NETWORK IDENTIFIERS - A wireless sensor network comprises a plurality of nodes. Each of the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate messages through the wireless sensor network based on a first network identifier identifying the wireless sensor network. Each of the nodes is further configured to communicate messages through the wireless sensor network based on a default network identifier identifying the wireless sensor network, and the first network identifier and the default network identifier are concurrently valid for communicating messages through the wireless sensor network. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074235 | GROUPING OF CELLS FOR EFFICIENT NEIGHBOR CELL INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is described a method and apparatus to group at least one cell of a network according to at least one characteristic of a physical layer cell identification of the at least one cell, and to signal a representation comprising the at least one characteristic of the grouped at least one cell to a mobile station. In addition, according to another exemplary aspect of the invention there is at least a method and apparatus to receive signaling comprising a representation of a grouped at least one cell of a network, where the representation is according to at least one characteristic of a physical layer cell identification of the at least one cell, and to determine, based on the signaling, whether the grouped at least one cell are to be considered for an operation including at least one of reselection and measurement reporting. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074236 | Wireless communication system, access point, controller, network management device, and method of setting network identifier of access point - There is provided a wireless communication system including: a wireless terminal that communicates information; an access point that performs wireless communication with the wireless terminal; a main server that communicates with the access point through a network and manages line connection of the wireless terminal; and a survival server that communicates with the access point through the network and manages the line connection of the wireless terminal in place of the main server, wherein the access point detects a communication state between the main server and the access point and between the survival server and the access point, and sets a network identifier of the access point according to the communication state, and wherein the wireless terminal performs wireless communication with the access point using the network identifier, and communicates information with the main server or the survival server according to the network identifier. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074237 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND IDENTIFYING TRANSMIT POWER VALUE IN MULTI-USER MIMO - A method for transmitting and identifying a transmit power value in a multi-user MIMO scheme is disclosed. The transmit power value transmission method includes calculating available transmit power ratios for respective layers, reducing a number of bits used to represent entire transmit power ratio values by allocating same bit value to a plurality of same transmit power ratio values among the calculated transmit power ratio values for the respective layers; quantizing a transmit power ratio values of symbols to be transmitted to the UE using the entire transmit power ratio values of the reduced number of bits; and transmitting the quantized transmit power ratio values to the UE. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074238 | VIRTUAL NETWORK IMAGE SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SERVICES - A virtual network image system (VNIS) maintaining virtual counterparts for each of the entities in a real-world, physical wireless local area network (WLAN) to which the VNIS corresponds. The virtual counterparts operate in accordance with a communication protocol that corresponds to that of the WLAN and under the control of a VNIS manager component. The VNIS manager component predicts and optimizes operating configurations associated with the virtual counterparts, based on “what-if” analyses, to provide automation of various services relating to the operation of the physical WLAN. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074239 | Wireless Detector and Adapter - The handheld wireless network detector and adaptor includes a housing at least partially enclosing a processor, a self-contained power source, an interface, a wireless transceiver, a wireless network detector and a wireless network adapter. The interface is configured to communicate with an external computing device. The wireless transceiver is configured for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The wireless network detector is configured to use the wireless transceiver to detect a presence of a detected wireless network. The wireless network adapter is configured for facilitating real time communication between the external computing device and the detected wireless network via the interface and said wireless transceiver. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100080197 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GIGABIT WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - A method and system for wireless communication with a mobile device. A first wireless communication network, such as a WiMax or cellular-based network, has a first maximum wireless speed. A second wireless communication network, such as a near-photonic speed gigabit link (“GiLink”) network, has a second maximum wireless speed. The second wireless maximum speed is less than the first maximum wireless speed. The second wireless communication network provides control plane services for wireless communication between the mobile device and the first wireless communication network. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080198 | INTERNET PROTOCOL CELLULAR PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE - In one embodiment, a communication system includes a private cellular base station subsystem to communicate, using a cellular radio frequency air radio interface, with home cellular wireless devices and visiting cellular wireless devices located within a coverage area associated with the private cellular base station subsystem. Each of the home cellular wireless devices has associated therewith (i) a public cellular number from a home public land mobile network, and (ii) a private cellular number from a private branch exchange (PBX) numbering scheme. The communication system further includes a private cellular switching subsystem to provide cellular switching functionality within the communication system for the home cellular wireless devices in connection with sessions that are associated with the respective private cellular numbers of the respective home cellular wireless devices. The private cellular switching subsystem is coupled to Internet Protocol (IP) devices, each of the IP devices having an associated extension number from the PBX numbering scheme. The private cellular switching subsystem is used to provide PBX services to the home wireless devices and IP devices. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080199 | OUT-OF-SYNCHRONIZATION HANDLING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method for handling out-of-synchronization (SYNC) includes generating a plurality of combination sets of transport channels utilized by a communication device. The method also includes selecting, based on a window-based parameter, a highest-ranking combination set of transport channels out of the plurality of combination sets of transport channels. The highest-ranking combination set of transport channels excludes one or more out-of-SYNC transport channels. The method further comprises providing, to a window-based data processing unit, data packets from transport channels in the highest-ranking combination set of transport channels, without providing data packets from the one or more out-of-SYNC transport channels to the window-based data processing unit. Apparatus and machine-readable media for out-of-SYNC avoidance and/or detection are also provided. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080200 | IDENTIFYING A DESIRED MESH NETWORK IN A MULTIPLE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Network devices in a multi-network wireless mesh network environment identify themselves as members of the network by receiving a broadcast message from a first mesh network device that has joined the wireless mesh network, and identifying that the broadcast transmission has been received such as by actuating a light, playing a sound, or sending an identifying reply message back to a broadcasting mesh network device. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080201 | Wi-Fi broadcast of links - A method and system is disclosed for transmitting wide fidelity (Wi-Fi) signals to an electronic device. These Wi-Fi signals may contain content specific links that may be relevant to the surroundings of a user. The user may be able to select these links by interfacing with the electronic device to view media content relevant to the user. The Wi-Fi signals may be transmitted from a base station. The base station can be configured by an operator of the base station to transmit any type of link deemed relevant to a user of the electronic device. Additionally, the base station may be configured to transmit location information to the electronic device for use with a positioning program in the device. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080202 | WIRELESS DEVICE REGISTRATION, SUCH AS AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF A WI-FI ENABLED DEVICE - A system for providing a wireless device with access to a computer network includes an access point that sets up a radio link with the wireless device and couples the wireless device to the network. The system also includes a server that receives data packets from the access point through the computer network. The data packets include at least one data packet that has a first identifier that uniquely identifies the wireless device and a second identifier that corresponds to at least one of a manufacturer code or a vendor code of the wireless device. The system further includes a database that is coupled to the server and stores data for associating a service plan with the first and second identifiers and basing the service plan, at least in part, on the second identifier. Other features and systems are also disclosed. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080203 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Wireless Communications Within a Building - A wireless distribution secured cabling system includes faceplates, each of which contains an antenna or other radiating element and an active amplifier, which serves as a bi-directional repeater for the wireless communication system. The system further includes a patch panel or distribution module which connects multiple cables, which may be either twisted pair or coaxial, to amplifier, acting as a power divider and/or an impedance matching device. An antenna, which may be mounted either outside of a building structure or inside the building structure, provides communications between the structured cabling system and a service provider base station. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080204 | WLAN TRANSCEIVING SYSTEM - A WLAN transceiving system, which comprises: a plurality of antennas; a plurality of receiving circuits, wherein each one of receiving circuits is coupled to one of the antenna to receive a input signal from the antennas; and a plurality of transmitting circuits, for outputting one of an output signal and an amplified output signal, wherein at least one of the transmitting circuit includes a power amplifier and utilizes at least one of the power amplifier to amplify an output signal to generate the amplified output signal, where a number of the power amplifiers is less than a number of the antennas. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080205 | RATE RECOVERY MECHANISIM, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A WLAN-BLUETOOTH COEXISTANCE SYSTEM - In accordance with the invention, a method and system relating to the rate recovery mechanism in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and Bluetooth coexistence system is provided. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080206 | AUTOCONFIGURATION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK AND ITS METHOD, AND GATEWAY APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention enables connection between a wireless sensor node and a service server while reducing load on the wireless sensor node. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100085947 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A system for transmitting data via a core portion of a computer network to a mobile device is described. The network includes a plurality of access points wherein each access point includes a memory where data for onward transmission to the mobile device may be cached and is operable to communicate with the mobile device over a short-range wireless connection, when the mobile device is in range thereof, and with the core portion of the network over a backhaul connection on a substantially continuous basis. The system comprises: a location collection server for receiving location data from the mobile device; an access point prediction engine for generating predictions of one or more of the access points which the mobile device is considered likely to come in range of in the future based on recent location data received at the location collection server; and a content delivery server for transmitting the data or a portion thereof to the one or more predicted access points via the backhaul connection for caching at the access points and for onward transmission to the mobile device in the event that the mobile device comes into range of the access point, or one or more of the access points where data is transmitted to more than one predicted access point. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085948 | Apparatuses for Hybrid Wired and Wireless Universal Access Networks - A gateway switch comprises: two or more transceiving modules, wherein each of the transceiving modules is capable of transmitting and receiving data, wherein the data is an analog signal or a digital signal, and wherein each of the transceiving modules provides a different network connection type; a system module for processing the received data in accordance with one or more rules; and a switching module for symmetrically switching the processed data from any one of the transceiving modules to a selected one of the transceiving modules for transmission of the processed data; wherein the system module selects one of the transceiving modules for the transmission of the processed data as a function of the rules. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085949 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, AUTHENTICATOR APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ATTACHING A BASE STATION APPARATUS TO AN AUTHENTICATOR APPARATUS - A Base Station apparatus includes a network attachment device and a memory. The network attachment device is adapted to attach the Base Station apparatus to an Authenticator apparatus by sending a Base Station Attachment signal. The Base Station Attachment signal is adapted to request globally scoped or per-Base Station information from the Authenticator apparatus and the memory is adapted to store received globally scoped or per-Base Station apparatus information. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085950 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device includes a physical layer protocol processor which can transmit and receive data by first to Nth communication schemes, where ith communication scheme has compatibility with the first to (i−1)th communication scheme. A first controller generates a first frame for forbidding communication by the first to Nth communication schemes for a first period, and orders the physical layer protocol processor to transmit the first frame by the first communication scheme. A second controller generates a second frame for lifting the forbiddance on communication, and orders the physical layer protocol processor to transmit the second frame by a jth communication scheme. A third controller generates a third frame for forbidding communication by a (j+1)th to Nth communication schemes for a second period, and orders the physical layer protocol processor to transmit the third frame by the (j+1)th communication scheme. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085951 | MANAGING UNSCHEDULED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A MULTIRADIO DEVICE - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of radio modules integrated within the same wireless communication device. A control strategy may be employed to manage both more predictable and more spontaneous wireless communication mediums, wherein a local controller may be employed in a radio module utilizing an unscheduled wireless medium, like WLAN, for determining whether adequate time has been allocated to complete a transaction. If the transaction cannot be completed in the allowed time, it may be delayed until adequate time exists, and the delay may be reported so that the time may be reallocated to other radio modules. The radio module may then enter a power-saving mode until the transaction can be completed. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100091745 | COVERAGE OPTIMISATION FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - In a wireless network comprising access points deployed within a designated zone of coverage, the radio frequency field strength resulting from radiation from the access points is optimised as a function of location by means of control of the transmission power and/or radiation pattern of the access points in response to measurements from sensors at defined locations that measure received signal power, the received power being related to radio frequency field strength. Sensors may be deployed within the designated zone of coverage, at the edge of the zone and/or outside the zone and optimisation of the transmission parameters of the access points in terms of transmission power and/or radiation pattern is carried out taking into account the location of the sensors in addition to the received power at the sensors. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091746 | COVERAGE-HOLE DETECTION and SELF HEALING - A system, apparatus and techniques for detecting and self-healing coverage hole conditions in a wireless network are disclosed. The apparatus includes a monitor module that is configured in a data forwarding plane of a network switch and a regulatory module configured in a control plane of the switch. The monitor module is configured to detect a coverage hole condition affecting a mobile device associated with an access port and the regulatory module is configured to adjust transmission power to the access port based on the condition. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091747 | Dynamic thermal control for wireless transceivers - Methods and apparatus for dynamic thermal management and control within, e.g., small form-factor wireless devices such as laptop computers or cellular “smartphones”. In one embodiment, a thermal management system monitors the temperature (or other relevant criteria) for one or more components, and implements different operating states within the wireless transceiver (e.g., Wi-Fi™ or WiMAX transceiver) so as to both reduce thermal output and minimize disruption to the wireless link and/or user experience. In another embodiment, a wireless client may communicate with other clients, and/or access points, so as to cooperatively provide more options for thermal management. In addition, methods and apparatus employing “high performance” (e.g., high power output or high data rate) radios within aggressively small industrial designs are also disclosed. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091748 | Voice Transmission Apparatus - A voice transmission apparatus includes a jitter absorbing buffer unit provided in the receiving unit and which absorbs a transmission delay in the packets, and a transmission wait control unit provided in a transmitting unit and which links a packet to be transmitted when transmission temporarily breaks down to a queue. A transmission wait control unit | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091749 | Transmission and Reception Parameter Control - A system and method for implementing transmission parameter control at a transmitting station is described. The exemplary system and method comprises querying a transmission parameter control module for a transmission schedule. The transmission schedule comprises at least one schedule entry defining a set of transmission parameter controls as they pertain to a destination address. At least one packet of data is then transmitted to the destination address according to the transmission parameters controls of at least one schedule entry from the transmission schedule. A system and method for selecting an antenna configuration corresponding to a next transmission of packet data is also disclosed. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091750 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION - A device and method for receiving, by a mobile terminal, system information from a base station. The method includes: receiving a block of first system information from the base station in a predetermined frame of a broadcast channel configured to broadcast only system information; and after the block of first system information is received, receiving a first block of second system information from the base station in a predetermined frame of a downlink shared channel configured to carry system information and other data, the first block of second system information including schedule information relating to a second block of second system information. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091751 | COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM FOR WIRELESS DEVICES OR THE LIKE - Briefly, in accordance with one embodiment of the invention, a wireless terminal may include an application subsystem and a communication subsystem. The communication subsystem in one embodiment may enable a virtual direct interface to a remote network to be presented to the application subsystem via a wireless communication system air link interface. The communication subsystem may allow applications of the application subsystem to be independent of any particular radio technology or network implementation of a wireless communication system air link interface. Once a session is established between the communication subsystem and the wireless communication system air link interface, the application subsystem may gain access to the remote network through the communication subsystem via a transport interface. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100098033 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING NETWORK DATA - A method for transmitting network data is provided. A sender and receivers can stably transmit and receive data using a packet reception result report request frame and a packet reception result report frame, and data stability at the receivers can be improved through retransmission of network-coded data. In addition, service can be provided at a high transfer rate and with good data stability by adjusting a transfer rate according to a network environment using adaptive transfer rate control. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098034 | Wi-Fi ENABLED ROUTER HAVING UPLINK BANDWITH SHARING CAPABILITY - A method and apparatus is provided for forwarding data traffic to a broadband network. The method includes receiving at a local broadband wireless router data traffic to be forwarded to a broadband network and acquiring over a wireless communications link current bandwidth utilization rates for one or more neighboring broadband wireless routers. Based at least in part on the current bandwidth utilization rate of the local router and the current bandwidth utilization rate acquired from the one or more neighboring wireless routers, the data traffic is forwarded to the broadband network over a broadband interface of the local router or to a selected one of the neighboring routers over a wireless interface of the local router. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098035 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICE PROVISIONING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - An open service provisioning method may be implemented by a terminal. The method may include receiving a customer's selection of a first-time network access provider and network service provider (NAP/NSP). The method may also include establishing a connection with the first-time NAP/NSP. The method may also include receiving information about possible other NAPs/NSPs while connected to the first-time NAP/NSP. The method may also include receiving the customer's selection of a home NAP/NSP. The method may also include assisting the customer to sign up for service with the home NAP/NSP. The method may further include establishing a connection with the home NAP/NSP. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098036 | SELF-CONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A self-configuration method for access devices in a wireless network begins by performing wireless data collection with the access devices during an automated calibration period. During this time, each access device receives beacons from one or more transmitting access devices, the beacons being transmitted and received using a plurality of different channels available to the wireless network. The method records radio frequency (RF) data associated with the received beacons, and processes the RF data to select, from the plurality of different channels, a respective channel for each of the access devices. In addition, the RF data is processed to adjust transmit power levels for the access devices. The selected channels and adjusted transmit power levels are then used as configuration settings for the access devices. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098037 | Apparatus,systems and methods adapted for opportunistic forwarding of uplink short messages in wireless metropolitan area networks - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a subscriber station (SS) operable to communicate with a base station (BS) and at least one additional subscriber station (SS) in a wireless metropolitan area network, wherein the at least one additional SS attempts to overhear a first message from the SS and piggy back a second message for the overheard message from the SS's uplink data to the BS with its uplink data. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098038 | DEPLOY APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - A deploy apparatus, method and computer program product thereof for a wireless network are provided. The wireless network comprises at least one first network node and a second network node. The method comprises the following steps: calculating an output constant and a node constant according to a first default value, a second default value and a third default value; calculating a first evaluation function according to the related information of the network nodes of the wireless network; moving or removing the second network node from the wireless network when the output constant is smaller than one and a test value is smaller than the node constant; calculating a second evaluation function according to the related information of the network nodes of the wireless network; and deploying the wireless network after comparing the first evaluation function and the second evaluation function. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098039 | Method for Variable Cyclic Length in OFDM Communications - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098040 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING VoIP SERVICES FOR WIRELESS TERMINALS - The present invention relates to a system and method for wireless telecommunication in a packet-based network comprising a Software Radio Port (SRP) which functions as a radio base station and a VoIP gateway to interconnect the wireless network with the VoIP packet network. Together with a Network Server Platform (NSP) and VoIP call-server, the SRP combines mobile call processing signaling with the VoIP call signaling to establish calls between the mobile and VoIP device or between mobiles. The SRP establishes the voice path to the mobile station over the air and the RTP media path to a party over a packet network for a call. These two paths are interconnected at the SRP so that an end-to-end voice path is established. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098041 | Intra-Premises Wireless Broadband Service Using Lumped and Distributed Wireless Radiation From Cable Source Input - A premises, connected to receive broadband service(s) and also connected to a cable system, is provided with a broadband interface which connects to in-premises cabling which is coupled to consumer receivers such as a television sets, PDAs, laptops. Connected to the broadband interface is an adjunct device which channels broadband, data and voice signals supplied to an in-premises wireless system as distinguished from the signals supplied to the cable connected consumer receivers. The adjunct device formats the broadband and voice signals or any broadband service into packet format suitable for signal radiation and couples them to the in-premises coax cabling, via a diplexer, at a first selected location. At a second cable location a second diplexer, connected to the cable, separates the broadband, data and voice signals and couples them to a signal radiation device (i.e., an RF antenna or leaky coaxial cable) which radiates the signal to the immediate surrounding location. Various devices, near to the second cable location for specific services, receive the wireless signals (i.e., broadband, data and voice) from the radiating antenna. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100103909 | DATA PACKET, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE NODES TRANSMITTING UNDER AD-HOC NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A system and method are provided for multiple nodes to wirelessly transmit in an Ad-hoc network architecture. First of all, an integration module of the system integrates a multi-node transmission protocol into a reservation column of a data packet. Next, an initial node of the system transmits the integrated data packet. Afterwards, according to the multi-node transmission protocol, one or more bridge node of the system receives the integrated data packet transmitted from the initial node. And finally, according to the multi-node transmission protocol, a destination node of the system receives the integrated data packet transmitted from the bridge node. By means of the proposed system and method, data transmission between multiple nodes is achieved under the Ad-hoc network architecture. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103910 | SMART DEVICE PROFILING - Providing device profiles for devices attached to local ports of access nodes on a wireless network. A device connected to a local port of an access node on a wireless network, such as a USB, IEEE1394 or wired IEEE 802.3 Ethernet port, is identified and the identification information sent to the controller. The controller may send further queries to the access node to be executed in further identifying the device. The controller configures the appropriate profile for the device and sends the profile to the access node. The profile may contain access control information such as access control lists. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103911 | Apparatus and method providing an IEEE-802.16 self-organizing network - Systems and methods are disclosed that include a receiver configured to receive a command message a controller configured to interpret the command message. The controller is also configured to perform a scan according to the command message using the receiver. The controller can also transmit a report message based upon one or more parameters within the command message using a transmitter. In some systems and methods, the report message comprises information related to contention within the wireless network. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103912 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CAUSING COMPUTER TO EXECUTE THE CONTROL METHOD - In 80211.n, the time during which the band is occupied is prolonged by the use of the frame aggregation method or in accordance with the type of communication frame, and this may influence communication of another apparatus. To solve this problem, a communication frame length (a communication frame to be used and the number of frames to be aggregated) is determined by taking account of priority information of a plurality of communication apparatuses. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103913 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING CONTENTION WINDOW SIZE IN MULTI USER MIMO BASED WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A Multiple-Input Multiple-Output data transmission system includes access stations and an access point having multiple receive antennas. An access point has a minimum contention window size decision unit to determine a minimum contention window size based on the number of receive antennas and a number of access stations, a broadcasting unit to broadcast the determined minimum contention window size to the access stations, and a receiver to receive data from the access stations in a contention window that is calculated based on the minimum contention window size. An access station receives the minimum contention window size from the access point, determines a first contention window size based on the minimum contention window size, and transmits data to the access point within the first contention window. If the transmission fails, the access station determines a second contention window size and retransmits the data in the second contention window. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103914 | Wireless Transmission Method, Apparatus, And System - A wireless transmission method, performed in a second layer of a wireless LAN apparatus, for transmitting data from a first layer of the wireless LAN apparatus to a third layer of the wireless LAN apparatus, comprising steps of: retrieving information related to unacknowledged frames from the first layer; aggregating the unacknowledged frames into a data unit if a processing time of the retrieving and aggregating step is less than a short inter frame space corresponding to a transmission opportunity; and transmitting the data unit to the third layer in the transmission opportunity. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103915 | VIRTUAL STREAMS FOR QOS-DRIVEN WIRELESS LANS - A virtual stream (VS) in a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) that exists solely within the medium access control (MAC) sublayer of the WLAN. The VS includes a unidirectional path in the wireless network between a station sourcing a quality of service (QoS) session and at least one station receiving the QoS session in the same BSS. The VS is defined by a VS identifier (VSID) that is unique within and local to the BSS, an address of the sourcing station, and an address of the at least one receiving station. The VS can be a virtual down-stream (VDS), a virtual up-stream (VUS) or a virtual side-stream (VSS). The VS can be a unitcast or a multicast VS. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103916 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system, a radio communication apparatus, and a radio communication method allow networks to operate without interference between contending networks. When plural piconets collide on the same frequency channel, a control station of one of the piconets temporarily sets a buffer super frame period to coexist between the piconets. When an apparatus other than a control station receives a beacon signal of the buffer super frame period, a shorter super frame period based on that super frame period is temporarily set to make fine adjustment of the next beacon signal transmission timing. An apparatus that has not received a beacon signal looks for a beacon signal of its own piconet for a redundant time to find a start time of a new super frame period. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100111051 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit processes the inbound control data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111052 | MANAGEMENT UNIT WITH LOCAL AGENT - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via either a logical or physical control channel. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit includes a local agent that gathers environmental data, wherein the management processing unit processes the inbound control data, the environmental data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111053 | Techniques for enhanced network discovery - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising retrieving a first network scan while connected to a second network access point (AP), without actually accessing the air, by the AP sending a message to “Get first network base station (BS) list” to devices in communication with the AP and operable to communicate in the first and the second networks, merging by the AP all answers from the devices to provide a list of all base stations (BS's) in the AP's vicinity, and querying the AP by other devices for the network BS list. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111054 | System and method for robust data loss recovery in a wireless local area network - A system and method for robust data loss recovery in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes splitting user data into multiple data fragments. The method further includes creating multiple beacon frames by placing each data fragment in a unique beacon frame and broadcasting the beacon frames through a wireless medium by an access point of the network. Prior to transmission, the method includes arranging the frames into a plurality of groups and creating a parity frame for each group, to be transmitted along with the beacon frame. After transmission, the beacon frames are received by a wireless client and data fragments are extracted from each beacon frame. At the receiving end, the wireless client checks whether all the transmitted beacon frames have been received. Finally, the user data is reconstructed from the extracted data fragments by reassembling the data fragments. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111055 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT, WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE, AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - The invention provides a wireless access point, a wireless network architecture, and a method for establishing the wireless network architecture. The method of the invention includes the following steps. First a first wireless access point and a second wireless access point are defined. Second a first function mode of the first wireless access point is set to be a router mode. Third a second function mode of the second wireless access point is set to be a wireless access point mode, a repeater mode or an adapter mode. Fourth a communication connection is established between the first wireless access point and the second wireless access point to perform a data exchange procedure. At last, a plurality of operational parameters of the second wireless access point are set by the second wireless access point itself according to the second function mode to finish the establishment of the wireless network architecture. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111056 | RECALCULATING AIRTIME QUOTA IN WLAN TO USE UP BANDWIDTH - In a wireless communication channel, the time per a service interval is distributed among multiple data services. The data services have been allocated airtime quotas in order to comply with their QoS requirements. These airtime quotas are scaled by a factor that is the ratio between, on the one hand, the time available per service interval for accommodating data of these services and, on the other hand, the total of the airtime quotas. This allows the services to use more airtime in case not the entire service interval has been allocated. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111057 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND ACCESS POINT CONNECTION METHOD - A wireless communication device quickly connectable to an access point of a destination service area without wasting power when the wireless communication device moves from a service area to a different one. When a state change detecting section ( | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111058 | DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION OPERATION DURING CONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION - The present invention relates to communicating between a network and a mobile terminal in a wireless communication system. The invention includes receiving a coded data unit from a network, determining whether the coded data unit can be successfully decoded, determining not to receive a transmission from the network for a first predetermined amount of time independent of whether the data unit is successfully decoded, and determining not to receive a transmission from the network for a second predetermined amount of time when the data unit is successfully decoded. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111059 | CONTENT DELIVERY - Wireless routers having an ADSL or cable connection to content data available via the Internet, a wired connection for connecting local clients in a LAN and a wireless controller for connecting to other wireless routers and clients in a wireless local area networks (WLANs). The WLANs often intersect and therefore it is possible to communicate between wireless routers in order to exchange content data via the wireless LAN in addition to the ADSL or cable connection. Further, each wireless routers has a cache data store to cache content data requested by the user, or any other information sent to the wireless router from another wireless router. A central server can schedule transfer of content data between wireless routers by considering information packets stored on the server | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111060 | Communication Of Information Between Devices In Communication Networks - A first node in a connection network and a method for providing said first node with information related to a geographical position of a user terminal, which connection network comprises said first node, a second node and an access network, wherein: the first node has access to at least one user terminal via a wireless interface provided by the access network; and the second node is connected to the first node and has access to at least one external network, which method is characterized by the steps of: sending a session request from the second node to the first node; and sending a session response from the first node to the second node after receiving said session request, which session response comprises information related to a geographical position of the terminal associated with the session in question. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111061 | ADDRESSING SCHEME FOR A RELAY NETWORK SYSTEM - According to one general aspect, a method may include collecting at least one Mobile Station (MS) Medium Access Control (MAC) Packet Data Units (PDUs), associated with at least one Mobile Station. In various embodiments, the method may also include generating at least one MS station identifier (STID) sub-header (MSID-SH), indicating for each MS MAC PDU (MPDU) a MS STID that is associated the respective MPDU. In some embodiments, the method may include packing the MSID-SH and the at least one of MPDU into a single Relay MAC PDU (RPDU). In various embodiments, the method may also include wirelessly transmitting the RPDU. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111062 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH HIERARCHICAL CELL STRUCTURE - An apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving system information in a wireless communication system with a hierarchical cell structure are provided. A method for transmitting system information in a micro Base Station (BS) in a wireless communication system in which at least one micro cell exists within a macro cell includes transmitting first system information to a Mobile Station (MS) communicating with a macro BS within a micro cell and an MS communicating with a micro BS within the micro cell, and transmitting second system information to the MS communicating with the micro BS within the micro cell. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111063 | Signal strength guided intra-cell upstream data forwarding - Intra-cell upstream data forwarding is utilized in a wireless network such as a wireless local area network. A network forwarding path is determined based on the signal strength of an access point signal received at client stations within the network, referred to as the OASS. In particular embodiments, a station that is either originating or forwarding a frame inserts its own OASS into the frame before transmitting it and a client station that receives a frame forwards it only if its own OASS exceeds the frame-enclosed OASS, illustratively by at least a predetermined amount. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111064 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SELECTIVELY TYING THE OPENING AND CLOSING OF EVDO AND PPP SESSIONS - Method, and associated apparatus, for operating a hybrid access terminal operable in a CDMA 1x/EVDO hybrid communication session system. The hybrid access terminal is operable to communicate pursuant to an EVDO communication session and to a PPP communication session. The opening and closing of the communication sessions are independent of one another. Opening of one session does not require opening of another of the sessions. And, closing of one of the sessions does not require closing of the other of the sessions. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100118841 | DEVICE BEACON FOR HANDOFF MANAGEMENT OF HANDOFFS TO BASE STATIONS - A detecting base station comprises a device beacon detector that is configured to apply wireless wide area network (WWAN) system timing to receive a device beacon transmitted by a wireless communication device in accordance with the WWAN system timing and outside of a WWAN uplink channel. The detecting base station may include a wireless wide area network (WWAN) interface configured to receive the WWAN system timing from the WWAN. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118842 | DEVICE BEACON FOR HANDOFF MANAGEMENT OF HANDOFFS TO ACCESS NODES - An access node receives a device beacon transmitted from a wireless communication device in accordance with a system timing of a wireless wide area network (WWAN). When transmitted within a WWAN uplink channel, the device beacon is mapped to designated beacon channels within the time-frequency space of the uplink WWAN channel assignment. In response to the reception of the device beacon, communications between the wireless communication device and the access node are established. In one example, the access node is a femtocell base station. In another example, the access node is a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118843 | COMMUNICATIONS METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN COMMUNICATING WITH ACCESS ROUTERS AND/OR OTHER DEVICES ACTING AS COMMUNICATIONS PEERS - Methods and apparatus for performing peer to peer communications with access routers and non-access router peer devices are described. An access terminal generates a channel estimate estimating the channel between the access terminal and an access router. For at least some communication with the access router, a channel compensation operation is performed on a symbol to be transmitted prior to its transmission to the access router. In contrast, symbols transmitted to other access terminals are not subject to a channel compensation operation prior to transmission with the receiving access terminal being responsible for implementing a channel compensation operation on the received signal. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118844 | DYNAMIC LIGHTWEIGHT REMOTE MANAGEMENT OF HYBRID FEMTOCELL GATEWAYS - System(s) and method(s) that facilitate dynamic remote management of consumer premise devices comprising femtocells integrated into broadband gateways are presented. A communication network platform is associated with a consumer premise device(s) and can include a remote management component that facilitates dynamic and remote management of consumer premise devices in a wireless communication network. The remote management component monitors and measures desired parameters respectively associated with a consumer premise devices and employs remote controls to remotely adjust parameters based on predetermined optimization criteria. The remote management component calculates channel capacity based on measured channel signal-to-noise ratio to facilitate determining whether to hand off a current cell to another cell, wherein at least one cell is associated with a consumer premise device. The remote management component can generate and store Quality of Service profiles respectively associated with the consumer premise devices to facilitate remote management of the consumer premise devices. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118845 | Method and Apparatus for Implementing Generic Access Network Functionality in a Wireless Communication Device - According to one aspect of the teachings presented herein, a “smart” phone or other wireless communication device includes a “modem” processor configured to support cellular communication network signaling and an “applications” processor configured to host call control and/or user applications, such as by providing a desired Operating System (OS) for hosting such applications. In at least one embodiment of a wireless communication device contemplated herein, the modem processor implements a cellular network signaling controller, a Generic Access Network (GAN) manager, and a privately routable, first Internet Protocol (IP) stack. Further, the applications processor implements a publicly routable, second IP stack that implements routing, e.g., a Network Address Translation (NAT) routing, for routing GAN traffic to and from the first IP stack on a local IP link bridging the first and second IP stacks. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118846 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH SERIAL DEVICE INTERFACE - A mobile router having a serial interface is disclosed. According to various embodiments, the mobile router may comprise a serial port data publisher module that may take data received from a serial device connected to a serial port of the mobile router and make the data from the serial device available via a TCP stream. In that way, the serial port data publisher module may be used, for example, to populate a remote database with the data from the serial device. That way, the data from the serial device may be remotely accessed via the Internet, for example. In addition, the mobile router can be used to output a received signal from the device connected to its serial interface. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118847 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, ACCESS POINT EQUIPMENT, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING AND EXTRACTING DATA - A wireless communication system includes a first network including a base station, a second network including a second base station, and a data providing server. The second base station extracts a first identification data to identify the base station by receiving a radio wave transmitted from the base station. The data providing server collects the first identification data from the second base station and a second identification data to identify the second base station, and provides the second identification data for a wireless communication terminal connected to the first network. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118848 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND IMAGE DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A communication terminal capable of easily transferring image data of a taken image and rapidly transferring the image data by using wireless LAN ad-hoc mode communication. In the terminal, a transmission section ( | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118849 | OFDM RECEIVING DEVICE AND OFDM RECEIVING METHOD - An OFDM receiver | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118850 | Method and apparatus for transmitting data in wireless network - A method and apparatus for transmitting data in a wireless network. A piconet coordinator transmits a frame, which is built by combining and capsulating a plurality of datagrams respectively corresponding to a plurality of devices, to the plurality of devices. Thus, since a time interval to ensure a frame header and an inter frame space (IFS) can be excluded, it is possible to improve transmission efficiency. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118851 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WLAN SERVICE USING MULTIPLE CHANNEL - Provided are an apparatus and method for providing a WLAN service using multiple channels. The wireless local area network (WLAN) service apparatus includes a service request receiver configured to receive service request information from a first wireless terminal accessed through a first channel, a data receiver configured to receive data from a first access point accessed through a second channel according to the service request information, a data transmitter configured to transmit the data to the first wireless terminal in a predetermined service area, and an access controller configured to control the first wireless terminal and the first access point to be accessed through different channels. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118852 | System and Method of Processing Data Using Scalar/Vector Instructions - A method of processing data is disclosed that includes performing a fetch of a plurality of instructions from a memory unit. The method also includes grouping the plurality of instructions into packets of instructions of different types for parallel execution by a plurality of instruction execution units. The packets of instructions include a first instruction and a second instruction. The method includes using a combined scalar and vector condition code register to execute the first instruction for a compare operation and the second instruction for a conditional operation using the combined scalar and vector condition code register. The method also includes when the compare operation is a scalar compare operation, receiving a scalar compare instruction for the scalar compare operation at an instruction executing unit and storing results of the scalar compare operation in the combined scalar and vector condition code register. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118853 | Advance Notification of Transmit Opportunities on a Shared-Communications Channel - A technique is disclosed that enables both an IEEE 802.11 transceiver and a Bluetooth transceiver to be employed in a single wireless telecommunication station (e.g., a device supporting a wireless telephone, personal digital assistant, etc.) without interfering on each other. In particular, the illustrative embodiment enables standard “off-the-shelf” IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth transceivers to work in a coordinated fashion in a single telecommunications terminal. In the illustrative embodiment, an IEEE 802.11 transceiver that uses a shared-communications channel notifies a Bluetooth transceiver that a transmit opportunity exists and that the Bluetooth transceiver has permission to use the shared-communications channel. The technique disclosed is also applicable to communications protocols other than IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118854 | DUAL BAND WLAN COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER TECHNIQUE - A dual band WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) communications technique is provided where a frequency synthesizer unit generates an LO (Local Oscillator) signal at a frequency between both frequency bands and two downconversion units and/or two upconversion units are provided. One of the units performs conversion between the LO signal and an IF (Intermediate Frequency) signal while the other conversion takes place between the IF signal and a zero-IF or low-IF signal. Signal processing is performed on the zero-IF or low-IF signal. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100124210 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING BEAMFORMING WITH GPS GUIDANCE - A method for radio frequency transmitting and receiving beamforming using both GPS guidance and wireless access points is disclosed. The method comprises providing a wireless networking device with preloaded wireless access point locations; calculating a relative vector to an access point based upon at least one of the preloaded wireless access point locations; steering a transmitted beam with a sounding packet to the access point; calculating a channel condition by the access point; and sending a packet by the access point to the wireless networking device to establish a connection. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124211 | REDUCING AN OCCURRENCE OF A VOIP CALL ON HOLD FROM BEING DROPPED IN EV-DO SYSTEMS - Methods, apparatuses, and systems for reducing an occurrence of a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call from being disconnected in an Evolution Data Only (EV-DO) system are disclosed. The VoIP call is placed on hold and at least one keep-alive packet is issued to prevent a radio link from disconnecting. The at least one keep-alive packet is issued at least while the VoIP call associated with the radio link is on hold and is configured to reset a dormancy timer for the call at one or more network entities. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124212 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING BEAMFORMING WITH LOCATION OR GPS GUIDANCE - A method and system for radio frequency transmitting and receiving beamforming using both GPS guidance and wireless access points is disclosed. The method and system comprises providing a wireless networking device with a locating system; providing an access point, the access point broadcasting its location; calculating a relative vector from the device to the access point based upon the location; steering a transmitted beam with a sounding packet to the access point; calculating a channel condition by the access point; and sending a packet by the access point to the wireless networking device to establish a connection. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124213 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A wireless terminal device performs first, second, and third scans in sequence to detect wireless access points; stores base station information on the detected wireless access points in a storing unit; sets a disappearance flag in base station information that correspond to a wireless access point that was detected in the first scan and not in the second scan; sets a reappearance flag in base station information that correspond to a wireless access point that was not detected in the second scan and was detected in the third scan; identifies a wireless base station corresponding to base station information in which the disappearance flag and the reappearance flag are set; and displays information on the wireless base station identified on a display unit. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124214 | Position based WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) management - Position based WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) management. Based on either the relative position or the specific location of devices within a WPAN, communication between the various devices is managed by grouping the devices into two or more groups. In addition, the communication between theses various devices may be governed by profiles assigned to the groups (or even the actual individual devices) that are assigned based on their locations within the WPAN. The relative locations of the devices may be made using ranging that is performed by transmitting UWB (Ultra Wide Band) pulses between the various devices within the WPAN. Alternatively, each device may include GPS (Global Positioning System) functionality and information corresponding to the specific locations of the devices may be communicated between the devices, and that information may be used to group devices user and/or assign profiles to govern the communication to and from the devices. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100128701 | BEACON TRANSMISSION FOR PARTICIPATION IN PEER-TO-PEER FORMATION AND DISCOVERY - Aspects relate to allowing multimodal devices to communicate over multiple bands to take advantage of lower traffic bands. A device can transmit its interface presence information to a base station on an uplink. The base station can broadcast the presence information to other nodes within the vicinity of base station. Based on the received presence information, the device can selectively establish communication in a peer-to-peer configuration. The presence information on the uplink can be sent on a first interface and the communication between the devices in the peer-to-peer configuration can be on a second interface. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128702 | Ad Hoc Communication Protocol Method and Apparatus - According to one embodiment, a connection is established between a first communication device and a second communication device in accordance with one or more communication layers. Each communication layer is associated with a standard structure and protocol. An ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol are determined at the first communication device. The ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol are communicated to the second communication device. One or more of the standard structures and/or protocols are replaced at the first communication device with the ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol responsive to the second communication device acknowledging acceptance of the ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128703 | Method for Routing Packets in Wireless Ad-Hoc Networks with Probabilistic Delay Guarantees - A method determines an optimal route to deliver a packet from a source node via relay nodes to a destination node in a network. A graph of nodes connected by edges represents possible routes in the network. A probability that the packet arrives at the destination before a deadline time is assigned to each edge. A minimal delay route is selected from the possible routes, and an arrival time for delivering the packet using the minimal delay route is determined. The arrival time is comparing to a deadline time, and the probabilities are scaled accordingly until the minimal delay route is an optimal route. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128704 | Mulitcasting, location services, payment methods and performance management in broadband wireless access networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for location discovery, electronic payment and multicast broadcast in a wireless broadband network disclosed. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128705 | TRANSMITTER STATION WITH DETECTABLE FUNCTION FOR RADIO CONDITION - In a wireless LAN system, the transaction efficiency may be enhanced. The transmitter station holds the number of transaction successes, the number of transaction failures, the data rate when the transaction is carried out, and the number wait to perform the transaction. The transmitter station determines that the radio wave condition is in the state {WS} from the data rate at which the transaction succeeded; the area covered by the transmitter station is influenced by the hidden terminal by the average rate of the failure transaction, and the area is influenced by the collision terminal from the relation between the number of the wait for the transaction and the data rate. The transmitter station selects an optimum mode for respective conditions. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128706 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INCREASING OPERATION TIME IN IEEE802.15.4-2006 BEACON BASED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided are an apparatus and method for increasing operation time in an IEEE802.15.4-2006 beacon based wireless sensor network (WSN) with respect to the same amount of power consumption used by coordinators included in a WSN, by reducing unnecessary standby power consumption required during an active period of a super frame in a beacon-enabled mode. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128707 | CALL CONTROL DEVICE, RELAY DEVICE, CALL CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A call control device, which controls call connections between a plurality of terminals, includes a device information storage unit that stores device information on call-connectable terminals; a call request accepting unit that accepts a call request from one terminal to another terminal; a determining unit that determines, when the call request accepting unit accepts a call request, whether the device information on the other terminal is stored in the device information storage unit; a holding unit that holds a call state of the one terminal when the determining unit determines that device information on the other terminal is not stored in the device information storage unit; a state acquiring unit that acquires state information indicating a state of the other terminal; and a holding tone setting unit that sets a holding tone to be transmitted to the one terminal associated with the state information acquired by the state acquiring unit. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128708 | FEMTOCELL LOCAL BREAKOUT MECHANISMS - A system and methodology that employs local breakout mechanisms at a femto access point (FAP) to facilitate efficient utilization of backhaul and/or macro networks is provided. In particular, a slave Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) can be integrated within the FAP to directly route the incoming traffic from a user equipment (UE) at the FAP. In one example, Internet bound traffic can be directly routed to the Internet, without employing macro network resources. Further, the system can avoid hairpinning by routing traffic between the UE and a home Local Area Network (LAN) by a anchoring a call or a session in the slave GGSN and facilitate integration of UEs with home applications by employing a UE Digital Home Agent. In addition, the FAP can perform UE-to-UE CS media breakout to facilitate communication between UEs attached to the FAP, without routing the traffic through the core macro network. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128709 | HOME SERVICE INTEGRATION AND MANAGEMENT BY EMPLOYING LOCAL BREAKOUT MECHANISMS IN A FEMTOCELL - A system and methodology that facilitates home services integration by employing a local breakout mechanism at a femto access point (AP) is provided. In particular, the system can perform mapping to provide home functions to an authorized user equipment (UE) attached to the femto AP and provide integration with one or more home services. Further, a monitoring component is employed for home monitoring and facilitates monitoring and/or controlling devices on the home Local Area Network (LAN) via the UE. Furthermore, an access management component is utilized to set, manage and implement access privileges associated with UEs authorized to access the DH LAN. In addition, shared location data is determined and utilized for location based management and/or location assistance services. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128710 | INFRASTRUCTURE FOR WIRELESS LANS - A wireless data communications system includes simplified access points which are connected to ports of an intelligent switching hub. The switching hub relays data packets to the access points in accordance with destination address data in the data communications. In a preferred arrangement the access points are provided with power over the data cable from the switching hub location. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128711 | TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL FOR MOBILE UNIT - In a wireless local area network which includes access point having variable transmitter power levels, transmitter power data is sent from the access points to the mobile units and used by the mobile units in order to provide a corresponding variation in the transmitter power of the mobile unit. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100135263 | Wireless sensor system - Providing wireless communication between an access point and a wireless device includes the wireless device operating in a first reduced power mode for a first period of time, where the wireless device does not receive communications while operating in the first reduced power mode and includes the wireless device operating in a full power mode for a second period of time, where the wireless device transitions back into the first reduced power mode in response to there being no communication from the access point to the wireless device during the second period of time. The wireless device may be a wireless sensor. In response to the access point directing the wireless sensor to collect data at a particular collection time, the wireless sensor may enter the first reduced power mode for a time prior to the collection time. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135264 | Communication Method under IEEE 802.11e Enhanced Distributed Channel Access - The present invention provides a method for the Medium Access Control (MAC) layer in IEEE 802.11 | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135265 | DYNAMIC EQAM DISCOVERY IN M-CMTS ARCHITECTURE - In one example, an Edge Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (EQAM) communicates EQAM information to a Modular Cable Modem Termination System (M-CMTS) core using a routing protocol that is configured on a packet switched network coupling the EQAM to the M-CMTS core. The EQAM generates a routing message according to the routing protocol and inserts EQAM information, such as a description of a modulated channel extending from the EQAM, the service-group information, etc, into the routing message. The EQAM then floods the EQAM information over at least portions of a routing domain by transmitting the routing message to an adjacent intermediary device. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135266 | PROVIDING PRIVATE ACCESS POINT SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A private access point may be utilized to establish a local network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the private access point. The private access point is then operable to determine services that may be provided in its local network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within its local network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Private access points are also operable to utilize local and/or remote resources to provide additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in private access point networks is incentivized to the private access points and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the private access points. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in private access point networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135267 | METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE BEACONING - A method of adaptive beaconing includes operating a node within an ad hoc wireless communication network to calculate a probability P for an interval of time I; transmit a beacon when a uniformly distributed random number is less than the probability P; and wait for the interval of time “I” and repeat the calculate, transmit, and waiting operations when the uniformly distributed random number is greater than the probability P. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135268 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY TRUNCATION - A method and device for communicating in a contention-based communication network. The method includes upon an early termination of a previously obtained transmission opportunity (TXOP) for communications with one of a mobile device and a base station, transmitting a contention free end (CF-End) frame to the base station for further broadcasting to the network by the base station. Also, a method and device for communicating in a contention-based communication system. The method includes receiving in a base station a first contention free end (CF-End) frame from a first mobile device indicating an early termination of a transmission opportunity (TXOP) previously obtained by the first mobile terminal for communications between the first mobile device and one of the base station and a second mobile device; and omnidirectionally broadcasting a second CF-End frame with a duration field having a value equal to zero. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135269 | RETRIEVING VOICE-BASED CONTENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH WIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOL BROWSING - A WAP-enabled device can request text-based and/or voice based content from a WAP Server. The WAP device communicates over a conventional wireless service provider network. This network provides a connection between the WAP device and a WAP Gateway. The WAP Gateway operates as a gateway between the wireless service provider network and the TCP/IP-based Internet. Content requests are sent from the WAP gateway to the WAP Server. When a request for voice-based content delivery is received, the WAP Server responds by sending a TCP/IP instruction to a Voice Portal Node. The Voice Portal Node is operative to establish a voice-based communication session with the WAP device. The WAP Server will transmit voice-based content to the Voice Portal Node. An audible transmission is then played over the telephone connection established between the Voice Portal Node and the WAP device in response to the request initiated by the WAP device. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135270 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CALL CONTROL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication system for calling a plurality of terminal devices in response to a single request of call connection, assigning, for a single terminal device which answered the call, a communication band to be occupied in a communication band which can be used, and establishing the call connection in the assigned communication band, the communication system includes a deriving section that derives a communication band required for the call connection of each of the terminal devices to be called when the request of call connection is received, a securing section that secures a communication band including the maximum width in each of the derived communication bands in the communication band which can be used; and an assigning section that assigns a communication band to be occupied in the secured communication band to the terminal device which answered the call. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135271 | PACKETIZED AUDIO DATA OPERATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit includes a WLAN interface, an input buffer, an input buffer controller, and a processor. The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit may also include an output buffer, an output buffer controller, a transcoder, and/or an audio Coder-Decoder (CODEC). The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit is installed in a WLAN device that services voice communications. The input buffer receives packetized audio data from the WLAN interface. When the input buffer satisfies a buffer vacancy threshold, the processor and the input buffer controller cooperatively operate to fill at least a portion of the input buffer with packetized audio data. The processor copies packetized audio data from the input buffer and fills the input buffer with the copied packetized audio data to maintain an audio pattern in the input buffer. The input buffer controller fills the input buffer when the processor is available and after copying/filling is no longer effective. The processor operates to maintain the audio pattern when additional packetized audio data is received by the WLAN interface. These operations are also performed for the output buffer, which receives packetized audio data from the transcoder and writes the packetized audio data to the WLAN interface. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100142499 | SUPPORT OF UICC-LESS CALLS - The invention relates to a method comprising initiating a session from a subscriber terminal, wherein the subscriber terminal does not comprise a specific user identification module, and authenticating the session based on a temporary identification of the subscriber terminal, by using a procedure performing a server authentication and avoiding a client authentication. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142500 | COEXISTENCE INTERFACE FOR MULTIPLE RADIO MODULES USING A REDUCED NUMBER OF CONNECTIONS - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a first radio is operated in a first coexistence mode between the first radio and a second radio. The first radio monitors a first signal received from a third radio to determine if the third radio is active. In the event the third radio is active, the first radio switches to a second coexistence mode between the first radio and the third radio, and the first radio then operates in the second coexistence mode. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142501 | System and method for location services over wireless LANs - A system and method for location determination based on available information about the premises served by a Wireless Access Point is disclosed. More specifically, what is described is a method that enables the mobile terminal to deliver adequate and valuable location information to the service when proper function of the service requires this information. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142502 | Wireless Communication Device and Computer Usable Medium Therefor - A wireless communication device is provided. The wireless communication device includes a first obtainer configured to obtain an identifier of a wireless network to which a first external device belongs, the identifier of the wireless network being detected based on radio waves transmitted from the first external device, a second obtainer configured to obtain an identifier of a wireless network to which a second external device belongs, the identifier of the wireless network being obtained from the second external device through an IP network to which the wireless communication device has been connected, and an output controller configured to output a first identifier obtained commonly by the first obtainer and the second obtainer to an output unit so that the first identifier is presented to be distinguishable from other identifiers obtained by solely one of the first obtainer and the second obtainer. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142503 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals And Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142504 | Simultaneous Operation of Wireless LAN and Long-Range Wireless Connections - A method for communication includes establishing a first connection between a wireless terminal and a base station of a long-range wireless data network, which operates in accordance with a first protocol that defines a sequence of time frames for transmission of data between the wireless terminal and the base station. A signal is sent from the wireless terminal to the base station identifying an interval including one or more of the time frames during which the wireless terminal will not receive data from the base station. During the interval, a second connection is established between the wireless terminal and an access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) in accordance with a second protocol, different from the first protocol. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142505 | MULTIPLE PROTOCOL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS IN A WLAN - A method for multiple protocol wireless communications begins by determining protocols of wireless communication devices within a proximal region. The method then continues by determining whether the protocols of the wireless communication devices within the proximal region are of a like protocol. The method continues by, when the protocols of the wireless communication devices within the proximal region are not of a like protocol, selecting a protocol of the protocols of the wireless communication devices within the proximal region based on a protocol ordering to produce a selected protocol. The method continues by utilizing the selected protocol by the wireless communication devices within the proximal region to set up a wireless communication within the proximal region. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100150116 | Method and Apparatus for Adjusting EDCA Channel Access Parameters - A contention based communications channel access method emulates scheduled access by dynamically updating Enhanced Distribution Channel Access (EDCA) parameters for groups of member stations in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150117 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LAN-BASED INDOOR POSITION LOCATION - A method and system for position location of clients in wireless local area networks. (WLANs). The position location technique utilizes time-of-flight (TOF) measurements of signals transmitted from a client to a number of wireless access points (APs) or vice versa to determine distances. Round-trip time (RTT) measurement protocols are used to estimate TOF and distances between the client at an unknown position and the WLAN APs. The method and system improves positioning accuracy by identifying and mitigating non-line-of sight (NLOS) errors such as multipaths. Trilateration algorithms are utilized in combination with median filtering of measurements to accurately estimate the position of the client. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150118 | Method and System for Time Based WLAN Scanning - Certain aspects of a method and system for time based wireless local area network (WLAN) scanning may include controlling scanning of a plurality of wireless access points in one or more WLANs by a WLAN station based on one or more factors comprising power consumed by the WLAN station based on the scanning, and/or a priority level of one or more media packets to be handled by the WLAN station. The information may be acquired for one or more of the plurality of wireless access points in one or more WLANs during the controlled scanning. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150119 | Handling of Terminating Calls in a Distributed System - A technique for handling mobile terminating calls in a distributed switch is described. The switch includes at least one cluster wherein the at least one cluster comprises a plurality of cluster members. Each cluster member is associated with a set of roaming numbers and adapted to route a mobile terminating call to either a recipient subscriber served by the cluster member or to another cluster member which serves the recipient subscriber. The at least one cluster further comprises a first data structure having a content that is common to and accessible by all the cluster members of the cluster. The first data structure specifies the plurality of cluster members and the roaming number set associated with each cluster member. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150120 | MOBILE APPLICATIONS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet that may facilitate use of mobile applications in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain mobile applications may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150121 | FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS USING WIDEBAND VOICE CODEC - A fixed mobile convergence (FMC) communication apparatus using a wideband audio codec is provided. The FMC communication apparatus includes an application processor which is capable of processing one or more wireless communication protocols and supports a wideband audio codec; a wideband audio signal input/output (I/O) unit which is connected to the application processor and processes the input and output of wideband audio signals; a mobile network access unit which is connected to the application processor and accesses a mobile communication network; and a wireless local area network (LAN) access unit which is connected to the application processor and wirelessly accesses an access point (AP). The FMC communication apparatus can access the base station of a mobile internet system or the base station of a mobile communication system. In addition, the FMC communication apparatus can access a Bluetooth device or an AP using a short-range wireless communication method. Moreover, the FMC communication apparatus can provide high-quality voice call services and various multimedia internet services by using a wideband audio codec. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150122 | MANAGING AND MONITORING EMERGENCY SERVICES SECTOR RESOURCES - A system includes one or more wireless islands, one or more incident management applications, and one or more message management and routing (MMR) systems. Each MMR systems is configured to act as an intermediary for communication between one of the wireless islands and one or more of the incident management applications. One of the wireless islands includes a radio network. The radio network includes a plurality of remote sensor nodes (RSNs), and a gateway controller. An RSN of the plurality of RSNs is worn by ESS personnel, the gateway controller is mounted to an ESS vehicle, and the RSN is configured to wirelessly communicate with the gateway controller. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150123 | IPTV SERVICE PROVISION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FIXED AND MOBILE DEVICES - An Internet Protocol (IP) TeleVision (IPTV) service provision method and system is provided for providing both fixed and mobile device users with IPTV services. The IPTV service provision method of the present invention includes establishing, when a Mobile-IPTV terminal function (M-ITF) including a first Open IPTV Terminal Function (OITF) having a plurality of functional entities and an embedded gateway having a plurality gateway functions detects a gateway function of an IPTV Terminal Function (ITF) including a second OITF having a plurality of functional entities and a plurality of gateways, a link with the gateway function of the ITF; disabling the embedded gateway; requesting a service provider network for an IPTV service via the gateway function of the ITF; and establishing a service link with the service provider network to received the IPTV service. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150124 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK COMPRISING A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method is provided for use by a subscriber device associated with a LAN comprised in a wireless network, to enable provisioning of services to another subscriber device associated with that LAN. The method comprises the steps of: (i) at the first subscriber device, receiving an outgoing packet generated by the other subscriber device associated, wherein that outgoing packet has been tagged with a VLAN label; (ii) forwarding the outgoing packet towards an address being a source MAC address the subscriber device; (iii) associating a DSCP value with the outgoing packet; (iv) removing VLAN label and Ethernet MAC layer from the outgoing packet and forwarding the remaining IP packet to a MAC convergence sub-layer; (v) at the MAC convergence sub-layer, forwarding the outgoing packet to a service flow determined by using a DSCP value associated with the outgoing packet; and forwarding the outgoing packet along an air-link service flow connection that corresponds to the respective DSCP associated with the outgoing packet. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150125 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECEIVED CHANNEL POWER INDICATOR (RCPI) MEASUREMENT - A received channel power indicator (RCPI) value is used as a measure of the received RF power in the selected channel, measured at the antenna connector. This parameter is a measure by the PHY sublayer of the received RF power in the channel measured over the PLCP preamble and over the entire received frame. RCPI is a monotonically increasing, logarithmic function of the received power level defined in dBm. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100157960 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SUPPORTING CONTROL BY MULTIPLE APPLICATIONS - A computing device configurable as a wireless network access point that can be controlled from multiple applications. The computing device provides an interface through which applications may input commands to change the state of the access point. The interface responds to these commands and other events, such as association or disassociation of a wireless client, in a manner that does not disrupt the applications or devices using the access point. To determine an appropriate response to any event, the interface may maintain state information, including a count of the number of applications and/or wireless devices that have taken action indicating an operating state of the wireless access point. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157961 | Method and Apparatus for Scheduling Communication Traffic Flows - In one or more embodiments of the disclosed technology, an Access Point (AP) schedules communication traffic flows or service tasks between an Access Point (AP) and one or more member stations in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The communication traffic flows or service tasks may include both control and management flows and data traffic flows. The communication traffic flows or service tasks may include traffic flows or streams of different types, each of which may have different service intervals. The order of service tasks can be changed from cycle to cycle, randomly, by rotation, or based on historical delay records. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157962 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN WIRELESS LAN - The transmission delay of a voice frame can be reduced by performing internal collision resolution and frame aggregation according to the presence or absence of a voice frame awaiting transmission in a MAC layer, thereby reducing an end-to-end voice transmission delay time for a VoIP service. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157963 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING MOBILITY TO MOBILE NODE IN PACKET TRANSPORT NETWORK, PACKET TRANSPORT NETWORK SYSTEM AND GATEWAY SWITCH - A method for providing mobility of a mobile node in a packet transport network, and a packet transport network system are provided. The packet transport network system includes a plurality of gateway switches configured in a plurality of packet transport access networks to connect a packet transport core network and transmit/receive a packet to/from a certain terminal via a certain access switch. When the certain terminal moves, each gateway switch updates a tunnel mapping and management table according to the movement of the certain terminal, allocates a pre-set tunnel by using information included in the tunnel mapping and management table, and transmits/receives a packet to/from a counterpart terminal via the allocated tunnel. Thus, a packet loss and delay due to the influence of handover occurring when the mobile node moves between networks can be minimized and the handover procedure can be simplified. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157964 | SERVER TO GUIDE RECONNECTION IN MOBILE INTERNET, METHOD FOR GUIDING SERVER RECONNECTION, AND SERVER RECONNECTION METHOD - If a terminal attempts a connection to an Internet site while a server in charge of the site is under maintenance, a connection request may be denied and an error message is sent to the terminal. After the server maintenance returns to a connection enabled state, a connection guide message is sent to notify the terminal. The server includes a communication unit, a message generator, a storage unit to store identification information of the terminal, and a controller. The server generates the error message if the connection attempt occurs while the server is in a connection disabled state, generates the connection guide message if the connection disabled state is released, and transmits the messages to the terminal. The server performing the connection management function may be a content server or a connection management server. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157965 | Dynamic preamble detection - A data packet, comprising a preamble and the preamble comprising a plurality of synchronization bits, is received where the preamble may be of either a first preamble type or a second preamble type. Channel estimation is performed using at least a first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits. It is determined whether the preamble is of the first preamble type or of the second preamble type, where the determination overlaps in least in part with the channel estimation. The performance of the channel estimation is controlled such that: in the event it is determined the preamble is of the first preamble type, the performance of the channel estimation continues for a second portion of the plurality of synchronization bits, adjacent to the first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits, after the processing of the first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits; in the event it is determined the preamble is of the second preamble type, the performance of the channel estimation ends after processing the first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157966 | THROUGHPUT IN MULTI-RATE WIRELESS NETWORKS USING VARIABLE-LENGTH PACKETS AND OTHER TECHNIQUES - In a wireless communication network having a plurality of devices operating at different data rates that contend for access to the network, an apparatus is provided that assigns network access parameters so as to control throughput on the network. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157967 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE AS WELL AS COMPUTER PROGRAM - Communication performed within a network including a plurality of communication stations is provided, in which when an access control is performed so that communication timing of a packet can not collide with that of another station by detecting a signal which is transmitted from another station, “a header area processed not to become easily an error such as a physical layer header portion of a packet” which is transmitted from a communication station is made to have at least information which is required for extracting information in a payload of the packet and a field for controlling an access reservation of transmission of a packet which is generated as a result of transmission of another packet so that processing using the field can be performed. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157968 | HANDLING OF MULTIMEDIA CALL SESSIONS AND ATTACHMENTS USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of multimedia information using simulcasting using a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information during exchanges between access devices over a wireless wide area network. The wireless wide area network may intercept multimedia information, and may, for example, determine that the access device of the recipient is incompatible with the multimedia information. The wide area network may then redirect the multimedia information to a broadband access gateway that may cause the storage of the received multimedia information. In another representative embodiment of the present invention, the wide area network may adapt intercepted multimedia information to be compatible with the access device of the recipient, and may also redirect the original intercepted multimedia information to a broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may then cause the original intercepted multimedia information to be stored for later access. A recipient of the multimedia attachment or information may be notified of the redirection of the multimedia attachment or information, and may retrieve the stored multimedia information using a wired or wireless access device. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100165956 | OFDM COGNITIVE RADIO WITH ZERO OVERHEAD SIGNALLING OF DELETED SUBCARRIERS FREQUENCIES - A system, device and method are described for suppressing certain sub-carrier frequencies within a multi-path transmission system and efficiently notifying a receiver ( | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165957 | PROVIDING A CELLULAR NETWORK WITH CONNECTIVITY TO A DIFFERENT NETWORK - Among other things, a system for use in wireless communication includes a first device communicating via a first protocol in a first network, a cellular device communicating via a second protocol in a cellular network, the second protocol being incompatible with the first protocol, and an access point in the cellular network, the access point being accessible by the cellular device and being configured to enable communication between the first device and the cellular device. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165958 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING FAIR ASSOCIATION OF CLIENT DEVICES WITH ACCESS POINTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for facilitating association of a client device with an access point in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the access point receiving at least one client parameter and required throughput from the client device. The access point computes an achievable transmission rate for the client device based on the client parameter. The access point then estimates throughput for the client device based on the achievable transmission rate. Thereafter, the access point computes a utility value considering an association with the client device. The utility value is based oil the estimated throughput and the required throughput of the client device. The access point then determines a possibility of an association of the client device based on the utility value. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165959 | MULTI-RADIO CONTROLLER AND METHODS FOR PREVENTING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN CO-LOCATED TRANSCEIVERS - Embodiments of a multi-radio controller and methods for preventing interference between co-located transceivers are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the multi-radio controller operates within a multi-radio device and is configured to cause a wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver to transmit a triggering frame after an active period of a wireless wide-area network (WWAN) transceiver. The triggering frame indicates the duration of a transmission opportunity, which may be restricted to the time between active periods of the WWAN. In response to receipt of the triggering frame, the WLAN access point is configured to transmit a downlink data frame within the transmission opportunity. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165960 | PERSONAL ACCESS POINT MEDIA SERVER - In general, media data is stored in a storage medium of a mobile base station. The mobile base station transmits the media data from the mobile base station to a handheld device through a packet data protocol context. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165961 | SOCIAL NETWORKING AND ADVERTISEMENTS IN A MOBILE DEVICE ON A LOCAL PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for media access control (MAC) layer processing to support social networking and advertisements over the MAC layer of a local personal area network (PAN). An application interface permits a service category corresponding to the application to be selected, and further permits service announcements corresponding to the application to be advertised. Generator logic may generate the service announcements to be advertised. The MAC layer processor inserts the service announcements into beacons in the local MAC layer of the local PAN and also receives advertisements from other devices over the MAC layer of the local PAN. Monitor logic can monitor the MAC layer of the local PAN for advertisements corresponding to the selected service category. The monitor logic is also operatively coupled with the application interface for displaying advertised services corresponding to the selected service category. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165962 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION OF DATA PACKETS BASED ON DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION STANDARDS, A DUAL PLATFORM COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER AND A WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER - A dual platform communication controller, a method of controlling communication of data packets based on different communication standards and a wireless transceiver. In one embodiment, the dual platform communication controller includes: (1) a signal interpreter configured to recognize first data packets based on a first communication standard and second data packets based on a second communication standard and (2) a traffic manager coupled to the signal interpreter and configured to dynamically control communication of the second data packets including active second data packets and allocate bandwidth for communication of the first and second data packets. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165963 | ROBUST UNICAST/BROADCAST/MULTICAST COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - Methods and apparatus for implementing a robust unicast/broadcast/multicast protocol are provided. In one aspect, a method of avoiding collision of intra-basic service set unicast, broadcast or multicast transmissions notifies stations in the basic service set of a reserved transmit opportunity for a unicast, broadcast or multicast transmission. Transmissions from at least one station in the basic service set are deferred until after the reserved unicast, broadcast or multicast transmit opportunity. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165964 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication apparatus that transmits data in certain communication interval to a receiving apparatus, using one or more communication channels among a plurality of adjacent communication channels, is provided. The apparatus includes: a setting unit configured to set the one or more communication channels for transmitting the data; a transmission unit configured to transmit the data using the one or more set communication channels; and a detection unit configured to detect interference with other wireless communication apparatuses, when the transmission unit transmits the data using the one or more set communication channels; wherein the setting unit changes the number of the one or more communication channels based on a time duration that the data transmission has been restrained due to the detected interference, and the communication interval. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165965 | DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A method of data transfer between wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) is performed by a sending communication device soliciting environment information relating to active communication devices operating within the local area of the WTRU. The local area of the WTRU may be determined by an environment variable that may be configured to indicate a search radius. Within the local area, information relating to active candidate WTRUs is received through a communication peripheral. User actions on the user interface are converted to electromechanical signals which act as an input along with the environment information to select a target WTRU from the candidate WTRUs to receive the data transfer. The environment information and user input are used to uniquely discriminate the target WTRU as the intended recipient of the data transfer. Transmission instructions are generated based on the solicited information and the user input. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165966 | DYNAMIC APPROPRIATION OF AT LEAST ONE MULTIMEDIA DEVICE DURING CALL SET-UP - The invention relates to a method of dynamic appropriation of at least one second multimedia device by a first device situated in a geographical area in which said at least one second multimedia device is situated in the event of a request to set up a call between the first device and a third device, the method including a step of setting up a first signaling link between a server and the first device and a step of controlling the second and third devices from said server with a view to setting up between the second and third devices at least one first payload data stream forming a first part of said call. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165967 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM USING SPACE-TIME BLOCK CODING (STBC) HAVING BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY WITH PRIOR STANDARDS - A method of communicating data to a receiving antenna from N transmitting antennas, where N is an integer, includes the steps of determining whether a legacy transmission mode has been selected, producing N data streams from outbound data, and applying the N data streams to a space/time encoder to produce N encoded signals. When the legacy transmission mode has not been selected, the N encoded signals are transmitting from N transmitting antennas and when the legacy transmission mode has been selected, the one encoded signal is transmitted from one of the N transmitting antennas. The legacy transmission mode allows receivers to receive and process transmitted signals when the receivers are only configured to receive the transmitted signals from a single transmitting antenna. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165968 | Wireless LAN Control over a Wired Network - Apparatus for mobile communication includes a switch and a plurality of access points, which are arranged in a wireless local area network (WLAN) to communicate over the air on a common frequency channel with a mobile station using a common basic service set identification (BSSID) for all the access points. The access points are coupled by a LAN to the switch so that upon receiving at one or more of the access points an uplink signal transmitted over the WLAN by the mobile station on the common frequency channel, the one or more of the access points convey messages responsively to the uplink signal over the LAN to the switch. A manager node is coupled to the switch so as to receive the messages and is adapted to process the messages so as to select one of the access points to respond to the uplink signal. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165969 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the invention comprises a plurality of communication stations decentralized-autonomously construct a network without having a relation between a control station and a station to be controlled under a communication circumstance where a plurality of channels are prepared. In this case, each of the communication stations prepares a plurality of operation modes for activating transmitting and receiving operations, informs the own operation mode, and receives information regarding operation modes of peripheral stations to manage its operation mode of each of the peripheral stations. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100172332 | Method and apparatus for controlling a vocoder mode in a packet switched voice wirelss network - A method for controlling speech vocoder rates in a packet switched voice wireless network, comprises a base station included in the network controlling the adaptive multirate (AMR) codec rate. The network may be in accordance with LTE standards and the base station be an eNB. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172333 | Method of conditionally routing a call made to a fixed telephone number - The invention relates to a method of routing a call made by a calling party to a fixed telephone number of a called party, wherein the call is routed to one or more mobile terminals ( | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172334 | WIRELESS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AGGREGATED PACKETS - Embodiments of a wireless network and method for communicating aggregated packets are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an aggregation header frame that identifies the originator is included in an aggregation of media-access control (MAC) frames to allow the originator to be easily identified when none of the MAC frames are properly received. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172335 | Data transmission method and apparatus based on Wi-Fi multimedia - An apparatus can transmit data based on Wi-Fi Multimedia. The apparatus utilizes different retransmission limits for different service types or access categories. Therefore, it is possible to perform data transmission conforming to characteristics of specific services. In particular, the retransmission limit for a data transfer service emphasizing a real-time constraint is set to a value less than that for a data transfer service emphasizing an error-free delivery constraint. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172336 | Periodic Location Update Handling - A method and apparatus are provided for providing periodic location updates to a MSC-S in a CS core network providing CS services for a terminal attached to a PS cell of a radio access network such as an LTE radio access network. The method comprises sending periodic location updates from a PCSC in the core network to the MSC-S for as long as the terminal is registered with the PCSC or the PCSC receives location updates from the terminal. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100177749 | Methods of and apparatus for programming and managing diverse network components, including electronic-ink based display devices, in a mesh-type wireless communication network - A wireless communication network for programming and monitoring a plurality of network-managed devices, including electronic-ink based display devices, comprising a network management computer system, a network gateway device, one or more wireless network routers, a plurality of network-managed devices, and a network coordinator. The wireless communication network of the present invention bridges the gap between wireless display networks, wireless sensor networks, and the worlds of passive, active and partially-active RFID and real-time locating systems. The wireless communication network of the present invention allows conventional communication network protocols to operate in more flexible ways in dynamic, diverse, and heterogeneous application environments, in fields including retail, healthcare, transport, logistics, manufacturing, education, etc. At the same time, the wireless communication network of the present invention is preferably based on the IEEE 802.15.4 network layer standard, which offers low-cost wireless network communication between a large number of wireless network end-devices. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177750 | Wireless Diplay sensor communication network - A wireless sensor communication network supporting a plurality of electronic-ink display sensor devices adapted for use in environments where a local source of electrical power is not available at the point of sensing/monitoring, and there is a need to display sensed data at the point of sensing/monitoring, and minimize the level of servicing required to maintain the wireless sensors. The wireless sensor communication network includes a network gateway device, one or more wireless network routers, a plurality of wireless electronic-ink display sensor devices, and a network coordinator. Each wireless electronic-ink display sensor device comprises: an addressable electronic-ink based display module providing a display surface on which to display graphics. Each wireless electronic-ink display sensor device also includes a power source module including an electrochemical battery, and also a sensor module for sensing a parameter or condition associated with the ambient environment in which the wireless electronic-ink display sensor device is located, generating environmental data representative of the sensed parameter or condition, from which environmental data packets are generated by an onboard programmed processor. The programmed processor, a RF transceiver and a RF antenna cooperate to transmit environmental data packets over the second communication medium, for reception by a network management computer network, and wherein the programmed processor and the addressable electronic-ink based display module cooperate to display the environmental data on the display surface. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177751 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DELIVERING CONTENT OVER A LOCAL WIRELESS SYSTEM - A local wireless system comprises a plurality of wireless communication units to transmit to and receive wireless signals from one or more wireless devices and a soft switch coupled to the plurality of wireless communication units to obtain connection information for each of the one or more wireless devices. The soft switch comprises a memory to store the connection information and location-based data associated with a service area of the plurality of wireless communication units; and a gateway to process non-real-time data requests and provide an interface to a packet network. The soft switch is operable to push the location-based data from the memory to at least a subset of the one or more wireless devices using the connection information stored in the memory. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177752 | NETWORK-BASED MICRO MOBILITY IN CELLULAR NETWORKS USING EXTENDED VIRTUAL PRIVATE LAN SERVICE - A new architecture provides network-based mobility in cellular networks that is built on Internet Protocol (IP)/Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technologies, such as Virtual Private Local Area Network (LAN) Service (VPLS), the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and BGP MPLS Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). The architecture consists of several building blocks that provide functionality for different aspects of cellular network mobility. One building block is network-based macro mobility in IP/MPLS networks. The macro mobility techniques described herein are built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block relates to transferring subscriber context between network devices while preserving the IP address of the subscriber. The techniques described herein provide a subscriber context transfer mechanism for mobile subscriber management that is built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block of the mobility architecture is network-based micro mobility based on VPLS. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177753 | Method for Operating a Wireless Mesh Data Network with Multiple Nodes - A method for operating a wireless mesh data network with multiple nodes, wherein data frames are transmitted from a source node via one or more intermediate nodes to a destination node, wherein the source node, the one or more intermediate nodes, and the destination node constitute network nodes of the data network, wherein during transmission of a data frame, at least some of the network nodes which receive the data frame, using a precursor list for the destination nodes which is assigned to the destination nodes of the data frame, check whether the network node sending the data frame is in the precursor list, and wherein in the case of a positive result, the data frame is transmitted to a further network node, and in the case of a negative result, the data frame is thrown out or processed by an error recovery routine. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177754 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING OVER MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS BY USING ROAMING PROFILES - There is disclosed a system and method for enabling transmission of data between an application pair, a first one of the applications in a nomadic/mobile subsystem and a second one of the applications in a ground subsystem comprising a first router within the nomadic/mobile subsystem, the first router interconnected with the first application, a second router within the ground subsystem, the second router interconnected with the second application, and a secure data transfer tunnel established between the first router and the second router, the tunnel comprising a plurality of communication pipes, each one of the plurality of pipes having associated therewith one of a plurality of different communication networks and at least one filtering rule dictating circumstances under which the pipe can be used to transmit data. When at least one attribute of the data to be transmitted matches the at least one filtering rule of a matching one of the plurality of pipes, the transmission of the data between the application pair is assigned to the matching pipe. In a particular embodiment each of said different communication networks comprises a network driver, and each of said plurality of pipes further comprises a roaming profile consisting of a set of rules defining how the pipe can transmit and receive data packets from at least one of said network drivers. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177755 | HIGH THROUGHPUT FEATURES IN 11S MESH NETWORKS - The addition of high throughput capability elements to beacon frames and peer link action frames in wireless mesh networks enable the utilization of desirable features without further modifications to the network. Rules can be established for high throughput mesh point protection in a mesh network, Space-time Block Code (STBC) operations and 20/40 MHz operation selections. However, features such as PSMP (power save multi-poll) and PCO (phased coexistence operations) are barred from implementation to prevent collisions. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177756 | ASSOCIATION METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE CHANNELS - An association method in a wireless LAN system using multiple channels includes: broadcasting a beacon frame including first channel information which is information on first available frequency channels of an access point; receiving an association request frame from a wireless station having received the beacon frame, the association request frame including the second channel information which is information on second available frequency channels of the wireless station among the first available frequency channels; and transmitting an association response frame to the wireless station, the association response frame including third channel information which is information on frequency channel allocated to the wireless station. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177757 | METHOD FOR SETTING TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY AND FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE CHANNEL - A transmission opportunity setting method in a wireless LAN system using multiple channels includes: receiving a request-to-send (RTS) frame from a wireless station, the RTS frame including information on a wireless LAN mode of the wireless station; and transmitting a clear-to-send (CTS) frame to the wireless station according to at least one of the number of remaining available channels among the multiple channels and the wireless LAN mode of the wireless station. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100182982 | Method for Broadcasting Alert Message in Mobile Multi-Hop Networks Using Inferred Distance Prioritization - A method and system broadcasts an alert packet in a wireless multi-hop network of nodes. An event is sensed in a source node of the network, and an alert packet is broadcast in response to sensing the event. The alert packet is received in a set of candidate nodes within a broadcast range of the source node. Each candidate node infers a distance between the candidate node and the source node based on a receive power of the received alert packet, and determines a priority for rebroadcasting the alert packet, wherein the priority is based on the distance to minimizing a probability of collisions while rebroadcasting the alert packet and extend a range of the rebroadcasting. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182983 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS AS A SERVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The system comprises a WLAN network controller and a plurality of access points. The WLAN network controller is in communication with each of the plurality of access points via a transport data network. The WLAN network controller is configured to perform one or more network control functions for the benefit of the plurality of access points. The network control functions may be selected from management and operation, client authentication, mobility, and per-user administration. The WLAN network controller is remotely located and operated with respect to the plurality of access points. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182984 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS AS A SERVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The system comprises a WLAN network controller and a plurality of access points. The WLAN network controller is in communication with each of the plurality of access points via a transport data network. The WLAN network controller is configured to perform one or more network control functions for the benefit of the plurality of access points. The network control functions may be selected from management and operation, client authentication, mobility, and per-user administration. The WLAN network controller is remotely located and operated with respect to the plurality of access points. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182985 | Methods, Apparatuses and Computer Program Product For User Equipment Authorization Based on Matching Network Access Technology Specific Identification Information - It is disclosed a method including providing a relation of network access technology-specific identification information (NATSII) of a user equipment or user and network identity-related information (NIRI) of the user equipment, receiving an inquiry comprising network identity-related inquiry information (NIRII), resolving the received NIRII based on the provided relation, and sending a response including the NATSII according to a result of the resolved NIRII; a method including receiving a registration request comprising NIRII from a user equipment or user, obtaining NATSII based on the received NIRII, appending the received NIRII with the obtained NATSII, and sending the appended NIRII; and a method receiving a registration request comprising first NATSII and NIRI, obtaining second NATSII based on the received NIRI, matching the received first NATSII against the obtained second NATSII, and authorizing access for a user equipment based on a result of matching. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182986 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal includes: a communication timing arbitration section adapted to control the allocation of first and second communication protection periods. The communication timing arbitration section exercises control so that the first and second wireless communication terminals use the same frequency band before the first wireless communication terminal enters an active communication period, and also exercises control so that a packet containing a network allocation vector is transmitted according to the second communication scheme, the network allocation vector being adapted to define the communication protection period for the first wireless communication terminal. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182987 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Provided is a method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a wireless communication network. The method for transmitting data from an access point to a plurality of stations in a wireless communication network includes: simultaneously transmitting request-to-send messages to the plurality of stations, the request-to-send messages having transmission order information of clear-to-send messages; receiving the clear-to-send messages transmitted from the stations according to the transmission order information; and simultaneously transmitting the data to the stations which have transmitted the clear-to-send messages. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100189083 | WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORK RECONNECTING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless local network reconnecting system and method is provided. The method detects a connection-lost signal generated when a network node of the wireless local network group lost connection. A reconnecting coordinate is calculated according to the connection-lost signal and transmitted to the connection-lost network node through an external communication network. Afterwards, the method guides the connection-lost network node to move to the reconnecting coordinate and reconnect with the wireless local network group wirelessly. Since the external communication network is used to connect with the connection-lost network node, the connection-lost network node is able to reconnect with the wireless local network group through the proposed method. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189084 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMAL CONTROL OF DATA DELIVERY PATHS FOR A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A network controller within a femtocell may be operable to control communication of data among devices within a communication system comprising the femtocell and one or more other femtocells, end-point devices, base stations and/or access points and with devices external to the communication system. The network controller may receive and/or analyze status, measurements and/or operating constraints of one or more of the devices. Quality of service constraints, latency constraints, data type constraints and/or security constraints for communication of the data may be determined. The network controller may allocate physical and/or logical resources, may control security and/or quality of service and/or may allocate bandwidth for the communication of the data. The network controller may assign one or more of the devices comprised by the communication system to handle the communication of the data. The data may be communicated via wired, optical and/or wireless interfaces. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189085 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH RELIABILITY DELIVERY OF CONTENT TO A PLURALITY OF USERS VIA A PLURALITY OF FEMTOCELLS - A cellular enabled device may be operable to receive replicas of content that are communicated from a plurality of femtocells via transmit diversity. The content may comprise voice, video and/or data. A location of the cellular enabled device may be determined and/or communicated to each of the plurality of femtocells. Synchronization may enable the transmission of the content replicas based on the location of the cellular enabled device. Transmission times of the content replicas may be adjusted based on a location of the cellular enabled device. Transmission power and/or gain of the content replicas that are transmitted from each of the plurality of femtocells may be adjusted based on the location of the cellular enabled device. The content replicas may be received via different ones of a plurality of wireless communication standards. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189086 | MOBILE ACCESS POINT APPARATUS FOR AD HOC NETWORK - The present invention comprises a mobile access point having a processor, a memory, a computer-readable medium, a radio frequency transceiver coupled to the processor, a communications interface coupled to the memory, and software that, when executed, causes the mobile access point to act as an access point in an ad hoc network. The mobile access point may also be coupled to a portable computer by means of the communications interface. The portable computer may be loaded with software tools that allows a user to troubleshoot a network node which has lost connectivity with the timely organized ad hoc network. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189087 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - A mobile phone terminal receives current position information thereof from a public wireless base station, and stores the current position information. The mobile phone terminal reads a profile name corresponding to the position information from a public wireless base station-WLAN profile association table, and sets the WLAN profile as a scan profile. Then, the mobile phone terminal scans the WLAN profile when the mobile phone terminal is located outside the WLAN service area. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189088 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING MODES METHOD AND APPARATUS - A portable electronic device is disclosed. The portable electronic device includes a wireless transceiver, a processor coupled to the wireless transceiver, a memory coupled to the processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor. The program provides automatic transitioning between a wireless infrastructure communication mode to an ad-hoc communication mode. The infrastructure mode is used when a request from a mobile device is received to access a communications network. The ad-hoc mode is used when a request from the mobile device is received to access resources on the portable electronic device. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189089 | COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE DEVICE FOR PERSONAL ELECTRONIC DEVICES (PEDS) OPERATING ON A GENERAL AVIATION AIRCRAFT AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications device is to be removably positioned in an aircraft that includes a radio, and a first modem coupled thereto. The communications device includes a portable housing to be removably positioned within the aircraft, and a second modem carried by the portable housing and coupled to the first modem. A wireless access point is carried by the portable housing to provide a wireless local area network (WLAN) within the aircraft to communicate with a personal electronic device (PED) carried by an occupant of the aircraft. A data router is coupled between the wireless access point and the second modem. A processor is carried by the portable housing to couple the PED in communications with the radio via the WLAN. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189090 | LOCAL AREA NETWORK HAVING MULTIPLE CHANNEL WIRELESS ACCESS - A communication network having at least one access point supports wireless communication among a plurality of wireless roaming devices via a first and a second wireless channel. The access point comprises a first and a second transceiver. The first and second transceivers operate on the first and second wireless channels, respectively. Each of the plurality of wireless roaming devices are capable of communicating on the first and second wireless channel. In one embodiment, the first wireless channel is used to exchange data, while the second channel is used to manage such exchanges as well as access to the first channel. In an alternate embodiment, both channels are used to support communication flow, however the first channel supports a protocol that is more deterministic than that of the second channel. Allocation of ones of the plurality of wireless roaming devices from one channel to the next may occur per direction from the access point. It may also result from decisions made by each of the wireless roaming devices made independent of the access point. For example, a decision may be made based on the data type being transferred or based on the current channel load. Such factors may also be used by the access point for allocation determinations. In addition, allocation may be based on the type of roaming device involved, such as allocating peripherals to a slower channel. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189091 | SPATIAL PUNCTURING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND SYSTEM - Stations in a N×N multiple-input-multiple-output (MIMO) wireless network always puncture the weakest spatial channel. N−1 spatial channels are always used regardless of the channel state. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100195631 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING FROM MISCONFIGURATION IN A WLAN - A method of recovering from misconfiguration of APs and other networked components includes storing a “safe” configuration, implementing a configuration request received from a network operations center (NOC), then reverting to the stored configuration in the event that connectivity is not restored with the NOC within a predetermined time period. The NOC is configured to transmit one or more handshake messages to the AP after sending the configuration request. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195632 | ACCESS POINT DETECTION FOR WIRELESS NETWORKING - Methods and systems for detecting one or more access points in a wireless network are disclosed. The location coordinates of a wireless communication device (WCD) are first determined. Based on comparisons made with the WCD location coordinates, if the WCD is within range of a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point and remains stationary for a preset time interval, a wireless local area network (WLAN) radio interface may be activated within the WCD to connect to the WLAN via the access point. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195633 | MAPPING SERVICE COMPONENTS IN A BROADCAST ENVIRONMENT - Services and service components in a broadcast network may be mapped to disparate physical layer transmission channels (PLPs) using logical layer pipes (LLPs). The use of LLPs allows different service components of a single service to be mapped to physical layer transmission channels (PLPs). Accordingly, service components may be shared among different services. Additionally or alternatively, different functions (e.g., different error detection or correction protocols) may be applied to each service components of a service. A receiver may identify services, service components and corresponding PLPs based on LLP identifiers. The receiver may then access and receive desired services and service components through the identified PLPs. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195634 | Method to provide connectivity and power for different aircraft sub-systems varying in levels of criticality and intended purposes while using a single partitioned Airborne Local Area Network (ALAN) - System for providing non-flight critical aircraft sub-system communication, over an ALAN, meeting DO-254/DO-178 certification. This system deterministically makes data available to each aircraft sub-system without regard to specific bandwidth requirements. This system network supports functions that are certified on a non-interference basis. The system network deterministically places all non-required functionality into a low priority to assure that all required data functions sets are not dropped. One aspect of this system is how the clients are able to join sessions. In this system, network clients are preprogrammed based on their hardware coding to be able to join a specific LVAN, or LVANs, in accordance with their predetermined functions. The present system is an ALAN based on a ring Ethernet topology, for redundancy, which provides two paths to each connection point without requiring all the wiring associated with a star wiring topology. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195635 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION - A wireless communication system including a gateway device that connects a core network and a wireless access network. The wireless access network includes a virtual base station that includes a representative base station connected to the gateway device and a plurality of unrepresentative base stations, which are subordinate to the representative base station. The presence of the unrepresentative base stations is hidden from the gateway device and an adjacent base station. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100202422 | METHOD FOR SELECTIVE DISTRIBUTION OF COMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE - A wireless communication system is provided for configuring a multihop chain while suppressing the cost and complexity. In this system, one network controller (NC) ( | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202423 | SERVICE ADVERTISEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device is operable to receive broadcast information communicated by a network access device specifying one or more advertised services provided via the network access device. The communication device then determines whether to connect via the network access device based on the received information. The network access device comprises an IEEE 802.11 access point, a user end-point device, a private access point network access device, and/or a wired network routing device. The advertisement broadcast is performed via beacon signals, other broadcast messages, and/or utilizing advertisement framing procedure, wherein service related information are set directly into beacons signal messaging, and/or communicated via advertisement subframes. The advertisement communication may comprise a multi-stage procedure, where a first stage enables obtaining service related information without attachment and/or full login into the network access device. User authentication and/or validation may be performed in subsequent stages. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202424 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DECODING BROADCAST PAGING MESSAGES IN WIMAX NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present disclosure propose a method for addressing MAC protocol data units which include MOB_PAG-ADV messages in an attempt to improve the success rate of decoding BS broadcast paging messages. For example, certain embodiments propose parsing and continuing to decode MPDUs with MOB_PAG-ADV messages although the corresponding CRC failed. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202425 | DUAL MODE UNIT FOR SHORT RANGE, HIGH RATE AND LONG RANGE, LOWER RATE DATA COMMUNICATIONS - A technique for communication with a local area network (LAN) via a wireless connection determines whether a first short-range, high-speed, wireless communication path is available and connects to the LAN using a longer range, lower speed wireless communication path if the short-range, high-speed wireless communication path is not available. The low-range, high-speed wireless communication path is a wireless communication path is a wireless LAN connection such as an IEE 802.11-compliant wireless LAN and the long-range, low-sped wireless communication mode is a cellular CDMA-type connection. Determining whether the first IEEE 802.11 mode is available can be done by detecting a beacon signal, or transmitting a probe request message and detecting a probe response message in response to the probe request, indicating the presence or availability of the short-range, high-speed wireless communication path. Alternatively, the availability of short-range, high-speed wireless communication path can be detected by simply detecting activity on it. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202426 | Wireless station and wireless LAN system - A wireless LAN system in which data communication between a wireless station whose connection method as a method for wireless connection can be set to one of a plurality of connection methods and a wireless access point whose connection method has been preset to one of the connection methods is made possible by setting the connection method of the wireless station to a method identical with the connection method of the wireless access point. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202427 | Apparatus and Method of Flow Movement for Network-Based Mobility Management Protocol - An apparatus comprising a local mobility anchor (LMA) configured to forward a flow to a mobile node (MN) via a first mobile access gateway (MAG) in a first network and via a second MAG in a second network, and to bind the flow to the second MAG from the first MAG, wherein the first MAG is configured to manage the MN mobility in the first network and the second MAG is configured to manage the MN mobility in the second network, wherein the first MAG sends a binding update comprising a flow description information to the LMA, and wherein the LMA replies to the binding update with a binding acknowledgement. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202428 | System and Method for Concurrently Utilizing Multiple System Identifiers - System and Method for providing access to multiple wireless service providers (WSPs) on a shared network infrastructure. The system includes a plurality of access points (Aps) coupled to a network which may be distributed in airports, mass-transit stations, businesses, etc. The network may couple to a wide area network, such as the Internet. Each AP may include a plurality of virtual Aps (VAPs), each corresponding to a WSP. A portable computing device (PCD) of a user stores identification information indicating a WSP of a plurality of possible WSPs, and which may include an access level of the user. Each AP “listens for” or detects identification information associated with numerous WSPs. When the AP receives the identification information from the PCD, it determines the VAP/WSP for the PCD using the identification information. Network access is then provided to the PCD through the determined WSP at the determined access level. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100208711 | System and method for efficiently populating an access point database - A system and method for populating an access point database includes a network of access points that are implemented to transmit access point signals by utilizing a wireless broadcasting procedure. One or more mobile devices are then configured to wirelessly receive and analyze the access point signals to produce access point scan data corresponding to the access points. A location server receives and analyzes the access point scan data to determine specific access point locations for the access points. The location server then utilizes the access point locations to populate the access point database. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208712 | Enhancing WLAN performance in the presence of interference - A wireless access point coherently receives signals transmitted from client devices and from interfering devices, measures noise and interference capture samples from the received signals, and computes a characterization of noise plus interference. Receive gains and threshold levels are adjusted based on the computed noise plus interference characterization. A set of weights for an interference suppression spatial filter are calculated from the measured noise and interference capture samples and used to produce a filtered signal by spatially filtering the received signals such that interference is spatially nulled in the filtered signal. The method may also include setting PHY parameters at the wireless access point based on the computed noise plus interference characterization. In some embodiments, a protection transmission is transmitted from the wireless access point, requesting connected client devices to suspend transmissions during a specified time period. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208713 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208714 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208715 | Classifier for communication device - Classifier for communication device. A communication device includes a classifier and a number of PHY (physical layer) receivers communicatively coupled thereto that enable the communication device to process various received signal types. Each of the PHY receivers is operable to perform pre-processing of a received frame (or packet) of data and to calculate a confidence level indicating whether the received frame is intended for that particular PHY receiver; this pre-processing does not involve processing (e.g., demodulation and/or decoding) of the received frame. Those PHY receivers having sufficiently high confidence levels assert claims to the classifier for the received frame. The classifier is operable to arbitrate between competing claims by 2 or more PHY receivers and to ensure that the received frame is provided to the PHY receiver for which it is intended. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100215024 | MOBILE PEER-TO-PEER CONTENT SHARING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Embodiment of the disclosure set forth methods for sharing data in a wireless network. Some example methods include storing in a database a content related information associated with a first mobile device, receiving a request for the content related information from a second mobile device, searching the database for the content related information, and transmitting a search result to the second mobile device to enable the transfer of content between the first mobile device and the second mobile device. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100215025 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication apparatus for performing a communication parameter configuration process as one of a communication parameter providing apparatus and a communication parameter receiving apparatus, comprises: a first reception unit adapted to receive a communication parameter from another communication apparatus; and an enabling unit adapted to enable a communication parameter providing function for providing a communication parameter to another communication apparatus, after the communication parameter is received. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100215026 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING UNIFIED OPERATOR AND RAT MAPPING AND SELECTION SCHEME - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a unified scheme for selecting an operator and a radio access technology (RAT) by a multi-mode wireless device during a power-up or a handover process. By utilizing the proposed scheme, the mobile station may switch between RATs that are associated with the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX), 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) or 3GPP2 standards. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100215027 | Techniques for Flexible and Efficient Beamforming - A method includes generating a first data unit to be transmitted during a first time period, including generating a field that specifies a first number of beamforming training data units that can be communicated during a first training session; processing a second data unit received during a second time period, including determining whether the first training session was accepted based on a first field of the second data unit, and determining a second number of beamforming training data units that can be communicated during a second training session based on a second field of the second data unit; and if the first training session was accepted, causing the specified first number of beamforming training data units to be communicated during the first training session. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100215028 | PROVIDING WIRELESS COVERAGE INTO SUBSTANTIALLY CLOSED ENVIRONMENTS - A communication system includes a master host unit, communication links, a remote server unit, an analog communication medium, and remote units. The master host unit communicates analog signals with service provider interfaces using a first set of bands of analog spectrum. The master host unit communicates digitized spectrum in N-bit words across communication links and converts between the first set of bands and N-bit words. The remote server unit communicates N-bit words with the master host unit across communication links and converts between N-bit words and a second set of bands of analog spectrum. The remote server unit communicates the second set of bands with the remote units across the analog communication medium. Each remote unit frequency converts the second set of bands to a third set of bands of analog spectrum and transmits and receives wireless signals, associated with service provider interfaces, over air interfaces. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100220697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-MODE CONVERSATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention proposes a method for performing multi-mode conversations for mobile terminals, comprising the steps of: 1)detecting whether there is Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) available nearby; 2)accessing a network device for correlative location information of another mobile terminal which it intends to communicate with when there is a WLAN available; 3)establishing communication with said another mobile terminal by using said correlative location information via said WLAN after receiving said correlative location information of said another mobile terminal sent back by said network device; and 4)accessing said network device to request updating correlative location information of said mobile terminal when said correlative location information of said mobile terminal changes. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220698 | WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless LAN terminal (AP) transmits a data frame to a counter wireless LAN terminal (STA-j), and receives an ACK frame from STA-j. AP measures a response time from the transmission of the data frame to reception of the ACK frame, and measures a transmission interval time from the previous transmission of the data frame to STA-j to the current transmission. AP includes a memory to store a predetermined set transmission interval time and a set response time for said terminal station. AP re-transmits the data frame when the transmission interval time does not exceed the set transmission interval time and the response time exceeds the set response time, and stores the response time in said memory as the set response time, when the transmission interval time exceeds the set transmission interval time. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220699 | Medium reservation protocol for directional wireless networks - Two wireless communications devices in a wireless network may reserve a period of time for directional data communications between themselves during a Contention Access Period. The technique may include transmitting Clear-to-Send messages to each other, and to any other devices with which either has established a directional link, to prevent interfering transmissions from these other devices. Other devices that have not established a directional link with either of these two may overhear the CTS messages and also refrain from transmitting interfering signals during the reserved time period. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT AND A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND PROVIDING A MISSING INFORMATION NOTIFICATION - A method and system for selectively provisioning connections between an access point, which supports telecommunications services over an IP network, and a carrier network includes a network connection and a telephone connector suitable for connecting to a landline telephone, a cordless telephone, or a mobile device. The access point sends a provisioning request, which includes identifying information such as a subscriber identifier and a MAC address, to a network controller. The network controller attempts to find a geographic, street, or other address associated with the connection to be provisioned. If an address is not found, the network controller rejects the connection and sends a missing information notification to the access point. After receiving the missing information notification, the access point controls a user indicator to provide error information. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220701 | Client/Bridge and Method and System for Using Same - The transmission of data is accomplished across a network having wireless and wired interfaces. Data is transferred through a wireless interface from an Access Point to a Client/Bridge and then to one of a Intelligent Electrical Device (IED) connected to the Client/Bridge through a wired connection. Data is transferred from the Access Point to the Client/Bridge through a 4 address mode wireless interface having originator, transmitter, receiver and destination address fields. The originator address uniquely identifies an IED in the overall network, the transmitter address identifies the AP transmitting the data, the receiver address identifies the Client/Bridge receiving the data through the wireless interface while the destination address refers to one of the IEDs connected to the Client/Bridge through the wired interface. Communication can also be performed in reverse from one of the IEDs connected to the Client/Bridge through the wired interface to an IED in the overall network. The Client/Bridge determines context cache information representing the media access control numbers of each of the IEDs connected to the Client/Bridge through the wired interface and transfers this context cache information to the AP. In the event of a failure of the Client/Bridge, the context cache information stored at the AP can be transferred to the Client/Bridge using the wireless interface to facilitate recovery of the Client/Bridge. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220702 | LOW POWER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION - A wireless networking device includes a transceiver that transmits and receives communications over a wireless local area network (WLAN), and a processor cooperatively operable with the transceiver. The processor transmits over the transceiver one WLAN frame of a file transfer to a receiving networking device and then transitioning from transmit power level down to a state of receive power level while waiting for an “ACK” signal to the transmitting. The processor also receives over the transceiver the “ACK” signal from the receiving networking device, and the “ACK” signal triggers going into a doze state of a low power level for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period of time expires and triggers transitioning the processor to a state of receive power level for an inter-frame space while waiting to transmit a next WLAN frame. The low power receive power level is lower than the receive power level. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220703 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING CALL ADMISSION IN IMS - A method and a system for controlling call admission for parallel ringing processes to a realm in an IMS is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a call control message to a called party, determining whether the called party has parallel ringing enabled, if positive, generating a plurality of parallel call control messages, associating to each parallel call control message a parallel ringing identifier indicating that the corresponding call control message is a parallel call control message, receiving a plurality of call control messages directed towards the realm, performing call admission control for this realm by verifying whether a parallel ringing identifier is associated to each call control message directed towards this realm so as to determine if the call control message is a parallel call control message. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220704 | Extended Call Handling Functionality Using Multi-Network Simulcasting - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information via a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information simultaneously exchanged by an associated access device via a wide area network. The broadband access gateway may store the received multimedia information locally, within the broadband access gateway, or may communicate the multimedia information to storage accessible from the broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220705 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100226344 | Method and System for Scheduling Multiple Concurrent Transmissions During a Contention Access Period in a Wireless Communications Network - Aspects of a method and system for scheduling multiple concurrent transmissions during a contention access period in a wireless communications network are presented. Aspects of the system comprise communicating devices (DEVs) within a piconet that are operable to derive a neighborhood map of a piconet. The neighborhood map information may enable a plurality of DEVs to concurrently transmit signals during a given channel time allocation (CTA) time slot. The ability for multiple DEVs to transmit signals concurrently during a single CTA time slot may increase spectral reuse within a wireless communication medium. In another aspect the system, the neighborhood map information may enable individual DEVs to set clear channel assessment (CCA) thresholds. Individual DEVs may utilize CCA threshold information to determine when to transmit signals to one or more destination DEVs and/or at what rate to transmit data via the signals. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226345 | ENCODED INFORMATION READING TERMINAL OPERATING IN INFRASTRUCTURE MODE AND AD-HOC MODE - An encoded information reading (EIR) terminal can comprise a central processing unit (CPU), a memory communicatively coupled to the CPU, an EIR device, and a wireless communication interface communicatively coupled to the CPU. The EIR device can be selected from the group consisting of a bar code reading device, an RFID reading device, and a card reading device. The EIR device can be configured to perform one of: outputting raw message data containing an encoded message, outputting decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message. The wireless communication interface can comprise a first logical communication interface operating on a first frequency channel and a second logical communication interface operating on a second frequency channel. The wireless communication interface can be configured to transmit infrastructure mode beacons. The infrastructure mode beacons can include a service set identifier. The wireless communication interface can be further configured to transmit ad-hoc mode beacons on the second frequency channel. The ad-hoc mode beacons can include an identifier of a mesh path selection protocol. The EIR terminal can be further configured to route MAC frames between the first logical communication interface and the second logical communication interface. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226346 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY PROVISIONING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT AND A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK USING A SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFIER - A method and system for selectively provisioning services between an access point, which supports telecommunications services over an IP network, and a carrier network includes a network connection and a telephone connector. At least one detection component detects whether a landline telephone is plugged in to the telephone connector. The access point and network are configured to provision telecommunications services based at least in part on an identifier stored in an identification module. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226347 | AUTHORIZING ACCESS TO TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS FOR MOBILE DEVICES, SUCH AS MOBILE DEVICES ACCESSING NETWORKS VIA NON-TRADITIONAL ENTRY POINTS - A system and method for authorizing mobile devices to carrier networks via non-traditional entry points is described. In some examples, the system reviews a registration message sent during establishment of a communication session between the mobile device and the carrier's network to determine the type of access network used by the mobile device. In some cases, the system may identify the base station controller originating the registration message when determining whether the access request came from an IP-based network or other non-traditional entry point. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226348 | UWB COEXISTENCE SCHEME - Roughly described, a first radio is configured to operate according to a first protocol and configured to use a coexistence signaling scheme with a second radio configured to operate according to a second protocol, wherein the coexistence signaling scheme is configured to allow a radio configured to operate according to the second protocol to be co-located and non-interfering with a radio configured to operate according to a protocol different to the first protocol, and wherein the first radio comprises behavioral logic for generating messages for the second radio in accordance with the coexistence signaling scheme to cause the second radio to adopt behavior suitable for coexistence with the first radio. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226349 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus has a transmission unit that transmits a transmit signal in a condition where either acknowledgement or negative acknowledgement is set therein, a reception unit that receives a response signal in response to the transmission signal, a counter that counts the number of times the reception unit has not received the negative acknowledgment signal in response to the transmission signal in which the negative acknowledgement is set, and a control unit that causes the transmission unit to set the negative acknowledgement if a count value of the counter is less than a predetermined value and, if the count value is equal to or larger than the predetermined value, causes the transmission unit to set the acknowledgement. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226350 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATIONG USING INTERNET PROTOCOL - Disclosed is a system and a method for communication using different IPs, i.e. a mobile IP supporting mobility and a simple IP, according to the service by a UE. The method includes network initiated IP allocation (i.e. the network allocates different IPs to the UE) and UE initiated IP allocation (i.e. the UE directly requests an IP corresponding to a specific service). As such, the IP is selected and used based on consideration of continuity of the service to be supported by the UE. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226351 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226352 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226353 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100232401 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SCAN BASED ON LOCATION - A system, apparatus and methods are described that define the frequency in which a scan for a wireless local area network access point ( | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232402 | Handling Multiple User Interfaces in an IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method of operating an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network having a plurality of user interfaces. A terminal agent is interposed between a plurality of Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) User Agents and a Serving Call/Session Control Function (S-CSCF) of the IMS network. The terminal agent registers its contact address with the S-CSCF on behalf of the plurality of SIP User Agents and emulates a single SIP User Agent to the S-CSCF. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232403 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING EMERGENCY CALLS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a network element operably couplable to an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem network where the network element has a controller to receive an SIP request associated with a call, determine whether the SIP request comprises an identifier associated with an Emergency Call Session Control Function (E-CSCF) where the identifier was added to the SIP request by the E-CSCF, and provide the call to an emergency network when the identifier is associated with the E-CSCF. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232404 | SCALABLE DISRUPTIVE-RESISTANT COMMUNICATION METHOD - A method for transmitting data in vehicular network comprising determining a communication window between at least two nodes, grouping a plurality of fragments of content together into an aggregate fragment block, forwarding the aggregate fragment block to a target node and assembling the plurality of fragments into the content. The content is divided into the plurality of fragments. A fragment signature is generated for the fragments that contain fragment index information regarding each fragment. Each fragment is unambiguously identified by its signature. A number of fragments grouped into the aggregate fragment block is dependent on the communication window. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232405 | INFORMATION COLLECTION SYSTEM, INFORMATION REGISTRATION SERVER, INFORMATION COLLECTION METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A public wireless LAN accessible area collection system includes a mobile terminal device having GPS means, wireless LAN communication means, and data communication means and a server which has storage means and accessible area map generation means and performs data communication with the mobile terminal device. When the wireless LAN communication means recognizes that the mobile terminal device exists in the area in which the mobile terminal device can be connected to the public wireless LAN, it obtains access information in the area. The data communication means transmits location information and access information to the server. The server associates the location information with the access information that are received from the mobile terminal device and stores them in the storage means. The accessible area map generation means applies the location information about the area in which the mobile terminal device can be connected to the public wireless LAN to the map data according to the location information stored in the storage means. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232406 | USING WLAN FOR MEDIA TRANSPORT IN CELLULAR MOBILE NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method of operating a telecommunication network for setting up a call between a first and a second WLAN-enabled mobile terminal. The telecommunication network comprising a first switching node, a second switching node, a gateway switching node, a first WLAN AP serving said first WLAN-enabled mobile terminal and a second WLAN AP serving said second WLAN-enabled mobile terminal. The first and second WLAN AP insert LMT indications into for example DTAP Setup messages, indicating that media transfer may take place directly from the WLAN APs. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232407 | GATEWAY RELOCATION IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Systems and methods that provide a mechanism to relocate functions from one gateway to another gateway in a wireless communication network are disclosed. The gateway can implement an access service network (ASN) gateway in a WiMAX based network with a number of functionalities co-located on the gateway such as an authenticator, an anchor FA, an anchor DPF, a PMIP client, and a prepaid client. These functionalities can then be relocated from a first ASN gateway to a second ASN gateway. The proposed system and method reduces the messaging needed for the relocation and the number of components in the network, which can save capital and operating expenses. Additionally, the reduced messaging can reduce latency and delay in the process of relocating, which saves bandwidth and increases the level of service provided to the user. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232408 | METHOD OF CONNECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME - A wireless communication device and method for same, including: a first communication unit configured to use a non-IP-based wireless communication protocol, a second communication unit configured to use an IP-based wireless communication protocol, and a controller configured to: search for a wireless device for communication, the wireless communication device configured to provide a universal plug and play (UPnP) service, the search being by use of the first communication unit, and initiate the UPnP service with respect to a found wireless device for communication by use of the second communication unit. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232409 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL WITH ACCESS POINT - Disclosed is a method for connecting a mobile communication terminal with an access point located in a local area providing a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) service in which a server managing the access point compares Media Access Control (MAC) information of the mobile communication terminal or MAC information of the access point transferred from the mobile communication terminal through a mobile communication network with MAC information previously stored in the server and transfers network setting information required for connection to the access point to the mobile communication terminal if the MAC information of the mobile communication terminal or access point is identical to the MAC information previously stored in the server. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232410 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232411 | SIGNALING FORMAT FOR WLANS - A method for wireless communication begins by determining whether legacy devices are within a proximal region of the wireless communication. The method continues, when at least one legacy device is within the proximal region, formatting a frame to include: a legacy preamble; a signal field; an extended preamble; at least one additional signal field; at least one service field; an inter frame gap; and a data field. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232412 | MOBILE VIRTUAL LAN - A communication system in which multiple protocols and proxy services are executed by an access point. In one embodiment of the invention, GVRP and GMRP registrations are combined in a single packet when a wireless device roams to a different VLAN. In addition, outbound GVRP and GMRP multicast messages are handled by an access point (also referred to as a GVRP and GMRP “gateway”) such that the wireless device is not burdened with the associated computational overhead. In a further embodiment, a wireless device may dynamically switch between a VLAN-aware state and a VLAN-unaware state depending on the nature of a detected access point. For example, if a relevant access point supports GVRP, the wireless device may operate as a VLAN terminal. If a wireless device is not attached to an access point with a matching VLAN ID, the wireless device sends and receives VLAN tagged frames. If a wireless device configured with a VLAN ID is attached to an access point with a matching VLAN ID, or if the wireless device is attached to a non-VLAN access point, then the wireless device may send and receive raw/untagged frames. In addition to the gateways described below, the ability of a wireless device to detect when it can send untagged frames is considered novel. In another embodiment of the invention, a special ID that is different than the native VLAN ID for a switch port is used for VLAN-unaware devices. This allows such devices that do not issue tagged frames to belong to a single VLAN ID. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100238911 | Apparatus and methods for addressable communication using voice-grade radios - The invention relates to methods and apparatus for conducting directed communication using voice-grade radios. The methods and apparatus can be used to form a packet-switched wireless network using legacy analog transceivers, providing, e.g., both data and voice-over-Internet Protocol communication. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238912 | SIGNALING METHODS FOR MMSE PRECODING WITH EIGENMODE SELECTION - Different methods of signaling between an access point and user terminals in a multiuser wireless system for performing a minimum mean square error (MMSE) precoding at the access point preceded with eigenmode selection are provided. For one embodiment of the present disclosure, a compact feedback may be utilized between a plurality of user terminals and the access point. For another embodiment of the present disclosure, a hybrid feedback may be utilized between the plurality of user terminals and the access point. For yet another embodiment of the present disclosure, a full feedback may be utilized between the plurality of user terminals and the access point. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100246542 | Disparate radios in a wireless mesh network - A wireless mesh network that makes use of strategically placed nodes with radios having superior communication range through the use of high gain antennas, MIMO technology, high power transmitters, high sensitivity receivers, a combination thereof, etc. Besides the obvious effect of extending the physical coverage area of a network, the effect of the longer distance links formed by the nodes with superior range is a flattening of the wireless mesh network by reducing hop count, thereby improving performance, latency, reliability, cost, and power consumption among other factors. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246543 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA FRAMES - A method of transmitting a data frame is disclosed and may include transmitting a preamble, transmitting a physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) header, and transmitting a plurality of MAC protocol data units (MPDUs). Each MPDU may be configured to reset a convolutional decoder state after each MPDU. The method may also include transmitting an MPDU aggregation header. The MPDU aggregation header may include a count of packed MPDUs, an array of offsets, an array of lengths, a frame check sequence (FCS) for the MPDU aggregation header, a group of tail bits, or a combination thereof. Further, an end of the MPDU aggregation header may be aligned to an interleaved symbol boundary. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246544 | INDOOR COMPETITIVE SURVEY OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - System(s) and method(s) are provided to collect network operation data within a confined indoor wireless environment for generation of competitive intelligence and strategic network planning. Scanner component(s) survey and compare signals transported in a set of electromagnetic frequency bands, and in accordance with a set of radio technologies associated with competing networks. Collected data can be aggregated and delivered to femto gateway node(s), which can supply the data to an analysis component that generates network operations NetOp intelligence. A report component can manage received and aggregated network operation data and convey a portion thereof to planning tool(s) that can produce competitive intelligence and develop strategic network planning. Planning tool(s) can request specific network operation data or NetOp intelligence. Aggregated network operation data can be employed to identify service provider indoor coverage strengths or weaknesses relative to competitors to focus sales activities related to network services, and network improvement efforts. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246545 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK MOBILITY - An approach is provided for extending private enterprise networking to wireless interconnecting domains. A home agent maintains a first routing table for a first wireless router configured to route according to a first address space. The home agent also maintains a second routing table for a second wireless router configured to route according to a second address space. The first address space and the second address space are overlapping. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246546 | METHOD OF SELECTING ANTENNAS AND TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - In a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) system, a method is provided for selecting at least one antenna from a plurality of antennas and transmitting a data frame from a station to an access point via the selected antenna or antennas. A method for transmitting data from a plurality of stations to an access point in the MIMO WLAN system includes detecting a channel status of a channel from the access point to each transmitting antenna of the station, selecting at least one transmitting antenna from among the station's transmitting antennas based on the detected channel status, and transmitting a data frame from the station to the access point via the selected transmitting antenna or antennas. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246547 | ANTENNA SELECTING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a reception antenna selecting method of a receiver including a plurality of antennas in a wireless communication system. The reception antenna selecting method aligns amplified frames according to levels of received signals and performs CRC for each of the aligned frames. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246548 | BASE STATION, METHOD FOR MANAGING CELL, METHOD FOR DETECTION SIGNAL, TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL THEREOF - A base station according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes: a receiver receiving environment information of a first terminal from the first terminal positioned at a cell boundary and receiving usable resource information from a neighbor base station; a resource allocator allocating a resource to the first terminal on the basis of the usable resource information; and a transmitter transmitting information on the resource allocated to the first terminal to the neighbor base station. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246549 | System and Methods for Distributed Medium Access Control and QOS Scheduling in Mobile Ad-Hoc Networks - A communication device and method are provided for communicating with a receiving device over a channel within a mobile ad-hoc network. The receiving device includes a clear-to-send (CTS) packet generating portion that can generate and a CTS packet based on a parameter of the channel and that can transmit the CTS packet over the channel. The communication device includes a transmitter portion, a receiver portion and a management portion. The transmitter portion can transmit information into the channel. The receiver portion can receive information from the channel. The management portion includes a request-to-send (RTS) packet generating portion, a CTS packet receiving portion, a threshold database, a comparator and an RES packet generating portion. The management portion is in communication with the transmitter portion and the receiver portion. The RTS packet generating portion can generate a RTS packet and can provide the RTS packet to the transmitter portion. The transmitter portion can transmit the RTS packet to the receiving device by way of the channel. The receiver portion can receive the CTS packet from the receiving device by way of the channel and can provide the CTS packet to the CTS packet receiving portion. The threshold database can store a threshold value for the parameter of the channel and can provide the threshold value to the comparator. The CTS packet receiving portion can provide channel parameter information, to the comparator, based on the CTS packet. The comparator can compare the threshold value and the channel parameter information and can generate an instruction signal based on the comparison. The RES packet generating portion can generate an RES packet based on the instruction signal and can provide the RES packet to the transmitter portion. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246550 | HIGH PERFORMANCE WIRELESS NETWORKS USING DISTRIBUTED CONTROL AND SWITCH-STACK PARADIGM - A design and proof of concept of a new type of WLAN, complete with simulation and results from the simulation has been described. Each AP Node is implemented as a self-contained embedded OS unit, with all algorithms resident in its Operating system. The normal day-to-day functioning of the AP node is based entirely on resident control algorithms. Upgrades are possible through a simple secure communications interface supported by the OS kernel for each AP node. Benefits provided by a wireless network, as proposed in this invention, are that: it installs out of the box; the network is self-configuring; the network is redundant in that mesh network formalism is supported, ensuring multiple paths; load balancing is supported; there is no single point of failure; allows for decentralized execution; there is a central control; it is network application aware; there is application awareness; there is automatic channel allocation to manage and curtail RF interference, maximize non interference bandwidth and enable seamless roaming between adjoining wireless sub networks (BSS) and it supports the wireless equivalent for switching—for seamless roaming requirements. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246551 | Performance optimization for wireless networks with mixed modulation types - In one embodiment, different physical layer standards are segregated into different frequency channels. In one implementation, 802.11b traffic and 802.11g traffic are segregated into different frequency channels. A network management tool allows the user to specify channels to either, e.g., 802.11b-only, 802.11g-only, 802.11b preferred and 802.11g discouraged, or 802.11g preferred and 802.11b discouraged. Access points are given the capability of preventing or discouraging client traffic of either given type. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246552 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELIVERING IPP2T (IP-PUSH-TO-TALK) WIRELESS LAN MOBILE RADIO SERVICE - A wireless subscriber terminal (ST) for use with IP push-to-talk (IPP2T) service using a wireless local area network (WLAN) operating in a plurality of modes, including a mobile terminal having an ability to communicate over the air to a wireless Access Point (AP), the mobile terminal further programmable to use conventional WLAN protocols, and a method for operating the wireless terminal are described. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100254357 | Method and System for Remotely Communicating Information to a Plurality of Devices Within a Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for remotely communicating information to a plurality of devices within a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of communication devices operable to communicate with one or more of a plurality of femtocells via one or more wireless connections and/or via one or more wired connections. The plurality of femtocells may be managed via a femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of communication devices may be operable to receive information from the femtocell management entity via one or more of the plurality of femtocells utilizing one or both of the one or more wireless connections and/or the one or more wired connections. One of the plurality of communication devices may be configured by utilizing the received information. The received information may comprise one or more of software, service profiles, device configuration data and/or synchronization data. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254358 | WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTING AND SETTING METHOD AND APPLICATION THEREOF - A wireless network connecting and setting method includes the following steps; a detect signal is transmitted through a first wireless network device; a detect reply is replied to the first wireless network device when the detect signal is received by a second wireless network device; a wireless access point (AP) profile of the first wireless network device, according to which the first wireless network device connects to a wireless AP, is transmitted to the second wireless network device; the second wireless network device is connected to the wireless AP according to the wireless AP profile, such that the second wireless network device connects to a network through the wireless AP. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254359 | Mobile terminal, mobile communication system, base station searching method, and storage medium storing base station searching program - A first mobile terminal forming a mobile communication system connects to a base station by using a first wireless communication method (for example, GSM method). Further, a second mobile terminal acquires unique information of the base station (for example, cell information) from the first mobile terminal by communication with the first mobile terminal by using a second wireless communication method (for example, wireless LAN method), and searches a transmission frequency of the base station included in the unique information. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254360 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO CONTROL DEVICE, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND MESSAGE TRANSMISSION METHOD - A mobile communication system according to the present invention comprises a mobile terminal ( | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254361 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication device which includes a function information transmitting unit for transmitting, via a wireless communication network, function information relating to a function of the wireless communication device, a function information receiving unit for receiving function information transmitted from another device, a function information comparison unit for comparing the function information of the wireless communication device and the function information received from such other device, and a function determination unit for determining which of the wireless communication device and such other device is to play a function of an access point, based on a result of the comparison by the function information comparison unit. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254362 | NETWORK COMBINING WIRED AND NON-WIRED SEGMENTS - A local area network ( | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254363 | NETWORK COMBINING WIRED AND NON-WIRED SEGMENTS - A local area network ( | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254364 | RATE-ADAPTIVE METHOD FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - This invention relates to a rate-adaptive method for wireless mesh network in areas of wireless networking technology. In the invention, each node in the wireless mesh network broadcasts probe packets and meanwhile receives probe packets from its neighboring nodes, and maintains a rate priority table in time based on the sending success ratio of probe packets, and then sets up a new dynamic probe queue according to this rate priority table, selectively sending all the probes with rates that are listed in the rate priority table or close to them, and the automatic rate selection is accomplished by decisions on probes' sending success ratio. This invention can adapt to the changes of the network conditions very well, and reduce the influence of route broadcast and convergence on network throughput as much as possible, and at the meantime, it takes the changes in network topology into account, thus is very suitable for conditions with a complex spatial distribution of electromagnetic waves. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254365 | EMERGENCY CALL HANDLING IN CONTENTION-BASED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - An apparatus and methods for handling emergency message frames (e.g., “911” call frames, etc.) sent by a station in a wireless local-area network are disclosed. The illustrative embodiment increases the probability with which an emergency message frame is accorded the singularly highest quality-of-service by modifying one or more IEEE 802.11 e parameters (e.g., back-off contention window length, Arbitration Inter-Frame Space [AIFS], etc.) for a station or access point that transmits an emergency message frame. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100260157 | MOBILE BROADBAND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, SUCH AS A DEPLOYABLE SELF-CONTAINED PORTABLE SYSTEM - Systems and methods for establishing IT services in edge environments are described. In some examples, the system comprises a transportable housing capable of being carried by personnel, a plurality of commercial off-the-shelf components contained in the housing and coupled together and configured to provide the broadband communications network, a software management system operatively coupled to the plurality of components, a network connection subsystem defined by at least a first portion of the plurality of components and configured to establish access to the broadband communications network, and a connection subsystem defined by at least a second portion of the plurality of components and that provides a user with a connection to the broadband communications network via the network connection subsystem | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260158 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication device which includes a notification information transmitting unit for transmitting, via a wireless communication network, notification information of the wireless communication device, a notification information receiving unit for receiving notification information transmitted from another device, a frequency switching unit for successively switching, at random cycles, a frequency at which the notification information is transmitted or a frequency at which the notification information is received, and a transmission processing unit for performing a data transmission process after transmitting or receiving an acknowledgement to the notification information to/from such other device. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260159 | PHYSICAL LAYER FRAME FORMAT FOR WLAN - In a method for generating a data unit for transmission via a communication channel, wherein the data unit conforms to a first communication protocol, a preamble of the data unit is generated. The preamble includes a first field having information that indicates a duration of the data unit, the first field being formatted such that the first field is decodable by a receiver device that conforms to a second communication protocol but does not conform to the first communication protocol to determine the duration of the data unit based on the first field. Additionally, the preamble is formatted such that a portion of the preamble is decodable by a receiver device that conforms to a third communication protocol but does not conform to the first communication protocol. Also, the preamble is formatted such that a receiver device that conforms to the first communication protocol can determine that the data unit conforms to the first communication protocol. A data portion of the data unit that conforms to the first communication protocol and does not conform to either (i) the second communication protocol or (ii) the third communication protocol is generated. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100265926 | Mobile Station Methods and Systems for Maintaining PLMN Continuity When Moving Between Networks of Different Types as a Function of PLMN Continuity Preference - Mobile station methods and systems for maintaining PMLN continuity when moving between networks of different types as a function of PLMN continuity preference are provided. PLMN continuity preference concerns a preference for the mobile station when transferring from a first network type, such as cellular, to a second network type, such as GAN to reduce the possibility of dropping calls, for example. The mobile station transmits this preference to the network, and the mobile station then perform network selection based on the preference. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265927 | Efficient Allocation of Power to Bandwidth In a Multi-Carrier Cellular Communication System - A cellular communication system includes a plurality of base stations ( | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265928 | METHOD FOR SELECTING AN ACCESS POINT AND APPARATUS FOR USING THE SAME - The method generates a candidate list in accordance with the contents of frames transmitted by access points and sequentially performs the handshaking operations with the access points on the candidate list to select a personal identification number (PIN) enabled access point. During the candidate list generating process, this method places Wi-Fi protected setup (WPS) PIN-enabled access points at high priority positions but eliminates non-WPS access points and WPS push button configuration enabled access points. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265929 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME - A method for determining a modulation and coding scheme for signals with packets of different lengths comprises the steps of: grouping signals according to their packet lengths, wherein each group has a weighting for each modulation and coding scheme; transmitting signals with different modulation and coding schemes; adjusting weights of each modulation and coding scheme of each group according to the quality of receiving the transmitted signals; determining a modulation and coding scheme according to the weightings of each modulation and coding scheme in the group corresponding to the packet length of the signal to be transmitted. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265930 | METHOD FOR SCANNING WIRELESS CHANNELS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR USING THE SAME - In order to obtain information related to operating channels of access points, the method receives lightweight beacons on a common channel. The method generates a channel scanning list in accordance with the content of the lightweight beacons and sequentially scans all the channels on the list. The method is capable of reducing the scanning time and the data loss rate during the scanning operation. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265931 | Range-Based Wireless Alarm System - A range-based alarm system comprised of a controlling device and a plurality of portable, handheld devices communicating over a wireless local area network (WLAN); wherein the controlling device frequently computes the distance between itself and the plurality of portable, handheld devices and raises an audible or visual alarm when one of the computed distances exceeds its programmed operating range. An audible or visual alarm is also triggered on any of a plurality of portable, handheld devices when it has lost communication with the controlling device or when instructed by the controlling device. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265932 | Wireless transmitter, wireless transmission method, wireless receiver and wireless reception method - A wireless transmitter which includes: a packetizer which generates a special packet with a payload containing transmitted video signals and a header containing distinguishing information used to distinguish the special packet from an IP packet; and a wireless transmitting section for generating and transmitting wireless radio signals which contain a special packet generated by the packetizer. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100272080 | Techniques for generating proof of WiMAX activation and safely handling a disconnect during a WiMAX provisioning session - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising using actual values inside an Open Mobile Alliance Device Management (OMA DM) activation session to produce a unique combination of values for a mobile device operable in a wireless network to verify activation by a certain network service provider (NSP). | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272081 | COMMUNICATION METHODS AND APPARATUS - Methods and apparatus well suited for efficiently communicating small amounts of information relatively frequently in a wireless communications system are described. An uplink timing frequency structure for an access point includes a set of dedicated uplink communications resources, e.g., expression advertisement interval air link resources. Different ones of the set of dedicated uplink communications resources correspond to different individual wireless communications devices currently registered with the access point. In the downlink timing frequency structure for the access point there are dedicated downlink broadcast communications resources, e.g., expression broadcast interval air link resources and neighbor expression broadcast interval air link resources. Information received on dedicated uplink air link resources is echoed back or selectively echoed back on the dedicated downlink air link resources. Wireless communications devices monitor downlink dedicated air link resources to recover expression information being communicated by other wireless communications devices in its local vicinity. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272082 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING BLUETOOTH - Systems and methods are disclosed for use in a wireless network that includes a first device using an wireless association protocol. In some embodiments the wireless association protocol uses at least one inquiry packet and a scatternet topology. These systems promote communication with other devices using the wireless association protocol through a routing protocol. This routing protocol routes data according to a network topology created through information obtained through the wireless association protocol. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272083 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided a wireless communication device including a control-message creation/transmission-instruction unit which sends notification information via a wireless communication network and also sends response information in the case of receiving notification information sent from another device, a reception/interpretation processing unit which receives, from another device which has received the notification information of the wireless communication device, response information of such other device and also receives the notification information sent from such other device, and an operation mode determination unit which determines, based on operation mode determination information included in the notification information of such other device or the response information of such other device, that the wireless communication device is caused to operate as one of a master device and a slave device. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272084 | ACCESS NODE SWITCHING METHOD - A method of switching a terminal from a source access node (NA | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272085 | Method for WLAN Localization and Location Based Service Supply - A method is for WLAN localization and corresponding location based service supply. By providing a WLAN data set as an actual WLAN fingerprint of a geographical unit for the usage in a mobile device the user is enabled to localize himself self-sustained. Thereby the mobile device receives WLAN signals from at least three WLAN senders for the localization. Due to self-sustained identifying of the WLAN senders by the mobile device on basis of the received WLAN signals the mobile device may calculate the actual geographical position of the mobile device. The calculation is done on basis of the WLAN data set and on basis of the received WLAN signals from the at least three different WLAN senders. Furthermore a location based service is supplied by the mobile device the a user of the mobile device on basis of the calculated actual position. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272086 | Method of Releasing An Access Restriction at High Interference Cell in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and UE providing wireless communication services, and a method of transmitting and receiving data between a terminal and a base station in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, or a LTE-A (LTE-Advanced) system, and more particularly, to a method of releasing an access restriction at high interference cell, such that an effect of the interference can be minimized. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272087 | TERMINAL DEVICE WITH SEPARATED CARD AND STATION BASED ON WIMAX SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a mobile terminal with separated card and station based on World Interoperability for Microwave Access, WiMAX, system, in communication field, which comprises: a main station; one or more consumer identification modules, connected to the main station in a removable way. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272088 | System and Method for Managing Call Continuity in IMS Network Environment - In one embodiment, a scheme is disclosed for managing call continuity in a network environment including a circuit-switched (CS) network and an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) network wherein unique identity (ID) information supplied by a user equipment (UE) device is utilized. A pool of dynamically allocable IP multimedia routing numbers (IMRNs) maintained at an IMS network node are used for associating an IMRN with call information received from the UE device, which can include at least one of a GRUU, Instance ID, and the called party number relating to a call. When the dynamically allocated IMRN is returned by the UE device, the network node utilizes the IMRN mapping to effectuate call continuity with respect to the called party. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100278157 | Determining Optimal Locations For Wireless Access Points In A Wireless Network - A computer-implemented method for predicting signal coverage in a wireless network environment includes segmenting the wireless network environment into a plurality of zones, in which each one of a plurality of wireless communications devices operating in the wireless network environment is assigned to a corresponding one of the plurality of zones. The method continues with determining that a dependency exists between at least two signal reference relations from at least two of the plurality of zones and merging the at least two of the plurality of zones. The method concludes with adjusting the search space size for the optimal solution that predicts the signal coverage for the wireless network environment and locating at least one wireless access point within the wireless network environment based on the optimal solution. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278158 | Selecting an access point in a wireless network using a data flow metric - Available access points (AP) are searched in a wireless network for information of each channel between a client and each AP and the information includes at least one network performance metric. A list of the available APs and the information are received at the client and the client has at least one interface used for communicating with each AP. A type of a data flow and a corresponding data flow metric for the type of data flow are also determined. An AP is selected to receive the data flow from the list of the available APs based on the information of each channel and the type of the data flow metric, and the data flow is received at the client from the selected AP in the wireless network. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278159 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENDPOINT BASED ARCHITECTURE FOR VOIP ACCESS POINTS - A VoIP access point may be operable to provide VoIP servicing to a plurality of wireless audio endpoint devices. The VoIP access point may extract VoIP audio data received via IP backbone and communicating the extracted audio data as non-VoIP formatted data to the wireless audio endpoint devices. In the uplink direction, the VoIP access point may receive non-VoIP formatted audio data from the wireless audio endpoint devices and pack the received data into IP packets for VoIP communication. The VoIP access point may also be operable to perform PCM encoding/decoding operations during VoIP servicing operations. The wireless audio endpoint devices may perform audio processing during VoIP communications via the VoIP access point. One or more intermediary communication devices may be utilized to route messaging between the VoIP access point and at least some of the wireless audio endpoint devices. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278160 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HYBRID SCHEMES OF MIMO MODE DECISION - A system and method a hybrid scheme of mode decision in a network having a plurality of mobile stations communicably coupled to a base station may include a mode decision module associated with the base station. The mode decision module may include one or more processors configured to select a first mode configuration for use during transmission of a first communication from the base station, receive first feedback information comprising a first mode recommendation and first channel information, identify a first system state of the first communication based at least in part on the first condition information, determine whether to use the first mode recommendation configuration based at least in part on the first system state, and configure the second communication using a second mode configuration based on the determination. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278161 | SELF OPTIMIZATION OF FORBIDDEN NEIGHBOR CELL LIST - An apparatus, a system, and a method to self-optimize a forbidden neighbor cell list (FNCL). A FNCL includes a list of cells sent to a user equipment (UE). The UE would not report those cells in the list to a network but may be considered by the UE for measurement purposes only. The self-optimization of the FNCL includes building a list of neighbor cells in an autonomous and/or automatic manner, with or without human intervention. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278162 | METHOD OF MAINTAINING DATA COLLECTIONS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile device configured to communicate with one or more various enterprise services and Internet services. Such services include such features as e-mail, calendar, and personal information management (PIM). The mobile device is configured to maintain a distinction between each of these services by having a number of databases, each database dedicated to a specific service. To facilitate this distinction, a service identifier is generated with respect to each database. When a service is removed, the mobile device no longer has access to the service. In such an instance, the mobile device is configured to maintain the associated database and the service identifier. Should a removed service become reactivated for the mobile device, the maintained database will become re-associated with the proper service by using the service identifier. By distinguishing between databases using the service identifiers, the mobile device may prevent “cross-pollination” between its databases when synchronizing with different services. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278163 | METHOD OF DELIVERING DATA IN WIRELESS PRESONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method of delivering data in a wireless personal area network. One of nodes forming the wireless personal area network broadcasts data including the address and the sequence number of one node to a plurality of other nodes, and broadcasts one of the data and other data to the other nodes depending on whether the data is received from the other nodes within a predetermined time. Accordingly, all the nodes on the network can receive data reliably and simultaneously power consumption is reduced, and thus the life of the network is extended. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278164 | Method, Base Station, Mobile Station, Telecommunication System, and Computer Program for Detecting a WLAN - A method comprising operating a base station is disclosed. The operating consists of providing synchronisation for mobile stations; and broadcasting information comprising information about an access point enabling generic access network, GAN, communication, from the base station operating a pure broadcasting telecommunication cell. An access area of the access point and the pure broadcasting telecommunication cell cover essentially the same area. Therefore, mobile stations able to receive the broadcasting information become aware of accessibility to the access point. Corresponding base station, mobile station, telecommunication system, and computer program are also disclosed. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278165 | RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The radio terminal comprises a base station communication unit ( | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278166 | METHOD FOR SWITCHING CHANNEL IN MESH NETWORK - A method of performing a channel switch in a mesh network by a first Mesh Point (MP) includes configuring a peer link between the first MP and a second MP, and transmitting a mesh channel switch announcement frame from the first MP to the second MP. The mesh channel switch announcement frame includes a new regulatory class field and a new channel number field. The new regulatory class field indicates the number of a new regulatory class after the channel switch and the new channel number field indicates the number of a new channel to which the first MP is moving. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100284378 | Method for packet classification based on the protocol type and on priorities - External packets entering a transmitting entity of a broadband wireless access system are forwarded to a receiving entity onto MAC layer connections at the wireless interface between such entities in a manner depending on the result of a packet classification performed by using a set of classification rules identified by a rule index and associated with a priority index determining the order of application of different rules to packets relating to a same service. The classification rules include both classification rules specific for data communication protocols and containing one or more protocol-specific parameters to be matched by corresponding fields in a packet being classified, and a pass-through classification rule only containing a priority index and a rule index, but no protocol-specific matching parameter, said pass through classification rule being applied to a packet not having matched a protocol-specific classification rule. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284379 | WIRELESS RECEIVER WITH INTERMITTENT SHUT-OFF OF RF CIRCUITS - A terminal ( | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284380 | QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WLAN AND BLUETOOTH COMBINATIONS - A hybrid device ( | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284381 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT IN THE PRESENCE OF BURSTY INTERFERENCE - A method and system for operating a wireless access point is disclosed. In an embodiment, a wireless access point determines whether bursty interference is present within the operating range of the wireless access point and then adapts a transmission characteristic in response to the determination. In an embodiment, the wireless access point determines whether bursty interference is present by changing at least one transmission characteristic and monitoring the resulting error rates. The presence of bursty interference can be detected if a lowering of the transmission rate causes an increase in the error rate. The increase in the error rate is a result of the lower transmission rate and corresponding longer transmission time for each frame, which in turn increases the likelihood that a frame will overlap with bursty interference. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284382 | EMERGENCY CALLING DEVICE FOR A VEHICLE - A network-based emergency call device for a vehicle. A first connection between the vehicle and a server is firmly prescribed as a permanent IP connection. This connection is used to send an emergency call, together with the necessary emergency call data to the server. The latter forwards the emergency to all the registered assistance units via further connections directly and without human action. The assistance unit providing assistance is selected automatically by taking the emergency call by an assistance unit. The subsequent setup of a communication link between the assistance unit taking the call and the vehicle involves the use of the already existing IP connection between the vehicle and the server for the communication link which is to be set up. The data to be transmitted and the data rate can also be customized to the current situation of the vehicle and to the surroundings of the vehicle. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284383 | INTERNET-ORIENTATED AD-HOC NETWORK - A hierarchical directional internet-oriented ad-hoc network, defined by a software infrastructure, is composed of fixed gateway nodes and a plurality of wireless nodes, which may be fixed or mobile, and which may act as subscribers, routers, or both. The infrastructure hierarchy is defined by the hop count of each node (distance of that node to a fixed gateway node). The software infrastructure includes two tables associated with each node in the network: the upstream routing table which provides shortest routes to fixed gateway nodes through upstream neighbors, and the downstream routing table which provides shortest routes to subscribers through downstream neighbors. These two tables are used by routing algorithms. A peer table can also be used for alternate routes. The maintenance of the aforementioned tables is performed by autonomous algorithms operating locally on each node by receiving and processing signals from their neighbors. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284384 | USE OF THE WLAN STANDARD FOR C2C COMMUNICATION BY ADDING NEW PACKET TYPES - C2X communication is made possible efficiently via WLAN by apparatuses and a method for filtering data frames received by a vehicle from a receiver via a WLAN connection, wherein a frame type indicated in a received data frame is used to decide that device to which data in the data frame are transmitted. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284385 | LAN BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of routing calls from a mobile unit to a destination location can include registering the mobile unit with a wireless adjunct, wherein the wireless adjunct is in communication with a switching unit and a packet based network and is operable to receive data from the switching unit and place the data, in packetized form, on the packet based network. The method can further include responding to a call setup request from the mobile unit and querying a subscriber database to determine if the mobile unit is a resident or a guest. If the mobile unit is a resident, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through the switching unit to a first destination location. If the mobile unit is a guest, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through an RF source to a second destination location. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284386 | LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS CAPABILITY INDICATION - Aspects describe indicating to a mobile station whether an access point supports local Internet Protocol (IP) access. The indication can be sent through utilization of common signaling, which allows the mobile station to have information about the local IP access availability before connecting to the access point. The indication can be sent through utilization of dedicated signaling, which allows the mobile station to find out about availability of local IP access after the mobile station connects to the access point. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284387 | PAGING FOR LOCAL IP ACCESS PACKETS - Local IP access paging schemes facilitate paging of an access terminal when packets destined for the access terminal are received via local IP access. In some implementations, a local entity acquires information that enables local paging of the access terminal by sniffing messages passing through the local entity. In some implementations, a local entity sends a packet or message to cause the core network to page an access terminal when a local IP access packet destined for the access terminal arrives at the local entity. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284388 | Management of a Hybrid Communication Network Comprising a Cellular Network and a Local Network - Disclosed herein is a method of managing a hybrid network including a cellular network and a local network wherein a number of dual mode mobile terminals are connectable to a base station of the cellular network through a direct cellular link and are also connectable, one with respect to the other, through the local network by a radio access technique. The method includes the steps of computing a cost associated with a direct connection established along a path (A) extending from a selected mobile terminal to the base station through the cellular link only, computing a cost (C | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284389 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING A MEDIA PLAYBACK IN A NETWORKED ENVIRONMENT - Described herein are systems and methods for providing media playback in a networked environment. In one embodiment, a networked media playback device is configured to provide a web server for delivering data indicative of a browser-renderable control interface for the networked media playback device, or for a related networked media playback system. In overview, the user of a networked device, such as a wireless web enabled device, is able to render the control interface in a web browser, and in this manner control playback of digital media via the networked media playback device or networked media playback system. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284390 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AND APPLING HISTORY INFORMATION OF TERMINAL IN CONVERGED PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE ENVIRONMENT, AND CONVERGED PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE SERVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND END DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed herein is a system for managing and using history information of terminals in a Converged Personal Network Service (CPNS) environment. The system includes a CPNS server for collecting and storing access information and history information of mobile communication terminals and end devices which transmit and receive information over a wireless local area network, and, if the previously stored history information is requested while a CPNS service is active between a mobile communication terminal and an end device, extracting the corresponding information, and providing the extracted information to the mobile communication terminal and the end device, the mobile communication terminals each for, while using the CPNS service, performing a CPNS service-related procedure using the history information received from the CPNS server, and the end devices each for, while using the CPNS service, performing a CPNS service-related procedure using the history information received via the mobile communication terminal. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284391 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESSLY TRANSMITTING VENUE-BASED DATA TO REMOTE WIRELESS HAND HELD DEVICES OVER A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system for wirelessly transmitting venue-based data in video data packets to remote wireless hand held devices over an 802.11 wireless network. Such a system includes one or more processors for processing video captured by at least one venue-based video camera into data packets for transmission to remote wireless hand held devices, wherein the remote wireless hand held devices each further comprise a display screen for displaying the data and for viewing video while held in the same manner as a personal digital assistant during use, and in a hand of a user and away from a face and head of the user. Such a system additionally includes at least one 802.11 wireless network transmitter for wirelessly transmitting the data packets to the remote wireless hand held devices. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100290440 | Mobile Communications Terminal for Use in Several Wireless Local Networks and Method for Operating - The invention relates to a mobile communications terminal for use in a plurality of wireless local networks. Said terminal comprises a log on memory, in which an access address that is designed to be used for a new log on process is stored. According to the invention, information concerning the access addresses that were received by the mobile communications terminal in previous log on operations and the network among the plurality of wireless local networks that was used, is stored in an allocation memory. The terminal is configured in such a way that when a new access request is received for a sought network among the plurality of wireless local networks, it searches for a previous access address that was allocated for the sought network and is also configured in such a way that when said previous access address for the sought network has been found, it writes the address to the log on memory and permits the log on operation. The invention also relates to a method for managing log on information that is designed for the mobile communications terminal. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290441 | ROUTE SELECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROMOTING ROUTE DISTRIBUTIONS AMONG MULTIPLE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - In a mesh network having a plurality of wireless nodes, including a first, second, third and fourth node, wherein each node includes a routing table, a method of route discovery. A first route request message is broadcasted from the first node and received at the second and third nodes. In the second node, a link quality metric is calculated as a function of link quality of the link to the first node and as a function of capacity in the routing table of the second node. In the third node, a link quality metric is calculated as a function of link quality of the link to the first node and as a function of capacity in the routing table of the third node. A second route request message is broadcasted from the second node and received by the fourth node, wherein the second route request message includes the link quality metric calculated by the second node. A third route request message is broadcasted from the third node and received by the fourth node, wherein the third route request message includes the link quality metric calculated by the third node. A route path is selected as a function of the link quality metric calculated by the second node and the link quality metric calculated by the third node. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290442 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC CONNECTION WITH A WIRELESS NETWORK - A Intelligent Mobile HotSpot (IMHS) comprises a wide area network radio interface configured to enable communications between a wide area network and the IMHS; a local area network radio interface configured to enable communications between the IMHS and a computing device; a power input configured to cause the IMHS to be powered on; memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the power input: automatically establish a data connection with a base station associated with the wide area network over the wide area network, automatically establish a data connection with computing device over the local area network, and be in a ready state to route data packets from the computing device to the base station via the local area network data connection and the wide area network connection. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290443 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The invention relates to a method for controlling communication between at least one stationary and at least one mobile, data-exchanging unit. In said method, a position of the mobile unit is determined, and communication is made possible in response thereto. According to the invention, a priority measure is determined in response to the determined position, and data can be transmitted from the mobile, data-exchanging unit according to the priority. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290444 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC CONNECTION WITH A WIRELESS NETWORK - A Intelligent Mobile HotSpot (IMHS) comprises a wide area network radio interface configured to enable communications between a wide area network and the IMHS; a local area network radio interface configured to enable communications between the IMHS and a computing device; a power input configured to cause the IMHS to be powered on; memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the power input: automatically establish a data connection with a base station associated with the wide area network over the wide area network, automatically establish a data connection with computing device over the local area network, and be in a ready state to route data packets from the computing device to the base station via the local area network data connection and the wide area network connection. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290445 | Methods, Apparatus and Computer Readable Medium For Conveying Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Policies From Designated to Roamed Network - A method, apparatus and computer program product for providing policy inheritance between Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) is presented. The systems disclosed herein are able to convey, from a designated (i.e., first) VLAN to a roaming (i.e., second) VLAN, mobility VLAN policies enabled at the designated VLAN that are not provided at the roaming VLAN. In operation, example embodiments of the present invention detect a roaming mobile unit in the roaming VLAN. VLAN policies for the mobile unit are then requested from a VLAN server mobility switch in the designated VLAN. VLAN policies are then received and applied in the roaming VLAN. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290446 | METHOD FOR ENABLING MOBILITY OF CLIENT DEVICES IN LARGE SCALE UNIFIED NETWORKS - Embodiments herein include systems and methods for providing a mechanism to enable smooth, seamless, and reliable connectivity for wireless devices in a unified network. The system supports roaming of mobile units across mobility switches. A given mobile unit can retain its IP address in both intra-subnet and inter-subnet roaming scenarios. The given mobile unit also retains its membership to a mobility VLAN to which it had been assigned, even during roaming scenarios. Embodiments include a framework for wireless switches to advertise VLANs they support to peer wireless switches in the mobility domain, and to advertise their capability to act as VLAN servers for those VLANs. Embodiments support VLAN membership management capabilities that allow access points and peer wireless switches to request wireless switches to add VLANs to the tunnels they share. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290447 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFORE - Different communication parameters are automatically provided in accordance with a setting scheme in communication parameter automatic setting. To do this, when transferring communication parameters to another communication apparatus, a communication parameter provider identifies a communication parameter setting scheme to use, and selects, in accordance with the identified setting scheme, communication parameters to be transferred. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290448 | PRE-FETCHING OF INPUT DATA FOR ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION - The present invention relates to a method, an Access Selection Server and a communication network for network access selection. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290449 | PREAMBLE EXTENSIONS - Systems and/or methods for communication that generate a plurality of spatial streams are disclosed. Each of the spatial streams comprises a plurality of symbols. At least a portion of a training sequence is distributed across a first symbol in a first one of the spatial streams and a second symbol in a second one of the spatial streams. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290450 | ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL BASED ON THE EXCHANGE OF CHARACTERISTICS - A wireless access point and multiple wireless terminals exchange utilization, status, mobility and reception characteristics. Each wireless terminal generates reception characteristics based on transmissions received from the wireless access point and from other devices in the network. In one operating mode, the characteristics gathered by the wireless devices are forwarded to the wireless access point, and, based on all received characteristics, the wireless access point selects its own transmission power for different types of the transmission. In another mode, all characteristics are exchanged between every wireless terminal and the access point so that each can independently or cooperatively make transmission power control decisions. In a further mode, the wireless access point adjusts protocol parameters based on an assessment of the characteristics received from the client devices. The utilization, status, mobility, and reception characteristics include received signal strength, error rates, estimated battery life, availability of unlimited power, active versus sleep mode ratios, anticipated bandwidth utilization, coding schemes available, deterministic/non-deterministic requirements, encryption and security requirements, quality of service requirements, position, velocity, stationary status, etc. Gathering of such characteristics involves both retrieval of preset parameters from memory and generating parameters based on received transmissions (including test packets). | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100296495 | WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND BEACON TRANSMITTING METHOD - A wireless LAN communication device is provided for making it possible to set beacons including DTIM information elements not to be synchronous in the case that the timing for generating the beacons including DTIM information elements is the same among access points, so that it is avoidable that only a terminal device under a specific access point among access points using the same channel is subjected to a delay and jitters, while anxiety about mutual interference of the terminal devices is removed in the case of broadcast and multicast service, so that a fair broadcast and multicast service can be received. In the device, a wireless LAN control unit ( | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296496 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONCURRENT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS AND SENSING - This invention describes systems and methods for combining the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) infrastructure and Wireless Intrusion Prevention Systems (WIPS) by leveraging a common radio platform equipped with more than one WLAN radio and a unified management system. The invention provides all the benefits of the WLAN, without sacrificing the 24×7 dedicated security monitoring and performance troubleshooting available from an overlay WIPS system, while reducing the deployment cost and management complexity, by sharing a common hardware platform for the WLAN Access Point (AP) and WIPS sensor and leveraging an integrated management system. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296497 | HYBRID NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR FEMTOCELLS AND ACCESS POINTS - A communication system may comprise a hybrid network controller, femtocells, access points and/or endpoint devices. The hybrid network controller may control communication of information between two or more specified femtocells, access points and/or endpoint devices by communicating control information. The communication of information via the femtocells, access points may be managed by the hybrid network controller. The network controller may handle network traffic associated with the communication of the information. The hybrid network controller may control one or more wired and/or wireless interfaces for handling of the network traffic. Quality of service and/or bandwidth allocation may be managed by the hybrid network controller. Resources utilized by the endpoint devices, the femtocells and/or the access points may be allocated and/or de-allocated by the network controller. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296498 | INTEGRATED FEMTOCELL AND WLAN ACCESS POINT - Aspects of a method and system for integrated femtocell and WLAN access point are provided. In this regard, an IFWAP device comprises an integrated WLAN interface and an integrated femtocell cellular interface. The IFWAP device may be operable to receive data, determine a destination of the received data, and transmit the received data to one or more end-user devices via the integrated WLAN interface and/or the integrated femtocell cellular interface based on said determined destination. In various embodiments of the invention, the IFWAP device may be operable to receive data from one or more end-user devices via the integrated WLAN interface and/or the integrated femtocell cellular interface, process the received data to re-format and/or re-packetize it into one or more corresponding IP packets, and transmit the one or more IP packets to one or more destination devices via a single network connection. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296499 | COMMUNICATIVELY COUPLING WLAN AND FEMTOCELL NETWORKS UTILIZING A FEMTOCELL-TO-WLAN NETWORK BRIDGE AND CONTROLLER - Aspects of a method and system for communicatively coupling WLAN and femtocell networks utilizing a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller are provided. In this regard, data communicated via one or more femtocells and one or more WLAN access points may be managed via a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller communicatively coupled between a femtocell controller and an access point controller. The femtocell controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more femtocells, and the access point controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more WLAN access points. The FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller, the femtocell controller, and the access point controller may interoperate to manage data communicated between a first end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the femtocells and a second end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the access points. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296500 | MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR SCANNING A SERVICE SET IDENTIFIER - A mobile station scans a wireless channel that an access point uses to communicate with a third-party mobile station, receives a management frame from the access point in the wireless channel, and determines that the access point utilizes a close service set identifier (SSID) according to the management frame. The mobile station further imitates one of the access point and the third-party mobile station to transmit a disconnection frame to the other one of the access point and the third-party mobile station, so as to disconnect a communication between the access point and the third-party mobile station. The mobile station further intercepts a reconnection frame transmitted between the access point and the third-party mobile station, and extracts the closed SSID of the access point from the reconnection frame. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296501 | METHOD FOR GENERATION OF BEACONS BY A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The invention, which relates to a method for the generation of beacons by a base station in a wireless communications network, consisting of at least one base station and at least one station, the beacons being generated repeatedly at time intervals, is based on the object of specifying a method with which the generation of the beacons can be tailored to needs, achieving a reduction of the energy demand and the emissions, and an improvement in the security. According to the invention, the object is achieved in that the generation of the beacons is started with a switching on of the base station and is ended after the expiry of a wait time t | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100303046 | WIRELESS VIDEO AND AUDIO NETWORK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - This disclosures describes a wireless local area network (LAN) video and audio system | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100303047 | Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device - Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device. Various services that may be used by a wireless communication device within a particular location may be referred to as location based services (LBS). As such, means by which the location of a wireless communication device that may use such available services, within such a locale, is made by using more than one type of location determination approach. For example, a wireless communication device includes communication capability (e.g., RX and TX) in accordance with a first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) and also includes a communication capability (e.g., RX only) in accordance with a second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi/WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)). The RX capability is operative to assist in location determination for the wireless communication device based on knowledge of at least one wireless communication device that communicates with the wireless communication device. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100303048 | USE OF THE WLAN STANDARD FOR A C2C COMMUNICATION BY ADDING NEW PACKET TYPES - C2X communication is made possible efficiently via WLAN by apparatuses and a method for filtering data frames received by a vehicle from a receiver via a WLAN connection, wherein a frame type indicated in a received data frame is used to decide that device to which data in the data frame are transmitted. The C2X communication can be used for recognizing pedestrians. It is also possible to use a plurality of transmission paths and/or UDP. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100303049 | Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device - Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device. Various services that may be used by a wireless communication device within a particular location may be referred to as location based services (LBS). As such, means by which the location of a wireless communication device that may use such available services, within such a locale, is made by using more than one type of location determination approach. For example, a wireless communication device includes communication capability (e.g., RX and TX) in accordance with a first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) and also includes a communication capability (e.g., RX only) in accordance with a second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi/WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)). The RX capability is operative to assist in location determination for the wireless communication device based on knowledge of at least one wireless communication device that communicates with the wireless communication device. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100303050 | Method for Implementing an Intelligent Content Rating Middleware Platform and Gateway System - The method for implementing an Intelligent Content Rating middleware platform and gateway system disclosed herewith provides telecommunications carriers and network operators with the ability to define routing and actions based on HTIP/SIP based content and subscriber context through a powerful, extensible Layer 4-7 switching fabric technology. The invention mediates communications between applications and networks for IP packet flows, personal messaging, location-based services and billing. Furthermore, it enables advanced context-sensitive dialogue scenarios with the wireless subscriber such as, but not limited to, Advice-of-Charge dialogues. The art permits telecommunications network operators and like entities to introduce real-time rating of data services for both prepaid and post-paid subscribers. Further advances in the art include the validation of digital signatures, combined with authentication and non-repudiation techniques to ensure subscriber privacy remains protected. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100303051 | ACCESS POINT SCAN METHOD, ACCESS POINT SCAN APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING ACCESS POINT SCAN PROGRAM - A probe request for an access point scan is transmitted over a specified radio channel according to an order of scanning, a connection candidate AP list including information indicating an access point which transmits a probe response and a received signal strength indication is generated when the probe response is received, the connection candidate AP list is referred to, one access point is selected from access points whose corresponding received signal strength indications exceed a predetermined threshold, connection processing is performed on the one access point being selected on the specified radio channel, and scanning is repeatedly performed by specifying a radio channel which is second in the order until scanning on all radio channels for which the order of scanning is set is completed when no probe response is received or the connection candidate AP list includes no received signal strength indication which exceeds the threshold. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100309893 | Techniques for detecting beacons on wireless channels - A wireless local access network (WLAN) radio listens for a beacon for a listening duration on each of multiple channels. Periodically, the WLAN radio changes the channel on which the WLAN radio listens for a beacon. The WLAN radio rotates through all channels until an entire beacon period is listened to. The number of iterations is chosen to minimize the overlap of successive listening durations. The WLAN radio can detect a beacon by detecting an incomplete portion of a beacon. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309894 | Method and Apparatuses for Allowing a Nomadic Terminal to Access a Home Network on Layer 2 Level - A method of allowing a nomadic terminal to access a home network on the Layer 2 level. The method comprises connecting said terminal to a remote access network via an access point, the remote access network being connected to an operator's backbone network via a remote access router. Signalling is exchanged between the access point and an authentication server within the backbone network in order to authenticate the terminal to the authentication server and, following successful authentication, a Layer 2 tunnel extending across the backbone network is established for the purpose of connecting said nomadic terminal to the home network. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309895 | DATA TRANSMISSION FROM A VEHICLE AND NETWORK REGULATION - The invention provides a method for transmitting data from a vehicle. The vehicle is provided with a monitoring apparatus ( | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309896 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE AND ADAPTER THEREOF - A wireless local area network (WLAN) device includes a WLAN adapter having a USB terminal connected to a USB terminal of a PC (personal computer). The WLAN adapter is loaded with a program for setting a WLAN and executing a communication, and a connection of the adapter to the PC prompts the PC to recognize the adapter as a CD-ROM drive, and prompts the program for setting a WLAN and executing a communication to run automatically. The PC loads data of SCSI standard into the WLAN adapter by using a vender defined command of SCSI standard by way of the program for setting a WLAN and executing a communication. The WLAN adapter converts the data of SCSI standard into data for setting a WLAN or data of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), and sets the WLAN and executes the communication. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309897 | NETWORK PARTICIPANT STATUS EVALUATION - Methods and apparatus for obtaining and providing status information for network devices. In one implementation, a wireless device includes: an antenna; a wireless communication interface connected to said antenna and supporting wireless communication across a wireless connection provided by said antenna; a memory supporting storing data; and a controller connected to said wireless interface and to said memory, supporting an application service and a network evaluation service; wherein said application service provides execution and management of one or more application programs accessible by said controller using application data stored in said memory, said network evaluation service provides evaluation of status information of other devices available for wireless communication through said wireless interface and provides status information of the wireless device to another device upon request, and status information provided by said network evaluation service includes information indicating at least one application program for which application data is stored in said memory. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309898 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS DEVICE ACTIVITY MESSAGING - A method and system of reachability indication between a wireless device and at least one push server, the method comprising the steps of: sending device status information from the wireless device to the at least one push server; and receiving the status information at the at least one push server; wherein the at least one push server is enabled to selectively start and stop serving the wireless device on the basis of the status information. The method further comprises sending status information to a packet data serving node that stores a list of push servers associated with a wireless device, and having the packet data serving node forward the status information to the push server. The system and method further includes selectively starting and stopping the serving of the wireless device by the push server during a voice call. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309899 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK NODE - Disclosed is a technique for achieving reduction in processing load caused when a mobile terminal having two or more interfaces registers flow control information with a network and reduction in traffic of signaling for the registration. According to this technique, a mobile terminal (MN | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100316029 | ROAMING BROKER AND NETWORK INTERWORKING CONTROL GATEWAY - An apparatus provides roaming broker functionality. The apparatus comprises a negotiation controller for negotiating a roaming agreement between an originating network and a destination network. The apparatus further comprises a rule generator generating rules according to a negotiated roaming agreement, and a configuration unit configured to implement configuration settings according to respective rules generated by the rule generator. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316030 | TECHNIQUES FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE PROTOCOLS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of supporting multiple protocols in a wireless network operating according to an Institute for Electronic and Electrical Engineers IEEE) 802.16 standard, comprising adding a new convergence sub layer (CS) type in which an extra field is added to an 802.16 service data unit (SDU) to indicate which higher layer protocol is carried in a 802.16 SDU payload. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316031 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND CONTROL METHOD - Communication terminal | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316032 | Service Period Recovery wIth Source/Destination help - SP recovery between communications of a source and destination apart from the PCP can occur by performing, prior to the initial frame response between a source and a destination, a back-off procedure using back-off parameters for SP recovery when the initiator of a SP cannot receive a responding frame from the destination and detects the communication medium being idle. In alternative embodiments the source and/or destination can send a notification frame to the PCP informing the PCP of transmission failure. When the PCP determines the communication medium to be idle, the PCP truncates and reallocates the remaining portion of the SP. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316033 | ENHANCEMENTS FOR OFF-THE-SHELF 802.11 COMPONENTS - Methods and systems are disclosed for deploying mobile ad hoc networks using commercial off-the-shelf components conforming to the IEEE 802.11-2007 networking standard. In particular, a physical layer (which may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of these) is provided at or below the MAC layer that adapts operation of standard chipsets to an enhanced ad hoc wireless networking protocol such as the MBRI protocol described herein. This may include suppressing or disabling certain operations of the 802.11 chipset, and adding other functions to support augmenting functionality of the protocol stack to provide various higher-level network functions (e.g., network, routing, and other functions) of an enhanced protocol within or through the physical layer. In one aspect, there is disclosed herein a method for operating a network device that includes disabling at least one function of an 802.11 chipset and providing at least one additional network function through a physical layer application programming interface for the 802.11 chipset. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316034 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - A method performed by user equipment (UE) includes receiving a request to access a service unavailable through a first network cell associated with the UE, and receiving a message from an access device associated with the first network cell, wherein the message identifies a plurality of second network cells providing the service. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316035 | POSITION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, NETWORK EDGE DEVICE, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique that, in a network-based local mobility management method, reduces the load of a network node for managing position information of a mobile terminal and achieves a high scalability with respect to the number of mobile terminals. According to the technique, a LMA (Local Mobility Anchor) ( | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316036 | WIRELESS NETWORK ROAMING TIMER METHOD AND APPARATUS - A mobile station in a wireless network includes a roaming timer. The roaming timer is set based on various criteria, and when the roaming timer expires, an attempt to roam is performed. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316037 | METHOD OF SECURING NETWORK ACCESS RADIO SYSTEMS - A method of providing security for network access radio systems and associated access radio security systems used with the systems. The method includes connecting an access radio having a radio link to a network; communicating between the access radio and a computer over the network using a ping application having ping commands and unique encrypted codes; and enabling operation of the access radio when the access radio is receiving ping commands. Typically, the access radio and the computer are nodes on the network and the network is a local area network (LAN). The ping application sends packets of information from the computer to the access radio and receives a response from the access radio. The ping application must be functioning (i.e., sending and receiving commands between the computer and the access radio) to enable the access radio to communicate via the radio link with a remote network. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100322212 | Optimization in heterogeneous networks - A heterogeneous wireless communication network includes a home access network with a home network characteristic and a home network policy, and a visiting access network with a visiting network characteristic and a visiting network policy. A packet data node gateway is adapted to communicate with the home access network and the visiting access network over a first communication path. An out-of-band communication path substantially separate from the first communication path is adapted to carry the visiting network policy from the visiting access network to the packet data node gateway. When the terminal is handed off from the home network to the visiting network, the packet data node gateway retrieves the visiting network policy, and the terminal accesses the visiting network over the first communication path using the visiting network policy. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322213 | SERVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of service discovery in a wireless network involve an Access Point (AP) proxy service to represent service providers. The AP manages service provider information, which is provided in response to service requests from service consumers. The AP proxy capability is advertised as a broadcast message in the wireless network. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322214 | WIRELESS NETWORK POLLING AND DATA WAREHOUSING - Methods and systems are provided to collect and update data on client devices connected to WiFi access points is provided. An inventory of WiFi cable modems and WiFi access points coupled to the WiFi cabled modems within a specific network is periodically collected. Internet Protocol (IP) addresses of WiFi cable modems and WiFi access points coupled to the WiFi cabled modems are periodically updated. Traps are periodically received from the WiFi access points. The traps are parsed to collect an inventory of client devices wirelessly connected to the WiFi access points and a time at which a client device connected to the WiFi access point. The WiFi access points are periodically polled to collect data on client devices, the data including a period of time that a client device has been connected to a WiFi access point and a physical location of the client device. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322215 | METHODS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS DOMAIN SWITCHING, NETWORK NODES, USER TERMINAL AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREFOR - A technique for controlling an access domain selection is described. The technique is applicable to user terminals that are capable of switching from a first network access domain to a second network access domain while services are provided to the user terminals. According to a network aspect of this technique, a network node receives a request message from a user terminal. In response to this request message, the network node sends a rule set including one or more access domain switching rules to the user terminal. These access domain switching rules may be dynamically selected by the network node to control the access domain switching behaviour of the user terminal. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322216 | Method for controlling the steering of the roaming of user equipment in a wireless telecommunication network - The invention concerns a method for controlling the steering of the roaming of a user equipment (UE) by the HPLMN to which said UE is attached via a WLAN Access Point wherein said HPLMN sends a EAP Request Identity message to said UE including a SoR information (SoR Command) and said UE performs a network reselection based on said SoR information as soon as possible. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322217 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING IDLE MODE IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for supporting an idle mode of a terminal in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. In the method, a first request message for starting an idle mode is transmitted to a first access node to which the terminal is currently connected and a first response message with respect to the first request message is received from the first access node, and in this case, when the first response message includes acceptance information with respect to the start of the idle mode, the idle mode starts. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322218 | MULTI-USER, MULTI-MODE BASEBAND SIGNALING METHODS, TIMING/FREQUENCY SYNCHRONIZATION, AND RECEIVER ARCHITECTURES - A femtocell wireless signaling/data mesh network for multi-user, multi-mode baseband signaling methods, timing/frequency synchronization, and receiver architectures is disclosed. The femtocell wireless signaling/data mesh network includes a plurality of femtocells connected by a plurality of wireless links. A first femtocell of the plurality of femtocells directly communicates with a second femtocell of the plurality of femtocells via a wireless link between the first femtocell and the second femtocell. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322219 | Management frame directed cluster assignment within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Management frame directed cluster assignment within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. From a first wireless communication device, a management frame may be transmitted to a number of other wireless communication devices to assign respective clusters (i.e., cluster being one or more channels within one or more bands) for use in communications by those other wireless communication devices. The first wireless communication device may be an access point (AP), and the others may be wireless stations (STAs); alternatively, all of the wireless communication devices in the communication system (e.g., including the first wireless communication device) may be STAs. The cluster assignment may be modified for any of a number of various reasons (e.g., periodically, after a certain number of packets being transmitted and/or received, communication system operating condition change, change in number, type, capabilities, etc. of the various wireless communication devices in the communication system, etc.). | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322220 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REGULATING SENDING IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of regulating sending implemented by a station having at least one data packet to be sent via a wireless communication network comprises at least one step of obtaining a binary value representative either of an authorization to send, or of a prohibition to send, a step of sending said packet, said sending step being executed on condition that at least one criterion relating to the binary value or values obtained is satisfied, wherein the binary value or values are dependent on an index value assigned randomly to said station and a class of packets to which the packet to be sent belongs. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322221 | RADIO TRANSMITTING DEVICE AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - Each of radio frame multiplexing circuits generates radio frame data by multiplexing multiplexed data inputted from a LAN terminating circuit, into the transmission area of a radio frame, and by assigning the transmission area of the radio frame other than the area, to which LAN-received data is assigned, as the transmission area of PDH data signal strings; inserts data assignment information into a radio over-header; and transmits the data from a radio transmitting/receiving circuit to a remote device via a transmission line. Each of radio frame demultiplexing circuits demultiplexes the multiplexed data based on the data assignment information in the radio over-header. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322222 | SHARED PROCESSING BETWEEN WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICES OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An integrated circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives first packetized data with a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol, wherein the first wireless interface circuit includes a first processing module that processes the first packetized data. A second wireless interface circuit, coupled to the first wireless interface device, transceives second packetized data with a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol, wherein the second wireless interface circuit includes a second processing module that processes the second packetized data, wherein the second wireless interface circuit is operable to assign a first processing task to the first processing module and wherein the first processing task relates to the processing of the second packetized data. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100329222 | MIMO BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND SYSTEM - A wireless telecommunications system having a plurality of radio base stations, the base stations in the system are arranged for communication with at least one user terminal in accordance with a first principle of wireless telecommunication. The system has at least a first sub-set of the plurality of radio base stations arranged for communication with at least one user terminal in the system in accordance with said first principle but also as MIMO-stations in cooperation with each other. Preferably, said first principle of wireless telecommunication is a principle within cellular telephony. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329223 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to one embodiment, a communication device connected wirelessly to a source-side communication device includes a wired communication module, first and second wireless communication modules, and a communication controller. The wired communication module transmits a video signal and exchanges a data signal with a sink device via wired communication. The first wireless communication module receives a video signal through a first wireless communication system. The second wireless communication module transmits and receives a data signal through a second wireless communication system. The communication controller performs processing related to a physical address used in the communication system of the wired communication module. The communication controller relays information as to data communication capability exchanged between the sink device and the source device, and exchanges information as to data communication capability with the source-side communication device. When the devices are capable of data communication, the communication controller sets data communication as possible. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329224 | CALL ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques to configure quality of service (QoS) and utilize radio resources for a call in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a station ensures that an access point in the WLAN is suitable for receiving service prior to performing registration to receive services via the WLAN. In another aspect, the station first requests for radio resources for traffic flows, then requests for radio resources for signaling flows, and sends signaling as best effort traffic if radio resources are not granted for the signaling flows. In yet another aspect, the station aggregates QoS for multiple applications and requests for radio resources based on the aggregated QoS. In yet another aspect, the station releases extra radio resources corresponding to the difference between the QoS granted by the WLAN and the QoS proposed by a remote terminal for the call. In yet another aspect, the station requests for the same QoS or lower from a new access point during handoff. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329225 | CALL ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques to configure quality of service (QoS) and utilize radio resources for a call in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a station ensures that an access point in the WLAN is suitable for receiving service prior to performing registration to receive services via the WLAN. In another aspect, the station first requests for radio resources for traffic flows, then requests for radio resources for signaling flows, and sends signaling as best effort traffic if radio resources are not granted for the signaling flows. In yet another aspect, the station aggregates QoS for multiple applications and requests for radio resources based on the aggregated QoS. In yet another aspect, the station releases extra radio resources corresponding to the difference between the QoS granted by the WLAN and the QoS proposed by a remote terminal for the call. In yet another aspect, the station requests for the same QoS or lower from a new access point during handoff. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329226 | SIP Server Discovery in an Interworking WLAN/IMS System - The present invention relates to a node and a method for transmitting initiation information related to a SIP-proxy server between an IMS-client stored in a user equipment (UE) and a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) via a Access Network (AN) and a Tunnelling Termination Gateway (TTG) node in IP core network. The present invention offers smooth transfer between different protocols and Interworking between different networks. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329227 | ROBUST CODING IN MULTI-HOP NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus which make use of a multiple receiver (MR) frame aggregation for creating data units so that they require acknowledgment of a single packet data unit by a group of several intended receivers. A multi-hop topology information regarding the neighborhood of a destination node can be used to derive the intended receivers which acknowledge a packet transmission besides the primary destination node of the packet. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20110002313 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MESSAGING ACROSS CELLULAR NETWORKS AND A PUBLIC DATA NETWORK - A computer program product for instant message communication in a wireless and non-wireless environment. A message is sent from a mobile unit device over a wireless communication network. The message includes a destination address, information associated with the mobile unit device's user, message content and message address. If, according to information previously stored for the mobile unit device's user at the instant message system, the destination address is associated with an instant message function, the associated instant message function is executed at the instant message system using the information contained in the message content, if required as determined by the associated instant message function. If, according to information previously stored for the mobile unit device's user, the destination address is associated with an instant message name, an instant message is created according to the message content and is sent to the user with the associated instant message name. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002314 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZATION OF FEMTOCELL NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Methods and apparatus that reduce network management overhead required for the operation of wireless femtocells. In one aspect of the invention, a central network entity governs the simultaneous operation of several femtocells by specifying modes of operation, and operational parameters for one or more of the femtocells. In one embodiment, at least one of the specified modes of operation directs a femtocell to operate in a substantially autonomous manner within the network-defined operational parameters. The network-defined constraints are provided to the femtocell for example, responsive to a successful registration attempt. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002315 | DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA LOCAL AREA WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND LOCAL AREA WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD USING THE SAME - A local area wireless transmission system includes: at least one transmitter transmitting a multimedia data signal with a first speed; at least one receiver receiving the multimedia data signal; and at least one master receiver transmitting a synchronization control signal with a second speed lower than the first speed, the at least one master receiver receiving the multimedia data signal from the at least one transmitter wirelessly and from the at least one receiver wiredly. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002316 | APPARATUS AND A METHOD FOR ENABLING A WLAN DEVICE TO ACCESS A WIMAX NETWORK - The present invention provides an apparatus for enabling a wireless local area network device to access a WiMAX network, the apparatus comprises: WiMAX means, configured to encapsulate uplink data from data means into a transmission message in an 802.16e protocol format, to send the transmission message to a WiMAX base station, to re-encapsulate a received message from the WiMAX base station into downlink data that can be processed by the data means and to send the downlink data to the data means; the data means, configured to receive the downlink data from the WiMAX means and the uplink data from WLAN means and to perform processing to the uplink data and the downlink data; and the WLAN means, configured to encapsulate the downlink data received from the data means into a downlink data message in an 802.11a/b/g protocol format, to send the downlink data message to a terminal device, and to re-encapsulate the uplink data message received from the terminal device into the uplink data that can be processed by the data means. The present invention also provides a method for enabling a wireless local area network device to access a WiMAX network. Therefore the facile movement in a local area is achieved. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002317 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAPPING THE INITIAL LOCATION OF DOWNLINK PILOT - A mapping method for the initial location of the downlink pilot comprises the following steps: acquiring a cell sequence number; mapping the cell sequence number to k; and setting an initial location of a downlink pilot on a first antenna as the K | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002318 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - It is an objective of the present invention to efficiently use an uplink radio resource, when transmitting user data based on an uplink high efficient transmission method. A mobile station according to the present invention includes a transmission section configured to transmit high efficient uplink data channel frames for transmitting user data based on the uplink high efficient transmission method, so that transmission timings of the high efficient uplink data channel frames are synchronized among mobile stations located in a single area. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002319 | SIGNALING OF TRANSMISSION SETTINGS IN MULTI-USER SYSTEMS - The present invention relates to a transmitting apparatus, a receiving apparatus, a system, a signal, and a method of multi-user transmission, wherein transmission settings are divided into common signal information, containing settings/information relevant for multiple receivers and user stream specific information, containing settings/information relevant only to a related user stream. Furthermore, the common signal information may comprise at least one of a duration of the longest user stream field and multi-user resource allocation field, so that the receivers know the mapping of user streams to receivers. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002320 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION FOR SUPPORTING LEGACY SYSTEM AND MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method for transmitting information that supports a legacy system and a multi-carrier system is disclosed. The method for transmitting information supporting a legacy system includes constructing a frame structure for supporting the legacy system, and transmitting a frame header including allocation information of the frame structure to a mobile station. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110007721 | METHOD FOR DIRECTIONAL ASSOCIATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product operable in a wireless communication system are provided in which an access probe is generated for transmission to a wireless node. A first signal is generated for transmission to the wireless node. The first signal includes information corresponding to a first preferred beam pattern from the wireless node to the apparatus. A second signal is received from the wireless node including information corresponding to a second preferred beam pattern from the apparatus to the wireless node. The second preferred beam pattern is determined based on the access probe. The apparatus communicates with the wireless node using at least one of the first preferred beam pattern or the second preferred beam pattern. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007722 | Base Station Selection Method for a Wireless Communication System and Device Using the Same - A base station selection method is disclosed. The wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations with overlapped radio ranges and a plurality of wireless devices. The method includes steps of modeling the plurality of base stations as a plurality of variable nodes in a factor graph, modeling the plurality of wireless devices as a plurality of constraint nodes in the factor graph, and selecting a base station for transmission from the plurality of base stations based on the factor graph. Each variable node is defined as a frequency band state of a corresponding base station. Each constraint node is linked to the variable nodes corresponding to the base stations that include the corresponding wireless device in their radio ranges, and is defined as that the frequency band states of the base stations including the corresponding wireless device in their radio ranges can not be all turned off. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007723 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION THEREOF - Disclosed is a communication apparatus in a network system constituted by a plurality of communication apparatuses, wherein the fact that a specific communication apparatus connected to a temporary network constructed temporarily has left the temporary network is detected. In response to the specific communication apparatus leaving the temporary network, another communication apparatus connected to the temporary network is allowed to return to the original network. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007724 | HIERARCHICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PROVIDING INTELLIGENT DATA, PROGRAM AND PROCESSING MIGRATION - A hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. Copies of data, program code and processing resources are migrated from their source toward requesting destinations based on request frequency, communication link costs and available local storage and/or processing resources. Each appropriately configured network device acts as an active participant in network migration. In addition, portable two-dimensional (2-D) code reading terminals are configured to wirelessly communicate compressed 2-D images toward stationary access servers that identify the code image through decoding and through comparison with a database of images that have previously been decoded and stored. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007725 | Network Access Points Using Multiple Devices - A system and method for providing access to a communication network includes providing a radio node comprising a first set of access point components including a radio component, and providing a physically separated controller node in communication with the radio node. The access point controller comprises a second set of access point components distinct from the first set of access point components, creating a distributed access point. A system controller may also be used to control at least one of the radio node and the controller node. The radio node, the controller node, and the system controller communicate over a communication link, such as a wireless or wired link. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007726 | METHOD, ROAMING PROCESSING DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING INTERNATIONAL ROAMING - There are disclosed an international roaming method, a roaming processing device and a communication system for international roaming of an international roaming subscriber of a first operator in a third operator network. When the international roaming subscriber of the first operator provided with a first operator IMSI and a second operator IMSI. roams in the third operator network, the roaming processing device of a second operator modifies a first signaling message from a first operator network and carrying the first operator IMSI to a second signaling message carrying the second operator IMSI and transmits the second signaling message to the third operator network. and modifies a third signaling message from the third operator network and carrying the second operator IMSI to a fourth signaling message carrying the first operator IMSI and transmits the fourth signaling message to the first operator network. There is also disclosed a gateway device. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007727 | METHOD FOR A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for a first coordinator operating at a first channel frequency in a wireless personal area network (WPAN), the WPAN further comprising a second coordinator operating a second channel frequency, the method comprising the steps of transmitting a message at a plurality of channel frequencies including the second channel frequency, requesting the second coordinator to change from the second channel frequency to the first channel frequency, and communicating with the second coordinator using the first channel frequency. As discussed above, advantages with the present invention includes that no priority based mechanism is needed due to the fact that the coordinator that initiates (e.g. starts) communication-decides on used frequency. Furthermore, every coordinator is able to have the coordinator it wants to communicate with to change to its decided frequency. The present invention also relates to a corresponding method for a second coordinator, a first and a second coordinator, a system comprising at least a first and a second coordinator, and a corresponding computer program. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110013603 | Techniques for MIMO beamforming for frequency selective channels in wireless communication systems - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus that may include a transceiver operable as a base station (BS) in a wireless network and adapted for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) beamforming and further adapted for wireless communication with a receiver that feeds back to the transceiver a plurality of beamforming matrixes per subband and interpolates the beamforming matrixes across the subband. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013604 | Methods, Systems and Computer Program Products for Controlling Devices Using Portable Electronic Devices - Remote devices are managed using a portable electronic device. If a portable electronic device is determined to have entered an area associated with a local area network (LAN), a link between the portable electronic device and the LAN is established. User services are established between the portable electronic device and a remote server using the established link based on a user profile associated with the portable electronic device. Devices associated with the remote server communicatively coupled to the LAN are controlled using the portable electronic device. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013605 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH SESSION PROXY - A mobile router having a session proxy module is disclosed. The session proxy module may act as a proxy (such as a TCP proxy) for all sessions (e.g., TCP sessions) going through the mobile router. That is, for example, when a local end-user seeks to establish a TCP session from their local end-user device (such as laptop) with a destination (such as a third party server), the session proxy module may (1) terminate the TCP session coming from the local end-user device and (2) establish a TCP (or some other protocol) session on the backhaul interface with the destination. That way, all end-user traffic between the end-user and the destination may be transparently routed through the mobile router. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013606 | METHOD OF OPERATING ACTIVE SCANNING TO CONFIGURE MESH NETWORK - A method of operating active scanning to configure a mesh network includes receiving a probe request frame from a mesh point (MP), the probe request frame comprising a Mesh Identifier (ID) information element, and transmitting a probe response frame to the MP when a Mesh ID in the Mesh ID information element is a wildcard Mesh ID or a specific Mesh ID. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013607 | CONSTRUCTING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT LONG TRAINING FIELD SEQUENCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for constructing a long training field (LTF) sequence in a preamble to reduce a peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) at a transmitter. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013608 | ACCESS POINT FOR PROVIDING WLAN VIRTUALIZATION, WLAN VIRTUALIZATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING ACCESS TO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a WLAN virtualization system which is capable of efficiently separating a Basic Service Set (BSS) into a plurality of virtual BSSs in a Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) manner. The WLAN virtualization system includes an Access Point (AP) for providing a plurality of vBSSs, and a plurality of stations corresponding to the vBSSs provided by the AP. Each of the vBSSs is operated on a superframe basis, the superframe being scheduled by a beacon frame transmitted from the AP. The superframe includes the beacon frame, one contention-free period, and one contention period. The CPs of the vBSSs include intervals which do not overlap each other. The vBSSs can be classified into any groups designated by a service provider based on certain criteria such as physical layer, QoS, security level, or network access authority, and times can be allocated to superframes at different rates or frequencies. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013609 | METHOD FOR A MORE EFFICIENT SEARCH FOR RADIO NETWORK ACCESS POINTS FOR CLOSED GROUPS IN RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method for identifying access points for a closed group of mobile radio devices to a cellular mobile radio network, wherein the use of said access points is authorized only for the closed group of mobile radio devices, wherein the data from a neighboring cell are transmitted to a mobile radio device checked into said cell by a cell forming such an access point, and/or a search for currently receivable neighboring cells is performed by the mobile radio device checked into said cell, the data from the neighboring cell are stored at least temporarily in the mobile radio device, and a search for the access point is initiated if the mobile radio device is present within range of one or more neighboring cells, wherein, in case the access point is not found, a renewed search for the access point is performed by the mobile radio device if the geographic position of the mobile radio device has changed significantly relative to a previous position, within the range of the neighboring cells. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013610 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS APPARATUS USING THE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless unit performs a frequency conversion process, a quadrature modulation process, and a quadrature detection process. A modem performs a modulation/demodulation process. A processing unit performs digital signal processing on a signal from the modem and on a signal to the modem. An image capturing unit acquires an external image and outputs the acquired image to a coding unit. The coding unit generates image data by performing a compression encoding process on the image received from the image capturing unit and outputs the image data to a control unit. The control unit controls the overall movement of a vehicle camera apparatus. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013611 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENABLING DISCOVERY OF WIRELESS DEVICES - A method and apparatus discover hidden wireless devices in a wireless network using a directional antenna system, preventing partitioning of the wireless network. A first wireless device located in a first antenna sector is joined in response to an initial first beacon. First beacons are received from the joined first wireless device during corresponding first beacon periods. At least a second antenna sector is scanned during at least one first beacon period to listen for second beacons from a second wireless device in the second antenna sector, while remaining joined with the first wireless device. The first beacons are not received while the second antenna sector is scanned. The second wireless device is joined in response to an initial second beacon. Second beacons are then received from the joined second wireless device during corresponding second beacon periods, and the first beacons are received during the corresponding first beacon periods. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013612 | Protocol Coexistence - A communication device having: a first communication unit for transmitting and/or receiving by a first protocol acknowledgements for data received by the device; a second communication unit for transmitting data units of a second protocol, the first and second protocols being such that the data units of the second protocol can interfere with the acknowledgements of the first protocol; and a controller configured to control the device such that, when a data unit of the second protocol is being transmitted by the second communication unit and the first communication unit is to transmit or receive an acknowledgement of the first protocol: the second communication unit interrupts the transmission of the data unit of the second protocol, the first communication unit transmits or receives the acknowledgement of the first protocol and the second transmitter resumes transmission of the data unit of the second protocol from the point that transmission of the data unit would have reached if it had not been interrupted. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013613 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HARQ IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a system configuration signal, the system configuration signal comprising frame configuration information and HARQ delay information, receiving a downlink (DL) signal in a DL subframe and transmitting an acknowledgement (ACK)/not-acknowledgement (NACK) signal for the DL signal in a UL subframe. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013614 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A telecommunications system communicates data packets to and from a mobile terminal in accordance with a mobile internet protocol. The system comprises a packet radio network including a first radio access interface and a gateway support node. The packet radio network is operable to communicate data packets to and from the mobile terminal, through the gateway support node and via the first radio access interface. The gateway support node is operable to provide a home address via which a correspondent node may transmit data packets via the gateway support node to the mobile terminal when the mobile terminal is attached to the packet radio network. The system further comprises a wireless access network including a second radio access interface and a home agent, the wireless access network being operable to communicate data packets to and from the mobile terminal through the home agent via the second radio access interface, the wireless access network being operable to provide a care of address for the mobile terminal via which the correspondent node may transmit data packets via the home agent to the mobile terminal when the mobile terminal is attached to the wireless access network. The mobile terminal is arranged to connect to one of the packet radio network or the wireless access network and, when connected, to detect which of the packet radio network and the wireless access network the mobile terminal has connected. Upon detection that the mobile terminal is attached to the packet radio network, the mobile terminal and the home agent are arranged so that data packets are transmitted to and from the mobile terminal via the gateway support node in preference to the home agent. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110019650 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZATION OF DEVICE CAPABILITY EXCHANGE IN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for optimizing the exchange of capabilities or other request messages across a network. In an exemplary embodiment, IMS architecture is disclosed which leverages the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) to optimize the exchange of capabilities of various user equipment (UE) client devices present on a network. The IMS architecture leverages intermediate entities (such as a home network gateway) to collect the capabilities of all UE devices on a given home network and forward this collected capability information onto a requesting UE device. The requesting entity generates a capabilities request message and appends this message with an information element that requests the capabilities of all UE devices on a given network (such as a user's home network). In response, the receiving device or intermediate entity generates a capabilities response message that includes the capabilities of all UE devices on the requested network. In this manner, signaling messages are reduced. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019651 | Mobile router stack - A wireless mobile router stack ( | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019652 | MOBILE SPECTRUM SHARING WITH INTEGRATED WiFi - Methods and systems are disclosed for realizing MBRI networks and network devices using commercial off-the-shelf components (e.g., chipsets) conforming to the 802.11 networking standards. In particular, a physical layer is provided at or below the medium access control layer that adapts the lowest level of a hardware chipset to the MBRI protocol. Also disclosed are methods of managing and operating an integrated MBRI router that supports a tightly or loosely coupled WiFi MAC and PHY layer operations in an all-IP mobile ad hoc network (MANET) with carrier grade network performance and improved spectrum utilization through IP transparent routing, media access control and physical layer convergence protocols. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019653 | SCANNING METHOD IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - A scanning method in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a station supporting the scanning method, and a new type of interworking information element format including information about a distribution system (DS) are disclosed. In the scanning method, information about a DS is included in a beacon frame or a probe request frame/frame response frame. Such information about the DS may be included in a network type field of for example, an interworking information element. In an active scanning method, a user equipment (UE) may specify its DS type by transmitting a probe request frame including DS information such as the DS type or the like. In a passive scanning method, the UE may select a suitable AP by using DS information such as a DS type included in the beacon frame or the like. The DS type may be information indicating whether a DS is a wireless network such as a mesh network or any other wired network. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110019654 | Method and Apparatus for Use in a Communications Network - A method is provided of enabling access for a terminal ( | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110026500 | LOW LATENCY MESH NETWORK - In an example embodiment, there is disclosed herein an apparatus comprising a wireless transceiver and packet processing logic coupled to the wireless transceiver. The packet processing logic is responsive to receiving a packet from a first node on a first path addressed to a node on a second path via the wireless transceiver to forward the packet on the second path towards the node on the second path via the wireless transceiver. The packet processing logic is further configured to send a reply to the packet to the first node on the first path via the wireless transceiver to a second node on the first path that is within range of the wireless receiver and on the second path to the first node on the first path responsive to determining the wireless transceiver cannot send a message directly the first upstream node. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026501 | VIRTUAL NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER FOR MOBILE VIRTUAL NETWORK OPERATOR ACTIVATION - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods and system configurations to activate a mobile virtual network operator (MVNO). A method includes wirelessly broadcasting a virtual Network Service Provider (NSP) to provide wireless activation of one or more Mobile Virtual Network Operators (MVNOs) associated with a NSP, directing a mobile station (MS) connected to the virtual NSP to a subscription portal that presents to a user of the MS the one or more MVNOs for selection, and provisioning the MS with configuration parameters for a selected MVNO to allow connection of the MS with the selected MVNO. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026502 | Method and System for Simultaneous Local and EPC Connectivity - A system for providing simultaneous local and global connectivity for a 3 | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026503 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS INFORMATION CHANNEL - Methods and apparatus to enable a wireless network system to dynamically change information channel message broadcasts. In one aspect, cellular network systems optimize pilot channel message delivery based at least in part on one or more network parameters. Base stations and/or cellular devices can dynamically configure the pilot channel message delivery or reception based on the network parameters. For example, such flexible pilot channel message delivery may more frequently deliver prioritized pilot channel messages, and less frequently broadcast low priority messages. Cellular subscribers with appropriately enabled user equipment may improve their power and applications performance through implementation of the invention. Furthermore, base stations may reclaim the freed cellular resources to support other services. Legacy subscribers are advantageously not affected. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026504 | CONTINUOUS GROUP OWNERSHIP IN AN IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method is provided that includes participating in a peer-to-peer wireless communications network that includes a group controller for creating and ending the network and controlling access to the network by wireless stations. A member of the network receives a status indicator from the group controller indicating that the group owner is or will be no longer serving as group owner. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026505 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR FORWARDING FRAME IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A wireless communication device, system and a method of forwarding frames between stations of a wireless communication system are disclosed. The wireless communication system includes a sending station, a forwarding station and a receiving station. The sending station is able to send a frame including a forwarding field, a receiving station address field, a sending station address field and a forwarding station address field. The forwarding station is able to receive said frame and to forward the frame as is to the receiving station. The receiving station upon receiving the frame reads the forwarding field and if the forwarding field indicates that the frame has been forward from the sending station, the receiving station exchanges the address of the sending station with the address of the receiving station and the address of the receiving station with the address of the sending station and sends a block acknowledge frame including exchanged addresses to the sending station via the forwarding station. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026506 | EFFICIENT COLLECTION OF WIRELESS TRANSMITTER CHARACTERISTIC - Systems, methods, and processor-readable storage media are disclosed for collecting information pertaining to the configuration of one or more wireless networks and using this information in turn to estimate the location of mobile wireless devices associated with those networks. Certain embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to providing efficient systems and methods for collecting the information, which are responsive to the coverage or quality of the wireless network configuration information already stored in a network database. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026507 | FILTER CIRCUIT AND RECEIVER USING THE SAME - Gain setting can be performed at high speed while reducing DC offset due to a filter cutoff frequency changeover without the need for input signal muting. A filter circuit having first and second filters is capable of allowing settings of first and second cutoff frequencies. First and second filter switch circuits and a charging circuit including a charging resistor and a charging switch are provided. For a first time period, the first switch circuit is controllably turned on while the second switch circuit is controllably turned off, thereby providing the first filter function. For a second time period, the first switch circuit is controllably turned off while the second switch circuit is controllably turned on, thereby providing the second filter function. For the first time period, the charging switch is controllably turned on so that the second capacitor is charged via the charging resistor. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026508 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve a problem of an accumulation on the transmission side, a delay on the reception side, and the like at the time of transmission in a communication system such as a wireless LAN system, each communication station in a network transmits a beacon in which information with respect to the network is written and sets a state in which a reception operation is performed during periods of time before and after the transmission of the beacon signal when performing access control not to make communication timing of a packet collide with that of another station by detecting a signal transmitted from another station. With performing such processing, a system can be formed based on minimum level of transmission and reception operation when transmission and reception data does not exist in each communication station in the network, and also a data transfer can be performed with latency as small as possible in a minimum necessary level of transmission and reception operation by making a transition of a transmission and reception state in accordance with a fluctuating volume of transmission and reception data. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026509 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus includes: a first local generator that generates a first local frequency arranged around a center frequency of a band group; a first down converter that receives a supply of a local signal from the first local generator; and a complex filter that quickly changes filter wave characteristics according to frequency hopping. A control to set the hopping complex filter to all-pass characteristics in wireless communication in a band crossing a local frequency among the bands for hopping and in wireless communication for simultaneously using the bands and to set the hopping complex filter to one side frequency suppression characteristics in other wireless communications is performed. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026510 | Method for Enabling Communication between a User Equipment and an IMS Gateway - A Femto base station ( | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110032913 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AP SELECTION AND SIGNAL QUALITY - An embodiment of the invention involves a method for selecting and maintaining wireless communications for wireless mesh networks between tier-2 and tier-3 nodes. The method comprises a first operation of receiving channel information from a first wireless node operating as an access point. The channel information includes each channel number used by one or more wireless nodes that are detected by the first wireless node to be operating within a signal coverage area of the first wireless node. Then, an active scan is conducted on a frequency spectrum for wireless signals based on the channel information. Such scanning is accomplished by initially scanning frequencies of each channel number used by the one or more wireless nodes. After the scanning, a determination is made whether to (i) maintain wireless communications with the first wireless node or (ii) establish new wireless communications with a new wireless node (AP). Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110032914 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING A PAYLOAD AMONG MOBILE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for sharing a payload among mobile devices in a wireless network. A first mobile device is configured to communicate with an access device via a first wireless path and with a media gateway server via a second wireless path. One or more other mobile devices are configured to communicate with the media gateway server via the second wireless path and with the first mobile device via a third wireless path. A payload is received at the first mobile device from the access device via the first wireless path and is partitioned into portions. One portion is assigned to the first mobile device, and the remaining portions are assigned to each of the one or more other mobile devices. The assigned payload portions are sent to the media gateway server via the second wireless path. The assigned payload portions are received at the media gateway server, and the payload is reconstructed from the received payload portions. The payload is sent to a destination address via a network. Payloads may also be received at the media gateway server, portioned, distributed to the first mobile device, reconstructed and delivered to the access device in a similar manner. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110032915 | LOCAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING FREQUENCY-VARIABLE SIGNAL DETECTION - A system for performing a local wireless communication using a predetermined frequency band divided into a plurality of channels. The system includes a hub for scanning each channel to identify available one of the plurality of channels and transmitting data over the available channel. The system further includes a sensor set to start to operate when the sensor detects a signal within the predetermined frequency band. The sensor spectrum-senses the signal of the frequency band for each channel, and analyzes a header of packet data for each channel, and receives and processes the packet data if the signal is identified to have a designated code. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110032916 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD USING THE SAME - The present invention discloses a wireless communication method for transceiving packets in wireless networks. The method comprises the steps of: transmitting a first packet with a first packet format, wherein a header of the first packet with the first packet format comprises information of a first communication duration; and performing a communication procedure during the first communication duration for transmitting at least one second packet with a second format, for receiving at least one third packet with the second format, or for both transmitting the at least one second packet and receiving the at least one third packet. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110032917 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE RELIABLE TRANSMISSION OF COMPRESSED NETWORK HEADERS - Method for transmitting data in a transmission system, the data being transmitted in the form of packets including a compressed header field and a data field and according to a format suited to the transmission system comprising the following steps: recovering the data packet to be transmitted including a compressed header and useful data, identifying the header part from the useful-data part, applying a corrector coding which is selected at the level of the header, and providing the resulting new packet to the link layer, while also communicating the protection mode used, generating the link header according to the transmission format of the relevant transmission system integrating the mode of protection used, and the adaptation of the CRC checksum of the link layer, on reception, performing the error corrector decoding in two steps. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110032918 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - A communication apparatus decides whether to provide, to a receiving apparatus that receives provided communication parameters, communication parameters that have been set by a communication-parameter setting process performed with another communication apparatus. When it is determined to provide the set communication parameters, a parameter that controls sending of an informing signal is changed in order to increase the number of informing signals sent by the communication apparatus per unit time. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110038357 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SCANNING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY BAND - Device, system, and method of scanning a wireless communication frequency band. In some embodiments, a device may include a wireless communication unit to scan a first wireless communication frequency band and, upon detecting at least one access point communicating over the first wireless communication frequency band, to receive from the detected access point information identifying one or more channels of a second wireless communication frequency band, different from the first wireless communication frequency band, and to scan the identified channels to detect wireless area network communications of at least one wireless area network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110038358 | Apparatus And Method For Neighbor-Aware Concurrent Transmission Media Access Control Protocol - An apparatus and method for neighbor-aware concurrent transmission media access control (MAC) protocol is provided, which determines whether a plurality of communication connections may be established concurrently in a wireless network, where each node in the network obtains the topology information of its multi-hop neighbors via a neighbor discover module. A cross-layer observation module integrates the physical and virtual carrier sensing, observes the address field of a control frame of a MAC layer in the wireless network, and compares the address field information of the control frame against the topology information obtained by the neighbor discover module to determine whether a plurality of connections may be established for concurrent transmission. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110038359 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CAUSING COMPUTER TO EXECUTE THE CONTROL METHOD - In 802.11n, the time during which the band is occupied is prolonged by the use of the frame aggregation method or in accordance with the type of communication frame, and this may influence communication of another apparatus. To solve this problem, a communication frame length (a communication frame to be used and the number of frames to be aggregated) is determined by taking account of priority information of a plurality of communication apparatuses. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110044302 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a radio communication system that simultaneously uses plural radio channels (STA | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044303 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF ADJUSTING A CONTENTION WINDOW FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - Device, system, and method of adjusting a contention window for wireless transmission. In some embodiments, a wireless communication unit may control transmissions of a wireless communication device in a wireless area network during a contention period, wherein the wireless communication unit is to select a back-off period within a contention-window having a contention-window size, which is adjusted based on a number of stations included in the wireless area network, and wherein the wireless communication unit is to wait for the back-off period prior to beginning a wireless transmission during the contention period. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044304 | Wireless Gateway Supporting A Plurality of Networks - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, systems and methods are illustrated for an apparatus comprising a modem component, a wireless communications component, at least one processor, and at least one tangible electronic memory storing data and numerous computer-executable modules to enable wireless hotspots with multiple network identifiers. Examples of at least some of the computer-executable modules includes, but is not limited to an input module, network identifier module, session management module, network management module, automatic location management module, authentication module, bandwidth negotiation module, billing interface module, and activity-based location module. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044305 | CHANNEL DEPENDENT GATING - Network element ( | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044306 | CALL SETUP METHOD FOR MOBILE VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK AND ACCESS POINT APPARATUS THEREOF - A call setup method is provided for a MVPN which includes at least one access point apparatus, at least one database, and a plurality of users. The database records a private extension number, a user phone number, and a user identity module of each user and a link address of the corresponding access point apparatus. The access point apparatus corresponding to a MO user receives a call setup request message for setting up a call with a MT user from the MO user. The access point apparatus corresponding to the MO user determines whether the link address of the access point apparatus corresponding to the MT user is valid according to the database. If the link address of the access point apparatus corresponding to the MT user is valid, the MO user and the MT user set up the call through the access point apparatuses corresponding to the link addresses. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044307 | Deregistration with Context Retention for Inter-RAT Operations - A method to perform deregistration with context retention is presented. In one embodiment, the method includes storing a context associated with a mobile station in response to a deregistration request from the mobile station. The method includes determining whether or not to accept the deregistration request with context retention and sending a deregistration command message to the mobile station if the deregistration request with context retention is allowed. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044308 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - It is an object of the invention to provide a wireless communication terminal and wireless communication method in which, even when moved outside the wireless area during communication, communication between terminals can be continued without requiring an operation of previously registering identification information or key information. A wireless communication terminal ( | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044309 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DEPLOYING TRACKING AREAS - The present invention provides a method and a device for deploying tracking areas. The method comprises: the mobile management entity MME acquires the connection establishment request from the Evolved Node B (e Node B), wherein, the connection establishment request carries one or more tracking area identities TAIs corresponding to the one or more tracking areas belonging to the e Node B; the MME acquires the one or more TAIs from the connection establishment request and locally searches the one or more TAIs; if the one or more TAIs are not found, the MME deploys the one or more tracking areas corresponding to the one or more TAIs. By the present invention, the MME of the mobile communication packet domain evolution system directly deploys the tracking areas, which increases the number of the tracking areas of the mobile communication packet domain evolution system, and satisfies the demand to the tracking areas of the mobile communication packet domain evolution system. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044310 | SYSTEM FOR ON-DEMAND ACCESS TO LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A roaming company makes payments to an aggregator of independent WLAN operators in exchange for providing Internet access services to subscribers of the roaming company. Independent WLAN operator accounts are maintained at the aggregation company. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110051698 | Mobile Remote Access - Providing mobile remote access in a secure manner. A bridge application is provided for devices such as smart phones which establishes a first secure connection to a host controller using a carrier network, advertises one or more SSIDs using a second wireless connection on the device such as an IEEE 802.11 interface, accepting and authenticating connections from a target device to the advertised SSID, and acting as a bridge for traffic between the target device and the host controller. The bridge application may be delivered to the device fully configured, or it may be delivered unconfigured with configuration information either supplied by the user or provided in an e-mail to the user of the device. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051699 | Traffic Forwarding in Mesh Networks - Prioritizing traffic forwarding in a wireless mesh network. In a wireless mesh network using carrier detect multiple access-collision avoidance with backoff, such as mesh networks supporting IEEE 802.11 clients, access points in the mesh are assigned levels according to their distance in hops from the root node of the mesh. Access points in the mesh then generate backoff times proportional to their level in the mesh. This has the effect of prioritizing traffic at those levels close to the mesh root. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051700 | MODIFYING SYSTEM CLOCKS BASED ON PARTICULAR WLAN CHANNEL THAT IS SELECTED TO IMPROVE RF SENSITIVITY OF A RADIO MODULE - Techniques are provided for selecting one of a plurality of clock signals used to drive a bus of a WLAN-enabled device having a WLAN radio module coupled to the bus and designed to operate over a plurality of WLAN channels. A network infrastructure device, such as an access point or port, is provided that comprises a WLAN radio module, a PCI bus coupled to the WLAN radio module, a look up table (LUT) and a processor. The WLAN radio module designed to operate over a plurality of WLAN channels in a first frequency band. The LUT comprises a plurality of entries. Each entry comprises: a particular one of the WLAN channels and a corresponding one of a first clock signal having a first clock frequency and a second clock signal having a second clock frequency that is to be selected. The first clock signal causes interference at the WLAN radio module when operating over a first subset of the WLAN channels, and the second clock signal causes interference at the WLAN radio module when operating over a second subset of the WLAN channels. The processor selects, from the LUT based on the one of the WLAN channels that has been selected for the WLAN radio module to communicate over, either the first clock signal or the second clock signal that is to be used to drive the bus. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051701 | IMS DEREGISTRATION OF A DUAL MODE DEVICE TRIGGERED THROUGH A LEGACY NETWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed that deregister a dual mode device with an IMS network by transmitting a message over a legacy network (e.g., a cellular network). The dual mode device detects a loss of wireless communications with an access network of the IMS network, and transmits a deregister request message to the legacy network for delivery to the IMS network. A network element in the IMS network receives the deregister request message, and updates an IMS registration status of the dual mode device based on the deregister request message to indicate the dual mode device as deregistered. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051702 | ADDRESS STRIPPING IN A METER READING WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND ASSOCIATED SYSTEM - A meter reading system includes a meter reading wireless mesh network having wireless meter reading nodes in communication with an access point. Each wireless meter reading node has an address associated therewith. The meter reading wireless mesh network is configured to define a given downstream route, from the access point to a given node via successive intermediate nodes, based upon addresses of the successive intermediate nodes and the given node. The respective address at each successive intermediate node is stripped while routing data along the given downstream route from the access point to the given node. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051703 | Mobile router device - A wireless mobile router ( | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051704 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR RELAYING SYMBOLS TRANSFERRED BY A SOURCE TO A DESTINATION - The present invention concerns a method for relaying symbols transferred by a source to a destination in a wireless cellular telecommunication network, the symbols being relayed by a relay, the relay receiving symbols. The relay:
| 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051705 | MIMO AND MU-MIMO OFDM PREAMBLES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure present frame structures to support a plurality of standards, such as the IEEE 802.11 ac in addition to the IEEE 802.11 a/b/n/g. Preamble of the frame structure can be used by a receiver to detect transmission mode of the packet. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051706 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A integrated circuit includes logic configured to support smart-utility-network communication using an integer number of data bits per symbol for 96, 48, 24, 12, and 4 data subcarriers across IFFT sizes of 128, 64, 32, 16, and 8. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051707 | CALL FLOW SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE IN A LEGACY TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a network server, such as a mobile application gateway, connect devices on a cellular or carrier network with individual networks, such as enterprise voice and data networks or residential networks. The effects of the present invention are far reaching in terms of transferring effective call control from the cellular network into the control of the individual network, such as the enterprise, and enabling new business models for the purchase of cellular service from a public cellular carrier by an enterprise. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051708 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DEPLOYING EVOLVED NODE B - A method and device for deploying evolved nodes are provided in the present invention, and the method comprises: a MME acquires a connection establishment request from an e Node B, wherein the connection establishment request carries a global identifier of the e Node B; the MME acquires the global identifier, and searches for corresponding e Node B information according to the global identifier, and if the corresponding e Node B information cannot be found, the MME deploys the e Node B. With the present invention, the MME in a mobile communication packet domain evolved system can directly deploy e Node B, which increases the number of e Node B in the mobile communication packet domain evolved system, and satisfies the demand of the mobile communication packet domain evolved system on e Node B. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110058535 | Primary user detection - A low complexity primary user detection system is disclosed. Signals are filtered to reduce the number of signals that must be processed. Width and PRI of the signals are used to match a constellation associated with a primary user. If the constellation is matched, communication parameters are adjusted to make way for the primary user. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058536 | WIRELESS NETWORK SELECTION APPARATUS - A wireless network selection apparatus comprises a storage unit, a transmitting unit, a first receiving unit, and a second receiving unit. The storage unit stores first connection setting information to join a first wireless network and second connection setting information to join a second wireless network which is different from the first wireless network. The transmitting unit transmits the first connection setting information or the second connection setting information to an external communication terminal. The first receiving unit receives a request to transmit the first connection setting information transmitted from the transmitting unit. The second receiving unit is provided in the same housing as that in which the first receiving unit is provided and receives a request to transmit the second connection setting information transmitted from the transmitting unit. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058537 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD APPLICABLE THERETO - A mobile electronic device and a communication method applicable thereto. The mobile electronic device includes a microprocessor, a routing IC and a modem unit. The microprocessor is used to connect with at least one first external device via the routing IC. The modem unit is coupled to the microprocessor for connecting with a base station, so that the first external device is enabled to communicate with the base station via the mobile electronic device. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058538 | HAND-HELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD APPLICABLE THERETO - A hand-held electronic device and a communication method applicable thereto. The hand-held electronic device includes a microprocessor and a modem unit. The microprocessor connects the hand-held electronic device with at least one first external device via an ad-hoc network protocol. The modem unit connects with a base station for enabling the first external device to communicate with the base station via the hand-held electronic device. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058539 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND RADIO STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for communicating between a primary station and a secondary station comprising (a) at the secondary station, upon arrival of a data packet to be transmitted to the primary station, buffering said data packet in a buffer, (b) at the secondary station, after the expiration of a time period starting at arrival of the data packet, transmitting to the primary station a request for an uplink transmission resource if a grant of uplink transmission resource is not received during the said time period, (c) at the primary station, granting to the secondary station an uplink transmission resource. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058540 | System and Method for Supporting Extended Protocols in a Wireless Communication System - A system and method is provided for supporting data transfer protocols that extend beyond standard protocols used in conventional data over cable systems. A subscriber station in accordance with the invention determines, during registration, whether a base station with which it communicates is capable of supporting an extended protocol, and if it is, transfers data to the base station in accordance with the extended protocol. Additionally, a base station in accordance with the invention is notified during registration whether or not a subscriber station supports an extended protocol and stores this information. When a request for transmission opportunity is subsequently received from the subscriber station, the base station accesses the stored information to determine if the cable modem supports the extended protocol. If the subscriber station supports the extended protocol, the base station processes data received from the subscriber station during the transmission opportunity in accordance with that protocol. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058541 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE NETWORK SELECTION BY THE HOME OPERATOR OF DUAL USER EQUIPMENT - The invention concerns a method for controlling the network selection by the home operator of dual user equipment ( | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110058542 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR PAGING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for forwarding a page message to a communication device includes receiving a page message and a list of Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Identities in conjunction therewith. Each of the CSG Identities is indicative of which radio base stations among said plurality of radio base stations the communication device is allowed to access. The method also includes selecting, based on the list of CSG Identities received in conjunction with the received page message, a subset of radio base stations among said plurality of radio base stations and forwarding the page message to each radio base station in the selected subset of radio base stations, whereby the communication device is paged only via radio base stations that the communication device is allowed to access. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110064062 | FREQUENCY BAND SETTING APPARATUS AND METHOD, ACCESS POINT, AND FREQUENCY BAND USING METHOD OF ACCESS POINT - A frequency band setting apparatus and method are provided. The frequency band setting apparatus may include a calculation unit and a control unit. The calculation unit may calculate a basic frequency band of each of a plurality of Access Points (APs), and the control unit may divide a frequency band, which is available to the plurality of APs, into each of the calculated basic frequency bands and a common frequency band. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110064063 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING/CHANGING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) ACCESS INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A method and apparatus for automatically generating/changing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access information are provided. The apparatus includes an access information management database for storing pre-registered WLAN access information of a plurality of WLAN Access Points (APs). The apparatus also includes an access information collector for collecting information for WLAN APs being accessible at a current position of the apparatus, and an access information analyzer for analyzing the collected information, and creating a list of the accessible WLAN APs. The apparatus further includes a comparator for comparing the list with the WLAN access information to determine if the WLAN APs match. The apparatus additionally includes an access information automatic changer for automatically changing current WLAN access information according to matched APs. The apparatus includes an access information generator for automatically generating new WLAN access information when no WLAN access information is matched with the APs. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110064064 | WIRELESS/LAN ROUTER QUEUING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A queuing method and system for wireless/LAN routers processes and routes an incoming data packet from a wireless mobile network to a destination server. The system uses a wireless transport module to initiate storage of the data packet in a permanent storage device while simultaneously forwarding the data packet to the destination server. A database thread is used to manage the operations being performed on the data packet and for initiating the storage of the data packet in a permanent storage device based on a permanent storage queue. A main thread is used to simultaneously forward the data packet to the destination server. The wireless transport module is adapted to determine whether the data packet has been acknowledged by the destination server and aborting the storage of the data packet in the permanent storage device once acknowledgment from by destination server has been received. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110064065 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus performs bi-directional communication with an initiator. The apparatus is allocated an allocation period for data transmission from the initiator. The apparatus includes means for generating a first physical frame including an acknowledgement frame with respect to data received from the initiator, and generating a second physical frame in which a plurality of transmission data frames addressed to the initiator are aggregated. The apparatus also includes means for transmitting the first physical frame at a first transmission rate and the second physical frame at a second transmission rate, during the allocation period. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110069685 | SIGNALING-LESS DYNAMIC CALL SETUP AND TEARDOWN BY UTILIZING OBSERVED SESSION STATE INFORMATION - A system and methodology that facilitates signaling-less call setup and teardown by employing observed Quality of Experience (QoE) and resource demands is provided. Moreover, the system provides an environment for supersonic treatment of observed QoE and Quality of Service (QoS) demands for mobile applications. Specifically, a monitoring component is employed to determine session state information associated with a traffic flow, which includes observed QoE and resource demand data. The session state information is stored in a shared memory location and can be analyzed to modify and/or create a network policy for the traffic flow. The network policy is applied to one or more traffic flows to minimize signaling exchanges between a communication network and a mobile station. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069686 | TRAFFIC FORWARDING IN MESH NETWORKS - Prioritizing traffic forwarding in a wireless mesh network. In a wireless mesh network using carrier detect multiple access—collision avoidance with backoff, such as mesh networks supporting IEEE 802.11 clients, access points in the mesh calculate a node rank based on downstream and upstream rank components. Access points in the mesh then generate backoff times inversely proportional to their node rank. This has the effect of prioritizing traffic at nodes that have higher rank. The downstream and upstream rank components take into account the amount of space occupied by downstream and upstream traffic, respectively, and are weighted by their position in the mesh tree. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069687 | Wireless Broadband Deployment - Deployment of wireless broadband and systems for use in providing wireless broadband is described. The system can include a trunk, which can include a root node, optional repeaters, and a main distribution node, the combination which enables wireless MIMO backhaul to a network such as the Internet. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069688 | Short Packet for Use in Beamforming - A method for generating a beamforming training (BFT) unit includes generating a physical layer (PHY) preamble of the BFT unit and generating a first encoding block and a second encoding block using PHY data and MAC data, including at least one of i) using a number of padding bits in a PHY layer of the BFT unit such that the BFT unit consists of the PHY preamble, the first encoding block, and the second encoding block, and ii) generating a MAC protocol data unit (MPDU) having a length such that the BFT unit consists of the PHY preamble, the first encoding block, and the second encoding block. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069689 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION WITH NETWORK CONNECTION - A method and apparatus may be used for peer-to-peer communication. The method and apparatus may allow for network connectivity during the peer-to-peer communication session. The network connectivity may be provided via Scheduled and/or Unscheduled AP Connection times/periods. A station (STA) may be configured to negotiate access point (AP) Connection times/periods with a peer STA for a direct link which may be on a basic service set (BSS) channel or on a non-BSS channel. The STAs may communicate with the AP during the agreed AP Connection times/periods and return to the direct link for peer-to-peer communication. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069690 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR THE PROTECTION OF AD-HOC WIRELESS DEVICE OPERATION - In an embodiment of the invention, a system may include one or more wireless transmitters and a transportable transmitter having at least one processor and at least one storage device. The transportable transmitter may be configured to communicate with the one or more wireless transmitters, store operational data in the storage device, encapsulate the operational data into a message, and transmit the message to establish a geographic protected contour for the wireless transmitter. The wireless transportable transmitter may, after transmitting the message, transmit information from within the geographic protected contour to a receiver outside the geographic protected contour while receiving interference protection on the transmitting frequency within the geographic contour. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069691 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN NETWORK ENVIRONMENT WITH WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS BRIDGED USING RELAY PORTAL - A method of transmitting and receiving data in a network environment with a wired network and a wireless network bridged using a relay portal is provided. The method includes choosing one of a plurality of portals sharing a wired network and a wireless network as a relay portal, and transmitting a data packet to the wired network by setting an identifier of the relay portal as a prioritized receiver of the data packet. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110075642 | Configurable contention-based period in mmWave wireless systems - Embodiments of systems and methods for implementing a contention-based period with configurable parameters such as slot size, and minimum and maximum contention windows in a wireless network are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075643 | Apparatus and methods for universal services interface networking - Embodiments of systems and methods for Universal System Interface networking are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075644 | Device, method and system of dual-mode wireless communication - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of dual-mode wireless communication. Some embodiments include a wireless dual-mode transceiver capable of operating at first and second wireless communication modes during first and second time periods, respectively, wherein at the first communication mode the transceiver is capable of performing wireless-local-area-network communications over a wireless-local-area-network link, and wherein at the second communication mode the transceiver is capable of performing wireless video communications over a wireless video communication link. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075645 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A wireless communications system including a mobile station MS and base stations BS | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075646 | WIRELESS SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION - A system for wirelessly communicating from a high speed data modem using a first radio transceiver at a first location and a second radio transceiver at a second location preferably includes: (i) a housing (containing the data modem, the first radio transceiver, a radio processor, and a power supply) connected to an outdoor supporting structure, which supports a coaxial cable carrying an RF signal and AC power; (ii) a splitter to split the RF signal from the AC power, wherein the radio processor sends a digital signal to the first radio transceiver, which sends the signal to a first antenna, and wherein the signal is provided from the first antenna to a second antenna coupled to the second radio transceiver at a user device, wherein the system communicates the signal from the second antenna to the second radio transceiver and then to a second radio processor coupled to the user device; and wherein the DC power is provided to the data modem, the first radio transceiver, and the radio processor. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075647 | Method for Sending and Receiving Signaling in a Multiple Carrier Frequency Communication System - The present invention discloses a method for sending signaling and a method for receiving signaling in a multiple carrier frequency communication system. The method for sending signaling comprises: a base station sends control signaling on a primary carrier frequency corresponding to a terminal; the control signaling carries the indication information for indicating the part of control signaling which needs to be decoded of a secondary carrier frequency. The primary carrier frequency is a carrier frequency resource that the terminal must decode all the control signaling. The secondary carrier frequency is a carrier frequency resource on which the terminal can operate determined by the control signaling on the primary carrier frequency of the terminal, and whether the part of the control signaling of the secondary carrier frequency needs to be decoded is indicated by the control signaling of the primary carrier frequency. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110080897 | Communications resource management - A communications resource management system. The system includes a first module for prioritizing incoming messages and a second module for steering the messages in response to the prioritization by the first module. The first module assigns a message priority to each message based on a plurality of parameters such as mission mode, message type, and timeliness factor. The second module selects the most optimal communications resource for the message with the highest message priority by assigning a transmitter priority to each communications resource based on a plurality of factors such as estimated message arrival time, availability, and waveform compatibility. The message with the highest message priority is steered to the communications resource with the highest transmitter priority at the moment the message is sent. The first and second modules are each implemented using decision tree logic. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080898 | MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION STATION AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE-ACCESS BEAMFORMING IN A MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of a millimeter-wave communication station and method for multiple-access beamforming in a millimeter-wave network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an initiating station performs multiple-access beamforming with one or more responding stations by announcing a number of sector-sweep (SS) slots of a beamforming training (BFT) period and a number of SS frames of each SS slot. One or more SS frames are received from one or more of the responding stations within one of the SS slots of the BFT period. The initiating station transmits one or more SS feedback frames to the responding stations within the one SS slot to indicate an antenna configuration to the responding stations for communication with the initiating station. The responding stations transmit a limited number of SS frames per SS slot based on the number of SS frames announced by the initiating station and transmit any additional SS frames in a next SS slot of the beamforming training period. Each SS frame contains an indication to the initiating station of an antenna configuration for communication with the responding station, | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080899 | Method and System for Extending a Mobile Directory Number to a Landline-Based Voice-Over-Packet Network - A mobile station is coupled to a docking station that has a landline connection to a packet-switched network. In response, the mobile station's mobile directory number (MDN) is registered, via the packet-switched network, as being accessible via the docking station. As a result, when a call is placed to the MDN, the call is routed to the docking station via the packet-switched network. Communication devices coupled to the docking station may then be used to answer the call and/or participate in the call. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110080900 | Cellphone Wlan Access Point - An integrated cell phone/WLAN AP for providing cell phone functionality and cellular-based data connectivity to a WLAN enabled device. The cell phone AP comprises a WLAN radio, a WLAN AP coupled to the WLAN radio, a cellular radio coupled to the WLAN radio, for communicatively connecting to a cellular system having a cellular-based data service and passing data between the WLAN-enabled device and the cellular system, a cell phone function block coupled to the cellular radio for providing conventional cell phone functionality, and a power supply. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110085524 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK TECHNOLOGY AGGREGATION AND BROADCAST - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided for wireless communication in which wireless signal information is received through at least one wireless wide-area-network technology. In addition, data related to the wireless signal information is aggregated. Furthermore, the data is provided to a wireless node through a wireless wide-area-network technology different from the at least one wireless wide-area-network technology. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085525 | LEVERAGING A FEMTOCELL NETWORK FOR PREMISES MANAGEMENT OR MONITORING - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can leverage femtocell network infrastructure in order to facilitate premises management or monitoring. In particular, the architecture can leverage the local presence of a home nodeB (HNB) located at a premises associated with a subscriber in order to aggregate, process and/or distribute various state information that can be collected at the premises. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085526 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK BASED CONTROL OF A SET-TOP BOX DEVICE - An exemplary method includes establishing, by a mobile phone device, a wireless local area network communication channel between the mobile phone device and a set-top box device, providing, by the mobile phone device, a graphical user interface for display on a display screen of the mobile phone device, the graphical user interface configured to facilitate inputting of one or more control commands by a user of the mobile phone device, and controlling, by the mobile phone device, at least one operation of the set-top box device via the wireless local area network communication channel in accordance with the one or more control commands. Corresponding methods and systems are also described. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085527 | CALL DESTINATION NUMBER MAPPING METHODS, DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - A call destination mapping method executes on a mobile communication device. The mobile communication device requests a call action within the device for a first call destination number of a call destination, maps the first call destination number to a second call destination number in accordance with one or more call destination mapping rules stored on the device, and replaces the first call destination number in the call action with the second call destination number. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085528 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ACCESS POINT FUNCTION IN PORTABLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for providing an Access Point (AP) function of a portable terminal are provided. The apparatus includes an AP function unit for performing the AP function by using the portable terminal in an environment where an AP is not present, and a controller for, if there is a terminal to be connected to the AP, performing connection to the terminal directly without having to perform a process of inputting password information of the AP. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085529 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for Peer-to-Peer (P2P) connection using a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes detecting a P2P connection attempt of a new terminal not connected to P2P communication, during P2P communication with at least one terminal, determining whether the mobile communication terminal operates as a slave terminal or a group owner in the P2P connection, and when the mobile communication terminal operates as the slave terminal, transmitting a signal indicating that the P2P connection attempt of the new terminal is detected, to a terminal operating as the group owner in the P2P connection. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085530 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - A system and method for improving digital communication in a wireless mobile ad-hoc network. More specifically, the system includes one or more portable network devices operable to support the seamless operation of a self-initializing, self-healing, adaptive portable network. The portable network devices implement protocols that provide bandwidth management capabilities for use with radios, routers and other wireless network devices. Each portable network device includes at least one wireless transceiver, a processor and control software. The processor and control software are logically coupled to the wireless transceiver to facilitate digital communication via a plurality of communication channels with other network devices. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085531 | Intellegent delivery agent for short message distribution center - A message distribution center (MDC) and Intelligent Delivery Agent are implemented in a wireless Internet gateway interposed between content providers and a wireless carrier to subjectively examine and direct messages via SMTP based on desired rules (e.g., non-peak hours, paying subscribers only, etc.) using standard SMTP Gateway and other well-known protocols. The MDC includes an individual queue for each subscriber, and the provider is informed through conventional SMTP protocol messages that the short message has been accepted. If the carrier has specifically disallowed service for a particular MIN (e.g., in the case of churning), then the content provider is informed through an SMTP interchange that the recipient is invalid. An MDC provides a single mechanism for interacting with subscribers of multiple carriers, regardless of each carrier's underlying infrastructure. For the carrier, an MDC can protect their SS7 network by intelligently throttling messages and configuring message delivery parameters to be more network friendly. An MDC can receive outside a relevant wireless network recipient handset presence information. In the disclosed embodiment, a content provider communicates with the MDC using SMTP protocol messages, and the MDC communicates with wireless carriers preferably using RMI/SMPP techniques. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085532 | SPACE-TIME-POWER SCHEDULING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A technique is disclosed to schedule frame transmissions in a wireless local area network. The network includes a plurality of stations configured to communicate on the same frequency channel with a plurality of access points. A central controller examines the transmission characteristics between the various stations and access points and identifies frames that may be simultaneously transmitted by a subset of the access points to their intended stations. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085533 | Limited-Use Data Rates in a Wireless Local Area Network - A wireless access point supports data rates and advertises an indication of a minimum data rate for advertisement. Those of the supported data rates that are less than the minimum data rate for advertisement are reserved for limited use. A mobile station that requests to communicate with the wireless access point at one of the one or more supported data rates that are reserved for limited use is informed by the wireless access point how much time communications with the wireless access point at one or more of the one or more supported data rates reserved for limited use will be permitted. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085534 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the invention comprises a plurality of communication stations decentralized-autonomously construct a network without having a relation between a control station and a station to be controlled under a communication circumstance where a plurality of channels are prepared. In this case, each of the communication stations prepares a plurality of operation modes for activating transmitting and receiving operations, informs the own operation mode, and receives information regarding operation modes of peripheral stations to manage its operation mode of each of the peripheral stations. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085535 | REPORTING TERMINAL CAPABILITIES FOR SUPPORTING SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE - A method for delivering a short message service (SMS) message to an interworking wireless local area network user equipment (UE) begins by registering the UE with an Internet Protocol short message gateway (IP-SM-GW). A capability report is sent from the UE to the IP-SM-GW, the capability report including the capabilities of the UE. A SMS message is transmitted from a short message service center (SMSC) to the IP-SM-GW. The capabilities of the UE are evaluated at the IP-SM-GW to determine whether the UE can receive the SMS message, and the SMS message is delivered to the UE via the IP-SM-GW if the UE has the capabilities to receive the SMS message. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110085536 | BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL AND METHOD - A base station for communicating with a first user equipment terminal within a first system band and communicating with a second user equipment terminal within a second system band includes a first reference signal sequence generating unit configured to generate M types of reference signal sequences; a second reference signal sequence generating unit configured to generate N (N>M) types of reference signal sequences; a scheduling unit configured to allocate resource blocks to the first user equipment terminal and the second user equipment terminal; a signal multiplexing unit configured to multiplex the M types of reference signal sequences into the resource block for the first user equipment terminal and multiplex the N types of reference signal sequences into the resource block for the second user equipment terminal; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit signals including the M types of reference signal sequences and the N types of reference signal sequences. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110090877 | METHOD AND OPERATION FOR OPERATION BETWEEN WPAN AND WLAN FOR A NETWORK INTERFACE CARD - A wireless network adapter may provide an absence indicator to devices in a first network to alert such devices to a time period when the wireless network adapter is not available in the first network. The wireless network adapter may operate in multiple networks, wherein the multiple networks are time division multiplexed on a same transmission channel. The absence indicator may be provided as a Notice Of Absence (NOA) Information Element (IE). | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090878 | Wireless Device With Opportunistic Band Access - A wireless communication network system includes a plurality of nodes. Each node from the plurality of nodes includes a plurality of communication modules. Each module includes a modem and is configured to operate according to a communication protocol. Each communication module is configured to monitor its own communication parameter data and to cooperate with companion modules of a node by sharing communication parameter data, for instance through a coordination unit. Each communication module is further configured to allow, preferably according to a predefined set of rules, communication using a protocol of one communication module by utilizing a band associated with a companion module. The sharing of communication parameter data between modules may be continuous sharing or periodic sharing. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090879 | Method and Apparatus of Providing a Frame Structure for Supporting Different Operational Modes - An approach provides a frame structure for supporting different operational modes. A frame is generated for transmission over a network to a first device and a second device over a first bandwidth and a second bandwidth, respectively. The preamble provides synchronization for operation over the first bandwidth and the second bandwidth. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090880 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UTILIZING MIXED PROTOCOLS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for wireless communications using two different physical layers with a common medium access control layer. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090881 | GATEWAY DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway apparatus | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090882 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING RECORDING INFORMATION FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN MULTI BASE STATION MIMO SYSTEM - A PMI combination ratio (PCR) being used for generating a uplink precoding matrix W is transmitted by a base station to a mobile station. Using the PCR, a PMI maximizing transmission performance and PMI | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090883 | INFORMATION TERMINAL AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An information terminal includes: a wireless communication section configured to communicate with an outside; a main functional section configured to perform an information processing operation that includes data communication with the outside, performed using the wireless communication section; a monitoring section configured to detect a state of power supply for the main functional section; and a communication control section configured to cause the wireless communication section to transmit data, preliminarily stored in a memory, to the outside when the state detected by the monitoring section corresponds to a state in which the main functional section is not capable of performing data communication using the wireless communication section. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090884 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for transmission/reception of system information in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. An operation of a Base Station (BS) in a broadband wireless communication system includes determining whether to apply a system configuration corresponding to a previous value of a Secondary-Super Frame Header (S-SFH) change count changed according to update of system information and, when applying the system configuration corresponding to the previous value of the S-SFH change count, setting a parameter representing the applied system configuration to a first value and, when applying a system configuration corresponding to a current value of the S-SFH change count, setting the parameter to a second value, and transmitting a Primary-Super Frame Header (P-SFH) including the S-SFH change count and the parameter set to the first value or the second value. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090885 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CENTRALIZED AND COORDINATED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN A WLAN NETWORK - Method and apparatus for interference mitigation in wireless local area networks (such as WLANs). In one embodiment, a centralized interference measurement and mitigation method is disclosed. The method may involve spectral sensing, beamforming, MIMO, power control, MAC scheduling using a cross-layer approach, and/or broadcast channel precoding, employed towards performance enhancement of WLAN networks in presence of interference. In one variant, different actions at interference mitigation are selected based on the source of the interference (e.g., inter-network or intra-network). | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090886 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A PERSONAL NETWORK FOR PROVIDING A CPNS SERVICE - Provided is an apparatus and a method for establishing a Personal Network (PN) by interconnecting a gateway device and various Consumer Electronics (CE) devices through a simple process in order to enable the CEs to receive various services. The method includes performing a physical pairing with surrounding devices by using Near Field Communication (NFC); finding a gateway device, which relays a service from the server, from among the paired devices; selecting a scheme for establishing a PN with the gateway device; and sending a request for connection with a PN according to the selected scheme to the found gateway device. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090887 | Method and Apparatus for Scanning Existing Networks in TVWS - A method and an apparatus for scanning existing networks in TV White Space are disclosed. For scanning existing networks at a station to operate as an unlicensed device in a regulatory domain where a licensed device and the unlicensed device are permitted to operate, the method comprises: receiving a white space map (WSM) comprising information for available channels to be used for the unlicensed device to operate a wireless local area network (WLAN) operation and maximum transmission powers allowed for each of the available channels from an enabling station, wherein the enabling station is a station determining the available channels at its location using its own geographic location identification and a regulatory database access capability; and scanning the existing networks on the available channels identified within the received WSM. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090888 | Wirelessly Communicating Sensor Data to the Internet - A method of wirelessly communicating sensor data includes providing a wireless sensor module that includes a sensor and a transmitting circuit. The transmitting circuit is connected for wirelessly transmitting data derived from the sensor for receipt by a receiver connected to the internet for providing information derived from said sensor on the internet. The method also includes using said sensor and wirelessly transmitting data derived from the sensor. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090889 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station transmits a physical address given to the mobile station to a connection device via a base station when subscribing to a communication system. The connection device previously stores the physical address given to the mobile station and an IP address in a table of the connection device in association with each other, searches the table for the IP address corresponding to the physical address transmitted from the mobile station from the address storage section, generates a header compression rule in accordance with the IP address searched for, and transmits the generated header compression rule to the mobile station via the base station. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090890 | METHOD OF CHANNEL SCANNING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of scanning channels of a white space zone in a wireless local area network is provided. A response frame includes a white space map including information about whether each white space channel in the white space zone is occupied by an incumbent user. Channels of the white space zone are scanned based on the white space map. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090891 | MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND RELATED METHOD OF OPERATION AND NETWORK ARRANGEMENT - A microwave radio communications device is configured to communicate with a selected one of at least first and second base stations of respective first and second cells, the first cell having a greater area of coverage than the second cell. The device is configured to retrieve data from a BSID sent from each base station and serving to discriminate between signals from the said first and second base stations indicating the relative cell coverage. Thereby the device achieves selective registration to one of the base stations responsive to the said discrimination. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110090892 | BONDED INTERCONNECTION OF LOCAL NETWORKS - Apparatus and methods relating to bonded interconnection of local communication networks are disclosed. Bonded communication links, including multiple constituent links that have been bonded together, are terminated to enable communications over the bonded links using bandwidth available on the constituent links. A cross-connect function determines whether received communication traffic is to be forwarded to one or more of a local communication network and the terminated bonded links. The received communication traffic is forwarded in accordance with the determination. The local communication networks may include ring networks, linear networks, or both. The bonded links and links between nodes in a local communication network are bonded DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) links in some embodiments. Bonding of DSL links in this manner can be used, for instance, to extend the reach of DSL service without sacrificing bandwidth. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110096756 | METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND TRANSCEIVING DEVICE - The invention refers to wireless local area networks (WLAN) consisting of a multitude of transceivers capable of establishing communication with one another (i.e. operating in a peer-to-peer mode) under the control of network coordinator (the so-called “ad hoc” networks). Implies the assignment of the role of the temporary coordinator to a transceiver from among the plurality of transceivers, switching-over other transceivers into the mode of a network client, orientation of antenna beam of a transceiver (switched-over into the client mode) equipped with a direction-agile antenna in the direction of the temporary coordinator of the network and transmission of information to an addressee by a client-transceiver of this network that has got the permission to transmit from the temporary coordinator. A WLAN comprises a multitude of transceivers, one of which serves as a temporary coordinator for said network and at least two of which have a direction-agile antenna and means for the operation of said antenna in the omnidirectional mode, in the directional scanning mode or in the stationary directional mode, an identification means responsive to transmission of a signal, including the transmission of a synchronization signal or identification signal intended for orienting said antenna in the direction of said signal being transmitted. The invention improves the quality and reliability of communication for WLAN users (including mobile users) thus increasing the data transfer rate. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096757 | Method for radio communication in a wireless local area network and transceiving device - Method for radio communication in a wireless local area network and transceiving device refers to wireless local area networks (WLAN) consisting of a multitude of transceiving devices of users ( | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096758 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING THROUGHPUT OF A WLAN MODULE COLLOCATED WITH A BT SLAVE MODULE, AND ASSOCIATED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MODULE - A method for enhancing throughput of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) module collocated with a Bluetooth (BT) slave module includes: detecting whether timing critical data of the BT slave module exists; and allowing the WLAN module to perform wireless communication when it is detected that no timing critical data of the BT slave module exists. An associated wireless communication apparatus includes: a BT slave module; a WLAN module collocated with the BT slave module; and a controller arranged to control operations of the BT slave module and the WLAN module, wherein the controller detects whether timing critical data of the BT slave module exists, and allows the WLAN module to perform wireless communication when it is detected that no timing critical data of the BT slave module exists. An associated wireless communication module such as the BT slave module is further provided. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096759 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING PERSONALIZED INTERACTION - A system and method for implementing an interactive session between a display equipment and a handheld electronic device is provided. The system comprises a display screen operable to display data/information, a telecommunication network coupled with local area network and world wide web, a smart-IB box capable of sending and receiving data/information, a system server capable of interpreting received messages from Smart-IB and user's handheld communication device, a handheld communication device. The method comprises the steps of detecting a request by a handheld communication device, initiating a user preferred schedule for pushing data/information in response to the request, determining the installation of enabling means to access various options available through enhanced enabling means, receiving and processing the request so made, sorting the request for scheduled data/information, relaying and displaying the scheduled data/information in accordance with preferred schedule. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096760 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION POWER IN WLAN SYSTEM - A transmit power control method of a first station in a wireless LAN (WLAN) system includes: receiving path loss information from an (access point) AP, the path loss information containing a maximum value among path losses between the AP and at least one or more stations included in the WLAN system; controlling a transmit power by using the path loss information; and transmitting a frame according to the controlled transmit power. In said controlling the transmit power by using the path loss information, the transmit power is controlled by using a path loss obtained by adding the maximum value and a path loss between the first station and the AP or by using the path loss between the first station and the AP. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096761 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - There are provided a communication device, a base station, a communication system, and a communication method that make it possible to yield a diversity effect by cooperative relay without involvement of disproportionateness in data received by an eNB even when one of parties has unsuccessfully exchanged data. After received an ACK signal from a repeater | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096762 | CLOUD VOIP SYSTEM WITH BYPASS FOR IP MEDIA - The cloud computing VoIP system includes a software as a service (SaaS) site and one or more additional sites. The SaaS site includes a gateway and a call manager and is coupled for communication across an IP network and the PSTN. The call manager includes a media monitoring module, a bypass module, a PSTN control module and a GUI module. The SaaS site handles and controls voice and video calls over the IP network and the PSTN for endpoints at the one or more additional sites. In another embodiment, the cloud computing VoIP system is also coupled to a cellular network and the endpoints include an associated cellular phone. The cloud computing VoIP system also includes a method for falling back to a secondary network, namely the cellular network, when there is insufficient quality on a primary network. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096763 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE PROVIDING PATTERN/FREQUENCY CONTROL FEATURES AND RELATED METHODS - A mobile wireless communications device may include a portable housing, a wireless transceiver carried by the portable housing, and a plurality of antennas also carried by the portable housing. Each antenna may have a different gain pattern at a different respective operating frequency, and the antennas may have different shapes to define different gain patterns at a given operating frequency. The mobile wireless communications device may further include a frequency/pattern diversity controller for controlling the wireless transceiver to preferentially operate with the plurality of antennas. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110096764 | PORTABLE TERMINAL FOR ACQUIRING PRODUCT DATA - A portable terminal for the acquisition of product data, for example in a point of sale or in a collection, distribution and/or storage point, includes a coded information reader, a user interface, and an interface for the logical connection with an external control station. Advantageously, the terminal also includes an interface for the wireless connection with cellular devices and/or telephones and/or PDAs and at least one internal management unit for the activation of the interface. The interface allows establishing a wireless connection with a single pre-identified cellular device and/or telephone and/or PDA, i.e., recognized following a recognition procedure. The terminal is then configured as a peripheral device of the pre-identified cellular device. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110103353 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A RECEIVER - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises identifying at least one receiver, selecting said at least one receiver by moving an apparatus according to at least one predetermined movement and sending data to said selected at least one receiver. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103354 | DECT Base and DECT Terminal - A digital enhanced cordless telecommunications (DECT) base and a DECT terminal are disclosed. The DECT base includes a housing, a central processing unit (CPU), and a DECT module. The DECT base further includes a high-speed packet access (HSPA) interface module, set inside the housing and connected to the CPU, where the CPU is connected to the DECT module and the HSPA interface module is configured to provide an HSPA card with interfaces to implement wireless communications between the base and the network over the HSPA protocol. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103355 | PACKET GROUPING FOR A CO-EXISTING WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a host processor and a plurality of co-existing wireless technology transceivers coupled to the host processor. The plurality of co-existing wireless technology transceivers share a communication medium using time-multiplexing. A throughput for data transmissions by the plurality of co-existing wireless technology transceivers is based on an algorithm that determines a grouping option for data packets to be transmitted by one of the co-existing wireless technology transceivers, the grouping option providing a highest throughput for a predetermined baseband PHY rate without exceeding a predetermined maximum grouping delay. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103356 | BACK-CHANNELED PACKETED DATA - Consistent with one aspect, location-based mobile-terminal data is processed within or involving the wireless portion of such communication networks, and methods and apparatuses process the location-based mobile-terminal data based on information provided from outside the relationship of the network operator and the user. The location-based mobile-terminal data is extracted and processed by a node in the wireless portion of the communication network based on a specified set of rules. Other sources of location-based information originate from within the communication network itself including, but not limited to, location information regarding the nodes themselves. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103357 | BACK-CHANNELED PACKETED DATA - The disclosure is directed to mobile terminals, their circuits, components, CPU-programming instructions and methods of implementing the mobile terminals so that they behave in accordance with one or more of the above-characterized manners. For example, the mobile terminal used in such a wireless network includes a memory circuit that stores: on behalf of an operator for the communication network, user identity information relating to wireless network subscriber data useful for providing network access; and on behalf of a third party, an executable set of communication rules relevant to a geographic region of service provided by the communication network. The mobile terminal also includes a mobile-terminal processor node which is configured in response to a communication from the wireless-technology equipment, indicating that the current location data for the mobile terminal permits the mobile terminal to alter normal rights for communicating with the user over the network while the mobile terminal is in the geographic region. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103358 | BACK-CHANNELED PACKETED DATA - The disclosure concerns a communication network having a wireless network that provides access of back channel data to third parties. A processor node in the wireless network uses and processes location-based mobile-terminal data as geographically-tagged information sources for processing and analysis by third parties. In some configurations, the processor node receives feedback from the third parties, and/or input from other resources and databases, for adaptively re-processing the data previously provided to the third parties. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103359 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VIDEO COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a method for changing a communication network for video communication, the method including performing, by a User Equipment (UE), video communication through a mobile communication network; searching for whether there is a WLAN currently accessible by the UE at every predetermined interval; displaying the accessible WLAN if one is found; and when the displayed WLAN is selected by a user, changing a communication network for the video communication to perform the video communication through the selected WLAN. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103360 | LOCATION TRACKING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS DEVICE USING WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - Provided are real time location tracking system and method of a wireless device using a wireless LAN AP, the system and method include measuring intensities of APs that are currently detected by the wireless device of which location is to be estimated, collecting ADD, constructing RDLE including locations, a list of APs corresponding to the locations, signal intensities of the APs, and reliabilities of the APs, storing the RDLE, comparing the RDLE with the ADD, and estimating the location of the wireless device, which realizes seamless location tracking technology indoors and outdoors, thereby providing a variety of location tracking services. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103361 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING MODES METHOD AND APPARATUS - A portable electronic device is disclosed. The portable electronic device includes a wireless transceiver, a processor coupled to the wireless transceiver, a memory coupled to the processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor. The program provides automatic transitioning between a wireless infrastructure communication mode to an ad-hoc communication mode. The infrastructure mode is used when a request from a mobile device is received to access a communications network. The ad-hoc mode is used when a request from the mobile device is received to access resources on the portable electronic device. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103362 | TRANSMISSION FORMAT SELECTION FOR OPTIMIZING TRANSMISSION OF DELAY SENSITIVE TRAFFIC - A method, scheduler, and processor program product for scheduling transmission of packets from a base station to a mobile station. A data rate control index is received from a mobile station. A transmission format is selected using the received data rate control index. The selected transmission format uses a payload size that is smaller than a largest compatible payload size for another transmission format corresponding to the received data rate control index and that is smaller than a total size of packets waiting to be transmitted. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110103363 | ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL BASED ON THE EXCHANGE OF CHARACTERISTICS - A first plurality of characteristics are received from a first client device relating to transmissions received by the first client device from both an access point and a second client device. A second plurality of characteristics are received from the second client device relating to transmissions received by the second client device from both the access point and the first client device. The first plurality of characteristics and the second plurality of characteristics are both assessed. Based on the assessment, a least one of a plurality of customized power levels is selected for transmissions by the access point to the first client device and the second client device. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110110342 | Subcarrier permutation to achieve high frequency diversity of OFDMA systems - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of improving subcarrier permutation to achieve high frequency diversity of OFDMA systems in wireless networks, comprising introducing different tone selections for different symbols, such that if a channel has only a few tones in each symbol of a resource unit it can still have sufficient frequency diversity. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110343 | ENHANCING FRAGMENTATION AND DEFRAGMENTATION PROCEDURES IN BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A preemption system enables successful transmission of multiple service data units (SDUs) across a wireless interface. The preemption system addresses out-of-order transmissions of fragments of SDUs, such that the receiver is able to process each successfully. The preemption system enables a higher-priority SDU to simultaneously be transmitted with a lower-priority SDU, so that delays in processing the lower-priority SDU does not negatively affect processing of the higher-priority SDU. The preemption system also addresses non-automatic repeat request medium access controller (non-ARQ MAC) connections that only use hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), in which the HARQ transmission may cause out-of-order delivery of SDU fragments. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110344 | Communication System for Voice-Over Internet Protocol Using License-Free Frequencies and a Mobile Telephone - In a communication system comprising—at least one mobile telephone ( | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110345 | MESSAGE ROUTING IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - Disclosed are methods and apparatuses related to the routing of communications in a wireless mesh network so as to provide improved range, reliability and/or throughput. At least some aspects of the techniques and apparatuses can be implemented in an intermediary node (relay node) on a wireless mesh network. The relay node and other devices on the wireless network may implement a form of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication, such as multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO). The devices on the network can communicate in accordance with IEEE standard 802.11. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110346 | SWITCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A switching method and apparatus in a broadband wireless communication system is provided. A method of an Advanced Base Station (ABS) for a Multicast Broadcast Service (MBS) in the broadband wireless communication system includes transmitting to an Advanced Mobile Station (AMS) a message including identification information for a primary carrier that provides the MBS among multiple carriers supported by the ABS, switching to the primary carrier with respect to the AMS, and transmitting MBS data through the primary carrier. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110347 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING CELLS IN AN OVERLAY NETWORK INCLUDING MACRO CELLS AND HOME CELLS - A method and system for operating cells in a network where macro cells and home cells coexist are provided. The method includes determining a first set of neighbor macro Base Stations (BSs) located within a predefined reference distance from a new macro BS to be newly installed, determining a second set of neighbor macro BSs having a cell region overlapping a region of a serving cell served by the new macro BS, detecting at least one sector including a contact with the cell region of the new macro BS within a cell region of each of the neighbor macro BSs in the second set, determining a neighbor cell set including the detected at least one sector, generating an initial Neighbor Relation Table (NRT) by mapping information about each of neighbor cells included in the neighbor cell set, IDentifiers (IDs) of neighbor macro BSs serving the neighbor cells, and a Physical Resource Cell IDentifier (PCID) allocated to each of the neighbor macro BSs, and providing the initial NRT to the new macro BS as neighbor BS information. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110348 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PLCP FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) frame in a Very High Throughput (VHT) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system includes generating a MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) to be transmitted to a destination station (STA), generating a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) by adding a PLCP header, including an L-SIG field containing control information for a legacy STA and a VHT-SIG field containing control information for a VHT STA, to the MPDU, and transmitting the PPDU to the destination STA. A constellation applied to some of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex (OFDM) symbols of the VHT-SIG field is obtained by rotating a constellation applied to an OFDM symbol of the L-SIG field. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110349 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT OPERATION AND CAPABILITY SIGNALING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus provide signaling for very high throughput (VHT) operation in VHT wireless local area networks (WLANs). An access point (AP) may control the operation of VHT wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) in a basic service set (BSS) by sending VHT operation or capabilities information. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110350 | Bearer Processing Method - The present invention provides bearer processing methods, in one bearer processing method, the serving gateway receives a bearer processing message from a mobility management unit, wherein the bearer processing message carries a message source mark for identifying a sending entity of the bearer processing message; the serving gateway acquires the message source mark in the bearer processing message, and judges the sending entity of the bearer processing message according to the message source mark, and performs the bearer processing according to the result of the judgment. In accordance with the present invention, it is possible for the serving gateway to distinguish the sending entity of a message, so as to perform the subsequent related bearer processing. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110351 | CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD FOR VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT (VHT) WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND STATION SUPPORTING THE CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD - According to an embodiment of the present invention, a channel access method in a very high throughput (VHT) system using a bonding channel consisting of a plurality of subchannels is provided. Wherein the Method comprises: transmitting a request to send (RTS) frame by one source station or each of a plurality of source stations to a destination station through any subchannel selected from the plurality of subchannels; and in response to the received RTS frame, transmitting a clear to send (CTS) frame by the destination station to one source station selected from the plurality of source stations through the bonding channel. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110352 | Method and System For Redundancy-Based Decoding of Voice Content in a Wireless LAN System - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of voice content in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system are provided. A WLAN receiver may determine whether a decoded portion of a received packet comprises voice content and may select a redundancy-based decoder to decode a remaining portion of the packet when voice content is detected. The redundancy-based decoder may be a Viterbi decoder. The redundancy-based decoder may be selected to decode a determined number of subsequent packets or to decode subsequent packets for a determined amount of time. After decoding the remaining portion of the packet and any subsequent packets, the WLAN receiver may select a standard Viterbi decoder to decode additional received packets. The WLAN receiver may generate at least one signal to select the redundancy-based decoder and the standard Viterbi decoder. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110353 | Multiple input multiple output wireless local area network communications - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transmitter includes a MAC module, a PLCP module, and a PMD module. The Medium Access Control (MAC) module is operably coupled to convert a MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) into a MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) in accordance with a WLAN protocol. The Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) Module is operably coupled to convert the MPDU into a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) in accordance with the WLAN protocol. The Physical Medium Dependent (PMD) module is operably coupled to convert the PPDU into a plurality of radio frequency (RF) signals in accordance with one of a plurality of operating modes of the WLAN protocol, wherein the plurality of operating modes includes multiple input and multiple output combinations. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110354 | NODE, METHOD, AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH-RATE ACCESS TO PUBLIC NETWORK FROM MOBILE NETWORK - The present invention discloses a node, method and system for high-rate access to a public network from a mobile network, where an enhanced GPRS Support Node (eGSN) is placed in a communications system and transmits information between a NodeB and the public network via a public network interface for communications between the eGSN and the public network and a NodeB interface for communications between the eGSN and the NodeB. By reducing the number of intermediate network elements for the access of a UE to the public network, the network structure is flattened. Thereby, the transmission delay is reduced and the transmission efficiency of the network is effectively increased. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110116482 | CENTRALIZED BROADBAND GATEWAY FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a centralized broadband gateway for a wireless communication system, including: a router/gateway module which receives encoded compressed audio/video (A/V) streams and distributes the encoded compressed audio/video A/V streams; multiple audio/video decoders which receive the encoded compressed A/V streams from the a router/gateway module, decode the encoded compressed A/V streams, and output uncompressed A/V streams; and an integrated Wireless High Definition Multimedia Interface (WHDMI) which receives the uncompressed A/V streams from the multiple audio/video decoders and transmits the uncompressed A/V streams wirelessly to media devices, without deploying individual media processors at each media device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116483 | TCP DATA THROUGHOUT ENHANCEMENT FOR WLAN CLIENTS ON A WIRELESS LAN ROUTER - A server may be bypassed in the context of retransmitting data packets, when such data packets are missing or lost due to interference or some other network error. Decreased throughput and other disadvantages associated with data packet retransmission are avoided by negating the need to transmit retransmission request packets to the server and retransmitting a missing/lost data packet from the server. Instead, retransmission request packets may be sent to a router, and the router may respond by directly retransmitting the missing/lost data packet to the client, where prior to retransmitting the missing/lost data packet, it is determined whether the data packet is a Transport Control Protocol or User Datagram Protocol packet, and proceeding with the retransmitting only if the data packets is a Transport Control Protocol packet. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116484 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION OVER A WHITE SPACE CHANNEL WITHOUT CAUSING INTERFERENCE - A method and an apparatus for providing communication over a white space channel without causing interference are disclosed. The method generates a first request to identify at least one available white space channel, and applies a spreading sequence to the first request to generate a second request. The method applies a modulation to the second request to generate a third request in the time domain, and transmits the third request via a wireless communication to at least one other user. Alternatively, the method receives a request wirelessly, wherein the request comprises a request for availability of at least one white space channel, and applies a demodulation on the request to generate a demodulated request. The method applies a spreading sequence on the demodulated request to generate a de-spread request, and processes the de-spread request by determining availability of at least one white space channel. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116485 | METHODS FOR SUPERFRAME/FRAME OVERHEAD REDUCTION WITHIN OFDMA-BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for tessellating a subframe using maximal-sized bricks. A brick bandwidth and a brick time duration are computed based on the heights and widths of the bursts in the subframe. Bursts within the brick-tessellated subframe are referenced using a brick-based coordinate system in which burst location and size are specified in units of bricks. A method for assembling and disassembling brick-based superframes is also disclosed. Bricked-based superframes are assembled and disassembled using a Superframe Preamble, a Superframe Control Header (SFCH), a Superframe Downlink Map (SDL-MAP), a Superframe Uplink MAP (SUL-MAP) and brick-structured downlink and uplink frames. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116486 | RADIATION IMAGING SYSTEM, METHOD FOR RADIATION IMAGING SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A radiation imaging system comprises: a radiation imaging apparatus; an entry apparatus which is associated with a radiation generator; wherein the entry apparatus is configured, in response to a request received from the radiation imaging apparatus via a close proximity wireless communication connection, to send information to the radiation imaging apparatus via the close proximity wireless communication connection for connecting the radiation imaging apparatus to a wireless LAN; wherein the close proximity wireless communication connection has a communication range shorter than that of a wireless LAN; and a control unit for controlling the radiation generator and the radiation imaging apparatus, which has connected to the wireless LAN based on the information which has been sent from the entry apparatus via the close proximity wireless communication connection. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116487 | CONTROL SIGNALING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Disclosed herein are methods, apparatus, and systems related to control and management signaling. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may exchange control and/or management signaling with a second WTRU via a wireless network. The wireless network may be based on, for example, a technology such as Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11ac or IEEE 802.11ad. The control and/or management signaling may relate to features such as power control, time and/or frequency synchronization, resource allocation, Channel State Information (CSI) feedback, beamforming, link adaptation, multi-channel transmission, Multi-User Multiple Input and Multiple Output (MU-MIMO), WTRU group assignments, or other features. The control and/or management signaling may be performed using Medium Access Control (MAC) frames, and/or other messages. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MANAGEMENT ACTIONS FOR VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A methods and apparatus may be used in Very High Throughput (VHT) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) management actions. Management action frames such as VHT Action frames may be used to implement VHT features in WLANs. Extensions to 802.11 Action frames may be used to support VHT features and provide backward compatibility. VHT Management Actions may be supported with VHT Action frames and VHT extensions to 802.11 Action frames in various categories such as Direct Link Setup (DLS), Public, Spectrum Management and high throughput (HT). An access point (AP) or a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may indicate VHT capability by way of signaling. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110116489 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VHT FREQUENCY REUSE FOR WLANS - An apparatus and method provides very high throughput (VHT) wireless local area network (WLAN) frequency reuse information reports and adjusts operation parameters based on the frequency reuse information reports. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110122853 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - A radio communication device C | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122854 | Dual transmission for communication networks - A dual transmission network may use a hybrid architecture where two types of links, such as wireless and fixed, function in a parallel manner for communicating control information and data. In at least one example embodiment, an apparatus includes at least two local transceivers and a controller. The controller is connected to control the two local transceivers and configured to establish parallel first and second communication links with a remote terminal via at least one of the local transceivers. The first communication link uses a first physical layer communication protocol and the second communication link uses a second physical layer communication protocol. The second physical layer communication protocol may be different from the first physical layer communication protocol or the first and second transceivers may be configured to operate on different frequencies. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122855 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION OVER A WHITE SPACE CHANNEL WITHOUT CAUSING INTERFERENCE TO DIGITAL TELEVISION SYSTEMS - A method and an apparatus for determining an availability of at least one space channel are disclosed. For example, the method generates a first request to identify at least one available white space channel, and encodes the first request to obtain a second request, wherein the second request comprises one or more bursts of data, wherein each of said bursts of data has a duration less than or equal to a pre-determined maximum signal duration that is based on one or more error tolerance standards associated with a digital television receiver. The method then transmits the second request wirelessly to other devices to solicit a response as to the availability of at least one space channel. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122856 | AUTONOMOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USE - An autonomous wireless system is disclosed. The system comprises a plurality of devices. Each of the plurality of devices includes a wireless interface. At least two devices directly communicate with each other through a direct link between the wireless interfaces of the at least two devices. Methods and apparatus for two or more devices equipped with wireless local area network (WLAN) interface to communicate and exchange selected information are disclosed. Accordingly, a system and method in accordance with the present invention enables a handheld, laptop, smart phone or the like, which is equipped with a WLAN interface, to communicate and exchange business contact, sales brochures, event announcements, presentation materials, alert messages, etc., to other devices that include a WLAN interface. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122857 | AUTONOMOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USE - An autonomous wireless system is disclosed. The system comprises a plurality of devices. Each of the plurality of devices includes a wireless interface. At least two devices directly communicate with each other through a direct link between the wireless interfaces of the at least two devices. Methods and apparatus for two or more devices equipped with wireless local area network (WLAN) interface to communicate and exchange selected information are disclosed. Accordingly, a system and method in accordance with the present invention enables a handheld, laptop, smart phone or the like, which is equipped with a WLAN interface, to communicate and exchange business contact, sales brochures, event announcements, presentation materials, alert messages, etc., to other devices that include a WLAN interface. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122858 | WIRELESS TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER AND MOBILE OBJECT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A concise and low cost mobile object management system which is capable of monitoring a state of a mobile object via a wireless transmitter-receiver having a wireless LAN function is provided. The mobile object management system includes a sensor for acquiring various information of a mobile object, a clock information acquisition unit, a memory unit for storing data, and a wireless LAN transmitter-receiver unit, each controlled by a Central Processing Unit, and transmits wirelessly a state of a measured object on the mobile object, location information, and clock information. By adopting a wireless LAN for the wireless transmitting and receiving function, it is possible to implement a concise and low cost system which is highly versatile and capable of utilizing a most common infrastructure. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122859 | Method for Sending a Paging Message - The present invention discloses a method for sending a paging message applied to a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access system, wherein an anchoring paging controller sends the paging message only to base stations meeting mobility restrictive conditions, or to base stations which belong to a paging group to which a terminal to be paged belongs and meet the mobility restrictive conditions; and the paging message is a paging starting message or a paging stopping message. Using the method in accordance with the present invention, the paging message can be prevented from sending to the base stations which do not meet the restrictive conditions of the terminal, thus reducing the consumption of the system resources. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110128943 | WiFi and WiMAX Internetworking - In accordance with some embodiments, a network may enable WiFi and WiMAX internetworking, such that a mobile node may move between the networks. This may be facilitated by assigning the same home agent and home address to a mobile node in both networks during authentication. In one embodiment, the assignment may be done by a server, such as an authentication, authorization, accounting server. A wireless gateway may control access by mobile nodes to the Internet. For example, the wireless gateway may intercept messages from a mobile node that wishes to access an Internet site and the wireless gateway can check whether the node is authorized to access the Internet. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128944 | FEMTO ACCESS POINT AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A femto access point (FAP) for use in a network system and a communication method for the femto access point are provided. A mobile station is wirelessly connected to the FAP. The FAP comprises a storage unit, a sniffer unit, and a process unit. The sniffer unit sniffs a packet of the mobile station. The process unit retrieves an identity (ID) code of the mobile station from the packet and stores the ID code into the storage unit. The process unit further establishes an uplink local area network (LAN) service flow and a downlink LAN service flow of the mobile station. The uplink LAN service flow and the downlink LAN service flow established by the FAP and the mobile station are used to transfer packets within the LAN. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128945 | ANCHOR GATEWAY, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF - An anchor gateway, a communication method and a tangible machine-readable medium are provided. The anchor gateway is for use in a WiMAX network comprising an authentication gateway and a serving base station (BS). After a mobile station (MS) enters the WiMAX network, the anchor gateway will request the authentication gateway and the serving BS according to an identification of the MS to respectively provide authentication key context and medium access control context. Thereby, the network latency, which is made by the MS in handover, will be reduced effectively. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128946 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio communication device which includes a communication unit that communicates with a connected radio communication device operating as a master unit, and a control unit that, when a prescribed inquiry packet sent from another radio communication device is received by the communication unit, controls the communication unit to send a response packet containing service information indicating a service with which the radio communication device is compatible to said another radio communication device. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128947 | Method and Apparatus for Sounding Multiple Stations - A plurality of stations to provide sounding feedback in response to a training signal sequence is determined, and a communication frame is generated that includes i) an indication of a request for the plurality of stations to provide sounding feedback corresponding to the training signal sequence, and ii) information indicative of when each of the plurality of stations should transmit sounding feedback, and iii) sounding feedback parameters. The communication frame is transmitted along with the training sequence. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128948 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA - Apparatus and method for random access control in a directional communication system is disclosed. The method includes omni-directionally transmitting start time and duration information associated with data to be transmitted, the duration information indicating a duration of transmission of the data to be transmitted to a target station within a random access period; and directionally transmitting, subsequent to the omni-transmitting, the data to the target station beginning at the start time. Data collision caused by overlapped antenna beams linking remote stations can be prevented and communication can be reliably performed. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128949 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system is disclosed. This system includes a wireless base station placed at an upper section of a communicating zone in a mobile unit such as an aircraft, multiple seat-rows arranged along a longitudinal direction in the communicating zone, and wireless terminals placed at each one of seats of the seat rows. Radio communication is done between the wireless base station and the wireless terminals. The wireless base station is placed on the ceiling at the forefront or at the extreme end of the communicating zone relative to the longitudinal direction of the seat rows. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110134894 | INVERSE MULTIPLEXING OVER 802.11 WIRELESS INTERFACES - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, a method and apparatus are disclosed that includes aspects of providing one or more data packets at a media access control-service access point of a transmitting device; dividing the one or more data packets into two or more streams of data packets, wherein the two or more streams of data packets are arranged for transmission on a separate wireless interface of the transmitting device; and transmitting the two or more streams of data packets over a wireless medium via their separate wireless interfaces. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134895 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION TERMINAL, RECEPTION TERMINAL, AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - The transmission terminal in a wireless communication system includes: a communication unit for intermittently transmitting a radio signal; a transmission-side beacon reception unit; a beacon analysis unit for analyzing the received beacon signal; and a transmission output level change unit for estimating an emission time period of a beacon signal to be received by the transmission-side beacon reception unit on the basis of the beacon period information and the beacon reception time information, thereby obtaining an estimated emission time period; wherein the transmission output level change unit instructs the transmission-side communication unit to transmit the radio signal having a raised transmission output level during at least the estimated emission time period, the raised transmission output level being higher than a transmission output level during a time period other than at least the estimated emission time period. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134896 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR UPGRADING AN AIRLINK IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Embodiments of systems and methods for upgrading an airlink in wireless system are described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134897 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTIMEDIA EMERGENCY ACCESS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for distributing multimedia emergency contact information using an access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) is disclosed. The access point is configured to retrieve service contact information from a lookup table. The method includes receiving a first generic advertisement service (GAS) query from a WLAN device. The first GAS query includes a uniform resource name (URN) identifying at least one of the services. The method includes retrieving contact information for the at least one of the services identified in the first GAS query. The contact information includes a uniform resource identifier (URI). The URI is configured to include session initiation protocol (SIP) URIs, and telephone URIs. The method includes transmitting a GAS query response to the WLAN device. The GAS query response includes the contact information for the at least one of the services identified in the first GAS query. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134898 | Secure Provisioning Methods And Apparatus For Mobile Communication Devices Operating In Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANS) - A wireless local area network (WLAN) includes a plurality of wireless access points (APs) which provide communications for a plurality of mobile communication devices. One of the APs is designated as a provisioning AP and is set to have a substantially smaller RF coverage area than RF coverage areas of the other APs. A mobile device is positioned within the provisioning RF coverage region and associates with the provisioning AP with use of a provisioning service set identifier, for establishing layer-2 communications with the WLAN, and for accessing and operating in a provisioning virtual local area network (VLAN) of the WLAN. While the mobile device is associated with the provisioning AP and operating in the provisioning VLAN, the mobile device receives via the provisioning AP an IP address which is assigned to the mobile device, for establishing layer-3 communications with the WLAN. After the layer-3 communications are established, the mobile device participates in an authentication procedure via the provisioning AP with a provisioning server of the provisioning VLAN. After positive authentication of the mobile device using the authentication procedure, the mobile device participates in a provisioning procedure with the provisioning server via the provisioning AP, for receiving provisioning information from the WLAN for programming in the mobile device. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134899 | ENABLING PHASE TRACKING FOR A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device for enabling phase tracking is described. The communication device includes a processor and instructions stored in memory. The communication device generates a plurality of pilot symbols. The pilot symbols conform to a rank-deficient pilot mapping matrix. The communication device also transmits the plurality of pilot symbols. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134900 | Frame Padding For Wireless Communications - Systems and techniques relating to wireless communications are described. A described technique includes obtaining data for a transmission to a wireless communication device(s), including one or more medium access control (MAC) data units that encapsulate data in a physical (PHY) frame, determining a length of a MAC layer pad based on a number of symbols associated with the PHY frame, including, in response to the length of the MAC layer pad being greater than zero, the MAC layer pad in the PHY frame after the one or more MAC data units, determining a length of a PHY layer pad based on remaining available bits in the PHY frame, including, in response to the length of the PHY layer pad being greater than zero, the PHY layer pad in the frame after the MAC layer pad, and transmitting the PHY frame to the wireless communication device(s). | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110142014 | REMOTE WIRELESS SERVICE INVOCATION WITH EFFICIENT POWER USE ON TARGET WIRELESS DEVICE - A protocol for operation of wireless devices enables a wireless device to remotely and securely invoke a service on a target wireless device without requiring the user of the target wireless device to take any action and without requiring the target wireless device to use power unnecessarily. Mutual authentication is executed while the target wireless device remains in a low power discoverable mode. The discoverable mode includes discovery windows separated by inactive windows when the radio of the target wireless device is powered down. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142015 | REGISTERING WITH SIP SERVERS FOR IMS USING A FULLY QUALIFIED DOMAIN NAME - A fully qualified domain name may be used to identify a session initiation protocol server with which a client device may connect to IMS services in a network. In one implementation, a network device may receive a request to register a client device for IMS services. The network device may determine a fully qualified domain name corresponding to one or more SIP servers that process SIP signaling packets for the client device and transmit a message initiating resolution of the fully qualified domain name into a plurality of IP addresses. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142016 | AD HOC NETWORKING BASED ON CONTENT AND LOCATION - Methods, program products, and systems for ad hoc networking based on content and location are described. A user of a mobile device can identify another user using another mobile device who is close by, if both users have requested to participate in networking. Common interests and experiences of two or more users located close to each other can be identified from content, including automatically created usage data of the mobile devices. Usage data of a mobile device can be created based on activities performed on the mobile device (e.g., songs downloaded), a trajectory of the mobile device (e.g., places traveled), or other public data available from the mobile device (e.g., pictures shared). Each of the users can be notified that another user having the common interests and experiences is close by. A means of initiating communication can be provided to the users to facilitate communication between the users. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142017 | Differentiated QoS for Wi-Fi clients connected to a cable/DSL network - The preferred method involves segmenting the routable IP address space of a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) to identify clients requiring differentiated QoS by assigning IP addresses from reserved ranges. The IP addresses are assigned to home clients/the Wi-Fi AP and roaming users based on special DHCP options inserted by the Wi-Fi AP DHCP Proxy software on behalf the Wi-Fi AP and home client devices and roaming devices using the Wi-Fi AP. This creates potentially multiple service classes whereby IP addresses from the reserved ranges are included in traffic classifiers that cause packets to map to service flows which provide for differentiated QoS to the Wi-Fi AP owner, home clients and roaming users on the cable access network. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142018 | System for Voice and/or Data Communication - The subject matter of the invention is a system for speech and/or data communication between a mobile telephone ( | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142019 | Seamless Mobility in Wireless Networks - AP's associated with a communication network and any wireless devices desiring contact, operated according to a protocol in which each wireless device selects AP's with which to communicate. A system coordinator causes the AP's to operate so as to guide each wireless device to an AP selected by the system coordinator. This has the effect that, notwithstanding that the protocol involves having the wireless device make the selection of AP, functionally, the AP's make the selection for it. In a 1st technique, multiple AP's share an identifier, with the system coordinator directing one particular AP to respond to the wireless device, thus appearing to wireless devices as a “personal cell”. In a 2nd technique, AP's each maintain identifiers substantially unique to each wireless device, with the system coordinator directing only one particular AP to maintain any particular wireless device's identifier, thus appearing to wireless devices as a “personal AP”. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING TRAINING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a training signal in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system includes generating one or more first training signals for a first destination station and one or more second training signals for a second destination station by applying a mapping matrix P to a training signal generation sequence, mapping the first training signals and the second training signals to a plurality of antennas according to an antenna mapping matrix, and performing Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on each of the first training signals and the second training signals mapped to the plurality of antennas and transmitting the training signals through the plurality of antennas. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142021 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus has a transmission/reception module, a WLAN-setting data storage module, a registrar process module, a WOL-setting data storage module, and a WOL-setting data addition module. The transmission/reception module transmits and receives data to and from an external apparatus through wireless communication. The WLAN-setting data storage module stores WLAN-setting data for setting a WLAN function. The registrar process module transmits and receives data to and from the external apparatus via the transmission/reception module on the basis of the data stored in the WLAN-setting data storage module, and registers the external apparatus as an enrollee. The WOL-setting data storage module stores WOL-setting data for setting WOL function with respect to the external apparatus. The WOL-setting data addition module adds the WOL-setting data stored in the WOL-setting data storage module, to the data to be transmitted by the registrar process module to the external apparatus. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142022 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TELEVISION RECEIVER, AND REPRODUCTION DEVICE - A communication device includes: a wireless communication unit configured to perform data transmission and receiving with another communication device via a wireless network; and a communication control unit electrically connected with the wireless communication unit via a media independent interface (MII) bus and configured to control the wireless communication unit using a management data input-output/management data clock (MDIO/MDC) included in the MII bus. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142023 | WIRELESS TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DEVICE AND METHOD - A wireless device, method, and signal for use in communication of a wireless packet between transmitting device and a wireless receiving device via a plurality of antennas, wherein a signal generator generates wireless packet including a short-preamble sequence used for a first automatic gain control (AGC), a first long-preamble sequence, a signal field used for conveying a length of the wireless packet, an AGC preamble sequence used for a second AGC to be performed after the first AGC, a second long-preamble sequence, and a data field conveying data. The AGC preamble sequence is transmitted in parallel by the plurality of antennas. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142024 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTING A WIRELESS CONNECTION IN A HYBRID NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to systems and methods for establishing and/or routing wireless data and/or voice connections across a hybrid network based upon a user's selection or preference. In some embodiments, a method for routing a wireless connection across a hybrid network comprises allowing a user to select a routing preference, routing the wireless connection via a short-haul communications network if the routing preference indicates a short-haul communications network choice, and routing the wireless connection via a cellular network if the routing preference indicates a cellular network choice. In other embodiments, the present invention provides a system and method for learning the user's data, cellular, and/or VoIP access habits in order to optimize the user's experience. In yet other embodiments, the present invention allows carriers to comply with CALEA and E911 rules by identifying the location of hybrid devices within the hybrid network. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110149926 | METHOD AND STRUCTURES FOR MOBILITY POLICY IN A WIMAX COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The invention relates to method and structures for mobility policy e.g. in a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access, WiMAX, based communication. According to embodiments, a method and devices for mobility control of a terminal are provided wherein a mobility policy parameter defines the mobility control of the terminal. The mobility policy parameter preferably is part of a mobility policy or subscription record stored for a subscriber of the terminal in a subscriber data base. The mobility policy parameter may include at least one of an indication of mobility restriction, possibly indicating included or excluded cells or areas etc; an indication of fixed access, indicating a fixed base station to which the subscriber has to request access; nomadicity, indicating that no handover is allowed for that particular subscriber; and restricted mobility limited to a group of base stations or areas. Embodiments allow to deploy mobile WiMAX for fixed access applications, enabling reuse of existing technology and further development towards full mobility. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149927 | 802.11 VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT PREAMBLE SIGNALING FIELD WITH LEGACY COMPATIBILITY - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, a method and apparatus are disclosed that includes aspects of a controller configured to create a VHT frame that is arranged to include information relating to a modulation and a coding scheme with which a data portion of the VHT frame is modulated and encoded; and a transmitter configured to transmit the VHT frame to one or more STAs. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149928 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN WWAN AND WLAN IN A MOBILE WIRELESS HOTSPOT DEVICE - An apparatus comprises a first interface module configured to interface with one or more user devices through a wireless local area network (WLAN) connection; a second interface module configured to interface with a wireless communication network through a wireless wide area network (WWAN) connection; and a controller. The controller is configured to detect availability of carrier hotspots; if no carrier hotspot is detected, route traffic to and from the one or more user devices through the WWAN connection; and if a carrier hotspot is detected, route traffic to and from the one or more user devices through the detected carrier hotspot. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149929 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE-ANTENNA COMMUNICATION OF WIRELESS SIGNALS WITH EMBEDDED PILOT SIGNALS - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for wirelessly communicating signals include one or more transmitters configured to generate a plurality of wireless signal for transmission. Each of the wireless signals includes a plurality of pilot signals represented in a plurality of unevenly spaced, in-band subcarriers. Pilot signals of each wireless signal are positioned at subcarriers that are orthogonal in frequency with subcarriers at which pilot signals of all other wireless signals are positioned. According to an embodiment, subcarrier indices each the plurality of pilot signals are determined using a third order or higher order polynomial parameterization of pilot subcarriers in conjunction with a convex optimization algorithm to produce pilot signals having near-optimal channel estimate mean square error (MSE) performance. The wireless signals are simultaneously radiated over a wireless communication channel using a plurality of co-located or distributed antennas. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149930 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFORE - Different communication parameters are automatically provided in accordance with a setting scheme in communication parameter automatic setting. To do this, a communication parameter provider identifies a communication parameter setting scheme to be used by another communication apparatus as a providing destination of communication parameters, and then selects and provides communication parameters in accordance with the identified setting scheme. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149931 | CONTENTS SUPPLY SYSTEM, A METHOD, A SERVICE SERVER, A STORAGE MEANS, A RELAY METHOD, AN APPLICATION SERVER AND A CELLULAR PHONE FOR MULTI CONNECTED END TERMINAL - Disclosed herein are a system and method for providing content to a plurality of end terminals, a service server, a content relay method, an application server, a content provision method, and a mobile communication terminal. The system includes a plurality of end terminals connected to a mobile communication terminal via a Local Area Network (LAN), and configured to execute content received from an application server, a mobile communication terminal connected to a service server via a mobile communication network, and configured to transfer content between the end terminals and the-service server, the service server connected to the application server, and configured to authenticate the end terminals and the mobile communication terminal and to request content, requested by authenticated end terminals, from the application server, and the terminal application server for providing the content, requested by the end terminals, to the service server. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149932 | ZIGBEE GATEWAY AND MESSAGE IDENTIFICATION METHOD OF THE SAME - A ZigBee gateway includes: an IP network communication unit supporting communications with an IP network; a ZigBee network communication unit supporting communications with a ZigBee network; and a message processing unit generating a forwarding entry containing a service request ID and a transaction sequence ID corresponding to a service request message, when the service request message is received from the IP network, and performing a forwarding operation between the service request message and a response message transmitted from the ZigBee network in response to the service request message, by referring to the forwarding entry. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149933 | Cellular augmented radar/laser detection using local mobile network within cellular network - A radar/laser emission detector is augmented with a cellular communications capability to provide the capability to share emission detection information amongst drivers to give other drivers even more advanced warning. A network of a plurality of cellular augmented radar/laser emission detector devices may be formed, each having the capability to source the location of radar or laser emission detections to others requesting access to such information, and each being warned when within a proximity of a recent radar or laser emission detection reported by at least one of the plurality of hybrid radar/laser detector devices. A local area, mobile area wireless network (MAWN) is formed in a cellular network to share radar/laser detection information among drivers. Mobile Position Centers (MPCs) are provided in ANSI-41 networks and Gateway Mobile Location Centres (GMLCs) (GSM networks), to determine other members that are proximate to a device that is detecting radar emission. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149934 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE DEVICE LOCATION TRACKING USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Tracking devices are provided that use wireless local area networks to determine location. The tracking devices receive identification data from at least one local are network in the vicinity of the tracking device, and store tracking data that includes the identification data as well as a date and time stamp indicating when the identification data was received. The devices can transmit the tracking data to a server, and the location of the tracking device can be determined using the tracking data. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149935 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE WITH DIVERSITY WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) ANTENNA AND RELATED METHODS - A mobile wireless LAN communications device may include a portable, handheld housing, and a wireless LAN transceiver carried by the housing. A polarization diversity wireless LAN antenna may be included for cooperating with the wireless LAN transceiver to communicate over a wireless LAN. The polarization diversity wireless LAN antenna may include a first antenna element coupled to the wireless LAN transceiver having a first shape and a first polarization, and a second antenna element coupled to the wireless LAN transceiver having a second shape different from the first shape. The second antenna element may also have a second polarization different from the first polarization. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149936 | METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING CLOSELY-SPACED PACKETS IN WLAN DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) device transmits a header over an air interface, at a first modulation rate. The header may include an indication of a second modulation rate that will be used to transmit a consolidated payload. The device further transmits the consolidated payload at the second modulation rate. The consolidated payload includes multiple data units. In one embodiment, the consolidated payload includes delimiters with validation fields associated with the various data units. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149937 | TECHNIQUE FOR MANAGING WIRELESS NETWORKS - Network connectivity may be managed on a computing device. An identifier of each wireless access point or network that is available at a given location is determined. The identifier determined without the device attempting to connect to any available wireless access point or network at the given location. Each determined identifier is compared to one or more network identifiers that are known to the device. The device connects to an available wireless access point having the identifier that is known and detected. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149938 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING TEMPORAL INFORMATION - An apparatus for providing temporal information may include a processor. The processor may be configured to provide a request for receipt of temporal information associated with a wireless communication access point, and receive a response to the request prior to either or both of authentication of a device providing the request by the wireless communication access point or association of the device with the wireless communication access point in which the response includes the temporal information. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149939 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK, A SYSTEM AND A PRIMARY STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a system comprising at least one primary station and at least one secondary station, wherein the primary station comprises communication means for communicating with the secondary station in accordance with a first protocol, wherein the communication means are arranged for communicating with a plurality of further stations in accordance with a further protocol, and wherein the primary station comprises control means for generating a message to be broadcast to the secondary station, said message comprising purposely erroneous information causing the at least one secondary station to remain silent for a predetermined duration. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110158207 | System, Method, and Device for Providing Temporary Communication and Calendaring Applications in a Private Network - A communication device ( | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158208 | UPDATING AN IGMP MEMBERSHIP REPORT WHEN A WIRELESS CLIENT DEVICE ROAMS ACROSS IP SUBNETS - A network is provided that includes a first WLAN infrastructure device (WID) that defines a first subnet, and a wireless client device (WCD) that is initially associated with the first WID. The WCD associates with a “current” WID when the wireless client device roams from the first subnet to a second subnet defined by the current WID. Upon successful association, the current WID unicasts a first IGMP query message (IGMPQM) to the WCD that has a MAC header including a destination MAC address that is set to a MAC address of the WCD. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158209 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING PRESENCE STATE OF A STATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A method and apparatus for presence state determination at an access point of a station determines whether a station associated with the access point is responsive to the access point to indicate the station is “present” or “not present”. The access point informs a presence server when the station's presence state changes. The presence server does not therefore need to rely on presence handshaking between the presence server and the station. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158210 | DYNAMIC WIRELESS NETWORK APPARATUSES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Exemplary dynamic wireless network apparatuses, systems, and methods are disclosed. An exemplary system includes a plurality of wireless-network-enabled devices configured to communicate with one another when within wireless transmission range of one anoth |
